Planar Modelling

Hull Detailed Design
Planar Modelling
User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited
Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.
1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.
1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.
1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.
1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.
All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.
The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not
be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from
a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.
AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.
AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide
Revision Sheet
Date
Version
Comments / Remarks
September 2011 12.1.1
Deleted Chapter 12.2 Jumbo Panel Splitting
January 2012
Copyright added to all pages.
December 2011
12.1.2
Update Standard Holes in Standard Brackets.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
Change to chapter 3.1 Programs Creating Basic Information...
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New forms in chapter 6.2.4 View. Model generation and View

Functions in Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions.
April 2013
12.1.SP4
Added Excess Line Type and Colour settings for limit lines.
April 2013
12.1.SP4
In chapter Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Function the

function Right Click has been improved.
May 2013
12.1.SP4
Addition to Bracket Statement; definition of position number of

the stiffeners on bracket.
May 2013
12.1.SP4
Addition to Cutout Statement; Cutout in Plates, holes for clips.
May 2013
12.1.SP4
Updates to plane defined by RSO. Chapter Model Generation

and View Functions / View / Create.
May 2013
12.1.SP4
Two new parameters in the Default File for Panel Modelling;

CORNER_NOTCH_CHECK and SEAM_NOTCH_CHECK.

Contents
Contents
Page
Planar Modelling
Operators Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Planar
Model
Divide
Split STI
Delete
Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Copy/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Split
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Delete
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
View
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Detail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Recreate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Modify
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Select multiple views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Edit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11
PosNo
Scope
Change
Copy
RSO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13
Create RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13

Delete RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13
Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13
Copyright 1974 to current year.

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12 Series

Contents
Activate
Store
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
Hull Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14

Note
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
Position Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14

Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Bevel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Curve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Create Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15

Store Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
Shrinkage Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Intersection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-initialise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Painting Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:16
1:17
1:17
1:17
Create Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17

Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:18
Users Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Purpose of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Purpose
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Relation between Planar Hull Modelling and other Hull Subsystems

3:1
Programs Creating Basic Information for Planar Hull Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Support Programs for Planar Hull Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Programs Using Information Created in Planar Hull Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Summing Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Main Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Generation of the Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deriving Pictures from the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developing of a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interactive Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ii
4:1
4:2
4:2
4:2
4:3
12 Series

Contents
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3

Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Data Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Control Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Planar Hull Modelling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

Plane Panel Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editor Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6:1
6:2
6:2
6:2
6:3
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3

Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Statement Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Controlling the Scheme layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Model Generation and View Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4

Model
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Create
............................................................................
Modify
............................................................................
Edit
............................................................................
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Divide
............................................................................
Split_STI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify_STI_end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete
............................................................................
Panel
6:4
6:4
6:4
6:5
6:5
6:5
6:5
6:6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Copy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Move
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Split
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Remove Seam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Jumbo Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Recreate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Compare Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Knuckled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Pan/Bkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Delete
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Modify Symmetry Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Toggle Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Scheme
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14

iii
12 Series

Contents
Input
...........................................................................
Show
...........................................................................
Edit
...........................................................................
Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gen in Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View
Create
Detail
Recreate
Modify
Select
Pos No
Scope
Set
Change
Copy
Auto
RSO
6:15
6:15
6:15
6:15
6:15
6:16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
6:16
6:22
6:23
6:23
6:23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:23
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
6:24
6:25
6:26
6:26
6:27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28
Create RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28

ReCreate RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28
Delete RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28
Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28
Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store
...........................................................................
Skip
...........................................................................
Store and Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6:29
6:29
6:29
6:29
6:29
Edit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:29
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Hull Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30

Note
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Position Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bevel
...........................................................................
Config Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Config Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curve
6:30
6:31
6:32
6:32
6:32
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32
Create Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32

Store Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:35
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shrinkage Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re Init
.............................................................
Production Program Interface Hull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vitesse
.............................................................
Painting Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General
Methods
6:36
6:36
6:36
6:36
6:36
6:36
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:36
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:37

iv
12 Series

Contents
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Painting Area Calculation Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6:38
6:38
6:41
6:41
6:54
6:65
Part Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:68

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify
...........................................................................
Recreate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear
...........................................................................
Save
...........................................................................
Close
...........................................................................
Generic File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6:68
6:68
6:73
6:74
6:74
6:75
6:75
6:75
6:75
Right Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:75
Planar Views from the Model - Hull Model Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

General about View Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Input
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Result
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Language Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

Statement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Scheme Syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Statement Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
NAME Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLANE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOOKING Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEPTH Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMITS Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECREATE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7:2
7:3
7:4
7:4
7:5
7:6
7:7
Model Generation, General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

The Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
The Input Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Input
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Result
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Panels
Pictures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3

12 Series

Contents
Input Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List
..............................................................
Plots
..............................................................
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8:4
8:4
8:5
8:5
Model Generation, Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

Input
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Result
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Model Generation, Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1

Running the System Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Two Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Generating a Panel Separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2

Available Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2
Generating a Panel in a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2

Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plane View Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheme Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating an Existing Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Drawing Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10:2
10:3
10:3
10:3
10:3
10:4
Integrity of Input Scheme, Model and Panel Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4
Interactive Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1

How to Create Input Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Definition of Point and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
References to Topology Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Key in Point References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Picking of Topology Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
Automatic Setting of Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
Jumbo Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

Jumbo Panel Versus Ordinary Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
Information on Drawings and Information Structure. . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Views
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Drawing Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

vi
12 Series

Contents
Model Subviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plane Panels, Plane Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plane Panels, Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intersections with the Hull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13:1
13:2
13:6
13:6
Added Information in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7

Model Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:8
Arbitrary Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:8
Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:8
XML Based Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1

Initialisations to be Performed before Using Planar Hull Modelling .
15:1
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Data Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Form Data Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Structure Data Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Standards Data Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2
Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2

Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2
Standard Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2
Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2
Default File of Planar Hull Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1

Organisation of the Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
Panel Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:4
Picture Derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:8
Drawing Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:21
Design Language of Hull Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General about the Design Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Introduction to Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Input Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Basic Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1

Syntactical Notations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Lexical Units and Spacing Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

vii
12 Series

Contents
Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numerical Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Strings
............................................................................
Term
............................................................................
1:2
1:2
1:2
1:3
General Features of Input Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Scheme Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General Layout of a Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Repetition Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Coordinates, Points and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8

Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
References to Frame and Longitudinal Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
Coordinate References to Topology Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Points
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Lines
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
Numerical Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17

Tag Handling for Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18
Types of Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18
Reference to Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:19
Repetition Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20

Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20
Principles for Documentation of Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21
Control of Colours of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21
Identifier Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Panel Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Types of Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Panel Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Storing of Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Normal Panel Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Syntax for Subpanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Syntax for Knuckled Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10

viii
12 Series

Contents
Only Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Boundary Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Normal Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Lines
..............................................................
Curves
..............................................................
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intersecting Plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intersecting Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6:4
6:4
6:4
6:5
6:5
Chamfer in Panel Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Intersecting RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7

Panel in the Same Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Profile Crossection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Boundary along Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Overlap of Profile End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Free Side Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21

Boundary Syntax for Special Side Webs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:33
General about Special Side Webs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax, Geometry Type 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6:33
6:33
6:34
6:34
6:35
6:36
Trigger in Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:38
Component Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Seam Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

General about Seam Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Seam along a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:5
Seam Parallel to another Seam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:5
Perpendicular Seam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Seam for Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:8
Seam for Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:8
Plate Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

ix
12 Series

Contents
Notch Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1

Notches in Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Notch Along a Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch for Seam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch at Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch at Plate Corner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10:3
10:3
10:3
10:4
At Seam End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4

At Seam Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4
Notch from Design to Production Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:5
Notch in Stiffener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:5

Notch for Seam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch at Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch at Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remark
.............................................................
10:6
10:6
10:6
10:7
Hole Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1

Holes in Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Holes in Stiffener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:7
Bridged Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:8
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:8
Seam Crossing Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:8
Manually Defined Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9
Cutout Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

Cutouts in Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
Cutouts for Inter-crossing Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:8
Cutouts in Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:12
Handling of Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Stiffeners
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Curved Stiffeners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Knuckled Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Flanges
Pillars
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4

Holes, Notches and Cutouts in Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5
Position of the Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5

Swedging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5

12 Series

Contents
Stiffener Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1

Stiffeners Except Connection Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Mould Line First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:9
End Points First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:21
Control of Knuckled Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:27
Recalculation of Parameters of Certain End Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:29
Control of Twisted Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:30
Connection Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:30

Curved Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:32
Marking Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:38
Flange Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1

Welded Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Folded (Bent) Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:8
Evaluating the Flange, Built-in Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:10
Pillar Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1

General Data for Pillars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
Orientation of the Pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:2
Positioning of the Pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:3
Generation of Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1

General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Type Standard Brackets, Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1

Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Brackets from Closed Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
Storing of Type Standards Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
Standard Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
Variant Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3
Bracket Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3
Bracket Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1

Type Standard Brackets, Generated from the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1
3-arm Brackets Controlled by Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:4
Common Input for Syntaxes 1 to 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:5
Syntax 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:13
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:13

xi
12 Series

Contents
Syntax 2
Syntax 3
Syntax 4
Syntax 5
Syntax 6
Syntax 7
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
18:17
18:21
18:27
18:29
18:34
18:38
Type Standard Brackets, Explicitly Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:47

Panels and Parts as Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:49
Copying an Existing Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:52
Doubling Plates Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1

Excess Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1
Compensation (CMP) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21:1
Shrinkage Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22:1
Weld Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23:1
Curve Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24:1
Curve, Defined by Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24:1
Spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24:2
Fillet Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24:3
Curve Parallel to Other Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24:11
Topology Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25:1
What is a Topology Point? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25:1
Storing of Topology Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25:1
Generating a Topology Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25:2
Display of Topology Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25:2
Use of Topology Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25:3
Point Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:1

Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:1
Point Given . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:3
Point at Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:4
Point at Profile Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:6

xii
12 Series

Contents
Point at Intersection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:10

Point by Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:13
Point for Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:14
Point at Part End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26:15
Plane (PLN) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27:1

Comment Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28:1
Marking Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29:1
GSD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29:1
Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29:2

Arbitrary Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29:3
Marking Defined as Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29:4
Marking Defined as Seam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29:4
Marking Defined as Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29:5
TAP Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30:1

Swage Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31:1
Special FRP Additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32:1
Hole Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32:1
Plate Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32:2
Stiffener Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32:3
Bead Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32:5
Flange Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32:6
Numerical Variable Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33:1

xiii
12 Series

Contents

xiv
12 Series
Operators Instructions

12 Series

ii
12 Series

Tools
Preferences
Purpose:
To control some settings that are modal, i.e. valid independently

of what drawing is current.
Instruction:
In the Tools menu, click Preferences.

A tree property sheet will appear, containing (apart from some
general categories) the following hull specific categories
Hull
In the hull property page it is possible to select how the scheme

editor window should appear. It could either be shown as a child
window owned by the main window (select Child), or as a floating
window outside the main window (select Floating).
It is also possible to set the preferred font to use in the scheme
editor window. Please note that the style (italic/bold) will be
ignored since it is used for special purposes in the scheme editor.
Options:
None.
Result:
The scheme editor will appear as requested next time it is

created. If the scheme editor is already open, close it and open it
again to get the wanted appearance.

1:1
12 Series

Planar
Model
Divide
Purpose:
To separate a group of components into two groups.
Prerequisites:
A panel must be active. If there is no active panel, panel

activation is prompted prior to performing this function. The panel
must contain multiple components generated in a single
statement in the scheme. The group to be divided must be
displayed in the required view, otherwise selection is not possible.
Instruction:
Indicate the group of components to be divided, then indicate and

confirm the components to be removed from the group.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
A new group is created containing all of the removed

components. The new group of components is inserted at the end
of the scheme. The components not selected will remain in the
original group. Note that in certain cases, the modified statements
may require alteration to permit them to run as intended.
Purpose:
To create two new groups of stiffeners from an existing group by

splitting each stiffener into two.
Prerequisites:

activation is prompted prior to performing this function. A stiffener
must exist in the active panel. The group of stiffeners must be
displayed in the required view, otherwise selection is not possible.
In this function, a group of stiffeners can also be taken to mean a
single stiffener.
Instruction:
Indicate the group of stiffeners to be split. Choose a line definition

from the displayed sub-menu. Indicate of the location of the line
to split the group. If preferred, components may be used to split
stiffeners. The types of components that can be used to split a
group of stiffeners are the same types that can be used to
terminate a stiffener in the initial generation e.g. another stiffener,
a seam, a hole or a panel.
Split STI

1:2
12 Series

Options:
Options is used to switch between using a line or a component

to split the group of stiffeners.
Result:
If the group is split by defining a line, the entire group will be split
into two groups, with the new group being inserted at the end of
the scheme. If the group is split by a component, then it may be
the case that not all objects in the group intersect the component.
In this situation, the objects that do not intersect are left in the
original group, and two new groups are inserted at the end of the
scheme.
Purpose:
To delete a complete group of components from the view, the

panel and the scheme.
Prerequisites:

activation is prompted prior to performing this function.
Instruction:
Indicate and confirm the group of components to be removed.
Options:
Not available
Result:
The group of components will be deleted from the view and the
panel. Deletion from the scheme will only occur if the scheme is
active.
Delete
Panel
Copy/Move
Copy
Purpose:
To make copies of existing panels at a new location.
Prerequisites:
One or more panels should be active in hull views on the current

drawing. If there are no active panels, panel activation is
requested before copying can commence.

1:3
12 Series

Instruction:
A form will appear on the screen. On this form, the names and
modules of the currently active panels are already filled in. Enter
the names and modules of the new panels being created.
Alternatively, select AS OLD or NEW MODULE to reduce
manual input. AS OLD will copy the names and modules of the
existing active panels into the fields for the new panels. NEW
MODULE requires a module number to be entered in the field at
the bottom of the form, which will then substitute the modules in
the existing panel names. Direction buttons are provided to
navigate through the form if the number of active panels exceeds
one page. After new panel names have been entered and
checked in the form, a second form will appear, which requires a
location to be defined for the new panels. Enter a new absolute
location for the panels, or specify an incremental move along the
X,Y or Z axis. An incremental move is activated by the Relative
position button on the location form. Incremental moves may be
entered as a linear distance from the original position or as a
number of Frame or Longitudinal positions. A positive number
(e.g. 10000 or +FR10) will move the panels forward on the X axis,
towards port of the Y axis or up on the Z axis. A negative number
(e.g. -5000 or -LP10) will move the panels aft on the X axis,
towards Starboard on the Y axis or down on the Z axis. Multiple
duplication is possible, either by repeating the copy command on
the new panels, or by using repetition syntax as follows:
For panel name repetition: AB123-8<12(10)32>P will give panel
names AB123-812P, AB123-822P and AB123-832P.
For location repetition: FR10(2)20 will repeat the active panels at
every second frame from FR10 to FR20.
If an error occurs in the generation of a component in the new
panel, the component will still be copied, but a warning window
will be given. The component may be modified or replaced in the
new scheme.
Note: that if a relative position is being used for the location of
new panels, the distance entered should not use
repetition, as the panels will be repeated with the same
increment if the names are repetitive.
Options:
Not available
Result:
New panels and schemes will be generated at the new location.

The co-ordinate references and name references will be updated
in the panel definition data. References to hull curves, frames and
longitudinal positions are also updated to correspond to the new
location. Hull views are also updated, but view limits must be
modified to include the new panels in the envelope of the view or
the panels will not be displayed when the view id updated.

1:4
12 Series

Move
Purpose:
To move existing panels to a new location.
Prerequisites:

prompted before moving can commence.
Instruction:
A form will appear, which requires a new location to be defined for

the active panels. Enter a new absolute location for the panels, or
specify an incremental move along the X,Y or Z axis. An
incremental move is activated by the Relative position button on
the location form. Incremental moves may be entered as a linear
distance from the original position or as a number of Frame or
Longitudinal positions. A positive number (e.g. 10000 or +FR10)
will move the panels forward on the X axis, towards port of the Y
axis or up on the Z axis. A negative number (e.g. -5000 or -LP10)
will move the panels aft on the X axis, towards Starboard on the Y
axis or down on the Z axis.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
Active panels will be moved to the new location. Schemes will be

updated with new location information and references to hull
curves, frames and longitudinal positions are updated to
correspond to the new location.
Purpose:
To separate a panel or group of panels in two by a plane.
Prerequisites:

prompted before splitting can commence.
Instruction:
Indicate a line signifying the plane to use for splitting the panels.
A form will be displayed requiring new names to be provided for
the panels that will be created after the split. The form also
provides the facility to create Pipe panels from non-reflected
panels and vice-versa.
Options:
Options may be selected when prompted to indicate a line,

offering a menu from which to choose the splitting method.
Panels may be split by picking an existing line in the view, by
defining a co-ordinate value along the X,Y or Z axis or by
selecting an intersecting panel.
Result:
Two new panels are created with new schemes. The old panel is
discarded from the data bank. If an intersecting panel was used to
split the active panel, the thickness of the intersecting panel is
considered when creating the new panels.
Split

1:5
12 Series

Delete
Purpose:
To delete active panels from the data bank and the work area.
Prerequisites:

requested before deletion can commence.
Instruction:
Confirm panel deletion as prompted. Confirmation will not be

required if All is selected.
Options:
Selecting Options will reveal a form, which gives the option of

deleting specific panels or blocks, given as names with wild
cards. Panel deletion may be performed by a combination of both
graphically selected and named panels.
Result:
Deleted panels will be removed from the work area and the data
bank.
Purpose:
To add a detail view of a specific section or component of an

existing view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing the required component or area must exist

in the current drawing for extraction of detail views.
Instruction:
Select a view definition method from the sub-menu.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
A Sub-menu will be displayed.
Purpose:
To add a detail view of a specific section of an existing view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view must exist in the current drawing for extraction of

detail views.
Instruction:
Select two cursor positions and specify a distance in front and a

distance behind the plane of the existing view. As with Insert,
specific panels, blocks, shell curves or shell profiles may chosen
to be included in or excluded from the view.
View
Detail
1. Two CPs

1:6
12 Series

Options:
Define the view direction by selecting Reject when prompted to

confirm the indicated line.
Result:
A detail view will be created and transformations can be

performed using Way to Transform before placing the view in the
drawing.
Purpose:
To add a detail view of a flange from an existing view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing a panel with a flange must exist in the

current drawing.
Instruction:
Select a flange from an existing panel. If the flange is selected

near the middle of its length, the detail created will the display the
full length of the flange. If the flange is selected near an end, then
the detail will show only the chosen end of the flange. Detail
views created from curved flanges are not reliable.
Options:
Options may be selected to allow the inclusion or exclusion of

specific panels, blocks, shell curves and shell profiles in the detail
view. If Options is not selected, only members of the indicated
panel will be displayed in the detail view.
Result:

performed using Way to Transform prior to placing the detail in
the drawing. The view direction will be per the system default.
Purpose:
To add a detail view of a stiffener from an existing view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing a panel with a stiffener must exist in the

current drawing.
Instruction:
Select a stiffener from an existing panel. If the stiffener is selected

near the middle of its length, the detail created will display the full
length of the stiffener. If the stiffener is selected near an end, then
the detail will show only the chosen end of the stiffener.
Options:

specific panels and blocks in the detail view. If Options is not
selected, only members of the indicated panel will be displayed in
the detail view.
Result:

2. Flange
3. Stiffener

1:7
12 Series

4. Bracket
Purpose:
To add a detail view of a bracket from an existing view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing a panel with a bracket must exist in the

current drawing.
Instruction:
Select a bracket from an existing panel.
Options:

specific panels, blocks, shell curves and shell profiles in the detail
view. If Options is not selected, only members of the indicated
panel and (in most cases) the item the bracket is connected to will
be displayed in the detail view.
Result:

5. Plate Edge
Purpose:
To add a large-scale detail section through a seam on an existing

view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing a panel with a seam must exist in the

current drawing.
Instruction:
Select a seam from an existing panel.
Options:
Not available.
Result:

Purpose:
To update an existing view to include any modifications made to

model objects in the range of the view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view must exist in the current drawing.
Instruction:
Select an existing view or choose All and confirm the selection.
Recreate

1:8
12 Series

Options:
Not available
Result:
If one hull view is selected to update, that view will be

regenerated including any model changes made to panels shown
in the view. If All is selected, then all views in the drawing will be
regenerated. Note that the previous limits of the view are chosen
by the system when regenerating the view. Any modifications
made to the view outside the current limits will be lost unless the
limits of the view are modified.
Purpose:
To supplement an existing view with additional panels.
Prerequisites:
Instruction:
Select a method of view modification from the sub-menu.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
A sub-menu will be displayed.
Modify
1. Remake Panel
Purpose:
To replace a single updated panel in a view.
Prerequisites:
Instruction:
Select the required panel in an existing view and confirm when

prompted.
Options:
Options may be selected to switch the drawing mode from

Plane view to Intersection and vice-versa.
Result:
The selected panel is regenerated in the chosen hull view.
2. Add Reflected Image
Purpose:
To add the reflected image of an existing panel.
Prerequisites:
A hull view showing a panel modelled as Pipe must exist in the

current drawing.
Instruction:
Select the required Pipe panel in the existing view and confirm
when prompted.

1:9
12 Series

Options:
Options may be selected to switch the drawing mode from

Plane view to Intersection and vice-versa.
Result:
The reflected image of the selected panel is displayed in the

chosen view. Note that if any area of the reflected image falls
outside the existing limits of the view, that area will be lost when
the view is regenerated.
3. Add Named Panel
Purpose:
To display an additional, user-defined panel in an existing view.
Prerequisites:
Instruction:
Indicate the existing view in which the new panel is to be

displayed, then enter the panel name.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
The new panel is displayed in the chosen view. Note that if any
area of the additional panel falls outside the existing limits of the
view, that area will be lost when the view is regenerated.
4. Modify Limits
Purpose:
To redefine the limits of an existing view.
Prerequisites:
Instruction:
Indicate and confirm the view to be modified. Select cursor

positions for the diagonally opposite corners of a box indicating
the desired limits of the view.
Options:
Select Options to modify the depth of the view, in front of and

behind the existing plane.
Result:
The view limits will be changed in the drawing, but the view will
not be automatically regenerated. Select View - Model View Update to regenerate the view within the new limits.
Select multiple views
Purpose:
To select/deselect views to be updated when creating panel

components.
Prerequisites:
A drawing with more than one view must be current.
Instruction:
Indicate the view to change the status on.

1:10
12 Series

Options:
'Options' may be selected to switch between select and deselect.
Result:
Views marked with a rectangle will be updated with generated

components. Views marked with a cross will NOT be updated.
Purpose:
The function allows the user to make changes to some of the

symbolic and textual information of the hull view and retains
these changes also when the view is recreated.
Prerequisites:
Instruction:
Select the symbolic or textual information that should be

transformed.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
Recreating views will no longer eliminate manual editions when

they have been made with this function.
Purpose:
The function allows the user to turn on or off the display of the
automatically presented information (part names, bevel texts,
flange texts etc) individually on panels and on complete views.
Prerequisites:
Instruction:
With the control box, select the textual or symbolic information

that should be displayed or not displayed. Thereafter select in
the drawing which model or view the new settings should be
applied to.
Options:
Select a single model or a complete view.
Result:
The function will blank or un blank information on the selected

model or view. The recreation of views will consider the current
status of the existing view and information blanked before the
recreation will be blanked also afterwards.
Purpose:
To define the modal scope that all Part Name functions will
operate on.
Prerequisites:
A Hull Planar Modelling session must be active.
Edit
Properties
PosNo
Scope

1:11
12 Series

Instruction:
Select Part Name from the Object menu. Select Set Scope
from list of Part Name sub-functions. Enter the required panel,
block or assembly, or select All if all parts are to be considered.
Wildcards may be used to provide a listing of panels, blocks or
assemblies to simplify selection. List can be selected to display
all items in the current scope.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
A group of panels, blocks or assemblies will be activated in the

current scope to allow further Part Name functions to be
performed.
Purpose:
To perform a global change of position number for identical parts

within the current scope.
Prerequisites:
A Hull Planar Modelling session must be active. All parts to be

changed must currently have the same position number.
Instruction:
Select Modify from the menu of Part Name sub-functions. Enter

the existing position number when prompted. Enter the new
position number when prompted.
Options:
Options are available to allow the most recent selection to be

redone.
Result:
All numbers matching the existing number entered will be

substituted for the new number.
Purpose:
To copy position numbers for the currently selected scope to a

new scope.
Prerequisites:
A Hull Planar Modelling session must be active. Position numbers

must be set in the current scope.
Instruction:
Select Copy from the menu of Part Name sub-functions. Enter

the new scope to which the current position numbers are to be
copied. The new scope will be prompted for in the same way as
the original scope. A warning will appear if an attempt is made to
copy position numbers to parts with position numbers already
assigned in the new scope.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
Part numbers will be copied to the new scope indicated. If any

warnings are given, the parts concerned are not updated.
Change
Copy

1:12
12 Series

RSO
Create RSO
Purpose:
To create or update an RSO from existing plane panels.
Prerequisites:

prompted before creation of the RSO can commence.
Instruction:
Possibly modify the name of the RSO. Choose whether to

update the panel location to be placed by the RSO.
Options:
None.
Result:
An RSO is created/updated. The plane or planes and the

extensions are derived from the mould planes of the involved
panels.
Delete RSO
Purpose:
To delete an existing RSO from the database
Prerequisites:
None.
Instruction:
Pick the RSO in the view. Confirm the deletion.
Options:
None.
Result:
The RSO is deleted from the database and the view.
Purpose:
To activate a panel, allowing changes to be made to the panel

without opening the scheme. The activated panel will be locked
on the database to prevent others from making changes.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing the required panel must exist in the current
drawing.
Instruction:
Indicate the panel to be activated. Continue indicating if further

panels are to be activated.
Select
Activate

1:13
12 Series

Options:
Selecting Options will reveal a form, which gives the option of

including and excluding specific panels or blocks, given as names
with wild cards. Panel activation may be performed by a
combination of both graphically selected and named panels.
Result:
The selected panels will be highlighted with a rectangle placed

around all views in the drawing that contain the panel. The
rectangle will have either a letter S or a letter M on the line. S
means Stored and indicates that the panel is identical to the
panel on the data bank, and M means Modified and indicates
that the panel has been modified since activation.
Purpose:
To store active panels that have been changed.
Prerequisites:
One or more panels must be active in hull views on the current

drawing. One or more active panels must have been changed.
Instruction:
Choose 'Save' from the menu. Confirmation to save panels is

only requested if a panel has been modified. Confirmation will not
be required if All is selected.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
Panels confirmed for saving will be updated on the data bank,

and the schemes will be re-written to include the modifications.
The M which appeared on the top line of the highlight rectangle
to indicate modification, will revert to an S when the panel is
saved.
Store
Hull Tools
Note
Position Number
Purpose:
To add the name and description on any part in a hull view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view must exist in the current drawing. The part type
selected from the on-screen menu must exist in the hull view.
Instruction:
Select a part type from the on-screen menu. Indicate the required
part in the hull view. Place the part description on the drawing as
desired.

1:14
12 Series

Options:
Options can be selected to display or omit each element of the

part description, i.e. part name, material quality, plate thickness,
profile type or profile size.
Result:
A note is displayed on the view identifying the chosen elements of

the part description.
Purpose:
To add the name of an assembly to any part in a hull view.
Prerequisites:
A hull view must exist in the current drawing. The required part
must have an assembly reference in the scheme.
Instruction:
Select a part type from the on-screen menu. Indicate the required
part in the hull view. Place the assembly name on the drawing as
desired.
Options:
Options may be selected to define the level of assembly

identified.
Result:
A note is displayed on the view identifying the assembly location

for the part chosen.
Purpose:
To add bevel identification to seam.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing a panel with a seam must exist in the

current drawing. The seam must have a recognised bevel code
included in the scheme.
Instruction:
Indicate the required seam. Place the bevel note on the drawing
as desired.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
A note is displayed on the view indicating the bevel detail

graphically and with text, also identifying which side of the
material is bevelled.
Assembly
Bevel
Curve
Create Curve
Purpose:
To create a user defined curve by cutting the hull surface at a

specific location
Prerequisites:
A Hull Planar Modelling session must be active. A hull surface

must exist.

1:15
12 Series

Instruction:
Select Curve from the Object menu. Select Insert from the
Curve menu. Enter the required curve definition data in the
appropriate fields of the displayed form. Select Continue to
display the next page of the form. Specify a location to cut the hull
surface. Select Create to complete the function.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
A curve with the specified definition data will be created on the

data bank. If the chosen curve name already exists, confirm
overwriting of the existing curve or begin again using a different
name for the curve.
Store Curve
Purpose:
To store curves in the current drawing as a CAT object in a

selected data bank.
Prerequisites:
A drawing must be open.
Instruction:
Select Curve from the Object menu. Select Save from the
Curve menu. Enter the name of the CAT object when prompted.
Select Yes to confirm the name to overwrite an existing curve or
select No to enter another name. Indicate the geometry in the
work area representing the curve.
Options:
Options may be selected to specify the data bank to use for

storing the curve.
Result:
The indicated curve will be stored on the selected data bank.
Shrinkage Information
Purpose:
To show the shrinkage information.
Prerequisites:
A hull view must exist in the current drawing. Also shrinkage

object must exists in the data bank.
Instruction:
Indicate a view where the shrinkage information should be

displayed or press All to select all views in the drawing. All panels
in the selected views that has any shrinkage defined will be
highlighted. Select the panel for which the shrinkage should be
displayed.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
Shrinkage information will be displayed for the selected panels in

the drawing.

1:16
12 Series

Panel Intersection
Purpose:
To add symbols to a view to indicate intercostal and continuous

panels.
Prerequisites:
A hull view containing intersecting panels must exist in the current

drawing.
Instruction:
Indicate an intersecting panel in the required view.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
A symbol indicating the continuous panel will be added to the

view.
Re-initialise
Purpose:
To reload the default file.
Prerequisites:
None.
Instruction:
None.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
The default file will be read.
Painting Areas
Create Input
Purpose:
To create an input file for painting area calculations and

optionally start the calculations.
Prerequisites:
A graphical view of Hull model information must be available. A

hull surface must exist if the surface is included in the
calculations.
Instructions:
Enter the required data in the appropriate fields of the displayed

form. Select 'Room', 'Surface', Combine' or Sum' to start creating
the input file. 'Calculate' can be used to perform the calculation of
the previously created input file.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
An input file to the painting areas calculation program will be

created. The painting areas data bank will be updated with the
resulting areas if the calculation has been made.

1:17
12 Series

Calculate
Purpose:
To start the painting area calculations.
Prerequisites:
A hull surface must exist if the surface is included in the

calculations.
Instructions:
Select the input file(s) form the open dialog box.
Options:
Not available.
Result:
The painting areas data bank will be updated with the resulting
areas.

1:18
12 Series
Users Guide

12 Series

ii
12 Series

General
General
This document is a user oriented description of the Hull Modelling system.
The guide covers a number of different subjects related to the system, its use and its
environment, for instance:
It defines the purpose of the system and specifies the activities in which Planar Hull
Modelling is used.
It describes in general terms the relation between Planar Hull Modelling and other
subsystems of Hull Modelling.
It describes the environment which the system requires.
It gives a description of the system itself: required input, functions, result, etc.
The reader of this guide is supposed to have a rough idea of the general features and
concepts of the systems.

1:1
12 Series

General

1:2
12 Series

Purpose of the System
2.1
Background
The design and production of a ship can be divided into a number of phases. This division
into phases can be made in many ways. One possible way, consciously made on a rough
level, is illustrated in the figure:
When applied on the hull information flow, the different phases may include activities as
outlined below.
Project Calculations
This is the early phase when the overall characteristics of the ship are defined. The
dimensions of the ship are set, hydrostatic and stability calculations are performed, etc.
Among important results from this activity is a preliminary form.
Design
In this phase, the predesign (classification) drawings are developed. Strength analysis may
be performed to select plate thicknesses, etc. Traditionally, the result of the design phase is
documented in the design (classification) drawings.
Detailed Design (engineering)
In the detailed design process, the preliminary design is penetrated in detail and adapted to
production needs. Production information is developed (drawings, burning tapes, sketches,
etc.).
Production
This phase includes the manufacturing of parts and the assembly of the ship.
Planar Hull Modelling is intended to be used from the early design phase when the ship may
be outlined in manually made, rough sketches. Based on such sketches, on preliminary
form information, the results of strength calculations etc., Planar Hull Modelling establishes
a design model and develops classification drawings. Planar Hull Modelling also
incorporates all functions that are required in the detail design phase.

2:1
12 Series

Consequently, Planar Hull Modelling in one system covers all the activities from the early
design to the production preparation.
2.2
Purpose
With the background, outlined above, the purpose of Planar Hull Modelling is summed up as
follows:
A. In the design phase:
Establish an early numerical model of the design.
Develop the design (classification) drawings, based on pictures, derived

model.
Use the model information as the basis for different early activities, e.g. preliminary
weight calculations, preliminary material ordering, etc.
from the
B. In the detail phase:
Further refine the model, breaking down the early model into production units and
adding detailed information.
Develop working drawings from the detailed model.
Use the model as a basis for different units of production information.
Planar Hull Modelling establishes the early design model but also allows the continuous
refinement and detailing of this information that is performed in the detailed design process.
Planar Hull Modelling does not include any modules for strength calculations. Classification
rules are built into the system only to a restricted extent and are concentrated to micro
standards.
Imperial units are implemented.

2:2
12 Series

Relation between Planar Hull Modelling and other Hull
Relation between Planar Hull Modelling and

other Hull Subsystems
Planar Hull Modelling is another member of the Hull family of subsystems and is
consequently based on common principles and conventions.
The information created in Planar Hull Modelling is stored and handled according to
identical or only slightly modified conventions as compared to the other systems. This
facilitates the information interchange between Planar Hull Modelling and these other
systems and it also means that it is possible to make a smooth transition between the use of
Planar Hull Modelling and certain other subsystems of Hull.
The programs that are related to Planar Hull Modelling can be divided into three different
categories:
1. Programs/subsystems that create basic information which cannot be created in Planar
Hull Modelling itself and without which it does not make much sense to use Planar Hull
Modelling.
2. Programs that can be considered as utility programs to Planar Hull Modelling itself, e.g.
by giving a possibility to derive picture information in the batch run mode.
3. Programs that utilizes the information created in Planar Hull Modelling.
3.1
Programs Creating Basic Information for Planar Hull

Modelling
Examples of initializing programs/subprograms are:
3.2
Utility programs for the creation and initialization of data banks.
Programs for generation of the hull form. This can be the TID Surface Module or a
surface imported from 3rd party software using the AVEVA Surface Manager.
Seams in the shell and shell profiles (longitudinal and/or transversal frames) must be
generated in the ordinary modules of TBH which are also used when the production
information is prepared.
Support Programs for Planar Hull Modelling
Certain functions of Planar Hull Modelling can preferably be performed in batch

processes as an alternative to doing them in Planar Hull Modelling itself. A typical
example is the derivation of picture information from the model. There are two separate
programs, one for pictures from plane cuts with the model, another one for shell
expansions.
The resulting pictures must be brought into the actual Planar Hull Modelling system
to be developed to drawings.

3:1
12 Series

Relation between Planar Hull Modelling and other Hull
3.3
There is a special subsystem related to Planar Hull Modelling, which analyses the
topology of the model created in Planar Hull Modelling. In case of changes this system
helps in analysing the consequences and assists in updating the model.
Programs Using Information Created in Planar Hull

Modelling
Characteristic of the AVEVA Marine philosophy is that a model of the product (the ship) is
gradually built up in the data banks. Many late activities are then based on the established
model, e.g. the derivation of different kinds of production information.
Many programs can directly operate on the Planar Hull Modelling model, e.g. in the
derivation of plate parts, in the calculation of weights and centres of gravity, in producing
production information for stiffeners, etc.
3.4
Summing Up
Planar Hull Modelling is heavily dependant on some other subsystems of Hull, especially
those which create information related to the hull form and the shell members.
Planar Hull Modelling creates information to be used in the preparation production
information.
Some support programs of Planar Hull Modelling offer the possibility to perform certain
tasks in batch processes rather than doing them in Planar Hull Modelling.

3:2
12 Series

Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics
4.1
Hardware
When run in the interactive mode, which is the normal running mode (see the following
sections), Planar Hull Modelling can be started from any workstation, supported by the
system.
System independent features in the operation of systems, using the work station, e.g. the
handling of graphics, are also described in a separate document.
When run in background mode, the system only requires an ordinary terminal window.
To be able to benefit from the system, a high quality printer must be available to produce
drawings.
4.2
General Functions
The interactive Planar Hull Modelling can in terms of functionality be divided in a general
part and a specific part. The general part is the one that is common to (almost) all interactive
applications. It contains general interaction and graphical functions, as well as drawing
development functions. Also presentation of all kinds of model objects as projected volumes
is included here.
The general functions are the ones in the upper left and lower right part of the main window
while the specific application functions are in the upper right part.
The general functions are inherited from the TBGD application and are described in the
Drafting Guide. Also all common files and data banks used are described there.
4.3
Main Activities
The overall purpose of Planar Hull Modelling is to generate a 3D model of the ship and to
develop drawings.
This corresponds to three different main activities of Planar Hull Modelling:
1. Generation of the model.
2. Deriving drawing information from the model.
3. Development of the drawing.
4.3.1
Generation of the Model

The smallest part of the model that can be separately stored is the panel.

4:1
12 Series

Even if a panel is always stored as a separate piece of information, it can also be generated
in its context, e.g. in the web frame it is part of. In the generation phase, reference can be
made - also interactively - to the surrounding curves or panels and the picture of the panel
may be added to, for instance, the web-frame.
Model generation can be executed in both background mode as well as in interactive
mode.
Like some other AVEVA Marine systems, Planar Hull Modelling optionally uses the
technique with a design language to describe the model. Input written in this language is
divided into units called input schemes, which are stored in ordinary text files.
A detailed description of the design language is given in General about the Design
Language.
4.3.2
Deriving Pictures from the Model

A major part of the information on a drawing consists of pictures (plane-views and
intersections) of the 3D model. These pictures can be derived from the 3D model in an
automatic or semi-automatic way.
This can be done in the system via a special function in which the operator interactively
selects the information to be included in a picture.
It can also be done via special picture generation programs, which are run in a separate
background process.
A picture can also gradually be developed if, in the generation phase, the panel is generated
directly into a drawing.
Also the general model presentation feature inherited from TBGD is available presenting the
model as projected volume primitives rather than the symbolic way used in the Planar Hull
Modelling specific view creation routines. In the following the symbolic Planar Hull Modelling
specific views are referred to as Planar Hull Modelling views while the TBGD way of
presenting the model is denoted TBGD view.
4.3.3
Developing of a Drawing
Pictures derived from the model form the basis of the drawing. These pictures are in an
interactive drawing development phase supplemented with different kinds of additional
information, like dimensioning texts, detail sketches, part name notes etc. All these kinds of
operations are supported by different functions of Planar Hull Modelling.
Note that the two kinds of views mentioned above can be mixed freely in one and the same
drawing, and that the drawing development works on both kinds of views with a few
exceptions.
4.3.4
Background Mode
When run in background mode, the system can be started up from an ordinary terminal
window. In this running mode, the system can only generate panels from input schemes,
which are prepared on beforehand as well as creating views from prepared input data files.
The background mode can preferably be used in situations where the interactivity does not
add anything to the system or when interactive tasks should be carried out simultaneously.

4:2
12 Series

4.3.5
Interactive Mode
Interactive mode is the normal running mode of Planar Hull Modelling. Then the system is
executed from a workstation under the direct control of the operator.
As all other interactive systems, Planar Hull Modelling has a set of pull-down menus,
designed to meet the specific needs of the system.
4.4
System Components
The actual Planar Hull Modelling system consists of three programs, of data banks and of
ordinary data files of different kinds as described in the diagram on the last page of this
section. The diagram only contains those data banks that are used by the Planar Hull
Modelling specific functions. The Drafting functions such as INPUT MODEL, for example,
access a number of model data banks.
The box denotes the programs and disc symbols indexed data files. Data banks have a
special indication. Sequential data banks are denoted with a tape symbol.
The figure describes only the actual Planar Hull Modelling system including all three
programs Planar Hull Modelling, Hull Model Generation and Hull Model Drawings . A
number of other programs must be used together with Planar Hull Modelling. They are not
covered by this diagram but are listed in Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics, Initialisations
to be Performed before Using Planar Hull Modelling.
4.4.1
Files
SYMBOL FONTS
The symbol font nos. 55 and 8 are used by the system besides the
fonts used in the Drafting functions. However to display a drawing
containing symbols, the symbol fonts used when creating the
drawing must be present.
DEFAULT
This file contains a number of parameters controlling the activities

of the program.
MESS
This is standard message files, containing the messages used in

the interactive communication between the system and the
operator and headlines.
SCHEME
The file containing the input scheme.
LOG
This file is used for system error messages etc. and does not
affect a normal user of the system. It is mostly used in connection
with the system's maintenance and error tracing.
LIST
Ordinary line printer files resulting from listings of the input

scheme, the generated panels, error messages, etc. One input
scheme corresponds to one LIST file.
CAT TRACE
In certain error situations, the system will dump some of the

current contents of the work area in this file for later listing with the
aid of standard utility programs.

4:3
12 Series

4.4.2
Data Banks
FORM BANK (SB_CGDB)
This bank stores different kinds of information in CAT objects.
Hull surface.
Hull reference.
Seams and butts.
Frames, waterlines and buttocks.
STRUCTURE BANK (SB_OGDB)
Structure reference.
Blocks.
Plane and curved panels.
Longitudinal and transversal frames.
Bracket objects.
Planes in the hull.
End cut table.
PICTURE BANK (SBD_PICT)

This data bank contains pictures derived from the model in different situations:
Panel pictures and bracket pictures from separate generation of panels.
Views derived from the model, either in Planar Hull Modelling itself or in the picture
generating programs (Hull Model Drawings and Shell Expansion). These views may
also include added information from an interactive run of Planar Hull Modelling.
DRAWING BANK (SB_PDB)

The drawings developed in Planar Hull Modelling are stored in this data bank.
STANDARDS BANK (SBD_STD)
This data bank is used for standard information, i.e. drawing forms and standard details
created in Planar Hull Modelling.
FORM BANK (SBD_FORM)
This databank is used for drawing forms (optional to SBD_STD)
TOPOLOGY BANK (SB_REFDB)
This bank stores the topology objects, one object for each model object.
TID BANK (SB_TID)
This bank stores objects created in an early phase of the project that can be used for
example when modelling panels.
Main particulars
Surfaces (RSOs)
Compartments

4:4
12 Series

4.5
Control Information
In many respects, the work of the system is controlled by the contents of a default file. It is
thoroughly described in Default File of Planar Hull Modelling.

4:5
12 Series


4:6
12 Series

Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics
Interactive Planar Hull Modelling

Characteristics
5.1
Planar Hull Modelling Menu

The application is run in a window containing the available functions in collections of pulldown or pop-up menus. The upper right part of the window contains the Planar Hull
Modelling specific functions, while the rest of the pull-down menus are common to all
interactive systems.
The general part of the menu handles everything having to do with drawings, 2D-Drafting
and Drafting view handling. These functions are all described in Users Guide Drafting. Also,
such things as drawing backup and creation of drawing forms are described here.

5:1
12 Series

Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics

5:2
12 Series

Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions

This section describes the functions specific to the interactive Planar Hull Modelling system.
The functions common to all interactive applications are described in Users Guide Drafting.
6.1
Plane Panel Editor
6.1.1
Introduction
When using the Plane Panel scheme for interactive modelling, a special editor dialog is
used. This dialog contains an area for the scheme text an area for possible generation
errors. The statement area works as a normal editor in the sense that the user can add or
modify the scheme statements directly.
Figure 6:1.
The editor dialog when generating a stiffener statement caused errors.
This dialog is opened, if not already done, by all functions that need it such as Planar/
Scheme/Input, Planar/Scheme/Edit and Planar/Model/Edit. The scheme dialog is a
modeless dialog. This means that the user can use other functions while the dialog is open.
These other functions, such as Planar/Model/Create, can then update the contents of the
scheme dialog.

6:1
12 Series

The Planar/Editor menu contains functions to start new schemes, open existing ones as well
as saving schemes. Also functions to cut/copy and paste and find/replace functions are
available. The statement menu contains e.g. functions to run the statement.
6.1.2
The Scheme
A plane panel scheme is a textual view of the plane panel definition. Each scheme
describes one panel object and has the same name as the panel object. The scheme is
subdivided into statements. For a detailed description of the plane panel Design Language
see Design Language of Hull Modelling. All statements must end with a semicolon except
for the first one, called the identifier statement. This statement is always restricted to a
single line.
Normally when using the editor a single scheme represents a single active panel. However
if a number of very similar panels, such as floors in the double bottom, are activated they
can all be modified via the editor at the same time. The scheme shown is the one
representing the first of the activated panels, but any modification is applied to all the active
panels, if possible.
A knuckled panel is mainly a collection of subpanels that contain the real definition. If a
knuckled panel is activated, the editor will show not only the main panel scheme, but also
the schemes of all the subpanels. Now the user can change the subpanels directly. Note
that in most cases it is necessary also to run the main panel statement after changing the
subpanels.
The same kind of behaviour is valid for panels containing bracket panels. The editor will
show the bracket panels schemes after the main panel scheme, making it possible to
change also the bracket panels directly. Note that unlike a subpanel a bracket panel can be
used by multiple main panels, and changing it via one of the main panels will affect also the
other main panels using it.
6.1.3
The Statement
As mentioned above a scheme consists of statements ending in a semicolon. A semicolon
can actually never be added or removed as a character directly. Instead statements can be
added or removed using editor menu functions.
A new statement can be added. In such a case only the semicolon appears and the user is
supposed to enter the rest of the statement text. A statement can also be pasted into the
scheme via a special paste function, for subsequent modification.
When deleting a statement, two situations exist. In the first one the statement has never
been run, and when deleting the statement text will simply disappear from the scheme. In
the second case where the statement is already run at least once, resulting in components
being added to the panel. Then the statement keyword is changed to DEL and the
statement is run, deleting the components from the panel. The statement text however
remains in the editor, with the statement keyword changed.
6.1.4
The Editor Dialog

The scheme text takes up the most of the editor dialog. The dialog can be resized. Colours
and underlining are used to add information about the status of the statements.
The current statement is underlined. By moving the cursor, the current statement is
changed.

6:2
12 Series

The identifier statement is painted green. If multiple schemes are displayed, the identifier
statement marks the limit between schemes.
If a statement is changed, it is painted purple. If it is then run successfully, the colour
changes back to black.
If running a statement results in a generation error, the statement is painted bright red. If
only a warning is given, it is dark red.
Under the scheme text is a field for output of generation errors. Double-clicking on an error
will position the cursor at the statement causing that error.
6.1.5
Editor Menu Functions

The Planar/Editor menu bar has three submenus, File, Edit, Format and Statement.
File Menu
The file menu contains the functions New, Open, Close and Save.
New prompts the user for a panel name that is used also as the name of the scheme and
the content of the identifier statement. A new scheme is initiated together with an identifier
statement and the user can add statements either via the editor of the Planar/Model/Create
function.
Open prompts the user to pick an existing scheme file initially from the directory associated
with the global variable SB_SHIPSCH. The scheme file is read and added to the editor. The
cursor is positioned at the first statement after the identifier statement, normally the panel
statement.
Close removes the current scheme from the editor. If any statement has been changed and
not yet run, the user is given a possibility to save the scheme to file first.
Save writes the scheme to file on SB_SHIPSCH.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the functions Cut, Copy, Paste and Select All as well as Find,
Find Next and Replace.
Cut can cut parts of a statement, up to but not including the semicolon.
Copy can copy parts of a statement, up to but not including the semicolon.
Paste can paste text into a statement, provided it does not contain any semicolons.
Select All makes all text in the editor selected.
Find finds the given text.
Find Next finds the next occurrence of the text previously given in Find.
Replace finds a given text and replaces it for another given text.
Statement Menu
The statement menu contains the functions Run This, Run All and Run as well as Copy,
Paste, Delete and New.
Run This runs the current statement.
Run All runs all statements from and including the current one to the end of the scheme.

6:3
12 Series

Run presents a small dialog with options to run all, all changed and a specified number of
statements.
Copy copies the entire current statement.
Paste pastes the previously copied statement after the current one.
Delete deletes a statement. See the section called The Statement above.
New adds a new statement after the current one.
6.1.6
Controlling the Scheme layout

It is possible to customize the scheme layout to some extent. It is done via a Vitesse Hook
called _TBhook_PPanScheme. It contains two methods SplitIntoLines and FormatLine.
SplitIntoLines takes a statement text and is supposed to return it after e.g. rearranging the
keywords and adding mandatory line breaks. Line breaks are added by inserting the
characters into the text for each line break. It is not necessary to control all line breaks,
the system will add additional line breaks to make sure a line does not exceed the maximum
length.
SplitIntoLines is called when the system has created a statement from the panel object data
that then has a fixed layout. If the returned statement is no longer a valid statement a normal
generation error will occur when attempting to run it.
FormatLine is used to make parts of a statement line be written in bold. Adding a pair of the
characters and will make everything between them bold. It is called when a line is
to be presented in the Editor.
6.2
Model Generation and View Functions

The groups of functions described below are used to build up and to change the plane parts
of the hull product model as well as to create and update Hull Planar Modelling views. They
can be found under the Planar menu.
6.2.1
Model
The functions in this group all act on a group of components. A component group can
contain one or more components. A group of components corresponds to one Design
Language statement. The functions require one or more panels to be active.
Create
This function is used interactively to build up component groups that will be added to the all
activated panels. This is described further in a separate chapter of this document.
Modify
This function is used to modify an existing component group when a component from that
group is indicated in the picture. The interaction is very similar, and uses the same dialogs
as the function Create described above.
Edit
This function is used when a certain component should be modified via its Panel Scheme
statement. First the operator points at the component on the display. Then the Panel

6:4
12 Series

Scheme Editor is opened, if not already done, retrieving the scheme file from the first of the
activated panels, if not already done. The Editor cursor is positioned at the statement
representing the component.
Using "Options" instead of pointing at a component means that the operator is asked to
select the type of component to be searched for before identification. This feature might be
useful in situations where the system otherwise fails to identify the correct component.
For brackets, identification can take place via the special bracket picture (in separate
generation).
See Scheme / Edit for more information on the Editor.
Assembly
This function is used to add parts to an existing assembly already in the modelling phase.
After identifying a component on the display, the operator is asked to key in an assembly
name. This assembly name will then be translated to a system assembly reference and
added to the component.
As the assembly reference is set for a component group, this means that all the parts in this
group will belong to the assembly. Only one assembly name can be given each time. If the
parts in one group should belong to different assemblies, use the function "Divide" to
separate them before using the "Assembly" function.
If "Options" is given on the indicate prompt, the component type (including panel level) can
be defined. This is useful in graphically "messy" situations, and when the whole panel
should be added to an assembly.
For more information on assemblies, see the User's Guide Assembly Planning.
Divide
This function is used to create two groups from one, by interactively picking first the group,
and then the individual components that should make up the new group. The components
not picked remain in the original group.
Split_STI
This function creates two new groups of stiffeners from an existing one by splitting each
stiffener in two. The stiffeners can be split by a line, defined interactively or by an existing
component indicated by the user. The selection of line and component types corresponds to
those that can be used to connect a stiffener to in panel generation, according to the
stiffener statement e.g. another stiffener, a hole, a seam or a panel.
Note that repetition terms can be given when defining the splitting line. The syntax is the
same as the one used in the Design Language scheme, e.g. FR24(6)60 for X-lines. Then
each stiffener is split in multiple parts and multiple groups are created.
It can be that not all the stiffeners of the group intersect the indicated component. In that
case the ones not intersecting, are not split but left unchanged in the original group. The
ones intersecting the component form two new groups.
Modify_STI_end
This function is used to modify stiffener ends. A stiffener group is picked within an active
panel. One of the ends is modified to stop at either a line or an existing component. As for
the Split_STI function the component can be any component on the panel that a stiffener

6:5
12 Series

end can connect to or it can be another intersecting panel. A third option is to pick the panel
boundary in which case the stiffener will end at the panel edge.
Delete
This function removes the components of a group from the panel and the picture.
6.2.2
Panel
The functions in this group all act on whole panels and not a single component group.
Copy
This function is used to duplicate the active panels at a location specified by the user. The
new location can be defined in the same way as the location in a panel statement or as an
incremental value along one of the principal axes. The new panels are generated using the
same definition data as the panels initially activated with updates described below, and are
then visualized in all views in the picture. After the duplication, the new panels are active.
New names need to be given for the new panels created. This can be done in two ways,
either via the Automatic Names option (see Hull, General Concepts, About Naming in Hull,
Automatic Names), or via a form. Even if the Automatic Names option is active it is possible
to override this and give the names via the form, if Options is given when prompted for
blocks for the new panels.
If the form is used, it is initially filled with the names of the active panels. The user should
then give new names for each one of the active ones. To simplify this the buttons "AS OLD"
and "NEW MODULE" exist. "AS OLD" will copy the names of the active panels to the new
name fields as a start, while "NEW MODULE" will change the "MODULE" field to a new
name given in the "NEW MODULE" field near the bottom of the form. If the first part of the
panel name equals the block name this part will also be changed. In the form "MODULE"
means the same as "BLOCK". The button "Check" gives error messages if the new name
fields are not filled in, or if any of the new names equal an old one.
The buttons "UP", "DOWN", "TOP" and "BOTTOM" are used to navigate among form pages
if the number of active panels exceeds one form page. "OC" makes the function continue
while "QUIT" ends it. "INDICATE" has the same effect as "QUIT".
While an absolute position can be defined using all alternatives in the "location" form, a
relative position can only be defined along any of the three principal axes. If a minus sign is
given as the first character using relative position, the corresponding coordinates are
decremented. E g --FR30 means a position 30 frames aft while +LP5 along Z means 5
longitudinal positions towards the top. Relative position is activated by a button in the
"location" form.
Note: when defining an absolute position the original normal vector of the panel(s) must be
kept. In other cases the definition of e.g. the boundary will be incorrect. If e.g. a panel
is created with its location defined by a frame view looking forward, it will be
expressed as three points. Then if an absolute position is given as an X-coordinate,
the normal vector will turn 180 degrees. However if a relative position is used
instead, the normal vector will always keep its direction.
Apart from updating the pure coordinate references in the definition data before generating
the new panels the name references are updated as well. References to hull curves in the
three principal planes and to stiffeners on frame- and longitudinal positions are also updated
according to the new location.

6:6
12 Series

Also the panel and block name pairs defined in the "new name" form are used as a
dictionary when updating the name references in the panels to be generated.
Panels can be copied to multiple positions in two ways. First, as the new panels of a
previous duplication are active, these panels in turn may be copied after defining new
names and a new location.
The second way is to use repetition both is the new names and in the new location. In the
location the same syntax is used for repetition as in the input scheme statements, that is
'start'('step')'end'. E g the frames 21 up to 23 are given by FR21(1)23, each metre from 1 to
5 is given by 1000(1000)5000. In the names the repetition is surrounded by angle brackets
to allow for characters after the repetition. E g the "name" AB123-8<12(10)32>P will result in
the panel names AB123-812P, AB123-822P and AB123-832P.
Note: that for a relative position, the coordinate can not contain any repetition, rather the
same incremental value is used multiple times if the names are repetitive.
When this way of specifying multiple locations is used the user will be asked whether to
store the panels created on one location before continuing with the next location. If "No" is
given, the duplication to the following positions are not affected, only the currently active
panel is lost. Answering "All" inhibits further confirmation, but only for the other panels in the
same location.
If the generation of a component in a new panel fails, an error message will be shown in a
pop-up list window. Instead the component will be copied from the old to the new panel, to
enable extraction of the input scheme statement used when modifying the panel.
If GPS strings are used, a dialogue can be presented that allows the user to change these
strings on the copied versions of the panel. The dialogue is presented only if the logical
SBH_COPY_UPDATE_GPS is set to any value.
Move
This function is used to move the active panels to a location specified by the user. The new
location can be defined in the same way as for Duplicate. The panels are regenerated and
visualized in all views in the picture. After the move, the panels are still active. The panel
keeps its old name.
Split
This function is used to split one or many panels into two by a plane. The splitting plane can
be defined by giving a coordinate value along one of the main axes (X, Y or Z), by
interactively picking any line in a model view or by picking an intersecting panel or RSO.
In case the plane is defined by picking a line, the plane will be perpendicular to the plane of
the view. Even if the line is restricted, the plane will be unrestricted. Both symbolic and 3D
views can be used.
In case the plane is defined by a panel, the thickness of the panel will be taken into
consideration when splitting the panels in two.
When the panels to split are activated, and the splitting plane is defined, new names have to
be given for the panels to create.
This can be done in two ways, either via the Automatic Names option (see Hull, General
Concepts, About Naming in Hull, Automatic Names), or via a form. Even if the Automatic
Names option is active it is possible to override this and give the names via the form, if
Options is given when prompted for blocks for the new panels.

6:7
12 Series

If the form is used, the symmetry code can also be set (P, S, SP or SBP). If an activated
panel is not intersected by the plane defined, it will be deactivated and will not show up in
the form.
The panels denoted first in the form are always the one on a lower coordinate value along
the main axes as compared to the second one. If e.g. a panel is cut by an x-plane the aftmost panel is the first one and the foremost is the second one. If the plane is a z-plane the
first one is the lower one, and if it is a y-plane the first is the one on the starboard side. For
inclined planes the closest principal plane is determined and the rule for this plane is then
used.
When stiffeners are split the connection codes are chosen from the Connection Control File,
if defined. If the panel is split by a plane, a connection code of type 5 is used, and if split by
a panel a type 4 code is used. The codes with the smallest clearance are selected. If no
Connection Control File is defined code 40 is used in the type 4 case, while code 70 is used
in the type 5 case. The endcuts are selected from the Endcut Control File, if defined,
otherwise the endcut from the other end of the original stiffener is used.
The Connection and Endcut Control are described in a separate document.
Remove Seam
This function removes a seam and then automatically updates all components within the
panel that are affected by this. E.g. it combines the plates that are defined on both sides of
the seam into one. Also stiffeners and flanges that either refer directly to the seam or that
are close enough are combined.
In case the components to combine are geometrically equal but have differences in some
attributes, the user is presented with a form containing the data from the two components to
combine, with a possibility to pick from either of them.
The components handled in the combination process are seams, plates, stiffeners and
flanges.
In order to combine seams, their starting or ending points must be close and the
corresponding tangent vectors also must be close. Other differences, such as bevel codes
and excess, are resolved by the user.
For plates the two corner points close to the seam to remove must coincide with two corners
of a plate on the other side of the seam. Also the material thickness and orientation must be
the same while the user resolves differences in other properties.
For stiffeners and flanges the profile type and dimensions must match as well as the side,
inclination, tag code and symmetry code. Also the mould line definitions have to be
compatible and the end points must be close as well as the tangent vectors. The user
resolves differences in material quality, weld and bevel data as well as other related
information.
For plates, stiffeners and flanges to be combined, the assembly references are removed if
they are not equal. For stiffeners and flanges also the part names are nullified.
Note: that for two groups to match they must have the same number of components and
the components must match two and two. Plates within the same group may be
combined with each other. However the plates must still match two and two as for
matching between groups.
When there are differences in data for components to be combined, a number of forms are
presented to help the user select the data for the component to be created. Each form has

6:8
12 Series

three columns where the left and the middle one list data for the existing component and the
one to the right for the new combined component.
To the left of each cell containing data belonging to the existing components a toggle button
is placed. This toggle is used to pick data either from the first or the second component for
the new one. If the data of the two existing components are equal, both toggles are on and
the third column is already updated.
If a value different from any of the two existing is wanted, it can be keyed in. In this case
both toggles should be off.
The menu button Apply at the bottom of each form is used to check the effect on the new
component data derived from the combination of toggles and keyed in values. The button
OK continues the combination while Quit cancels the combination for the current component
group making the two existing groups remain as they are.
Jumbo Split
This function is used to split up a jumbo panel into part panels. To use the function both the
jumbo panel and the rudimentary part panels must exist in the picture. The part panels must
have at least a boundary defined. Picking first the jumbo panel and then one or more part
panels terminated by Operation Complete start the splitting. All components from the jumbo
panel totally within a part panel are added to it. Plates, stiffeners and face plates intersecting
the part panel boundary are cut off at the boundary.
Nowadays in almost all cases the Split function is a better choice than this function.
Recreate
This function is used to regenerate a number of panels using the existing definition. It can be
useful e.g. when the geometrical shape of panel need to adapt to changes in the
surrounding panels. All active panels are regenerated. The function will make a topological
sorting of the panels automatically.
Topology
This function can be used to visualize the dependencies between model objects using the
topology information within the plane panel as a basis. Given a model object both the
objects defining it and the objects depending on it can be shown.
Furthermore the objects shown can be listed and activated (only plane panels). Once the
plane panels are activated they can be e.g. regenerated to adapt to any changes in the
defining objects using the Recreate function described above.
After giving the root object, the resulting objects can be used as a new initiation. This means
that the dependencies can be visualized repeatedly, level-by-level. To benefit from this
function the model must be created using topological references rather than pure
coordinates whenever possible.
Undo is used to back up to the previous state. E.g. if a deck is initially selected and the
Dependent primary is then used, Undo and then Defining will give the panels defining
the initially selected deck. Undo can back up to the previous state from successive calls on
e.g. Dependent primary.
Also other objects than plane panels can be picked initially, provided that they are used in
the definition of a panel. This is valid for e.g. shell curves and surfaces.
The topology concept is described in a separate document (General Hull Concepts /
Topology in Hull).

6:9
12 Series

Compare Panels
Suppose a situation where a big panel (e.g. a complete deck) has been generated in the
early design phase. Further suppose that this big panel has been broken down into panels
of production (e.g. block) size. In the detail design stage details are added and changes are
made (e.g. of dimensions and qualities), also in parts that have been derived form the
original big panel. To make certain that these changes do not jeopardize the strength
calculations made during the basic design stage, a function has been developed to assist
the designer in comparing the original big panel with the derived panels of production size.
This function compares a number of component types (plates, stiffeners, welded flanges,
pillars and brackets) regarding dimensions and quality. Found differences will be displayed
both graphically and in a list. To identify a difference AVEVA Marine must be able to find a
component in the big panel in the same location as a component of the same type in the
part panel. Additional requirements for stiffeners are that they have to be on the same side
of the panel and have the same inclination.
In the view of the part panel the following colours are used to indicate differences/no
differences compared to the big panel:
The dimensions are smaller or the quality differs: Red
The dimensions are bigger and the quality is the same: Blue
The dimensions and quality are the same: Green
No corresponding component found on the big panel: White
For the big panel:
No corresponding component found on the part panel: White
The identity of the component will also be displayed to make it easier to find the
corresponding row in the list of differences that is also displayed. This difference list
contains the component identity, the dimensions and quality of matching components of
both the part panel and big panel. An example is shown below.
Difference List:
Part panel Jumbo panel
Comp.
Dimensions
Qual.
Comp.
Dimensions
Qual.
S2
20,200,12
<
S2
20,220,12 A
S5
10,200,13
>
S5
10,200,12 A
F1
10,300,20
Here the stiffener S2 is smaller on the part panel than on the big panel, while the web of S5
is thicker on the part panel. The flange F1 on the part panel is not corresponded by any
flange on the big panel.
If a drawing is active containing both panels to be compared, they may be picked
interactively. This is also a condition for having a graphical indication of found differences.
Optionally the names may be keyed-in. In any case a difference list outputs on the screen.
This list may optionally be output as a CSV file.

6:10
12 Series

Knuckled
This function is used to create a knuckled panel from a number of ordinary panels. These
panels are changed to be sub-panels and are included in the created knuckled main panel.
Given a bending type the system finds the limits to connect updating the boundary
definition.
The symmetry code of the main knuckled panel is derived from the contained panels. If all
panels are symmetrical, the knuckled panel will be symmetrical. If any of the panels is overCL, or if panels are defined on both sides of the CL, the knuckled panel will be defined as
over-CL. In other cases the knuckled panel will be defined on either PS or SB.
Pan/Bkt
In generating a panel with brackets, the system may produce a separate bracket picture.
Normally, the picture of the panel is displayed. This function is used to flip between the two
pictures. If only one of the pictures exists, the function will not have any effect.
The bracket picture belonging to the selected panel will be displayed. This function can only
be used when a panel is generated in separate mode.
List
This function is used when the user wants to produce a listing of the input scheme, the panel
and of messages.
The listing reflects the generation in its current status. This function is mainly kept for
backwards compatibility reasons.
Delete
This function is used to delete the active panels from the data bank as well as from the work
area, after user confirmation. If no panels are active, the user is prompted to activate panels.
As for Store and Skip, answering "All" inhibits further confirmation.
If the SBHM default file contains the keyword SCH_DELETE, the input scheme is also
deleted when a panel is deleted.
Rename
This function is used to rename panels. One or many panels are activated and the user is
prompted to key in a new name for each activated panel. During the renaming process, all
panels referring are updated regarding their name references.
Modify Symmetry Code

This function allows a symmetrical panel ("SBP panel") to be split into one version valid
Portside and one valid Starboard (SB) side. The vast majority of panels are truly divided and
stored where valid. E.g. an SB panel will normally be stored on SB and its definition data
look as if it is described where stored and valid.
If the function fails to divide the panel, a simple solution will be used where only the
symmetry of the panels are set i.e. for the SB version the panel will still be defined on
portside but be valid on starboard.
The new panels will get the original panel name with an S and P added at the end.
To invoke the "true" splitting to be activated, the environment variable SBH_MOD_SYM
must be set to MIRR.

6:11
12 Series

Toggle Divide
The purpose of this function is to change priority between intersecting panels. The
modification affects both the panels themselves and the components on them, such as
stiffeners.
Start the function from menu Planar Hull>Panel>Toggle divide.
Toggle Divide Dialog
Dialog Sections:
-
Panels to be Continuous
Panels to be continuous can be two compatible panels or a single panel with seam.
Enter the panel name(s) by hand or indicate the panel(s) in the dialog.
The button Panels to be continuous makes it possible to select the panel(s) on the dialog.
Selected panel(s) must exist.
Panel to be Intersected
Enter the panel name by hand or indicate the panel in the dialog.

6:12
12 Series

With the Select panel to be intersected button it is possible to select a panel in the dialog.
Selected panel(s) must exist.
-
Merged Panel
Enabled only when two panels to be continuous are selected.
Name - the resulting name of two panels to be continuous after merge.
Block - the resulting block after merging two panels to be continuous.
Merge and Split

Two panels to be continuous are merged or (in the case when one panel to be continuous is
selected) a seam is removed from the panel to intersect. A seam is added for the panel to
be intersected. Also, the stiffeners of the continuous panel are merged and the stiffeners of
the intersected panel are cut. Cutouts are added to the intersected panel with a seam.
In a multi-view project with design panels and production panels, only design panels can be
merged by this function. If the merged design panels have connected production panels, a
block seam is created replacing the merged limit.
Production panels can not be merged as the block seam referred by from the coinciding
limits may connect to limits on another.
Check
It is possible to follow the track of changes before deciding to apply or cancel the
performance of Toggle Divide. After clicking the Check button, windows appear with the
new panels successive schemes, and next, the proposed changes can be confirmed.
Criteria for Selected Panels

One panel with seam to be continuous:
seam with reference to intersecting panel
compatibility of storing codes with intersected panel
Two panels to be continuous:
one common limit
the same length and position of coinciding limit
compatibility of storing codes with each other and with intersected panel
boundary definition with reference to the intersecting panel
Panel to be intersected:
the same length in the intersecting line as continuous panel or panels
compatibility of storing codes with continuous panel or panels
limits of panel plates must not be to short after splitting panel
Symmetry
Regardless of geometry definitions, only panels with full compatibility of storing codes can
be merged and split in one operation. Therefore, for example, even if merging of two
selected panels was possible, a third panel to split could disturb dependencies on any of the
ship sides and the operation will be rejected. In addition to panels with equal codes and
panels positioned on the same side with different origin, the collection of panels selected in

6:13
12 Series

the Toggle Divide window can be composed of a panel placed on the centre line to be
continuous with one of the sides panel.
If both symmetrical and not symmetrical panels were within the selection, before split and
merge, symmetrical panels will be automatically divided into portside and starboard
instances. This way only panels from one selected side of the ship will be used and changed
in one execution, except when all panels are symmetrical. To continue with the toggle divide
on the opposite side appropriate panels can be selected in a second execution. After
dividing into sides, and before merge and split, in projects with both types of panels,
references with production panels, if they exists, will be updated for functional panels.
The side of the ship for performing the operation of merge and split is dependent on the user
who chooses the appropriate panels on a specific side and writing down their names or
indicating them in the view. Of course, if all selected panels are symmetrical or all are not
symmetrical, dividing is not necessary.
For easier selecting the names of indicated panels appear in message window with storing
codes. After dividing a message window for confirmation will appear.
All specific cases when a combination of a panels storing codes violates the symmetry, even
after dividing into sides, are rejected with a warning message.
Allowed combinations of valid codes of panels for Toggle Divide:
6.2.3
Intersected panel
Continuous panel
(first panel)
Continuous panel
(second panel)
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Scheme
This group of functions use the Design Language scheme as the interface.

6:14
12 Series

Input
The Panel Scheme Editor is opened, if not already done. Then the operator is prompted to
give a scheme file name via a browse dialog. By default the files are fetched from the
SB_SHIPSCH directory. Then the Editor is used to alter and run the statements.
Note that the scheme file lines must not be longer than 72 characters.
Show
This function shows the scheme when a panel is picked from the picture. If a single panel is
active, this scheme will be shown directly.
Edit
The Panel Scheme Editor is opened, if not already done. Then the scheme file is retrieved
from the first of the activated panels.
The layout can be controlled to some extent via a Vitesse hook named
_TBhook_PPanScheme.py. See the example provided with the installation for further
information.
Then the Editor is used to alter and run the statements. When run, the statement will be
applied to all activated panels with a component group matching the statement.
Run Mode
This function gives the operator the possibility of controlling the execution mode in a number
of respects.
1. Confirm
In this subfunction, the operator selects whether a generated component should be
displayed for acceptance before being inserted in the picture (Confirm on) or if it is to be
inserted directly (Confirm off).
Default is Confirm off.
When creating a BOUNDARY or a CURVE, the Confirm on state has a special implication.
Then the separate boundaries/curve segment will be available for inspection, one by one.
This is intended as an aid in tracing errors when creating the outer geometry of the panel or
a curve. The graphical functions Zoom up, Zoom down and Original scale can be used to
look into the corners, etc. in detail.
2. Trace
If the keyword TRACEON is given in the Hull Modelling default file, and this function is set,
valuable information for error correction by AVEVA will be written into the log file.
Gen in Background
This function is used to generate panels from input schemes in the background. When
started the user is prompted to pick scheme files from the SB_SHIPSCH directory. Then the
generation starts via the Job Launcher and the panels are generated and list files are
created.
Also lists of schemes can be picked instead of scheme files. The file type is then set to
".schlst" in the dialog. All schemes noted in the scheme lists are generated.

6:15
12 Series

Create Lists
This function is used to create lists of schemes. After defining the name of the scheme list
file, scheme files are collected. The file type is ".schlst" and the files are placed in the
SB_SHIPSCH directory by default. A scheme can be part of many scheme lists. The
scheme lists can be used by the "Gen in Background" function.
6.2.4
View
The groups of functions described below are used to create and update views derived from
the hull product model.
Create
This function is used to create views from cutting the hull surface (with its belonging objects
like shell profiles and seams/butts) and the internal hull structure with a plane. The plane
can be defined in a number of ways. The view can be restricted in space via defining a box
and via filtering on block, panel or assembly names.
The panels are presented in a symbolic way, normally used on steel drawings. Depending
on the angle between the panel plane and the drawing plane the panel can either be
projected onto the view plane or intersected by the view plane. The presentation of
components on the panel e.g. stiffeners and brackets is also depending on their orientation
relative to the drawing plane.
The created view may be inserted into the current drawing.
The input is given via a tabbed dialog box where the first tab Plane defines the view plane.

6:16
12 Series

Optionally a view name can be given.

The scale determines the size of symbol components and should indicate the target scale of
the view when inserted in the drawing. The initial value corresponds to the system default
scale used when inserting model views in drawings.
When defining a plane first the type must be chosen using the radio buttons at the top of the
Plane section. Depending on this choice certain fields will be available either to give
coordinates or an object name.
If the plane is defined by a panel, it is possible to let a bracket, or the web of a stiffener or
flange define the plane. In this case the number of this component must also be given. The
Only Current Panel check box is used to exclude everything from the view except the
panel defining the plane.
If the plane is defined by an RSO, the face number must also be given. Key in the face
number in the field for component number. Furthermore, if viewing plane is defined by an
RSO, the user can select to create a view based on all the faces of the RSO. The faces will
then represent a number of restricted planes from which a combined stagged view will be
created. The depth values (from the Limits definition) will be used along all the faces of the
RSO.

6:17
12 Series

The viewing direction can be controlled in the Looking section. If not given the system
default will be used (or viewing directions defined by the customer via default parameters).
The view definition can be picked from an existing view using the Pick button at the bottom
of the dialog.
The second tab Limits contains the limits.
In the Limits section a box restricted by principal planes can be specified to exclude all
outside objects from the view. A clipping window will also be derived from the box. The
buttons on the side are only quick ways to set/reset the box relative to CL.
The depth values are related to the drawing plane and exclude objects outside the given
depth.
The third tab Select contains the selections.

6:18
12 Series

To start with two kinds of views can be created, a Design View and an Assembly View. If an
Assembly View is defined the selections are limited to giving the names of assemblies and
to select whether plane views and/or intersections of panels should be drawn.
For a Design View the shell can be represented by shell curves, shell profiles and shell
seam symbols. If the Existing button is chosen for Curve, the system tries to find an
existing shell curve that is close enough to the drawing plane. If found, this curve will be
included, otherwise the main hull surface will be cut to obtain a shell curve.
For the Planar panels there are a number of options to control the contents and the
appearance.
If Automatic selection is used all panels will be included that are inside the limiting box and
the drawing depth. If not, panels have to be selected by giving the names of Blocks or/and
Panels. Blocks and Panels can also be excluded when Automatic selection is used.
Panels can be drawn as plates rather than as an outer contour and seams. For Assembly
Views panels are always drawn as plates.
RSO's can be included in the view. RSO means Reference Surface Object and they are
created during the initial subdivision of the ship. As the position of panels can be defined by

6:19
12 Series

RSO's, they will often coincide. To make a view containing only RSO's, make sure the
Automatic selection is not checked while the Draw RSO's is checked.
The fourth tab Outfit contains the outfitting selections.
Via this tab it is possible to optionally select outfitting items to be included in the view and
what type of items. The outfitting items to be included in the view will be represented by their
3D representations, sliced to the depth of the view. For certain view types presentation of
the outfitting elements in the Hull Symbolic View has some limitations.
Using these view types, no slicing is applied which means that all elements found in the
desired area are fully visible even if only part of them lies within the limits of the view.
As a consequence even if there are limits defined or depth of a view modified all outfitting
models that exist in the view plane are fully visible.
The limited view types are:
Wireline
Wireline Hidden Line
In the last tab Misc it is possible to include:

6:20
12 Series

Coordinate axis showing the main directions in the view. The position of the axis is
selected in the drop-down list where there are nine predefined positions to select from.
The coordinate axis is a subpicture of its own and can later be moved to any position.
Cross section symbols automatically created in the view. For explanation the different
cases see the picture below.

6:21
12 Series

Detail
This function is used to derive detail pictures from the model or to cut out a part of the
current view.
When the view is derived from the model, the plane of the view can be defined in different
ways:
by the plane of an indicated stiffener.
ditto for a flange.
ditto for a bracket.
by a plane perpendicular to a plate edge.
In these cases, the whole model will not be scanned, only the panel with the component
(and the panel an indicated bracket connects to).
For stiffeners it is possible, as an option, to have a 'top' view of the stiffener showing the
correct look of the flange.
The plane can also be defined as perpendicular to the current view through a defined
line. In this case the whole model will be intersected.
The restrictions in space of the detail are set automatically from the indicated component or
from the defined plane.
By default, the detail views are scaled twice compared to the current view when entered into
the drawing.
Some remarks:
1. The detail views are in all respects like other views (e.g. from Create).
2. When creating detail views from a component it is not possible to make any explicit
exclusions or inclusions. For detail views created from two cp's however the select form
will appear as in Create.

6:22
12 Series

Recreate
This function is used to regenerate all panel subviews in the selected view from the model,
in order to adapt the picture to changes made in the model. The function then uses the
original data given to define the view.
If answering ALL on the indicate prompt, all views in the drawing will be remade. If a view is
replaced by its envelope, it will however not be remade.
The function creates new pictures of those elements which are already included in the view,
and will also add new panels within the view limits. It is possible to suppress the addition of
new panels via OPTIONS on the identify prompt. OPTIONS also give the possibility to
merge the indicated view with a previously stored view. Then, besides indicating a view, the
operator is asked to key in the name of the stored view. An empty return will make the
system search for a view, with the same name as the indicated one, on the data bank. This
option is useful if views have been created in batch by Hull Model Drawings, and is also
faster as no new view has to be created. The two features under OPTION can be combined.
Added information such as measurements and BL/CL are retained.
If UPDATE_NOTE is given the default file (SJ001.SBD/TBCHM.DEF), the hull modelling
notes for position numbers, bevel and assembly will be updated with correct model
information when views are recreated. The settings of the note will be kept. If the model
object that the note is referring to has been deleted, only the reference line will be kept and
the colour changed to blue.
Modify
This function is used to supplement an existing view with new panels. This can be done in
three different ways:
1. By recreating an already existing panel. In doing so, the system can be told to shift
drawing mode from "intersection" to "plane view" and vice versa.
2. By adding the reflected image of an existing panel.
3. By inserting a new panel named by the user into the view.
Moreover, the extensions of the current picture can be modified in the function.
Select
This function is used to select the views to be used for generation receipt by the modelling
functions. A single view or multiple views can be selected. The selection is done by picking
the views in the picture or using the All button.
The function can work in include mode, toggled by the Reject button. Included views are
marked with a rectangle while excluded views are marked with an X.
The selection is valid until changed or until the drawing is scratched. When a new drawing is
read containing model views, all views are selected by default. However see the default
keyword GEN_VIEW in Default File of Planar Hull Modelling.
6.2.5
Pos No
This group contains functions by which position numbers of panel parts can be set, modified
and copied interactively.
Automatic setting of position numbers is not handled by any of the functions described
below. For more information on how this can be achieved, please see separate

6:23
12 Series

documentation concerning autopos (Hull, Manufacturing, Automatic Position Number

Setting).
The general concept is that position numbers can be used to define a unique part within a
certain scope. The term scope can be seen as a part of the ship, characterized by the sum
of certain model parts (panels or blocks) and/or assemblies. This means that, within a
certain scope, e.g. all profiles with equal shape (within certain tolerances) and material can
be supplied with the same position number.
Since parts of different types are usually handled separately (e.g. plates / stiffeners / clips
etc.), position numbers can be reused between part types. This means that a certain
stiffener may be equipped with the same position number as a certain plate without risking
conflicts.
The rules for determining whether or not the parts are equal are the same as the autopos
module uses.
A position number can have a prefix and suffix containing non-digit characters surrounding
an integer. The prefix/suffix are stored using the general purpose strings attached to each
part. This means that these strings cannot be used for any other purpose. To enable the use
of prefix and suffix the environment variable SBH_AN_POSNO has to be set.
Common prerequisites for all functions are that:
A drawing exists (except for Scope).
A scope has been defined (except for Scope).
Since position numbers in most cases are required to be unique only among parts of the
same type, the user will sometimes be prompted for a part type, i.e. any of:
Bracket
Plate
Profile (includes stiffeners, flanges and pillars)
Clip
Bracket stiffeners
This means that only parts of the specified type will be taken into consideration during that
particular function.
In case there is a need to select e.g. stiffeners only instead of the bundled choice Profile
above, add the line:
PROF_BUNDLE=NO
in the Hull Modelling default file. This will allow the user to select any of the types Stiffener,
Flange or Pillar instead of merely Profile.
Scope
Within this function the user can extend the current scope (initially set empty) that all the
other functions operate on. The possibilities here are to:
Add parts belonging to a certain model object to the current scope. Parts may be
selected via any of:
Panels
Blocks
Assemblies (at first or all levels, explained below)
All parts (similar as to select all blocks)

6:24
12 Series

List the contents (user choices) of the current scope as it is
Reset the current scope
Assemblies can be selected either to include parts that are referenced on the first level or on
any level below.
If any of Panel, Block or All has been chosen then you will be prompted for optional side
information as well. A menu containing three choices will appear, containing the possibilities
PS
SB
CL
They can be used to filter out side specific parts from the most recent selection. Upper case
denotes a valid side while lower case denotes the parts that match that side will not be
included in the scope. Pressing any of these side items will toggle between on and off for
that item. When satisfied, press Cancel and the side specific parts within the model object
will be added to the scope. The combination of these side specifications will be left as
default choice for the next selection.
The Reset function scratches all the scope selections made, thereby leaving the scope
empty.
The function is closed by pressing Cancel. Since the scope is modal it can be extended later
on during or between settings.
Set
This can be seen as an on-line editor of position numbers. The user is prompted for a part
type that will be valid for the following settings. Now a position number can be keyed in
(possibly including prefix and/or suffix) and parts can be selected. Position numbers are
being prompted for until either Operation Complete or Quit is pressed. Choosing Options or
Cancel allows the user to select a new part type.
All parts in the drawing that belong to the current scope that carry a position number
identical to the given one are now highlighted.
At this point a check is performed to avoid ambiguous behaviour later on. Unless all
highlighted parts are considered to be equal, a warning message is printed to the message
window. This means that the position number is ambiguously given for the specific part type
within the current scope. This will also result in that future selections will be rejected due to
that it is impossible for a new part to equal all current parts.
All parts that are hereafter selected by the user (until pressing Operation Complete) are
compared with parts already carrying the given position number. If the selected part equals
all already collected parts it is accepted and its position number is noted for update (within
the panel object), hereby highlighting the part.
While selecting parts, pressing Options will display a list window containing all parts
currently selected. These are preceded by*' to the left. Besides that, all parts within the
current scope that already contain the current position number are listed. This could be
valuable when the selection of a part is denied due to the equality check.
The part does not get updated with a new position number (if all conditions are set) until
Operation Complete has been used to terminate the function. This means that there is
always a possibility to regret the latest chosen part in the order of selection. This is done by,
when prompted to select a part, pressing Cancel instead. This will deselect the latest
approved part and thereby its highlighting is switched off. By doing this repeatedly, all
choices in the current session can be made undone.

6:25
12 Series

For all parts for which the updating of the position number did not succeed, there will be a
signal in the message window. If no notification is printed, the panel has been updated.
In case an empty position number string is supplied, no comparison neither with already
existing parts nor with the selected part type is done. This means that the part position
number will be unconditionally blanked.
Change
The user is requested for a part type to be valid for the following settings. After that an
already existing position number is prompted for. All parts (within the current scope) in the
drawing carrying this position number are highlighted and a new position number is
requested by the program. What happens is that all matching parts carrying the old position
number are modified so that they now contain the new position number instead. A
prerequisite is that the part to be changed, must equal all parts carrying the new position
number.
The buttons Cancel or Options are always valid choices, and will allow the user to redo his
most recent selection.
Warning messages for all cases where the position number was not updated are displayed
in a list window afterwards.
Operation Complete or Quit will terminate the function.
Copy
This function can be used to copy certain position numbers from the current scope to a
target scope. Not all position numbers are copied from the current scope, only those that the
user has identified as final (rules for determining this distinction are described below). The
new target scope will be prompted for in a similar way as when the current scope was
determined. No further information is necessary, the function will go ahead and copy the
part position numbers to equal parts in the target scope.
Note: In case of large scopes (in particular target scopes) this function might take some
time to complete.
The target scope is also scanned to check if the position number to be copied has already
been assigned to parts that are not equal to the new set of parts.
Via the default file it is possible to determine certain prefixes and/or suffixes specify a
position number to be final. E.g. the default file contents
POSNO_PREFIX=A,E
POSNO_SUFFIX=K
tells the application that all position numbers starting in A' or E' and ending in K' are
considered as final, others not. The integer part within the position number may have any
value in this context. The Copy function will therefore only copy these position numbers to
equal parts in the target scope but not overwrite any such position numbers in the target
scope.
During the copying session, all warning messages and errors will be collected and
presented in a list window afterwards. This list will contain information about:
Position numbers in the target scope that were already considered as final. In case the
same position number is set to parts that are not equal in the current scope.
A specific position number is already assigned to parts in the target scope, thereby
causing an ambiguous state.

6:26
12 Series

Parts that cause any of the messages above will not have their position number updated by
this function.
Auto
Based upon the scope that is currently defined, you can create an input file to be used along
with autopos, optionally start it as well. This will then automatically set position numbers for
the plane panel parts within the current scope.
Additional information that is required at runtime is possible to specify in the form that
follows. For further details, see also Hull, Manufacturing, Automatic Position Number
Setting.
Within this form it is possible to specify:
The case to be used (if more than one specified)
Prefix and suffix strings, if any
Part types to be dealt with
Types of already existing position numbers that should be updated
Whether or not position numbers should be updated
Scope subdivision when comparing parts

6:27
12 Series

The scope is taken as currently defined.

After filling in the relevant information, you can either:
6.2.6
Exit from the function with no position numbers updated (Cancel)
Create the input file and start autopos with the file as input (OK)
Reset all fields to the initial value (Clear)
RSO
The functions in this group handle Reference Surface Objects (RSO).
Create RSO
This function is used to create or update an RSO from existing panels. First a number of
panel instances are picked, and then the name of the RSO can be defined in a dialog
together with an option to update the involved panels to depend on the RSO for their
location. The extension of the RSO is fetched from the panel boundaries.
RSO's can also be created in Initial Design. They are there used to subdivide the ship into
compartments. However these compartment boundaries are often coinciding with
bulkheads and decks. Thus it is natural to connect panels to RSOs.
The RSO is composed of a number of connected, limited subplanes. It can also contain
references to plane panels. From the other end a plane panel can refer an RSO for its
position in space. These references make it possible to refer the RSO rather than the panel
in a number of cases. The advantage of referring an RSO is that the reference is stable
even if the RSO initially contain jumbo panels that are later subdivided into panels for detail
design.
ReCreate RSO
This function is used when the panels forming an RSO has changed in shape. By picking
the RSO the same dialog will appear as in the Create RSO function, listing the referred
panels. The geometry of the RSO will then be adapted to the panel boundaries.
It is necessary that the panels be noted in the RSO as they would be e.g. if the RSO was
once created from the panels and the panel location was then updated to refer the RSO.
Otherwise the RSO cannot be recreated.
Delete RSO
This function is used to delete an RSO from the database after confirmation. It will also be
removed from the picture. It may be that plane panels are depending on the RSO for their
position. In such a case the user is given an additional control question before deletion.
The location definition for the panels that refer the RSO is updated. The new location will be
derived from the panel plane and will be either a position along one of the principal axes, or
three points.
6.2.7
Select
The functions in this group handle the panel versus the database. Multiple panels can be
handled in all functions.

6:28
12 Series

Activate
This function is used to activate panels. A panel must be activated before it is changed.
When activated, the panel is read from the data bank and locked for updating to prevent
other users from changing the same panel.
When a panel is active, it is highlighted by a circumscribed rectangle around all subviews in
the picture corresponding to the panel. Also a letter on the upper line of the rectangle is
drawn. The letter 'S' (stored) means that the panel object in the work area is identical with
the one in the data bank. The letter 'M' (modified) means that the panel in the work area has
been changed compared to the one on the data bank.
Panels can be activated either by picking them graphically or by giving the name. If
"Options" is given on the "indicate panel" prompt, a form will pop up giving the possibility to
include and exclude panels or blocks given as names with wildcards. A limiting box can also
be defined together with the names.
Activation by name can be mixed with activation by picking interactively.
If multiple panels are activated by name they are sorted according to the order in the block
they belong to. As this order reflects the order in which the panels were once created, it is
likely to be the best approximation in the absence of a proper topological sorting.
Store
This function is used to store active panels after user confirmation. If "All" is answered the
confirmation of the remaining active panels is avoided.
If the panels had an "M" on its highlighting rectangle previously, it is changed to an "S" after
storing the panel. Panel already marked with "S" are not stored.
If the SBHM default file contains the keyword SCH_CREATE, a new input scheme file is
created when a panel is stored.
Skip
This function is used to deactivate the active panels without storing them. If they are
changed, they are removed from the work area and from the picture. As for Store,
answering "All" inhibits further confirmation.
Store and Skip

This function is a combination of Store and Skip. Whenever a panel has been stored it is
skipped automatically.
List Activated
This function is used to list all active panels. It is useful when panels are active that is not
present in any view, or to make sure no panels are active. In the latter case an empty list
box is shown.
6.2.8
Edit
Automatically generated symbolic Hull views contain, apart from geometry, also textual and
symbolic information representing bevel, material side, and so on. To make these
automatically generated drawings readable, this type of information must sometimes be
moved from its original position. Recreating these hull views will get an automatic update of
a recreated view if the manual editions are made with this function. The function allows the

6:29
12 Series

user to make changes to some of the symbolic and textual information of the view and
retains these changes also when the view is recreated.
6.2.9
Properties
This function allows the user to blank (or un-blank) the symbolic or textual information on an
individual panel or on a complete hull view. The display option box is used to set which
information should be displayed or hidden. If a view is selected, previously selected display
options on individual models are overruled. If a single model is selected, the values
previously set on a belonging view are overridden.
The recreation of views will consider the current status of the existing view. Information
blanked before the recreation will be blanked also afterwards. The hull defaults values
control the initial status of the blank/un-blank information when a view is created.
6.3
Hull Tools
The groups of functions described below are common to all interactive hull applications.
6.3.1
Note
This group contains functions to insert hull specific notes into the drawing. Information is
fetched from the model and it is thus required that the view is up to date with the database.
Position Number
This function is used to create and insert a note into the drawing containing mainly the
position number or rather the part name.

6:30
12 Series

After indication of the panel part to get the position number from, a string line is defined by
the operator. The position number is put on the last segment of this string line. Also the
length of this
last segment is automatically adapted to the position number texts. As an option it is
possible to create a POSNO with several components with the same position number,
connected to it.
The position number components produced in the drawing have the same quality as the
ones created by the TBGD position number function regarding colour, layer, id etc. and can
thus be handled in the same way.
If the TB part name control is in effect the short version of the part name specified is used in
the position number function. For details on how to specify the part name. If nothing is
specified the part name equals the position number.
The appearance of the position number component in the drawing can be controlled to
some extent by the user. This is done via keywords and values in the Planar Hull Modelling
default file, and the Drafting default file connected to the logical name TBD_DEF1.
The keywords in TBD_DEF1 defining the size are
POS_SYM_HEIGHT
The height of the symbol definition space in mm.
POS_TXT_MINH
Minimum height of the text to be put in the position

number symbol.
TEXT_STD_HEIGHT
Standard text height.
First the height of the symbol is determined from POS_SYM_HEIGHT. Then the maximum
text height and width from the first text position of the symbol is fetched to calculate the
actual text size. However, it is made sure that the text height is never greater than
TEXT_STD_HEIGHT, and never smaller than POS_TXT_MINH. If no symbol exists, the text
height is set to TEXT_STD_HEIGHT.
The size of the dimension text to the right of the symbol is determined by the height from the
second text position of the symbol. If no symbol exists, it is 2/3 of the height of the position
number text.
It is possible to select the information to be included in the note, at run time. Giving
OPTIONS on the Indicate prompt will show a form where the types of items to be included in
the note can be selected or deselected individually for the different part types.
Previously the delimiter between the web and flange dimensions was the '*'-character. Now,
the logical name SB_PROF_DELIM can contain the new delimiter. Note, the delimiter is one
character long. If the logical name has not been set the old delimiter will be used.
When the use of imperial units is activated, the thickness of the plate is replaced by the
weight of the plate in pounds per square foot. The density is fetched from the quality
element in the catalogue. The handling of the quality file is described in a separate
document.
Assembly
This function is similar to the posno function except that the assembly name is used. The
symbols used are controlled via an own set of keywords in the default file.
TB/PS specific assembly names are obtained depending on the indicated part.

6:31
12 Series

Bevel
If the logical name TBH_BEVEL_CTRL is defined as a bevel control file then bevel notes
can be created according to the setting in this file regarding text and symbols (see separate
document). The interaction is similar to the other note functions.
Config Set
This function is used to insert user configurable notes into a drawing. The configuration
includes a set of note types each with its own set of characteristics both regarding the
contents and the appearance. The configuration is made via a Vitesse hook.
The created notes can be handled by the general note functions, e.g. to delete and move
reference.
If the default keyword UPDATE_NOTE is given the contents of the notes are updated.
The operator has to pick a model part and optionally create a reference string line for the
note. By giving OPTIONS on the prompt it is possible to invoke automatic setting of a certain
note type in a whole view or subview. In this case the notes are placed without or with
reference string line, according to the option Reference line OFF (on). The reference line
consists of 2 line segments.
Config Move
This function is used to move notes in a drawing inserted by the Set function above. To
move a note, just pick it and place it somewhere else.
Giving OPTIONS on the prompt will give the possibility to move a note and at the same time
create a reference string line from the original location. This option can only be used if the
note does not already have a reference line.
6.3.2
Curve
This group contains two functions that are used to update the data banks with curves.
Create Curve
This function is used to cut the hull surface with one or several planes to obtain one or
several curves. The curves are then stored under the given name on the hull form data bank
associated with the logical name SB_CGDB. Multiple planes can be defined only in principle
planes.
Optionally, the frame, waterline or buttock tables are updated.
Input
The input is given via the Form System. The form is divided into a common upper part and a
lower part where the contents is depending on how the plane is defined.
The Common Part

The common part of the form has the following appearance:

6:32
12 Series

Description of the Fields:

Surface name:
The name of the hull surface object to derive the curves from.
Curve name:
The name of the curve(s) to be created. If only one curve is

defined an arbitrary name can be given. If, however, multiple
curves are to be created the name has to be on the form:
<prefix><start>([<step>])<end>
where <prefix> is a string starting with a letter while <start>,
<step> and <end> are numerical values. Decimal numbers
can be used. If <step> is left out, step one is assumed.
Example of valid values are:
SBX34()46
CUR10(0.2)10.8
Limits:
Curve limitations. Default is Ymin = 0 and no limits on the

other values.
Plane:
Alternatives for the plane definition.
Exit PF4
Exit function.
Reject PF2
Reject.
Continue PR3
Continue to the plane definition part.
Defining the Plane at a Principal Axis

If X, Y or Z are chosen to define the plane, the following lower part will appear:

6:33
12 Series


Coordinate value:
A value to define the plane. The value have to be on the

form:
[<prefix>]<start>[([<step>])<end>] [+-<offset>]
where <prefix> is valid if frame or longitudinal terms are
used. <start>, <step>, <end> and <offset> are numerical
values. Decimal numbers are allowed.
Note: that the number of values derived from an expression
like this has to equal the number of names derived
from the curve name field.
Example of valid values are:
2700
360(720)3960
FR25()28
LP1.5(0.5)3.0
FR52(2)60+375
Update table:
Optionally, the frame, waterline and buttock tables can be

updated. However, this requires that the curve name(s)
consists of the frame, waterline or buttock group name,
depending on the axis chosen, and an integer number.
Furthermore, the default limits have to be used.
Create PF3
Activating the curve creation.

6:34
12 Series

Defining the Plane by Three Points
X1 - Z1:
First point
X2 - Z2:
Second point
X3 - Z3:
Third point
Defining the Plane by a Panel
Description of the fields:
Panel name:
The name of the plane panel to define the curve plane.
Reflected:
If it is a symmetrical panel, the reflected image can be

used to define the plane.
Store Curve
This function stores curve in the current drawing as a CAT object in a selected data bank.
The curve will be stored in the coordinate system of the current view in case this is a Planar
Hull Modelling view.
The name of the curve must be specified by the user and the drawing will be updated with
the given name as well.
This function is intended to be used in situations as described below.
1. To create non-stand notches and holes e.g. around the origin of the drawing.
2. To store long and complicated curves created in drawing mode that are used e.g. as
boundaries in many panels.

6:35
12 Series

3. To store intersection curves with the hull in views (e.g. from create Detail View) that one
wants to use as boundaries of panels.
6.3.3
Functional Description
The concept of Functional Description is described in the on-line documentation Hull / Setup
and Customisation / General/ Functional Description.
This function supports the interactive assignment of functional descriptions to panels and to
physical parts on panels. A functional description assigned on panel level will be valid for all
its parts. However, it may be supplemented with assignments on part level as well.
After display of the selected object this function will present a list of available functional
descriptions for interactive picking.
6.3.4
Shrinkage Info
This function is used to display the shrinkage defined in the modelling of plane panels. The
function will highlight all panels in the drawing which have shrinkage defined. If one of these
panels are then indicated, the shrinkage for this panel will be shown in detail. The main
shrinkage direction is presented as a solid line and the perpendicular direction as a dashed
line. For each plate of the panel the shrinkage factors are displayed; perpendicular to the
main direction, along the main direction and along the seams. All values in mm/m
(millimetre/metre).
The shrinkage of a panel may be defined via a shrinkage object. In this case the name of the
shrinkage object must be defined in the default file of Hull Modelling via the default
parameter "SHRINK_OBJ".
6.3.5
Re Init
This function performs certain re-initialisations, e.g. re-initialises the gentab file. It also
resets certain status variables to the situation when hull modelling is newly started, e.g.
layers to display, etc.
6.3.6
Production Program Interface Hull

This function is used for production and reporting within Hull. It is described in detail in Hull,
Manufacturing, Hull Production Program Interface.
6.3.7
Vitesse
This function is used to present the selection of Vitesse scripts that is put on the directory
given by the global variable SB_PYTHON. The scripts are presented in a list from which the
user can pick one to execute. For a description of Vitesse see the Vitesse User's Guide.
6.3.8
Painting Areas
General
This section describes the application for the calculation of areas for painting. The system
can be executed either in batch mode or in interactive mode. In batch mode the input is
given by the user explicitly in an input scheme and in interactive mode the same input is
created interactively.

6:36
12 Series

In both cases the actual area calculations are performed in a separate batch program. This
program reads input in a Interactive Language (TIL) format. The result is a listing of the
calculated areas with an option to produce a detailed list of the areas of different parts. The
result is also stored in a Painting Area Data Base (in this document referred to by PADB).
Methods
Surfaces and Rooms

The user is able to calculate areas within the hull in two different ways:
Calculation of surface
A surface may be either a plane or curved panel or a part of

a surface (the shell or a shaped deck). A panel may or may
not be restricted, a surface must always be restricted.
Calculation of the area

of a room
The room is always defined by limits which do not

necessarily coincide with any physical walls. Normally the
parts within a defined room will be selected automatically by
the system.
Optionally, panels may be manually included or excluded
from the calculations, and the side to be painted of a
selected panel can be chosen. For panels in the restricting
planes, normally only the surface facing the room will be
included.
In both cases, the surfaces/panels to be calculated will be restricted to the limits of the
surface or room that have been given by the user.
Consequently, parts (plates and profiles) contribute only with the part of their area within the
given limits.
Calculated areas of surfaces and rooms may be combined into larger units. This facilitates
the partitioning of rooms with complicated topology into smaller, simpler units.
-
Topological Considerations
The topology of a room may be of any complexity. The system will, however, have certain
restrictions on how complicated the geometry of a room may be.
Basically, a room must be of a box-like shape, i.e. in principle have six walls. It is further
supposed to make sense to talk about a restriction in the aft, forward, port side, starboard
side direction as well as in the direction up and down. However, the limits need not be
parallel to a principal plane.
On the other hand, a "prismatic" room (e.g. a side tank) in the forward part of the ship may
well have the shell as the limit towards PS and in the forward and the downwards directions.
The user is supposed to partition rooms with a complicated topology into subrooms.
It is further supposed that all panels within a defined room shall be calculated (except those
explicitly excluded), i.e. it is not possible to define a room within another room to be
excepted from the calculations. Note, however, the possibility within the input to subtract the
area of some surfaces/rooms from the sum of others!

6:37
12 Series

Rooms with Complex Limits

It is also possible to define more complex limits in a room. Such a limit consists of a number
of principal planes, general planes, panels or curves which together build up a continuous
limit.
The complex limits can only be defined in either the forward and aft directions, or the
portside and starboard directions, or the upwards and downwards directions. It is naturally
possible to define a limit in only one of the chosen pair of directions.
Another restriction with the complex limits is that the intersection line between two adjacent
planes must be parallel with the x, y or z axis.
The system will automatically make a subdivision of a room with a complex limit in one or
two directions into subrooms. These subrooms will also be stored on the data base and will
be combined into a larger unit.
Rooms with complex limits can only be defined in interactive mode.
Defaults
The most important default settings are the time factors for a given area. Separate factors
are defined for painting, blasting, cleaning, mechanical derusting and after treatment.
The default handling is described in Painting Area Calculation Default File.
Input and Output
Input
Input to the program is information about the objects for which the areas should be
calculated. The calculations can be performed only on information stored in the Hull Form
and Structure data bases. This means that the following parts may be included:
plates
brackets
stiffeners
flanges
pillars
shell profiles
restricted areas of shell/deck surfaces
Calculations can be performed on plane and curved panels and on selected parts of
surfaces (shell and decks) which need not be described as panels. For plane panels, the
areas are determined from the split plate parts. If a panel has not been split the panel itself is
used.
The selection may take place manually on panel level or via the automatic inclusion of
panels within a given room.
Each calculated area may be identified for blasting, painting, etc. Explicit time factors may
be given if default values cannot be used.

6:38
12 Series

Result
Data
The results are primarily the calculated areas, presented in a list. Based on these areas, the
program also calculates and lists total times, using time factors given as input or as defaults.
For testing and checking purposes, a detailed listing of the area of each part may be
produced at request.
The result of the calculations is stored in a CAT object on the PADB for later retrieval. The
following data are stored:
The calculated areas
The originally specified treatment and the factors that have been used.
The resulting time, calculated using these factors.
Names and areas for each part.
It is possible to refer to the result of previous calculations, e.g. to sum up the result in an
output list. The result of a calculation which contains separately stored partial areas (cf.
input) will normally not be stored (to avoid that the same area is stored in multiple records).
Files
Two result files are created when the input and default files are interpreted. They have the
same name as the input and default file and are stored on SB_SHIPPRINT with the
extension .lst.
The resulting calculations are stored in a comma separated file on SB_SHIPPRINT with
the extension .csv . The following terms are stored in this file (one line for each record).
The numbers refer to the order number of the terms..
No.
Attribute
Format
Key
string
Ship number
string
Statement type
string

6:39
12 Series

Painting Data:
No.
Attribute
Format
Area in square millimetres
real
Area in square metres
real
Time in minutes
real
Time in hours
real
Time factor
real
Blasting Data:
No.
Attribute
Format
real
10
real
11
Time in minutes
real
12
Time in hours
real
13
Time factor
real
Cleaning Data:
No.
Attribute
Format
14
real
15
real
16
Time in minutes
real
17
Time in hours
real
18
Time factor
real
Derusting Data:
No.
Attribute
Format
19
real
20
real
21
Time in minutes
real
22
Time in hours
real
23
Time factor
real

6:40
12 Series

After Treatment Data:

No.
Attribute
Format
24
real
25
real
26
Time in minutes
real
27
Time in hours
real
28
Time factor
real
Restrictions
Level of Detailing
The system has certain restrictions on the accuracy of the calculations. The restrictions are
listed below.
End cuts of profiles are not taken into account.
When profiles cross a limit, the "cut" is assumed to be perpendicular even if the profile
passes the limiting plane at an angle.
Areas of brackets are always calculated for the whole bracket even if it crosses a limit.
Exception: A bracket in the same plane as the panel it belongs to will be calculated only
on one side if that has been specified for the 'mother' panel.
The painting area will not be reduced for the common area of an overlapped profile and
bracket. The same is true for overlapping profiles. However, the area of the root of
profiles will be subtracted from that of the plates.
Clips will not be included in the calculations.
In the calculation of a shell region, there is always assumed to be two opposite limits
parallel to a principal plane, e.g. two parallel frame planes. This restriction is not valid
for a curved panel which may be of any shape.
Level of User Control

It is supposed that the lowest level of user control is at the panel level, i.e. it is not possible
to calculate the area of only plates and profiles, and to exclude brackets, etc. The only
factors that would affect the result are if a certain component is within or without the given
limits or if it is on the selected side of the surface.
This is also true for the shell. The shell profiles will always be included if the surface on
which they are located is calculated.
Create Input
General
This section describes the calculation of painting areas in interactive mode, where the input
scheme is created. It is possible to edit this input scheme manually after creating it
interactively.
It is also possible to perform the calculations for the created input in a background process,
thus letting the user define new rooms while the previous ones are being calculated.

6:41
12 Series

The definition of limits is done via pointing in ordinary 2D views or in 3D pictures. If 2D views
are used, normally two different views are required to define all the limits of a room.
In a similar way, panels are selected interactively to be included/excluded by pointing in
pictures.
-
Creation of Input Scheme

Selection of Panels
In all functions where panels are to be identified the function SELECT PANELS is used.
With this function it is possible to select the panels in different ways:
by pointing
by name
all panels in a view
all panels belonging to the same block and view as an identified panel
all panels with the same assembly name
By default, panels are selected by pointing. If OPTIONS is selected it is possible to switch

selection mode. The selection of panels is terminated with Operation Complete.
If the field EXCLUDE is chosen, the menu to be used for panels to be excluded will be
displayed. It is also possible to display all panels excluded so far.
To switch back to the Selection menu the field SELECT must be chosen.
The field EXCLUDE is not relevant for the SURFACE statement.
When a curve or a panel is to be used as a limit, the panel or curve can only be given by
pointing or by name. The selected panel/curve must be verified by the user. If the name of a
symmetrical panel has been given the user is prompted to give the ship side.
If the name of a curve has been given and the curve is not in the drawing or both the
reflected and unreflected curve exist in the drawing, the user is prompted to give the ship
side.
Rooms with Complex Limits
By default, the complex limit is defined by an interactive identification of the panels
constituting the limit. If a part of the complex limit is a principal plane, general plane or a
curve OPTIONS will give the user the opportunity to switch to the proper type.
OPERATION COMPLETE will terminate the definition of the complex limit.
If EXIT FUNCTION is given, the complex limit defined so far will be deleted.
If REJECT is given as an answer to the prompt for the indication of a panel, the last plane/
panel/curve is deleted from the current limit. It is possible to delete the whole limit in this
way.
To change a part of a complex limit this part must be deleted together with all planes/panels/
curves which have been defined after the one to be changed. This is done as stated above.
At any time the planes in the limit can be listed or displayed.
Input to the Function
The interactive creation of the input scheme is made using the form system. This allow to:
provide all required statements in the correct order

6:42
12 Series

reduce user input to file names and limit restrictions
minimize the possibility to produce syntax errors
Each keyword and most of the attributes will have at least one form of its own. A lot of
attributes can be created by simply giving Yes or No.
Some forms contain a special function INFO which makes it possible for the user to extract
information from the picture. The following information is available:
all graphical functions
3D-coordinate
3D-linear
distance between two points
distance between point and plane
model info
name info
attribute info
The functions of all forms are described in detail below. Common for all forms are the
functions EXIT and QUIT.
EXIT
means that the given values are saved and the calling form is
displayed.
QUIT,
which has been implemented only as CTRL Z, means that all

values given in the current form are cancelled and that the values
which were valid entering of the form are still valid. The only
exception is the forms used defining the limiting box.
QUIT
from the LIMITING STATEMENTS form means that all changes

made to the limiting box are cancelled.
Screen Based Reference

Calculate Painting Areas
Description of the form:
Input file:
Name of the input file. Default directory and extension are

SBH_PAINT_AREA_INP and *.dat respectively.
Detailed list:
Y if a detailed list of the resulting areas is wanted.
Level:
Detail level of the list above.
List file:
Name of the file for the detailed list. Default directory and
extension are SB_SHIPPRINT and *.lst respectively.
Default file:
Name of the default file. Default directory and extension

are SBH_PAINT_AREA_DEF and *.def respectively.
This information is displayed only if the paintareas default
file contains the statement DISPLAY_DEFNAME (see
DISPLAY_DEFNAME Statement).

6:43
12 Series

PADB:
Name of the Painting Area Data Base. Default directory is

SBH_PAINT_AREA_DB respectively.
This information is displayed only if the paintareas default
file contains the statement DISPLAY_PADBNAME (see
DISPLAY_PADBNAME Statement)
Room:
Exit:
ROOM statement.
SURFACE statement.
COMBINE statement.
SUM statement.
DELETE statement.
Exit Function.
List:
List the PADB.
Defaults:
List/create the default file.
Calculate:
Start the execution of the background program to calculate

the painting areas and times.
Surface:
Combine:
Sum:
Delete:
List Painting Data Base

The results of the painting area calculations are stored in the Painting Area Data Base
(PADB). A special list program has been developed to list the PADB. The input is made
using the Form system.
It is possible to create a CSV file from one or all objects in the PADB. Objects can also be
deleted.
Key:
Name of the record.
Ship:
Ship number.
Valids:
Valid treatments are given in one string with one letter for
each treatment. E.g. PBC means that painting, blasting
and cleaning are valid.
Type:
Statement type generating the record. The type can be

COMBINE, ROOM, SUM or SURFACE.
Created:
The creation date and time for the record.
Revised:
The revision date and time for the record. The revision
number is also given.
Painting:
Area, time and time factor for painting.
Blasting:
Area, time and time factor for blasting.
Cleaning:
Area, time and time factor for cleaning.
Derusting:
Area, time and time factor for derusting.
After treat:
Area, time and time factor for after treatment. The time
factor is only relevant for records of type ROOM or
SURFACE.
Print file:
The name of the output file when records or the complete

PADB are printed.
Exit:
Exit Function.

6:44
12 Series

List:
The record with the given key is listed. It is not necessary

to specify the whole key. The program finds the key which
is alphabetically greater than or equal to the given key.
First:
The first record is listed.
Next:
The next record is listed. Using next it is possible to list the

whole PADB sequentially.
Select:
Records on PADB can be selected to be used in the SUM

statement.
PrintRec:
Print current record on file (CSV file).
PrintAll:
Print all records on file (CSV file). The list will be brief with
only record key and record type.
Previous:
All listed records are temporarily stored in a sorted list.

Previous will list the previous record in this list.
Delete:
Delete the current record from the PADB. The record must
first be read with List, First, Next or Previous
before it can be deleted.
Define Treatment
Name:
Record key.
Common Difficulty
Factor:
Global difficulty factor. Method specific difficulty factor,

which will be multiplied in the paintareas default file.
Painting:
Y if the difficulty factor is to be defined.
Number:
The number of coats of painting.
Blasting:
Method:
Blasting method.
Cleaning:
Derusting:
Method:
Derusting method.
After treatment:
Exit:
Treatment has been defined.
Defaults
Default file:
Name of the default file.
Painting:
Time factor (m2/min).
Blasting:
Method:
Blasting method.
Cleaning:
Derusting:
Method:
Derusting method.
After treatment:
Blasting:
Next blasting method.

6:45
12 Series

Gold Blasting:
Previous blasting method.
Derusting:
Next derusting method.
Gold Derusting:
Previous derusting method.
Exit:
Exit Function.
Reset:
The first defaults values are listed.
Read:
Read and interpret default file.
List Resulting Statements

Next:
Next page (displayed only if an other page follows).
Previous:
Previous page (displayed only if a page precedes).
Yes:
The statement is accepted.
No:
The statement is not accepted. Return to main form.
Comments to Input Scheme

Exit:
Accept and return to list form.
Panel Statement
Exit:
Return to main form.
Next:
Previous:
Previous page (displayed only it a page precedes).
Identify:
Identify panels.
All identified panels will be listed. It is possible to define the version for symmetric panels.
The side attribute specifies the side to be calculated if only one side is treated. If any panels
are to be removed the valid field should be set to N for these panels and the function
Identify selected. New panels can be identified or Exit can be given, resulting that the
marked panels are removed from the list.
List panels in Limiting Box
Next:
Previous:
Previous page (displayed only if a page precedes).
Exit:
Room Statement
Room name:
Record key.
Type:
Room type.

6:46
12 Series

Continue:
Continue with the form according to the chosen type. If New

or Combine is selected and the record exists in PADB or
workspace a question is displayed to confirm changing the
record. The statement will be continued only if the answer is
Y.
Exit:
Return to main form. For rooms of type New and Combine

the system checks if the limits have been defined.
Room Statement - New

Room name:
Record key.
Store:
Y if the result shall be stored on PADB.
Automatic:
Y for automatic selections of panels.
Limits:
Add limit statements.
Panel:
Add panels explicitly.
Treatment:
Put treatment.
Exit:
Room Statement - Combine

Room name:
Record key.
Automatic:
Y for automatic selections of panels.
Type:
The room is to be added or subtracted.
Limits:
Panel:
Exit:
Room Statement - Old

Room name
Record key.
Store:
Treatment:
Put treatment.
Exit:
Surface Statement
Surface name:
Record key.
Type:
Surface type.

6:47
12 Series

Continue:
Continue with the form according to the chosen type. If New

or Combine is selected and the record exists in PADB or
record. The statement will be continued only if the answer is
Y.
Exit:
Return to main form. For surfaces of type New and

Combine the system checks if the limits have been defined.
Surface Statement - New

Surface name:
Record key.
Store:
Limits:
Panel:
Treatment:
Put treatment.
Shell:
Add shell statement.
Deck:
Add deck statement.
Exit:
Surface Statement - Combine

Surface name:
Record key.
Type:
The surface shall be added or subtracted.
Limits:
Panel:
Shell:
Add shell statement.
Deck:
Add deck statement.
Exit:
Surface Statement - Old

Surface name:
Record key.
Store:
Y if the result is to be stored on PADB.
Treatment:
Put treatment.
Exit:
Shell Statement
Surface name:
Record key.
Side:
Side of surface.

6:48
12 Series

Number:
The surface number if not the main surface. If the number is

equal to zero the statement is deleted.
Exit:
Deck Statement
Surface name:
Record key.
Side:
Side of surface.
Number:
The surface number if not the main deck. If the number is

equal to zero the statement is deleted.
Exit:
Combine Statement
Combination name:
Record key.
Store:
Y if the result is to be stored on PADB.
Add:
Add surface/room.
Subtract:
Subtract surface/room.
Treatment:
Put treatment.
Exit:
Return to main form. If the record exists in PADB or

record. The statement will be saved only if the answer is Y.
Combine Statement - Add

Combination name:
Record key.
Combination list:
All available records are listed in this enumerated field. If the

number of records exceeds the maximum number of rows
for the field, CURR, NEXT and PREV will be visible.
Select:
Selects a record to be added from the Combination List.

The selected records are listed in the form. When the form is
full a new page will be used.
Next:
Next page of Combination List (displayed only if an other

page follows).
Previous:
Previous page of Combination List (displayed only if a

page precedes).
Valid:
If selected records are marked N in the valid field they are

removed when the functions Select, Next, Previous and
Exit are used.
Exit:
When the combination statement has been accepted and stored, all selected records will be
deleted from the combination list.

6:49
12 Series

Combine Statement - Subtract

Combination name:
Record key.
Combination list:

number of records exceeds the maximum number for the
field, CURR, NEXT and PREV will be visible.
Select:

Next:
Next page of Combination List (displayed only if an other

page follows).
Previous:
Previous page of Combination List (displayed only if a

page precedes).
Valid:

Exit are used.
Exit:
When the combination statement has been accepted and stored, all selected records will be
deleted from the combination list.
Sum Statement
Sum name:
Record key.
Add:
The given rooms/surfaces will be added to a total.
PADB:
The given rooms/surfaces stored on the PADB will be added

to a total.
Exit:
Return to main form. If the record exists in PADB or

record. The statement will be saved only if the answer is Y.
Sum Statement - Add

Sum name:
Record key.
Sum list:

number of records exceeds the maximum number for the
field, CURR, NEXT and PREV will be visible.
Select:

Next:
Next page of Sum List (displayed only if a page follows).
Previous:
Previous page of Sum List (displayed only if a page

precedes).

6:50
12 Series

Valid:

Exit are used.
Exit:
Sum Statement - PADB

Sum name:
Record key.
PADB List:
All records on PADB which previously have been selected

from PADB are listed in this enumerated field. If the number
of records exceeds the maximum number for the field,
CURR, NEXT and PREV will be visible.
Select:

Next:
Next page of PADB List (displayed only if an other page

follows).
Previous:
Previous page of PADB List (displayed only if a page

precedes).
Valid:

Exit are used.
Exit:
Delete Statement
Name:
Record key.
Exit:
If the record key exists on PADB an additional question to

confirm the execution is displayed in the form. Only if the
answer is Y the statement will be deleted.
If the record key does not exist on PADB no message will be
displayed and no changes will be made. The program
returns to the main form.
Limiting Statements
Name:
Record key.
Forward:
Define a limit in the forward direction.
Aft:
Define a limit in the aft direction.
Portside:
Define a limit in the portside direction.
Starboard:
Define a limit in the starboard direction.
Upwards:
Define a limit in the upward direction.
Downward:
Define a limit in the downward direction.
List:
List the plane panels situated inside the defined limiting box.

6:51
12 Series

Display:
Display the plane panels situated inside the defined limiting

box.
Exit:
Return to main form. The validity of the limiting box is

checked and if all limits have been given correctly the
resulting box can be displayed.
Yes:
Display the limiting box.
No:
Do not display the limiting box.
Limiting Statements - Principal Plane

Direction:
The current direction.
Name:
Record key.
Plane:
Principal plane.
Coordinate:
The x, y, or z coordinate
Info:
Get additional information from the drawing.
Next:
List next plane in complex limit (displayed only if the plane is

a member of a complex limit).
Previous:
List previous plane in complex limit (displayed only if the

plane is a member of a complex limit).
Exit:
Limiting Statements - General Plane

Direction:
Name:
Record key.
X1, Y1, Z1:
The first point in the general plane.
X2, Y2, Z2:
The second point in the general plane.
X3, Y3, Z3:
The third point in the general plane.
Info:
Next:
List next plane in complex limit (displayed only if the plane is

Previous:
List previous plane in complex limit (displayed only if the

plane is a member of a complex limit).
Exit:
Limiting Statements - Panel

Direction:
Name:
Record key.
Panel name:
Name of the limiting panel.
Reflect:
Y if the selected panel is reflected.
Point:
A point in the given panel plane.

6:52
12 Series

Normal:
The normal to the given panel plane.
Identify:
Get panel from picture.
Info:
Next:
List next panel in complex limit (displayed only if the panel is

Previous:
List previous panel in complex limit (displayed only if the

panel is a member of a complex limit).
Exit:
Limiting Statements - Surface

Direction:
Name:
Record key.
Type:
Surface type: SHELL or DECK.
Number:
Surface number if not main shell or main deck. If the number

is equal to zero the statement is deleted.
Exit:
Limiting Statements - Curve

Direction:
Name:
Record key.
Curve name:
Name of the limiting curve.
Reflect:
Y if the selected curve is reflected.
Point:
A point on the given plane curve.
Normal:
The normal to the given curve plane.
Identify:
Get curve from picture.
Info:
Next:
List next curve in complex limit (displayed only if the curve is

Previous:
List previous curve in complex limit (displayed only if the

curve is a member in a complex limit).
Exit:
Limiting Statements - Complex

Direction:
Name:
Record key.
Complex limit:
Select type of complex limit part.
Define:
Define the limit of the selected type.
Display:
Display all planes and panels in the current complex limit.

6:53
12 Series

List:
List the planes/panels/curves in the current complex limit.
Exit:
Continue complex limit definition with panels.
Calculate
General
This section specifies the batch input format, by which the calculation of painting areas may
be specified by the user.
The input syntax is supposed to be written in accordance with the general input format as
described in the User's Guide Basic Features, Getting Started, Interpretative Language
(TIL).
In the syntax and the examples below the keywords may be abbreviated according to the
general rules of TIL.
Statement Types
The input language contains the following different statement types.
Calculation Statements
(see Calculation Statement Syntax):
COMBINE
combine or subtract areas which are already calculated.
ROOM
calculate the area of a room and define the surface treatment.
SUM
calculate the sum of previously performed calculations.
SURFACE
calculate the area of a surface and define the surface treatment.
Limiting Statements
(see Limit Statement Syntax):
AFT_LIM
define the restriction in the aft direction.
FOR_LIM
define the restriction in the forward direction.
PS_LIM
define the restriction in the portside direction.
SB_LIM
define the restriction in the starboard direction.
UPP_LIM
define the restriction in the upwards direction.
LOW_LIM
define the restriction in the downwards direction.
Selection Statements
(see Selection Statement Syntax):
DECK
specify that a deck surface should be included in the calculations.
NO_AUTOMATIC
inhibit automatic panel selection in a room.

6:54
12 Series

PANEL
include or exclude panels explicitly or specify the side of the panels

in the calculations.
SHELL
specify a shell surface that should be included in the calculation.
Miscellaneous Statements
(see Miscellaneous Statement Syntax):
DELETE
delete any record from the PADB.
PART_LIST
create a detailed listing of the part areas for testing and checking
purposes.
Calculation Statement Syntax

Below, the complete syntax of each calculation statement type is described.
COMBINE Statement
The COMBINE statement is used to combine/subtract the areas of surfaces and rooms,
calculated earlier in the same scheme/session. It also specifies the surface treatment of the
calculated area. The result will be listed and stored in the PADB unless otherwise stated.
COMBINE, <name>
[/ADD= (<name1>, ..., (<name10>)]

[/SUBTRACT= (<name1>, ..., (<name10>)]
[/NOSTORE]
[<treatment>];
<name>
/ADD
is a string, max 26 characters.
/SUBTRACT
Specification of names of areas (and times) to be

subtracted. The SUBTRACT attribute can be given any
number of times.
/NOSTORE
The calculated area is not stored in the PADB and the room/
surface <name> is not given in the list.
<treatment>
Specifies the way the surface should be treated and its

degree of complexity.

Specification of names of areas (and times) to be combined.

The ADD attribute can be given any number of times.
6:55
12 Series

For each of the treatments (and methods) a default file of the program will specify the basic
time factor (see Painting Area Calculation Default File). In addition a difficulty factor may be
applied (cf. below).
<treatment>::=
[/FACTOR=<com_factor>]
[/PAINTING
[=<paint_f>[/NUMBER=<no_p>]]]
[/BLASTING =(<method>[<blast_f>])]
[/CLEANING [=<clean_f>]]
[/DERUSTING =(<method>[=<derust_f])]
[/AFTER_TREAT [=<after_f>]]
Used to define a global difficulty factor
/FACTOR
<com_factor> which is assumed to be valid for all of the

other items if not specifically given. The default value is 1.
Specifies that painting activity should be included.
/PAINTING
<paint_f> is the difficulty factor for painting if different

from the global one (cf. FACTOR).
/NUMBER
specifies the number of times the painting should be

performed. Default value for <no_p> is 1.
/BLASTING
Sand blasting activity is to be included.
<method> specifies the blasting method. The selected

method must have been specified in the default file (see
Painting Area Calculation Default File).
<blast_f> is a difficulty factor for blasting if different from
the common factor.
Cleaning activity is to be included.
/CLEANING
<clean_f> is a difficulty factor for cleaning if different from

the common factor.
Derusting activity is to be included.
/DERUSTING
<method> specifies the derusting method. The selected

<derust_f> is a difficulty factor for derusting if different
from the common factor.
/AFTER_TREAT
After treatment activity is to be included.
<after_f> is a difficulty factor for after treatment if

different from the common factor.
Example:
COMBINE,
'Deck parts with opening'
/ADD=('DECK1', 'DECK2', 'DECK3')

6:56
12 Series

Example:
/SUBTRACT='ISLAND
/PAINT;
ROOM Statement
The purpose of the ROOM statement is to name the calculated area of a room to be specified
and to define the surface treatment. The statement may also be used to retrieve the area of
an already calculated room.
If the ROOM statement does not contain the attribute /OLD it must be followed by "limit
statements" (see below), defining the room. It may also be followed by statements explicitly
selecting or excluding a certain panel to/from being included in the calculations (see below).
<name>
/COMBINE
is a string, max 26 characters.

means that the area should be combined with those of other
rooms. Consequently it should not occur as an entity of its
own in the listings (cf. the COMBINE statement below).
If not given, <name> will occur on its own in the listing.
/OLD
The result is fetched from the room <name> which is stored

in the PADB.
/NOSTORE
<treatment>
The calculated area is not stored in the PADB.

specifies the way the surface should be treated and its
<treatment>::=

[/PAINTING [=<paint_f>[/
NUMBER=<no_p>]]]
6:57
12 Series

/FACTOR
Used to define a global difficulty factor <com_factor>

which is assumed to be valid for all of the other items if not
specifically given. The default value is 1.
/PAINTING

/NUMBER specifies the number of times the painting should
be performed. Default value for <no_p> is 1.
/BLASTING

the common factor.
/CLEANING

the common factor.
/DERUSTING
Derusting activity is to be included.

/AFTER_TREAT

Leaving out the <treatment> altogether would lead to a calculation of the area only and
no times will be calculated.
Example:
ROOM, 'Side tank sect A41' /COMBINE;

SUM Statement
The SUM statement is used to sum up the result of a number of previously performed
calculations, optionally including some of those of the current scheme. However, the factors
may not be changed.
The result of the SUM statement will not be stored in the PADB unless explicitly requested by
the user.:
SUM, <name>

/ADD= (<name1>, ..., (<name10>)[/STORE];
6:58
12 Series

<name>
/ADD
is a string, max 26characters.
/STORE
The resulting area and time will be stored in the PADB.
Specification of names of areas (and times) to be summed

up. The ADD attribute can be given any number of times.
SURFACE Statement
The purpose of the SURFACE statement is to name the calculated area and to specify the
surface treatment for it. The statement may also may also invoke the result of an already
stored surface.
The SURFACE statement must be followed by statements, specifying the names of the
panels or surfaces to be calculated. Consequently, there is no automatic searching for
panels to be included. This statement may also be followed by statements specifying the
restrictions by which the given surfaces should be limited (see below).
However, the restrictions are compulsory only for the calculations of real surfaces (in the
shell or in shaped decks).
<name>
/COMBINE
/OLD
The result is fetched from the surface <name> which is

stored in the PADB.
/NOSTORE
<treatment>
The calculated area is not stored in the PADB.

means that the area should be combined with those of other

surfaces. Consequently it should not occur as an entity of its
own in the listings (cf. the COMBINE statement below). If not
given, <name> will be output in the listing.
specifies the way the surface should be treated and its

6:59
12 Series

<treatment>::=
/FACTOR
[/PAINTING [=<paint_f>[/NUMBER=<no_p>]]]
Used to define a global difficulty factor.
<com_factor> which is assumed to be valid for all of the

other items if not specifically given. The default value is 1.
/PAINTING

/NUMBER specifies the number of times the painting should
be performed. Default value for <no_p> is 1.
/BLASTING

the common factor.
/CLEANING

the common factor.
/DERUSTING
Derusting is to be included.

/AFTER_TREAT

Leaving out the <treatment> altogether would lead to a calculation of the area only and
no times will be calculated.
Example:
SURFACE, 'Upper deck betw #75 and #90'

BLAST /DERUST /PAINT;

6:60
12 Series

The upper deck is to be blasted, derusted and painted once.
Limit Statement Syntax

The limit statements are used to define the restrictions of the given surfaces or to define the
extensions of a room.
The limit is always valid in a certain direction (aft, forward, etc.). The total restriction in a
certain direction may consist of one plane or surface only.
Each limit may consist of the shell/deck, a plane panel, a general plane or a principal plane.
A limit may also consist of a named curve in the shell/deck. The plane of a general plane
curve may be used as an explicitly defined plane or as a plane defined by a panel. A general
(proper) space curve can be used only to restrict a surface in the shell.
If the limits are undefined in a certain direction this implies no restriction in that direction. (If
the total area should be calculated of a given panel, then no restrictions need be given at all.
The surface of a shell region must always be restricted).
*_LIM Statements
All coordinates are real numbers, but x-coordinates may be given as frame terms and y- and
z-coordinates as LP-terms.
<princ_pl>::=
<princ_pl>
<coord>
<gen_plane>::=
X
Y
Z
=<coord>;
defines a principal plane where a constant X, Y or Z

coordinate is given.
constant x,y or z coordinate
/PLANE =
(<x1, y1, z1>;<x2, y2, z2>;

<x3, y3, z3>)
<gen_plane> defines a general plane where (x1, y1, z1),

(x2, y2, z2), (x3, y3, z3) are three points in the plane.
<panel>::=
<name>
/PANEL =
<name> [/REFLECT];
is the name of the limiting panel. If /REFLECT is given the
panel is reflected in CL.
/SHELL

6:61
12 Series

<surface>::=
[/NO=<number>];
/DECK
/SHELL and /DECK specify the type of surface. If there is
more than one shell or deck surface, then the surface number
can be specified. If not given, the main surface / deck is
assumed.
<curve>::=
<name>
/CURVE =
<name> [/REFLECT];
is the name of the limiting curve. If /REFLECT is given the
curve is reflected in CL.
Example:
AFT_LIM
PS_LIM
FOR_LIM
SB_LIM
/X='FR107+50';
/SHELL;
/X='FR120';
/PAN='AB123-4' /REFL;
Selection Statement Syntax

The selection statements are used to specify the surfaces/panels to be calculated.
For a calculation, initialized by the SURFACE statement (cf above), it is necessary to specify
all the surfaces/panels to be calculated.
For the calculation of a room, the parts to be calculated are supposed to be selected
automatically, unless otherwise stated. However, a part of the shell to be included must
always be requested by the user, even if the shell has been specified as a limit.
Curved panels may be treated as well. Such a panel will always be calculated as a whole,
without taking into consideration the limits. If the limits should be taken into account, then
the surface should be specified via the SHELL statement (see below).
Only the parts of plates, profiles, etc. located within the given limits will be included in the
calculation.
If a plane panel is parallel to, and within a certain distance from, a given limit in a room, then
by default only the inwards side will be calculated.
DECK Statement
The DECK statement specifies that the calculation of a deck surface should be included. In
such a case, the surface must always be restricted in all directions.
DECK
[/NO=<number>] [/SIDE=<direction>] ;
/NO
<number> specifies the surface number (if not the main

deck).
/SIDE
specifies the side of the surface. If not given, both sides are
calculated.
<direction>::= AFT | FOR | PS | SB | TOP | BOT

6:62
12 Series

NO-AUTOMATIC Statement
The NO_AUTOMATIC statement is used to inhibit the automatic selection of panels in the
current room. It is relevant only in relation to a room calculation.
Curved panels are never automatically included.:
NO_AUTOMATIC;
PANEL Statement
The PANEL statement is used to explicitly include (or exclude) a given panel in (from) a
certain calculation. Further, a certain side of a panel may be specified.
/EXCLUDE
means that the given panel should be excluded from the

calculations. This attribute is relevant only in relation with
room calculations.
/PS /SB /BOTH
are mutually exclusive and define the ship side of the

symmetric panel for which the calculation should be
performed.
/SIDE
The side attribute specifies the side to be calculated if only

one side is painted. Otherwise, both sides will be calculated
unless a panel coincides with a limiting plane.

The SIDE attribute is assumed to be valid for both ship sides of the given panel if the
attribute BOTH has been given. Otherwise two statements must be given.
SHELL Statement
The SHELL statement specifies that the calculation of a shell surface should be included. In
such a case, the surface must always be restricted in all directions.
SHELL [/NO=<number>] [/SIDE=<direction>] ;
/NO
<number> specifies the surface number (if not the main

surface).
/SIDE
specifies the side of the surface. If not given, both sides are
calculated.

6:63
12 Series

Miscellaneous Statement Syntax

These statements handle the PADB and the output lists for testing purposes.
DELETE Statement
The DELETE statement may be used to delete any record from the PADB.:
DELETE, <name>;
<name>
PART_LIST Statement
The purpose of the PART_LIST statement is to produce a detailed listing of the area of
each part for testing and checking purposes. The detail level can be specified. If the
PART_LIST statement is omitted no detailed list will be produced. If the statement is given
twice (with different level) both types of list will be created.
PART_LIST , <name>
<name>
[/LEVEL = <level>];
is a string, max 80 characters, used to set the name of the list file. The
default directory is SB_SHIPPRINT and the default extension is
.LST.
/LEVEL
Used to define the level of the listing. Valid values for <level> are:
=1
List only those objects that were marked as panels (not

including bracket panels).
=2
List all objects.
=3
Only interactively
One list with level 1 and one list with level 2 will be produced. The
corresponding file names are <name>_<level>.LST.
The default value is 1.

6:64
12 Series

Example
Below follows an example of an input scheme for calculation of one room and one surface,
which then are combined into one area.
Example:
ROOM, 'SIDET_1' /COMBINE;

!
! Limits
!
AFT_LIM /X=FR170;
FOR_LIM /X=FR180;
SB_LIM /Y=12300;
PS_LIM /SHELL;
LOW_LIM /PANEL='AA123-4';
!
! Panel to be excluded
!
PANEL, 'AA234-5' /EXCLUDE;
!
! Calculate surface separately with modified limits, add one
panel
!
SURFACE, 'SIDE_SHELL' /COMBINE;
!
! Limits
!
AFT_LIM /X=FR170;
FOR_LIM /X=FR180;
LOW_LIM /PAN='AA123-4';
UPP_LIM /Z=8000;
!
SHELL;
PANEL, 'AA345-6' /SIDE=PS;
!
! Combine the results
!
COMBINE, 'Total area, side tank' /ADD=(
'SIDET_1','SIDE_SHELL');
Painting Area Calculation Default File
General
This appendix specifies the input format for the time factors upon which the calculation of
estimated time for different activities is based.
The input syntax is supposed to be written in accordance with the general input format as
described in the User's Guide Basic Features, Getting Started, Interpretative Language
(TIL) .
In the syntax and the examples below the keywords may be abbreviated according to the
general rules of TIL.

6:65
12 Series

Default File Statements

PAINTING Statement
In the PAINTING statement the time factor for painting an area is specified.
PAINTING,<real>;
<real>
is the time factor, given in minutes per square meter.
BLASTING Statement
In the BLASTING statement the different methods for blasting an area and their
corresponding time factors are specified. The statement should be given once for each of
the used methods.:
BLASTING,<name>
<name>
/FACTOR
/FACTOR = <real>;
is the name of the method with maximum 32 characters.
<real> is the corresponding time factor, given in minutes

per square meter.
CLEANING Statement
In the CLEANING statement the time factor for cleaning an area is specified.
CLEANING,<real>;
<real>
is the time factor, given in minutes per square meter
DERUSTING Statement
In the DERUSTING statement the different methods for derusting an area and their
corresponding time factors are specified. The statement should be given once for each of
the used methods.:
DERUSTING,<name>
<name>
/FACTOR
/FACTOR = <real>;
is the name of the method with maximum 32 characters.
<real> is the time factor, given in minutes per square

meter.

6:66
12 Series

AFTER TREAT Statement

In the AFTER_TREAT statement the time factor for after treatment of an area is specified.:
AFTER_TREAT,<real>;
<real>
is the corresponding time factor, given in minutes per square

meter.
PANEL_LIMIT Statement
In the PANEL_LIMIT statement the maximum distance between a panel and a limit is
specified. If a panel is situated within this distance from a limit only the inside will be treated.
PANEL_LIMIT,<limit>;
<limit>
is the maximum distance in mm.
DISPLAY_DEFNAME Statement
The DISPLAY_DEFNAME statement is used to control the appearance of the default file
name in the forms used in the interactive mode. If given, the file name will be presented.:
DISPLAY_DEFNAME;
DISPLAY_PADBNAME Statement
The DISPLAY_PADBNAME statement is used to control the appearance of the data base
name in the forms used in the interactive mode. If given, the file name will be presented.:
DISPLAY_PADBNAME;
-
Example
Example:PAINTING, 1
BLASTING,
SA2.5 /FACTOR=2;
BLASTING,
PSA2.5 /FACTOR=3;
BLASTING,
PSA2.0 /FACTOR=4;
CLEANING,
5;
DERUSTING,
ST2 /FACTOR=3;

6:67
12 Series

Example:PAINTING, 1
DERUSTING,
ST3 /FACTOR=4;
AFTER_TREAT,
3;
PANEL_LIMIT, 1
0;
!DISPLAY_DEFNAME;
!DISPLAY_PADBNAME;
6.3.9
Part Checking
General
The function Part Checking is used to display a part together with its production information.
The displayed information will be created automatically as labelled texts on the part. All
planar and developed part types are supported. The part must exist on SB_PLDB.
The labelling information will be stored in the panel. It is available in the generic files created
by the Plate Interface and will automatically be added to the plate parts when they are
nested in the Hull Nesting System.
System settings
Production Information
The production information which shall be positioned automatically are defined in Inithull >
Part viewer > PartViewer Options.
Some properties for the production information are defined in superior file assigned to the
logical variable SBH_NEST_DEF1, and the inferior default file to the logical variable
SBH_NEST_DEF2.

6:68
12 Series

These keywords are:

Product Info
Height
Variables
Colour
Others
Compensation
info
TEXT_HEIGHT_COMPEN
SATION
COMPENSATIONIFO_CO
LOUR
Suffix
COMPENSATIONINFO_
SUFFIX
Excess info
TEXT_HEIGHT_EXCESS
EXCESSINFO_COLOUR
Side info
DIRECTION_TEXT
SIDEINFO_COLOUR
Grinding
information for
holes
TEX_HEIGHT
GRINDING_COLOUR
Attachment
angle
TEXT_HEIGHT
ATTACHMENTINFO_COL
OUR
All
position
number
for
markings line
TEXT_HEIGHT
QEPOSNOCOLOUR
Bevel info
TEXT_HEIGHT
BEVELINFO_COLOUR
Marking
internal names
TEXT_HEIGHT
WL info
TEXT_HEIGHT
QEPOSNOCOLOUR
Symbol height
POSNO_HEIGHT
Buttock (long
pos) info
TEXT_HEIGHT
QEPOSNOCOLOUR
Symbol height
POSNO_HEIGHT
Frame info
TEXT_HEIGHT
QEPOSNOCOLOUR
Symbol height
POSNO_HEIGHT
Margin symbol
TEXT_HEIGHT_EXCESS
EXCESSINFO_COLOUR
LABEL_TEXT_HEIGHT
TEXT_TYPE1_COLOUR
DIRECTION NAME1DIRECTION NAME7

DIRECTION_DEF
Symbol height
POSNO_HEIGHT
AUTO_POSNO_DIST
Bending
symbol
Bending radius
Manual text
Manual symbol
TEXT_TYPE1_COLOUR
The placing of the texts inside the part is made with the nesting bump function. The
following parameters in the default files above control the distances been texts/symbols and
other object:
DIST_PART_PART
Shortest allowed distance between the given object and other

object after the move
DIST_PART_PLATE
Shortest allowed distance between the given object and the raw
plate (outer contour) after the move
Marking Line Groups

The symbols, which shall be positioned automatically on marking lines, are defined in
groups by inithull (Part viewer -> Part viewer -> Marking lines groups):

6:69
12 Series

Delete item button - deletes chosen group from list.

By NEW option user create new group.

6:70
12 Series

Syntax
The item types to be labelled will be defined in a file using the syntax defined below.
The full file name of this file must be assigned to the environment variable
SBH_PART_CHECK_LABELLING.
The syntax will be:
PART/TYPE = (<list of types>)

/<item> = (<position>)
/H_FACTOR = <height factor>
<list of types> contains a comma separated list of part types to be handled. The
following types are available:
PLANE_PLATE
DEVELOPED_PLATE
BRACKET
CLIP
DOUBLING_PLATE
CONVERTED_PROFILE
Examples of <item> are:
AS1
AS2

6:71
12 Series

AS3
AS4
DIMENSION
DIR_INFO
PANEL_NAME
PART_ID
PART_NAME
POSITION_NUMBER
THICKNESS
UDA
QUALITY
All items to be presented need to be specified. This must be done for once for each part
type (bracket, plane plate, developed plate, clip etc). In this way the user can label different
information for different part types.
All labelled texts related to some geometry, will be positioned centered around the
geometry. The text rotation angle is determined automatically. For other texts it is in the
input file possible to define a position closest to which the system will try to place the text.
The labelling text height is controlled via the following new statements:
HEIGHT/LABEL=<text height>
/SYMBOL=<symbol height>;
It is however also possibly to add the attribute /H_FACTOR to increase or decrease the text
height for some specific item.
In the attribute <position>, the position can be given either as Centre of Gravity (COG)
or in the eight standard points of the compass:
NORTH
NORTH_EAST
EAST
SOUH_EAST
SOUTH
SOUTH_WEST
WEST
NORTH_WEST
For GPS items AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 syntax may look different.
/<item> = (<position>, <n1>...<nn>)

where n1 to nn parts of GPS text to show.

6:72
12 Series

If texts are overlapping, they can be manually moved.

Example:
HEIGHT/LABEL=20
/SYMBOL=60;
PART/TYPE=(PLANE_PLATE)
/DIR_INFO=(COG)
/AS1=(COG,1,2,3)
/AS2=(COG,1,2,6)
/AS3=(COG,1,3)
/AS4=(COG,2,4,6)
/UDA=(NORTH)
/POSITION_NUMBER=(WEST)
/PART_NAME=(SOUTH)
/PART_ID=(SOUTH)
/PANEL_NAME=(SOUTH)
/THICKNESS=(EAST)
/DIMENSION=(NORTH)
/QUALITY=(SOUTH_EAST);
Part Check
The user will be prompted to select a part in the current drawing. New parts can be selected
until Operation Complete is given. The last selected part will be displayed in its local
coordinate system. If some production information exists for the part, they will also be
displayed.

6:73
12 Series

Modify
Text
1.
Add
Add a single-line text. Options is supported.
2.
Move
Move a single-line text.
3.
Delete
Delete a single-line text.
4.
Height
Change text height.
5.
Rotation
Change text rotation.
6.
Colour
Change text colour.
7.
Properties
Change text properties.
8.
Contents
Change text contents (only for manually added texts).
Symbol
1.
Add
Insert a symbol. Options is supported.
2.
Move
Move a symbol.
3.
Delete
Delete a symbol.
4.
Height
Change symbol height.
5.
Rotation
Change symbol rotation.
6.
Colour
Change symbol colour.
7.
Symbol
Change symbol (only for manually added symbols).
Label
The following function can be used for a labelling which consists of a number of texts or a
combination of text and symbols. All texts/symbols will be affected. If only 1 text/symbol
should be changed, the functions above should be used.
1.
Add
Move a labelled text/symbol.
2.
Delete
Delete a labelled text/symbol.
3.
Colour
Change labelled text/symbol colour.
Recreate
With this function the production information are displayed according to the system settings.
If any previous text has been moved, the new position and properties are kept and only the
contents are changed.

6:74
12 Series

Clear
With this function all production information will be deleted from the part. The panel is also
updated.
Save
With this function all production information added to the part will be stored in the panel as
labelled texts. The user will get a warning if any text is outside the part.
Close
With this function the part checking mode is closed and the previous opened drawing is
displayed.
Generic File Viewer

The generic files created for plates can be viewed interactively. In the GENERAL_DATA
section the keyword TYPE_OF_MANUFACT must be = 2AXIS or = 3AXIS. All geometric
data and production information texts will be displayed in a drawing. The colours and line
types are taken from the Nesting default files.
6.4
Right Click
A quick way to check panel information and to perform certain actions on the panel is by
indicating a panel component and use the "Right Click".
By right-clicking on the panel a fixed size popup menu is displayed, showing the name of the
panel and the type of component pointed at. Specific Functions on panels are now possible
to select and activate.
In this situation one may choose to activate or deactivate the panel or as an alternative pick
the component field to get a submenu with information specific to the type of component in
question.

6:75
12 Series

Via this submenu it is possible directly to change the symmetry of the component (i.e. to
shortcut the normal change routine). One may also ask to modify the component in other
ways but then control is transferred to the normal function Panel/ Modify.
Furthermore, manufactoring parts can be generated by the selection of function Generate
Parts.

6:76
12 Series

Planar Views from the Model - Hull Model Drawings
Planar Views from the Model - Hull Model

Drawings
7.1
General about View Generation

Planar Hull Modelling contains a possibility to derive plane view picture from the model in
the background via the program Hull Model Drawings. The resulting view picture is of the
same kind and containing the same kind of information as the one obtained from the
interactive Planar Hull Modelling functions VIEW/CREATE or VIEW/DETAIL (see
Information in drawings and Information structure). However the resulting picture is stored
on the picture data bank (SBD_PICT) to be included in a drawing at a later stage.
It is also possible to recreate existing drawings and thereby updating all model views in
them with this program. This corresponds to the VIEW/RECREATE functions in the
interactive Planar Hull Modelling.
The program is started in the Job Launcher. The program SJ002 is invoked.
The name of the default file is SJ002.SBD and it can contain the default values described in
Default File of Planar Hull Modelling.
7.2
Input
The input to the program is given in a text file with an arbitrary name. The file name is given
when starting the program. Default directory is SB_SHIPDATA.
The input is written in a special language, described below.
7.3
Result
The result of the program will be picture objects stored on the data bank associated with the
logical name SBD_PICT. A list file is created, containing possible syntax errors in the input.
The name of the file is SB<jobno>.LST. Also a log file is created with the name
SB<jobno>.LOG.
7.4
Language Syntax
The general principles for this type of interpreter are described in a separate document. :
[ ]
...
optional (if only optionals, one of them must be chosen)

preceding term may be repeated several times

7:1
12 Series

{
<
7.5
}
>
choice
data
Statement Types
The input language contains the following different statement types
7.6
NAME
The NAME statement establishes the name of a new picture to be created.
PLANE
The PLANE statement defines the drawing plane in the model (ship).
LOOKING
The LOOKING statement defines the direction, in which the model is

regarded when "intersected" with the drawing plane.
DEPTH
The DEPTH statement defines the drawing depth.
LIMITS
The LIMITS statement defines the restrictions in the model space to be

regarded.
SELECT
The SELECT statement defines the blocks, panels and curves to be

included in the picture.
RECREATE
The RECREATE statement defines the drawings which views should be

automatically updated.
Scheme Syntax
The different statement types may occur in the following way in an input file:
{ NAME PLANE [LOOKING] [DEPTH] [LIMIT] SELECT }...
7.7
Statement Syntax
Below, the complete syntax of each statement type is described.
7.7.1
NAME Statement
NAME,'<name of resulting view>'[/SCALE=
<scale factor>];
<name of resulting view> is the name of the resulting picture on the data bank.
<scale factor> is an optional scale factor to apply to all information when creating the
resulting picture. If not given the default value 1 is used.

7:2
12 Series

7.7.2
PLANE Statement
,<x1>,<y1>,<z1>,<x2>,<y2>,<z2>,<x3>,<y3>,<z3>
,CL [+-<value>]
,BL [+-<value>]
,FR<frame no> [+-<value>]
PLANE {,X:=<x-coordinate>
X};
,Y:=<y-coordinate>
,Z:=<z-coordinate>
/PANEL='<panel>'[/REFLECT]
->
/BRACKET=<bracket no>
->
[ {/STIFFENER=<stiffener no>} ]
/FLANGE=<flange no>
/CURVE='<curve_name>'[/REFLECT]
<x1>,<y1>,<z1>,<x2>,<y2>,<z2>,<x3>,<y3>,<z3> are three points used to

define a general plane. Here <x1>,<y1>,<z1> is the origin of the drawing coordinate
system, <x2>,<y2>,<z2> is a point on the positive u-axis and <x3>,<y3>,<z3> is a
point with an arbitrary positive v-coordinate.
CL [+-<value>] denotes a plane perpendicular to the y-axis located at the given y
coordinate. <value> is a positive real number.
BL [+-<value>] denotes a plane perpendicular to the z-axis located at the given z
coordinate. <value> is a positive real number.
FR<frame no> [+-<value>] denotes a plane perpendicular to the x-axis located at
the given frame position. If <frame no> is a negative number or contains decimals, the
actual frame term must be surrounded by apostrophes ('), e.g. 'FR105.5'+100.
X:=<x-coordinate> denotes a plane perpendicular to the x-axis located at the given

coordinate.
Y:=<y-coordinate> denotes a plane perpendicular to the y-axis located at the given

coordinate.
Z:=<z-coordinate> denotes a plane perpendicular to the z-axis located at the given

coordinate.
<panel> is the name of a panel which defines the plane of the drawing.
REFLECT is an optional keyword to be used if the plane is to be defined by the panel in its
reflected position.

7:3
12 Series

<stiffener no>, <bracket no> and <flange no> is the component number
on a component on the panel used to define the plane of the drawing.
<curve_name> is the name of a curve stored on SB_CGDB which defines the plane of
the drawing.
7.7.3
LOOKING Statement
PS
SB
AFT
LOOKING,
};
FOR
TOP
BOT
PS denotes looking in the portside direction.

SB denotes looking in the starboard direction.
AFT denotes looking in the aft direction.
FOR denotes looking in the forward direction.
TOP denotes looking in the up direction.
BOT denotes looking in the down direction.
If not given, the defaults according to the default file are used.
7.7.4
DEPTH Statement
DEPTH, <distance 1>, <distance 2> ;

<distance 1> is the distance before the plane of the drawing.
<distance 2> is the distance behind the plane of the drawing.
If not given the default value 100 is used for both.

7:4
12 Series

7.7.5
LIMITS Statement
LIMITS,<xmin>, <ymin>, <zmin>,

<xmax>, <ymax>, <zmax>
{
[XMIN= <xmin>,] [YMIN= <ymin>,]
[ZMIN= <zmin>,] [XMAX= <xmax>,]

[YMAX= <ymax>,] [ZMAX= <zmax>,]
<xmin>, <xmax> is the restricting coordinates along the xaxis.
<ymin>, <ymax> is the restricting coordinates along the yaxis.
<zmin>, <zmax> is the restricting coordinates along the zaxis.
If no restricting coordinates are given along one axis, no
restrictions are used along this axis.

7:5
12 Series

7.7.6
SELECT Statement
/AUTOSELECT [/BEXCLUDE=('<block>',...)]
->
SELECT {
[/PANEL=('',...)] [/BLOCK=('',...)
>
->
[/PEXCLUDE=('<panel>',...)]
}->
->
[/PEXCLUDE=('<panel>',...) ]]
CUT
->
[/SHELL [={ NONE
}] ]
->
EXISTING
('<curve>',...)
PANELS NONE
-> [/PROFILES={
NOPLANEVIEWS] ->
}] [/
DRAWING
->
[/NOINTERSECTIONS] ->
->
[/AS1=('<a>',...)] [/AS2=('<a>',...)] ->
->
[/AS3=('<a>',...)] [/AS4=('<a>',...)];
/AUTOSELECT specifies that blocks and panels, that lie in the plane of the drawing or
intersects it, are to be automatically selected.
/BEXCLUDE and /PEXCLUDE specifies blocks and panels respectively, that are to be
excluded in the automatic search.
/PANEL and /BLOCK specifies panels and blocks that are to be selected in the drawing.
/SHELL
CUT specifies that the shell curve shall be derived by intersecting the hull form with the
plane.
NONE specifies that the shell curve should not be drawn.
EXISTING specifies that if a corresponding frame, buttock or waterline already exists on
the data bank it should be used, otherwise the shell curve is intersected.

7:6
12 Series

A number of curve names (<curve>) - maximum 12 - can be given in the statement. The
curves are supposed to exist on the data bank.
/PROFILES
NONE specifies that cross section of shell profiles should not be drawn.
DRAWING specifies that cross sections of shell profiles should be drawn together with the
shell curve. (This is default.)
NOPLANEVIEWS specifies that no plane views of panels should be drawn.

NOINTERSECTIONS specifies that no cross section of panels should be drawn.
/AS1, /AS2, /AS3 and /AS4 defines masks used when creating the view or
concepts, assigned to these keywords in the modelling plane.
7.7.7
RECREATE Statement
RECREATE, '<d>',...;
<d> denotes a drawing name. Wildcards can be used in giving the name. '*' replaces any
number of characters, while '%' replaces one character.

7:7
12 Series


7:8
12 Series

Model Generation, General

This section gives a general overview of one of the main functions of the system, namely the
one creating the 3D model. Detailed descriptions of the possibilities and restrictions are
given in separate chapters.
8.1
The Panel
The fundamental element in 3D modelling within Planar Hull Modelling is the panel. The
panel serves several purposes. One is being the primary data storage container. It is the
panel that is activated, created, stored and skipped. The panel manifest itself as an object in
the SB_OGDB data bank. Panels in turn are collected in blocks but the handling of blocks
within Planar Hull Modelling is limited to picking a block to which the panel should belong
when creating a new panel.
Another purpose of the panel is to be the modelling context of the components created
within it. The components can be e.g. seams, plates, stiffeners and brackets. The full range
of components available in 3D panel modelling is covered by the description of the design
language below. The panel always has a plane defined locating the main plating and a
closed contour limiting it, called the boundary. Implicit references to both the plane and the
boundary are frequently done during 3D modelling. E.g. a stiffener is always attached to the
plate surface and often "connects" to the boundary of the panel.
The components generated are organised in groups. The components within one group are
of the same type and share most qualities except for e.g. the physical placement on the
panel. When changing or deleting components it is actually the group that is affected. Of
course the group can contain only one component as a special case.
Although the panel object is the main data container there is a complementary way of
describing a panel. This is done via an ordinary text file using a design language. The text
file describing one panel is called an input scheme. The design language can express all the
qualities of the panel in a very comprehensive and perspicuous way. An input scheme file
and a panel object are equal in the sense that they describe the panel completely. It is also
possible to derive the input scheme from the panel as well as establish the panel object from
the input scheme.
8.2
The Input Scheme

One input scheme should always describe one panel object.
The input scheme itself, being an ordinary text file, can be established and modified in
different ways:
Any text editor of the computer system can be used in a separate process to create or
modify the input scheme.

8:1
12 Series

Planar Hull Modelling can on demand extract the input scheme from an existing panel
for inspection.
The input scheme can be created and written to a file when storing the panel if the
default keyword SCHEME_CREATE is given in the default file.
An input scheme created outside Planar Hull Modelling can be used mainly in two functions.
One is the "Scheme - Input" function where a scheme file is selected and then executed.
Any errors will be displayed together with the scheme text in a dialogue box.
Another way is to generate the scheme in the background via the "Scheme - Gen in
background" function. In this case multiple schemes can be selected and a separate result
file is created for each scheme. These files can be accessed via the Job Launcher.
When selecting an input scheme the logical name SB_SHIPSCH is used as the default
directory to pick from.
A convenient way of creating input schemes for similar panels is to copy the text file with the
input scheme and to modify it. The name of an input scheme can be selected quite freely.
An input scheme consists of statements according to certain syntax. Some of the
statements describe general panel qualities while others define component groups. The
component statement in the scheme defines a component group in the panel object.
The design language of Planar Hull Modelling is described in detail in a separate guide:
Section III, "Design Language of Hull Modelling".
Normally the panel is generated into its surrounding structure, e.g. into the web frame,
which it is part of. This environment should be displayed on the screen.
However the panel can also be generated isolated as a SEPARATE panel. This happens
when the "Scheme - Input" function is used stating from an empty screen with no drawing
opened.
When the Input Scheme is created from the panel, the following default parameter will have
an impact on how the Input Scheme will be created:
NO_OF_ANG_DEC
<number 1 - a>
All angle keywords will get the given number of

decimals (default 1).
The environment variable SBH_UPD_NO_IN_SCH has also an impact on how the Input
Scheme will be created. If set, the part number (for example NO, CNO) will NOT be written
to the scheme.
8.3
Input
The direct input to Planar Hull Modelling is given either via interactive modelling functions or
via input schemes using the design language.
The given input normally refers to information stored in the data banks of the system. This
information can be the hull form, panels already generated, etc.
Input to the system of a more static character is the information of the different default files,
etc., which normally are established when the work begins on a new ship. These files are
read into the system at the start-up of a session.

8:2
12 Series

8.4
Result
Depending on the running mode, the result of the generation phase may be somewhat
different. The operator can, to some extent, control the type and amount of information that
is produced.
The following items can be generated:
The panels.
Derived pictures of panels, either as separate objects (separate generation) or as part

of a view or drawing.
Separate pictures of generated brackets.
Created or updated input schemes.
Listing of the generated panels.
Plots of the generated panels.
Updated views. A view can - but need not - be a part of a drawing.
In background mode, the system will automatically store the panel, pictures of the panel
itself and of its brackets, and produce plots and a listing.
In the interactive mode, all information is stored and produced under direct operator control.
The user can very well generate a panel, have it included in a drawing, etc., without actually
storing any information and without producing any documentation except a temporary
picture on the screen.
Some comments are made below on the different kinds of information, produced in the
generation phase. Further details are given in the chapters that describe the different
running modes.
8.4.1
Panels
The panels are stored according to the conventions with the information belonging to them,
like:
Holes
Seams
Plates
Stiffeners
Brackets
Cutouts
etc.
In the panel, Planar Hull Modelling also stores tables, which serve as connections between
the generated components on the panels and the input statement that they have been
generated from.
During generation of panels, the system may establish standard bracket objects in the
Structure Data Bank.
8.4.2
Pictures
Normally, the system in parallel with the generation of the panels also generates a picture of
the panel. All different types of components are drawn according to normal Drafting
standards.

8:3
12 Series

The contents of a panel picture differ between a separately generated panel and a panel
generated into a view. No separate panel picture is stored in the latter case.
Brackets on panels will be drawn in different ways in separate generation:
Brackets in the same plane as the panel are drawn together with the panel.
Brackets at an angle to the plane of the panel are indicated by their mould lines on the
panel.
Those brackets which are not drawn together with the panel (and which are not
standard brackets) will be nested together in a separate picture that is stored as well.
When generating in a drawing the brackets are drawn either as a mould line or as the full
geometry depending on the orientation relative to the view.
The names of the picture objects are derived from the name of the panel in the following
way:
For the panel picture by adding an asterisk (#P),
For the bracket picture by adding a per cent sign (#B).
The picture objects are stored in a special picture data bank, from where they can be
retrieved, e.g. for an update of the panel in UPDATE mode.
8.4.3
Input Schemes
The input schemes can be created entirely within the system. If they have been established
by an editor outside the system, they will always be updated before being stored.
The updating can consist of changes, performed by the operator during the execution (in the
interactive mode only).
8.4.4
List
In the background mode, the system always - unless otherwise explicitly requested produces a list, documenting the created panel, and also including a log of errors,
messages and the input scheme.
In the interactive mode, Planar Hull Modelling creates the same list on an operator request,
normally at the end of an input scheme. The list is stored as an ordinary print file, the name
of which is identical with the name of the input scheme with the file type LST.
Example:
The input scheme "ab1234.sch" results in a listing file "ab1234.lst".
The list includes the following different types of information:
A flyleaf headed by the identifier of the input scheme within a frame.
A "log" from the execution of the input scheme in the form of messages from the
system.
A list of the input scheme with added labels.
Listing of the contents of the panels that have been generated from the scheme (this
part can be affected by input).
Messages resulting from errors in the execution of the statements are written in text en clair.

8:4
12 Series

8.4.5
Plots
Plots of the pictures of generated panels and of the separate bracket patterns, if any, are
stored in the plotter files and can then be plotted on any device working against them. When
run in the background mode, the system will automatically create plots of all pictures (unless
otherwise stated in input). In the interactive mode, plots are always created under the
control of the operator.
The names of the plots are:
8.4.6
For panels equal to the name of the panel (e.g. AB123-4).
For the separate bracket drawing, the panel name followed by -BKT (e.g. AB123-4BKT).
Drawings
When generating interactively into a view - which may be separately stored or included in
the drawing - the view is automatically updated with the picture of the generated panel.

8:5
12 Series


8:6
12 Series

Model Generation, Batch Mode

Planar Hull Modelling is normally executed in interactive mode, in the generation phase as
well as when the drawing is developed. However, the model generation part of the system
may also be run in the background (Hull Model Generation. Certain restrictions pertain
regarding the tasks the system can perform in batch mode:
Hull Model Generation can only generate panels from input schemes that have been
prepared before start-up of the system.
Panels can only be generated as separate units, i.e. not in their structural context (for
details about this, see the description of the interactive mode).
(Jumbo panels can also be split into production panels in batch mode which is described in
a separate chapter about the handling of jumbo panels.)
When run in the background, Hull Model Generation is started from the Job Launcher.
The name of the default file is SJ011.SBD and it can contain the default values described in
Default File of Planar Hull Modelling.
9.1
Input
The scheme files to execute are collected in the Job Launcher to form the input file. If a
panel with the same name as the one used in the Panel Statement already exists, it will be
replaced by the new panel generated from the scheme.
9.2
Result
Generated panels, panel picture, bracket pattern pictures, lists and plots as described in
Model Generation, General.
9.3
Error Handling
Errors may be detected when including macros, in interpreting the input, in generating the
model or when extracting the drawing information. These error will be registered and listed
on the resulting list. The system treats each statement independently of others, but errors in
one statement may very well cause corollary errors in subsequent statement, especially if
they have occurred in PANEL or BOUNDARY statements or statements preceding SAVE
statements.
Besides actual errors, the system may also produce warnings when certain design rules
have been violated. In case of warnings, the components will always be generated, in case
of errors normally not.

9:1
12 Series


9:2
12 Series

Model Generation, Interactive Mode
10

Planar Hull Modelling is normally run interactively from a workstation. This is the only
possibility in the pure drawing development. However, it is also the normal running mode in
the model generation phase.
The interactive features can be utilized in different ways:
10.1
For normal graphic activities, e.g. to zoom up on a part of the generated object.
For identification of items on a generated panel, e.g. to modify the component.
As an aid in the interactive modelling of panels.
All the general Drafting functions for drawing development can be used on the
generated panel picture as well as the view creation functions of Planar Hull Modelling,
even if it is generated in the separate mode.
Running the System Interactively

When modelling interactively in Planar Hull Modelling the user interaction takes place in a
graphical Workspace. This Workspace consists of different views that the user has created
in a "drawing". The views can be of different type like 3D views or symbolic Planar Hull
Modelling views.
The picking of objects and components during the interaction can normally be made from
any of these views, regardless of type. Normally also the selected items are highlighted in
all views.
In functions where objects or components are created, these objects will be presented in all
relevant views. However note the possibility to control which views to update via the function
"View - Select".
Although the Workspace is a "drawing" it need not contain any drawing form, but for
convenience it is handled as a drawing regarding creation, deletion, storing and so on.
10.1.1
Two Modes
For the two modes of interactive generation (separately or in a view), the contents of the
pictures of the generated panel differ considerably.
Since one and the same panel can, at any time, be generated in any of the two modes, it is
most essential to have a basic knowledge of how the two modes interact when applied on
the same input scheme.
The choice between the two modes is done automatically by the system. If a drawing is
active, then generation in drawing is assumed, otherwise separate generation is chosen.

10:1
12 Series

10.2
Generating a Panel Separately

In this case the panel is generated starting with a blank screen. The picture of the panel
grows up as its components are generated. The only pieces of its environment that are
displayed are the cross-sections of the profiles of its boundaries. The result of the
generation is the same as when executing in batch mode (see Model Generation, Batch
Mode) with some minor deviations:
The "system directives" (see Design Language of Hull Modelling) do not work in the
interactive mode.
The output of a generation is always produced under direct operator control (updated
model and input schemes, plots, listings).
Of course, the operator can benefit from the interactivity in correcting errors, etc. as they
occur.
Some of the aspects, in which the separate generation differs from generation in a view, are
emphasized below:
10.2.1
A separate picture is generated, containing in a pattern the brackets belonging to a

panel.
The picture of the panel includes all boundaries and the cross-sections of intersecting
profiles are calculated automatically for each panel.
The order numbers (S- and F-numbers) are displayed for stiffeners and flanges.
The panel picture is always described in the uv-system of the panel, seen from the
direction of its positive w-axis.
When storing the panel in the model data bank, the picture of the panel (and the
bracket picture, if any) is stored in the picture data bank, simultaneously.
Available Menu Functions

There is no difference in the availability of the menu functions between separate generation
and generation in the drawing.
Moreover, all drawing development functions can be used also in a separate generation.
Note however that in functions handling text, e.g. dimensioning, the text height should be
set to model coordinates. Otherwise, it will be too small (should be set in the range of a
hundred millimetres).
Also the view creation functions of Planar Hull Modelling can be used in separate
generation.
10.3
Generating a Panel in a View

In Planar Hull Modelling, a panel can be generated into the context it belongs to, i.e. into a
view. The view itself can be part of a drawing or isolated. A drawing may include several
views, e.g. several webframes. The panel is always generated into the selected views. By
default all views of a drawing are selected, but this can be changed via the Planar-ViewSelect function.
10.3.1
Restrictions
There are certain restrictions on an input scheme that is generated in a view:
Each panel domain (i.e. PANEL statement) may treat one panel only.
The scheme should have only one (main) panel domain.

10:2
12 Series

10.3.2
Selection of Views
When generating a panel in a Planar Hull Modelling view, Planar Hull Modelling examines
the position and orientation of the panel relative to the plane of the view. Two possibilities
exist:
The panel is, at least roughly, in the plane of the view. Planar Hull Modelling projects, if
necessary, the picture of the panel onto the plane of the view and selects viewing
direction (affecting line types for stiffeners, etc.).
The panel is intersecting the plane of the view. Planar Hull Modelling intersects the
panel with the drawing plane and the generated components occur on the screen when
they are generated, if they pass the plane of the view.
When generating in a view, a panel should normally be generated in the plane of the view. In
certain update situations, however, it might be interesting to generate also in an intersection.
TBGD views always just project the panel as no specific view plane is defined for them.
10.3.3
Plane View Pictures

When generating in a plane view, the picture of the panel is very similar to the picture from a
separate generation. However, there are - or may be - certain differences:
The in-view picture may be distorted because of projection.
The "positive side" of the drawing may be opposite to that of the panel itself, causing
different line types for stiffeners, brackets, etc.
In the view, much of the information in a separate panel picture is already there
beforehand. Therefore, this information is left out on the panel picture, e.g. crosssections of longitudinals/ transversals and stiffeners on bounding panels.
Excess material is left out from the picture.
The S- and F-numbers on stiffeners and flanges are replaced by position numbers, if
set. They are normally stored in a layer that is blanked out.
No separate picture of the bracket pattern is produced.
From these facts only, it is obvious that the pictures of the same panel generated separately
and in a view, respectively, are not exchangeable against each other.
10.3.4
Scheme Input
When generating a panel via the Planar-Scheme-Input function, the picture of the panel is
built up from the beginning. To prevent confusion with a possibly existing panel subview, this
subview is removed.
10.3.5
Activating an Existing Panel

When activating an existing panel, a number of different situations may occur:
1. The panel was not previously included in the view.
2. The panel is already in the view, but the model of it in the data bank is younger than the
latest stored version of the drawing or the model is younger than the start-up time of
the current session.
3. The model of the panel is older than the drawing.
In cases 1 and 2, a new version of the panel picture is automatically derived from the model
to ensure a true correspondence with the model. This always requires some time.
In case 3 the existing panel picture is connected.

10:3
12 Series

10.3.6
Applying Drawing Functions

When generating in a view, there is normally a view (or a drawing) on the screen. Then all
normal drawing development functions can be used, also between the execution of two
statements in the input scheme.
10.4
Integrity of Input Scheme, Model and Panel Picture

One and the same panel can, at any moment, be generated separately or in view. (In this
context, it does not make any difference if the panel is generated separately in interactive or
in background mode.) This might cause problems.
Suppose, for instance, the following sequence of events:
The panel is generated separately and the receipt picture of the panel is stored in the
data bank.
The panel is then included in a view that is created.
The panel is further updated via generation in that view. The updated version of the
panel is stored in the data bank.
As pointed out above, the panel picture generated in the view is not exchangeable for a
panel picture separately generated. Therefore, no panel picture is stored in the latter case.
To ensure integrity between the model and the panel picture, Planar Hull Modelling
deletes an already existing panel receipt picture in the data bank (and the bracket
picture belonging to it, if any).
Here follows a short summing-up of different actions to maintain integrity between the panel
model and the picture of the panel:
When storing a panel generated in a view, the separate panel and bracket pictures are
deleted from the data bank, as just described.
When afterwards generating such a panel separately, the panel picture is missing.
Planar Hull Modelling then automatically regenerates the picture from the model.
Likewise, when modelling an existing panel in UPDATE mode in a view, and it is

possible that the picture is older than the stored panel model, Planar Hull Modelling
regenerates the panel picture.
Nevertheless, it is possible to get inconsistent versions of models and pictures in different

ways, e.g.:
To generate in a view (drawing), update it and store the view (drawing) without ever
storing the updated model. Planar Hull Modelling does not detect this and later
updatings in the view may cause problems.
A usual (and "normal") way is to update a panel separately or in one view and to forget
to have the picture updated in all occurrences in other views, e.g. a longitudinal
bulkhead that occurs in many webframes.
However, each time the panel is updated in a view, the system detects this and
regenerates the picture.
In all cases the situation can be straightened up by:
Regenerating the model (not necessary in all cases).
Regenerating the picture(s) of the panel from the model (e.g. in the functions PlanarView-Recreate or Planar-View-Modify). This operation is possible to do in batch, see
documentation on TBHMDWG.

10:4
12 Series

Interactive Modelling
11
A panel can be established or updated in many ways in Planar Hull Modelling. Below, a
description of how to build up panels entirely interactively is given. Much guidance is built
into the function itself.
11.1
How to Create Input Interactively

The menu function Planar > -Model > Create is used to start up the function. In this function
the operator is guided into the different paths that exist.
Input is by default created and added to an existing panel. This means that if the operator
wants to establish a new panel, this is done by giving OPTIONS at the prompt to indicate a
panel.
Planar > -Model > Create makes sure that the panel, boundary and components are given in
the correct order while the order between the different components statements is the
responsibility of the operator.
When the different components are built up, the information must partly be keyed in. Where
feasible, there is also the possibility to point at items to be selected, e.g. a curve or panel to
be used as a boundary, a limit along which to set a stiffener, a profile section to make cutout
for, etc.
In many situations, several items can be selected, e.g. several profile sections. An identified
item is normally echoed in refresh mode.
The use of the standard functions QUIT, OPERATION COMPLETE and CANCEL is
described below.
QUIT
The component currently being built up is deleted entirely and Planar Hull Modelling
enters command mode.
OP. COMPLETE
In certain situations, e.g. when a sequence of positions is defined, OP. COMPLETE
terminates that sequence.
CANCEL
If an input has been given just before the rejection, it will be cancelled.
Repeated cancels will cancel input by input until the entire component is cancelled.
If, in a state where several positions have been defined or several identifications have been
made, Planar Hull Modelling will back out the last identification for each cancel.
An empty return when Planar Hull Modelling prompts for key-in is interpreted as a cancel
where applicable.

11:1
12 Series

11.2
Definition of Point and Lines

The panel modelling of Planar Hull Modelling allows points and lines to be set in a great
number of ways, selecting coordinate system, end points, etc. In defining positions and lines
in Planer-Model-Create, the same possibilities exist. In addition, there is, in most
situations, a choice whether a position should be keyed in or if it should be pointed out with
the cross-hair cursor. Depending on the situation the default situation is either "key-in" or
"point". In the plate definition it is normally quite satisfactory to select a position in a plate by
the cursor. When positioning a hole, pointing by the cursor is not exact enough and,
therefore, the default is that key-in is expected.
In all situations where the graphic interactivity can be used, it is possible to switch between
the two modes:
By an empty return when key-in was expected.
By CANCEL when a position is expected.
Both when coordinates are keyed-in and when points are identified in a view, it is possible to
use/create references to topology points, see below.
If any position already has been defined, a "cancel" as above will back out the last given
value. When all given values have been backed out, the mode switch will take place.
If possible, a keyed-in point or line is displayed.
If several points shall be keyed in, there are several possibilities. Say that the point is
defined by X- and Y-coordinates and that they are (1,10) (2,10) and (3,10).
Example 1
X:
<ret>
Y:
10
<ret>
X:
<ret>
Y:
10
<ret>
X:
<ret>
Y:
10
<ret>
X:
Consequently, the coordinates can be keyed in by pairs.

The end of such a sequence is marked by keying in a semicolon.

11:2
12 Series

Example 2:
X:
1-3
<ret>
Y:
10
<ret>
X:
Example 3
X:
1,2,3
<ret>
Y:
10
<ret>
X:
The two last examples show that in one return several terms or a repetition term can be
keyed in.
Example 4:
X:
1-3
<ret>
Y:
10
<ret>
X:
<ret>
Y:
11;
<ret>
is an allowed combination and will result in the following part of a statement:

... X = 1-3, 5, Y = 10, 10, 10, 11
Note: A sequence of coordinate pairs must be terminated by a; returned for the first
coordinate of the pair or following the last occurrence of the second coordinate.
An empty return acts as a cancel, i.e. the last input coordinate pair will be backed out.
FR- and LP-terms can be keyed-in in exactly the same way as explicit coordinates.
11.2.1
References to Topology Points

Key in Point References
Everywhere where coordinates can be keyed in it is also possible to key in a one-term
reference to a topology point. This can be done in complete analogy with FR- and LP-terms.
Examples:
P5
P1-100
P10(2)18 +200
This type of reference can be used for coordinates and for reference to direction angle 1
associated with the point.
When keying direction angles TA- or TB-terms may be used (cf. above).
Examples:
TA1()5 (equal to P1()3)

11:3
12 Series

TB10(2)18
When keying in references to the same topology point for e.g. both u,v and T (or x and Y,
etc.) it is enough to do this for the first keyword (e.g. U). An empty return for the second (e.g.
V), etc. means that the same reference will be picked up automatically for the keyword.
Picking of Topology Points

If you switch to define the position by pointing in the view is possible to create references to
topology points automatically. First select point definition mode "existing" and then point at a
topology point. The topology reference will then be created if the point pointed at is a
topology point.
(There is currently no way of picking the direction angle from the point in this case.)
11.3
Automatic Setting of Cutouts

Cutouts in a panel for penetrating profiles are defined via the interactive function Planar >
Model > Create:Cutout. They can be picked one-by-one but there is also an option to let
pick the cutouts automatically, either along a selected limit or along all limits of the panel.
The rules for the cutout to be chosen in a certain situation are set up in a special file as
described in the document Setup and Customisation / Cutouts and Clips / Automatic Setting
of Cutouts.

11:4
12 Series

Jumbo Panels
12
Jumbo Panels
The framework of a design consists of decks, bulkheads, girders, etc. This framework is
dimensioned and positioned in a very early design phase and, of course, it is described on a
rather rough level. At this phase, the main structures are important mainly from a functional
point of view and construction details are taken into consideration only to a restricted extent.
For instance, the partition into production units might not yet have been made.
Nevertheless, the main structures play an important role, when the model is built up, since
they constitute the framework that is supported by e.g. the webframes.
Planar Hull Modelling offers the possibility to handle a deck, a bulkhead, etc. as one big unit,
which is called a jumbo panel and also to subdivide it into production units.
12.1
Jumbo Panel Versus Ordinary Panels

From a technical point of view, there is no difference between a jumbo panel and an
ordinary panel. They are stored and generated in exactly the same way. This also implies
that a jumbo panel has the same restrictions as other panels, e.g. it must not have any
knuckles but it must be located in one plane.
A possible definition of a jumbo panel is: "A jumbo panel is a panel in a preliminary version
that is later on to be subdivided into production panels."
A certain interval has been reserved for data types for jumbo panels. A data type for a jumbo
panel should be in the closed interval [800, 899].
After the splitting of a jumbo panel, say a deck, into production size panels, one and the
same piece of the deck may be described by the jumbo panel and by one of the ordinary
panels.
Therefore, it is recommended to gather jumbo panels into block(s) of their own, so that
they can be sorted away in various situations. A possibility is also to let the jumbo panel
belong to blocks that are not included in the normal structure of the current ship.
Normal blocks include the panels from a restricted volume. Jumbo blocks may contain
decks that extend over a large part of the ship. Such a block can be considered as a way of
keeping record of the panels in an organized way rather than as a geographical unit.
However, restrictions in space must be set to include all its members.

12:1
12 Series

Jumbo Panels

12:2
12 Series

Information on Drawings and Information Structure
13
Information on Drawings and Information

Structure
The information in a drawing model view is organised in a well defined structure. Part of this
structure is transparent to the user. However, an efficient use of the system requires a basic
knowledge of a number of concepts and also a basic understanding of the structure of a
drawing. This section is intended to give this basic knowledge.
All information in a drawing belongs structurally to one unit, e.g. when the drawing is stored
in the data bank. However, the drawing itself is divided into a number of views.
13.1
Views
The views can be:
The drawing form (only one).
Model views.
Drafting views.
A view with all its belonging information can be handled as one unit in a number of respects,
e.g. it can be deleted as one unit, be moved as one unit, etc.
13.1.1
Drawing Form
The drawing form is normally fetched from a standard library and contains tables, standard
texts, etc. Drawing forms can be created in Planar Hull Modelling.
13.1.2
Model Views
A MODEL VIEW is by definition a picture derived from the 3D model. It can contain all kinds
of model parts previously created in the various modelling systems. In Planar Hull Modelling
two kind of views exist, the Planar Hull Modelling view and the Drafting view. They differ in
the way hull parts are presented but the information is arranged in the same hierarchical
structure.
All model views contain transformation information making it possible to update them with
new or changed model objects.
13.1.3
Model Subviews
Every model object presented in a Model View is represented by one Model Subview. The
components of the model objects in turn are represented as components within the Model
Subviews making it possible to access any model object component by indicating in a Model
View.

13:1
12 Series

The Planar Hull Modelling model view originally includes the following types of information
as separate subviews.
Plane views of panels.
Intersection pictures of panels.
Intersection curves with the shell.
Shell profiles.
A closer description of the contents of the different types of subviews is given below.
13.1.4
Plane Panels, Plane Views

The plane views of plane panels contain:
Outer contour of the panel, cutouts and notches excluded.
Cutouts and notches.
Holes.
Seams in the panel with bevel symbols along the seams. Parts of seams within holes
are not drawn.
Figure 13:1. Seams in a view.
Bevel symbols along the outer contour.

13:2
12 Series

Figure 13:2. Bevel along panel limits.
Stiffeners. Each stiffener is represented by a mould line, end cut symbols and a
material symbol showing the material side in relation to the mould line. The mould line
and the end cut symbols will be drafted in accordance with the rules given in Design
Standards.
If defined, the position number of the stiffener will be set as a text in a layer, normally
not displayed. See Figure 13:3.: Symbolic view of stiffener.
Figure 13:3. Symbolic view of stiffener.
Brackets, not lying in the same plane as the panel, are represented by mould lines and
material symbols. The mould lines will be drafted in accordance with the rules given in
Design Standards.
If set, the position number will be drawn (the "short part name").(Normally not
displayed.)

13:3
12 Series

Figure 13:4. Symbolic views of brackets.
Flanges will be drafted in different ways depending on the type of flange. A flange can
either be a welded or a bent flange.
If a flange is welded, the position number of the flange is also drafted, if set. See Figure
13:5.: Symbolic view of flange.
Figure 13:5. Symbolic view of flange.
Clips. The clips are calculated according to the rules in Design Standards. See
example in Figure 13:6.: Views of cutouts with clips.
The dimension of the clips is given as a text in a layer that is normally not displayed.
Can be controlled via the default file.

13:4
12 Series

Figure 13:6. Views of cutouts with clips.
Brackets lying in the same plane as the drawing will be located and drafted in plane
views.
The position number (short part name) of the bracket or the bracket designation will be
stored as a text in a layer, normally not displayed.
Figure 13:7. Side (planar) view of bracket.
By means of default parameters to the program Planar Hull Modelling it is possible to control
whether a type of component should be drafted or not.

13:5
12 Series

13.1.5
Plane Panels, Intersections

The pictures of intersections with plane panels contain the following kinds of information:
Intersection curves of the plane surfaces with the drawing plane.
Figure 13:8. Section curve of panel (with different plate thicknesses).
Symbols indicating seam sections, if specified in default file.
Side views of profiles containing:
The edge curve.
End cut contours.
Contour, indicating the flange of the profile, if any.
Figure 13:9. Side view of stiffener.
13.1.6
Side views of brackets in the drawing plane (see plane view above).
Sections or traces of brackets through or against the drawing plane.
Crossections of profiles on the panel, intersecting the plane of the drawing (see plane
view above).
Intersections with the Hull

The picture of intersection with the hull contains the following kinds of information:
The hull curve itself. The curve can be an existing hull curve or it can be cut from the
surface. This is affected via input.
Symbols indicating seam sections, if specified in default file.
Cross-section of those shell profiles that intersect - or abut - the plane of the drawing.
The profiles having a number which is an even multiple of 5, will be supplied with a
profile identifier as a text.
Side views of those shell profiles that lie in, or close to, the plane of the drawing. These
Side views include:
Edge curve.
End cut contour.

13:6
12 Series

Contours indicating the flange, if any.
See an example below.
Figure 13:10. Side view of shell profile.
In addition to this, different kinds of information can be added to a Model View, see below.
The information in a Model View still reflects the structure of the information in the panel. A
stiffener can still be identified as a stiffener, a cutout as a cutout, etc. A typical example of a
Planar Hull Modelling Model View is a web-frame.
13.2
Added Information in a Drawing

All of the information in the drawing described so far is derived from the model. However,
different kinds of information can be added interactively during the development of a
drawing.

13:7
12 Series

13.2.1
Model Related Information

One group of added information is the kind that in some way is related to the model, such as
measurements, notes and rulers. They are normally connected to the view or subview that
is identified in the process of creating the added information. For example a note is a
component under the panel model subview.
13.2.2
Arbitrary Information
Another group of information is arbitrary information such as lines, text and symbols with no
connection to a model view. This kind of information is normally gathered in a general
Drafting view.
The organisation of added information can be affected via the Current function, but the use
of that function is not recommended. Among the general functions inherited from TBGD
there are functions to rearrange the picture object. These functions are intended to be used
only on pure 2D-Drafting views since they can totally destroy the structure of a Model View
making it useless as an interface to the model objects.
13.2.3
Envelope
In many situations, it is favourable to minimize the information to be displayed on the
screen. One way of doing this is to replace one or several views with its envelope.
For the subpicture containing the drawing form, the envelope is its main frame and the
frames around the tables of the form. For all other subpictures the envelope coincides with
the min-max-rectangle of the subpicture in its current size. The benefit of the use of
envelopes is:
It greatly reduces the amount of information on the screen and thus makes the
repainting of the picture quicker.
The system will reject all trials to add information to a subpicture that is blanked out. By
having all subpictures blanked out, except the one he intends to add information to, the
operator can protect himself against adding information to an unintended subpicture.
When the envelope of a subpicture is displayed, the rest of the information belonging to it is
blanked out.

13:8
12 Series

XML Based Format
14
XML Based Format

There is a growing need to build interfaces between shipbuilding software systems so that
product data defined in one system can be used in other systems. In order to do so data
formats have been defined which can be accepted by the industry and implemented with
reasonable efforts.
One such format is TXHSTL, further described below.
TXHSTL describes ships steel structures and has the flexibility to transfer steel structure
product data on basic, overall level or on a very detailed level.
One of the first applications of TXHSTL is to transfer steel structural data from Structural
Design to PrimeShip from ClassNK and Patran/Nastran from MSC.
TXHSTL exists in two versions, one for modelling (input) purposes, called TXHSTL-M,
where M stands for Modelling and another one for reporting (output) purposes, called
TXHSTL-R. Their main structures are similar, but there are differences in the way the
details regarding the plate and profile parts are described. The M version is focused on
topology and parameters while the R version focuses on geometry.
The XML based format is further described in Hull Model Concept. This documentation also
includes an explanation of the basic concepts of XML.

14:1
12 Series

XML Based Format

14:2
12 Series

Initialisations to be Performed before Using Planar Hull Modelling
15
Initialisations to be Performed before Using

Planar Hull Modelling
In this appendix, a short survey is given - "check list" - of different kinds of initialisations that
should be made before starting to use Planar Hull Modelling.
15.1
Environment
The whole environment of Planar Hull Modelling must be decided upon and then set up. The
general environment is described in a separate document.
Things that must be handled in this phase are:
15.2
Decisions about directories to be used for data banks, for input schemes, etc.
Decisions on names of input schemes.
Establishment of data banks and initialisations of them (see below).
To activate different kinds of standards for the current projects, e.g. cutout, folded
flanges, bevelling, etc.
Data Banks
Planar Hull Modelling requires initialization of three different data banks of which two are
Hull data banks and one is a general one:
The form data bank
The structure (model) data bank
The standards data bank
Below, the initialization for them is described and also the tools to be used.
Form Data Bank

1. Establish connection to the hull form via SBSI.
2. Define the hull reference object (SF301D). This is done via INTHULL.
3. Create the hull curves (frames, waterline, buttocks and others) by intersecting the
surface.
4. Generate the seams and butts. This is necessary if notches are made for seams or if a
shell expansion drawing is to be produced.
Structure Data Bank

1. Create the Structure Reference object.
2. Create the Hull Structure object.

15:1
12 Series

Initialisations to be Performed before Using Planar Hull Modelling
3. Create the Block objects.

4. Generate the shell profile (longitudinals and transversals). In principle, Planar Hull
Modelling works without them, but in practice they must be available because they are
so often referred to.
5. An end cut table must be created, otherwise the end cuts in side views of stiffeners will
not be correctly drawn. The end cut table is normally copied from another project.
6. Objects must be established for definition of swedging, shrinkage, etc.
7. The gentab object contains frame positions, longitudinal and transversal coordinate
limits and the midship position of longitudinals.
The above items are supported by INITHULL, except for #4 which is made in Curved Hull.
Standards Data Bank

This data bank must contain the standard forms that are used. The data bank is, normally,
common to or copied from other projects. It can be initialized in Planar Hull Modelling (i.e.
forms can be created and stored) or any other interactive application.
15.3
Other Files
Default File
A couple of the files described in Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics, Overall must be
special to a certain project.
A default file must be established for the current project. Its contents are described in detail
in Default File of Planar Hull Modelling.
The default file is created as an ordinary text file in the editor of the computer system. It can
also be copied from an earlier project.
Standard Setup
Separate files or objects may be created to control and restrict the use of the system in
different ways. They are all described in detail in a separate document. Examples of such
matters are:
material qualities
bevel information
profile types and dimensions
connection codes
default end cuts
etc.
Environment Variables
SBH_PROFSYMB assigned to any value enables to show the true material symbol for
stiffeners in views.

15:2
12 Series

Default File of Planar Hull Modelling
16

The activities of the programs of Planar Hull Modelling, TBHM, (SJ001), TBHMDWG
(SJ002) and to some respect also of TBHMGEN (SJ011) are controlled in a number of
respects by the contents of a default file. This chapter describes in detail what this default
file may contain. The name of the files are SJ001.SBD, SJ002.SBD and SJ011.SBD
respectively.
Note: that for the general functions common to all interactive TB applications a general
default file exists named SBD_DEF1, described in the Drafting Guide.
If a file named SBD_HM.DEF exists in the directory given by SBGD_DEF this file will be
used instead of the one given by SBD_DEF1.
16.1
Organisation of the Default File

The default file is an ordinary text file and can be created and maintained with a standard
editor.
The file may contain a number of different parameters, in some cases with assigned values.
If a parameter is given in the file, this means that the default action controlled by the
parameter or the default value associated with the parameter is superseded. Inversely, if the
parameter is not given in the default file, the default action or default value of the system is
valid.
The following rules must be followed when parameters are specified in the file:
16.2
Values, assigned to parameters must be proceeded by an equal sign (=).
Multiple values are separated by commas.
Parameters and their assigned values are separated from other parameters by
carriage return (CR).
The order between parameters is irrelevant.
Parameters
Since the number of parameters is very large, the different parameters have been arranged
into groups.
16.2.1
General Purpose
HULLFORMREF = <hull reference object>
Defines the name of the hull reference object for the current ship.

16:1
12 Series

(Normally this parameter should not be given. The name should be fetched from the
environment variable SB_HREF instead.)idealize
STRUCTUREREF = <structure reference object>
Defines the name of the structure reference object of the current ship.
(Normally this parameter should not be given. The name should be fetched from the
environment variable SB_SREF instead.)
ENDCUT TABLE = <end cut table name>
The name of an end cut table. However, normally this name should be fetched from the
environment variable SB_ECUT.
LP_TERM_OUT
If longitudinal positions are defined, Y- and Z-coordinates can occur as LP-terms in system
generated output.
The keyword can be assigned the following values:
-1
0
1
2
no LP-terms are used

LP-terms with a possible offset are used.
LP-terms are used only if the offset is zero.
as for 1 but also "half" LP-terms are used.
The system default is LP_TERM_OUT = -1.

BKT_OLDPROF
Relevant only when NEW_BKT is given.
Sets the system in such a mode that the lengths of profiles are calculated in approximately
the same way in the extended bracket as they used to be in the old in-built bracket handling.
BKT_NODEF
Relevant only when NEW_BKT is given.
It then has the effect that no notches are set in brackets, covered by the extended bracket
handling, unless explicitly set by the user.
KNUCKLED_STIFFENERS [ = <activity>]
Activates the handling of knuckled stiffeners.
The parameter can be set as a stand-alone keyword, which will activate the knuckle
handling of stiffeners.
<activity> can be set to KNUCKLED or TWISTED
If set to KNUCKLED, the knuckled stiffener handling will be active.
If set to TWISTED, stiffeners will be smoothly twisted instead of knuckled.
MAX_KNUCKLED_ANGLE=<angle>
This parameter controls the maximum angle between two panels that is allowed for
knuckled bevels.

16:2
12 Series

<angle> is the maximum angle between two panels. If not given, the default 30 degrees will
be used.
NEW_BKT
Activates the extended bracket handling. Should normally be set (see Generation of
Brackets).
SCH_EDIT_NEW
When a panel is active and the scheme is opened in the schema editor, the normal
behaviour when a new panel is indicated is that the system will ask if the current panel
should be applied and deactivated. By setting parameter SBH_EDIT_NEW to any value, the
system will apply the current panel, if it has been modified, and then deactivate it without
any questions and automatically activate the new indicated panel and make the new
schema available in the editor.
SBH_OPEN_DLG
This has effect when the Input Schema dialogue should be open.
The variable can have one of two values:
KEYIN (default)
This will open a pre-dialogue where the user has a chance to key in a search string, for the
file/schema name, before the files in SB_SHIPSCH are presented. The benefit here is that
not all files are presented. The only ones that are presented are those that match the search
string from the first dialogue. This is also recommended when there are a large number of
files in the catalogue due to performance issues in Windows catalogues with a large number
of files.
STD
This will open the catalogue SB_SHIPSCH directly and present all available files in the
catalogue. If there is a great number of files this will have affect on the performance.
SURFACES = <surf_no>, <surf_no>, ...
Gives the possibility to handle multiple surfaces. <surf_no> is the reference number of the
surfaces noted in the Hull References Object. Several surface numbers may be given. By
default, surface number 1 and -1 is treated, meaning the original hull form and the deck
form.
SURFACE_REFERENCE = <value>
Controls the resolution of surface references in the boundary statement.
The keyword may have the following values:
EXISTING
means that whenever a hull curve is in the same plane as the panel
referring the surface it will be used rather than intersecting the surface.
CUT
means that the surface will always be intersected regardless of the

existence of any hull curves.
Hull curves are the curves noted in the frame, waterline and buttock coordinate tables.

16:3
12 Series

SWEDGING = <swobj>
<swobj> is the name of an object on the structure data bank containing data to define
drawing of swedged bulkheads.
STI_TAG_EXCLUDE = <tag_ctrl>
Controls the setting of tags in stiffeners. Possible values of <tag_ctrl> are:
(default) All stiffeners will get tags
NONE
FICT
TEMP
FIC_TEMP
ALL
Fictitious stiffeners will not get tags

Temporary stiffeners will not get tags
Fictitious and temporary stiffeners will not get tags
No stiffeners will get tags
TRACEON
If given, test prints will be produced on the log created by the program. This parameter is
only intended to be used for system maintenance.
WHT
Do not set.
16.2.2
Panel Modelling
ATTACH_COPY = <action>
Controls the handling of attachments on panel component groups when the groups are
copied or regenerated. Attachments are not part of the core definition or the scheme
language and thus require special handling. It can e.g. be user-defined attributes. The
possible values of <action> are:
NONE
The attachments are removed when the components are copied or

regenerated.
ALL_MATCH
The attachments are copied or preserved at regeneration if all the

components identities match within the group.
MATCH
The attachments are copied and preserved at regeneration for the

components with identities that match.
MATCH_COPY
As MATCH but if no matching identity is found for a component it gets

the attachments of the last component.
ATTACH_COPY_MSG = <action>
Controls the warning message level when attachments are handled. The possible values of
<action> are:
NO
NCOMP
MATCH
YES
Never warn.
Warn only when the number of components do not match.
As NCOMP but also warn when the component identities do not match.
Always warn when attachments are copied/preserved.

16:4
12 Series

AUTO_TAG
If AUTO_TAG is defined, then the stiffener dialog will include an automatic suggestion for
tag numbers.
BOU_HL_COL = <colour>
When a panel is currently modelled, it is highlighted in the Planar Hull Modelling views by an
enlarged boundary. The colour of this can be controlled by this parameter. The possible
values are: GREEN, BLACK, CYAN, BLUE, MAGENTA, RED, YELLOW, WHITE and
NONE.
BRIDGE_WIDTH = <width>
The default width for the bridge of a bridged hole. Default value is 100.
BRIDGE_RADIUS = <radius>
The default radius for the bridge corners of a bridged hole. Default value is 15.
CHAMFER_ADJUST=<dist>
If not given (or < 0) no consideration to chamfer in bounding panels is taken even if the
bevel set-up would indicate that there should be.
<dist> = 99 means that any chamfer in the connection point between bounding panels will
be considered as specified in the bevel set-up. If a bevel definition file is available this
setting is strongly recommended.
Otherwise, <dist> >=0 means that <dist> is a real number, defining the slope of the chamfer
(i.e. using the number 3 denotes the slope 1:3) in case there should be any. If the number is
not between 0.5 and 10, the slope 1:4 will be used as default.
CHAMFER_STEP=<thick-diff>
This parameter controls the minimum plate thickness step between abutting bounding
panels that is required in order for chamfer to be applied. I.e. if the thickness difference
exceeds this value a "chamfer slope" will be created between the two panels with a slope as
defined by CHAMFER_ADJUST. If not given, the default 3 mm will be used.
If CHAMFER_ADJUST = 99 then this parameter is irrelevant
CHECK_BUILD = <act>
When sister ships are built, schemes may be copied between the different projects. To
ensure that the correct scheme is run in the correct project, a keyword BUI can be given in
the panel statement. CHECK_BUILD is an activity that can be set to either warn if the
scheme is in the correct project or to reject the scheme in case the scheme is not updated
for the current project. The strings that are compared is the string in the keyword BUI (in the
panel statement) and the project name set in the Structure Reference Object (in Inithull).
0
1
No check.
Always check. BUI must be set in panel statement and must be equal to
project in current ship.
Check only if keyword BUI is set in panel statement. If so it must be equal to

project in current ship.

16:5
12 Series

COM_KNU_SELECT = <action>
Controls the selection of knuckled panel, COM_KNU_SELECT will default be set to MAIN.
The possible values of <action> are:
MAIN
SUB
ASK
When activating a knuckled panel the main panel will be activated.

When activating a knuckled panel the indicated sub panel will be active.
When activating a knuckled panel user will be prompted by a multiple
choice dialogue, where user either can choose Main panel or Sub panel.
CORNER_NOTCH_CHECK
When defined, each new defined corner notch will be checked against already defined
corner notches to verify that there is no duplicate definition.
CRE_COMP_DEC
0-9 (default 1). Enables the user to control the number of decimals for e.g. a line when
indicating in the drawing in the function Create Component.
DEF_QUAL_OUT
IF set, the default quality code will be written into the scheme Default: Not set
EARLY_DESIGN
Used in the early design phase to suppress warning messages, e.g. when a new panel is
generated with a name coinciding with an existing panel or, when no endcut date is given for
stiffeners.
GEN_VIEW = <view>
Controlling whether a single view or all views are used when drawing a panel generation
receipt picture. Possible values of <view> are:
SINGLE
ALL
Draw only in single view selected by the user

Draw in all relevant views
HOOK_GAP = <gap>
The default gap for the hook of a hooked hole. Default value is 25.
HOOK_RADIUS = <radius>
The default radius for the hooks of a hooked hole. Default value is 15.
POSNO_PREFIX
POSNO_SUFFIX
PROF_BUNDLE
These parameters control the setting of position numbers in the model. Position number
setting is described in Automatic Position Number Setting.
EXTENSION = <view>
This parameter controls the handling of input schemes.

16:6
12 Series

Default file type for input schemes.

LSTSCH
This parameter controls the handling result lists.
When given, the receipt list from panel modelling will be stored in the same directory as the
input schemes.
NO_OF_ANG_DEC
0-9 (default 9). Enables the user to control the number of decimals for angles in the scheme.
NO_OF_COORD_DEC
0-9 (default 9). Enables the user to control the number of decimals for coordinates in the
scheme.
NOLOCK
Do not set. For educational purposes only.
PANPOS_VIEW
When panel location is to be fetched from an existing view the panel location will be set to
the same as the view definition. Normal cases is that for principle axis definition and the
Looking is set as For, SB or Top, the panel location will be defined with full definition i.e.
with ORI, UAX and VAX. If PANPOS_VIEW is set to YES, this will be overridden and the
panel location will, if possible, be set to the principle plane (X, Y or Z).
REDUCE_HOOKS
When a panel section is used as a boundary of another panel the resulting section
contour(s) are extended outside the actual panel by "hooks" in order to ensure intersections
with neighbouring boundaries also in cases with complicated geometry and especially when
two panel boundaries are parallel to each other.
These hooks are added automatically unless CHAMFER_ADJUST = 99.
When REDUCE_HOOKS is given the hooks will be added only when really needed, i.e.
when two adjacent panel boundaries are parallel (or close to parallel). In all other cases the
hooks will be replaced by extensions of the boundary contours in the direction of the end
tangent. The length of this extension is 1000 mm.
REDUCE_HOOKS is irrelevant when CHAMFER_ADJUST = 99 (cf. above) since then no
hooks have been added.
SCH_CREATE
When given, and the function "Panel Store" is used, the input scheme will be created from
the panel. This is only done if the panel has been changed without having the scheme
updated.
SCH_DELETE
When given, and the function "Panel Delete on DB" is used, the input scheme is also
deleted together with the panel.

16:7
12 Series

SEAM_NOTCH_CHECK
When defined, each new defined notch that is referring a seam will be checked that there is
no duplicate definition.
SHORT_SCH_NAME
Affects the storing of the input scheme file name in the generated hull panels. If given, only
that part of the file name explicitly given is stored, contrary to the full file specification if not
given.
SHRINK_OBJ= <object>
Defines the name of the shrinkage object in SB_OGDB.
SPIGOT
This parameter controls whether spigot plates on holes should be possible to set.
It is a stand alone keyword and if set, it is possible to define spigot plates.
STORE_FR
When a coordinate along the X axis is given by a frame, this coordinate is translated to a
pure number before storing it. This means that if the frame table is then changed, this
number will translate back to another frame number. To avoid this, STORE_FR can be used
to actually store the frame number. This will make the panel definition follow changes in the
frame table.
STORE_LP
As for STORE_FR but valid for the Y and Z axis and the corresponding longitudinal tables.
STD_CLIP_TCODE
Controls the storing of clips as plate parts.
The in-built clips will be treated as individual parts. The part will get a position number
and will be stored as a plate part.
These clips will be handled as standard parts (i.e. they will not be stored as plate
parts and will not be assigned position numbers (also when STD_CLIP_TCODE is
left out)).
USER_TAG_UNIQUE
If USER_TAG_UNIQUE is defined, it is not possible to insert stiffeners with already existing
tag for the given plate.
16.2.3
Picture Derivation
The default parameters in this section control the layout and contents of views derived from
the hull model.
In addition to the default parameters there is an environment variable with a similar function.
If SBH_PROFSYMB is assigned an arbitrary value the simple material symbol along
stiffener traces will be replaced by symbols representing the true profile section.

16:8
12 Series

ABUT_PROF_DIST=<dist>
A stiffener that is close to a drawing plane but not passing through the plane is only drawn in
symbolic views if the end of the stiffener is closer than <dist> from the drawing plane.
Default value of <dist> is 30 mm.
ALL_SH_PROF
Normally, when drawing profile cross-sections, the searching for shell profiles is restricted to
longitudinals if the drawing plane is close to a frame plane and to transversals for other
planes. When drawing side views of profiles the situation is reversed. However giving
ALL_SH_PROF inhibits this restriction making the system search for both shell profile types
in all cases.
ATTACH_ANGLE
If set to YES it enables the attachment angle symbol.
ATTACH_ANGLE_DIST
The position along the geometry. Default: 10
ATTACH_ANGLE_SYMB
The symbol number. Default: 103
ATTACH_ANGLE_SYMB_FONT
The symbol font. Default: 8
ATTACH_ANGLE_SYMB_SIZE
The symbol size. Default: 5
ATTACH_ANGLE_COLOUR
The colour. Default: Green
ATTACH_ANGLE_TEXT_HEIGHT
The text height. Default: 5
ATTACH_ANGLE_DECIMALS
Number of decimals. Default: 0
ATTACH_ANGLE_TYPE
The angle type. Default: 0
Mould
Acute
Angle at mould side.

Angle at side less than 90 degrees.
BEVEL_COLOUR_OS = <colour>
Used to set colour on bevel intervals where the opening is on the opposite side to the viewer

16:9
12 Series

Accepted values are:
GREEN
BLACK
CYAN
BLUE
MAGENTA
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
Default value
BEVEL_COLOUR_TS = <colour>
Same as BEVEL_COLOUR_OS but used where the opening is towards the viewer.
WHITE is the default value.
BEV_LINE_SYMBOL
When given, bevel symbols will be drawn in symbolic drawings in the same way as in
separate generation, even if the extended bevel handling is used.
BEV_TEXT_SYMB_SIZE
Size (in mm) independent of scaling. Default: 5 mm.
BEV_TEXT_SYMB_COLOUR
The colour. Default: Green.
BRACKET_COLOUR=<colour>
Used to set the default colour of brackets that will occur as the default colour in the bracket
statement. Note: This, will be used only when assigning colours to brackets when modelled
and will not change the colours in drawings of already generated brackets.
Accepted values are:
<not set>
GREEN
BLACK
CYAN
BLUE
MAGENTA
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
Default value
CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW YES or NO
Enable chamfer text analysis and setting.

16:10
12 Series

CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW_TS <name>
Chamfer text this side. Default: CTS
CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW_OS <name
Chamfer text other side. Default: COS
CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW_DIST <distance>
Gap between the bevel and chamfer texts independent of scale. Default 3 mm.
For more info refer to User Guide Setup and Customisation / Bevel Handling in AVEVA
Marine / End User Handling of Bevelling / Selection and Display of Bevel via Text String.
CLIP_COLOUR=<colour>
Used to set the default colour of clips in the cutout statement. For its use, cf. BRACKET
COLOUR above.
CURR_BLOCK
Activates the display of "current blocks" in symbolic views.
One or several blocks are appointed to be "current" when using the function View/Create by
choosing Auto.select and giving the current block(s) under Blocks: Include.
When creating a view all parts belonging to the current blocks are drawn the normal way. All
parts belonging to other blocks are drawn with dashed dotted line with normal thickness.
DIN
When given, line types will be according to DIN standards.
DOUBLE_COLOUR=<colour>
Used to set the default colour of double plates in the doubling statement. For its use, cf.
BRACKET_COLOUR above.
DRAW_BEVEL_COLOUR
Used to set the default bevel colour display in symbolic views. If set to Yes, the bevel
colours defined in BEVEL_COLOUR_OS and BEVEL_COLOUR_TS will be displayed
automatically in the view. If set to No, the colours will be hidden and can be visualized in the
View Property function.
DRAWINGSCALE = <inverse scale>
The sizes of texts, chamfer symbols etc. will be adapted to the scale that is normally used
when the drawing of e.g. a panel is plotted. This parameter is used to tell the system the
(inverse) scale that is normally used for the current ship. Drawing in the scale of 1:50 means
that DRA=50 should be used. Default value, if the parameter is left out, is 100.
DRAW_EXCESS = <code>
This parameter controls the way of drawing excess. The following codes are available:
0
1
Do not draw any excess.

Draw only excess size. This text will only be drawn in separate generation.

16:11
12 Series

Draw only excess symbol. If no symbol is found (or defined) then draw text as
in 1.
Draw both excess symbol and size.
In case 2 and 3 the excess will always be drawn (separate generation, generation in view,
create view).
DRAW_PAN
This parameter controls the drawing of panels in a view.
DEFINED
Drawn as defined. Seams, cutouts and notches are drawn as

components.
PLATES
Draw the plate contours including the cutouts and notches in the contour.
EXC_TYPE_1 = <name>,<type> ,<prefix>,<colour>,<line type>

These parameters are used to specify at most five different excess types, identifying e.g. the
level of assembly when the excess should be removed..
<name>
is the name of the excess type that may be used in plane panel generation
input. It may be an empty string (note that the comma must be given
nevertheless) but must otherwise be unique.
<type>
is the type number of the excess. It is also used as the number of the
symbol to be issued in drawings for the excess. The number must be
unique.
<prefix>
<colour>
<line
type>
is a text prefix. Replaces the + or - sign.

is the colour of the boundary limit line which as excess. Default is green.
is the line type of the boundary limit line which has excess. Default is solid.
(<type> of EXC_TYPE_1 is the default excess type. If not given it will have the value 0.)
To be able to draw symbols it is supposed that a symbol font No. 92 is available, containing
the symbol types referred to by the default parameters EXC_TYPE_1, etc.
FIC_ELEM_LINE_TYPE (SOLID/DASHED)
When given dashed, fictitious hole and notches will be represented with dashed lines.
FLA_UNFOLDED
Normally folded (bent) flanges are drawn with bent flange. This means that the detailed
shape of the flange cannot be seen. Using this parameter means that the flanges are drawn
unfolded in separate generation. For brackets, this normally means in the separate bracket
pattern accessed via the menu function Planar/Panel/Pan/Bkt.
FLA_MINTH = < d >
This parameter controls the smallest acceptable distance between the two lines in side
views of flanges.

16:12
12 Series

Default value is 0.5 mm.

d=0 always gives a true picture of the width.
Important: Any other value may cause the drawing to be inconsistent with the model
(depending on the scale of the drawing).
FLANGE_COLOUR=<colour>
Used to set the default colour of flanges in the flange statement. For its use, cf.
HLAY_PROF_COL=<colour>
Used to define the colour of hidden system defined layer (131 and 133) for stiffeners,
flanges and pillars.
Possible values are:
GREEN
BLACK
CYAN
BLUE
MAGENTA
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
Default value
HLAY_PLATE_COL=<colour>
Used to define the colour of hidden system defined layer (136) for plates.
Possible values are:
GREEN
BLACK
CYAN
BLUE
MAGENTA
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
Default value
HLAY_PROFDIM_DRAW=<YES or NO>
When creating symbolic views from plane panels the views contain certain information that
by default are assigned to a hidden layer, i.e. this information is normally not displayed.
For stiffeners the position number is drawn in a hidden layer.

16:13
12 Series

The profile dimension string will be

HLAY_PROFDIM_DRAW is set to <YES>
added
to
the
system
hidden
layer
if
This feature is restricted to views in drawings (i.e. not available in the views resulting from
generation in "separate mode".
Set to YES or NO (default)
HLAY_FLANGEDIM_DRAW=<YES or NO>
This has the same meaning as HLAY_PROFDIM_DRAW but is valid for welded flanges.
HOLE_ANNOTATE_SIGN
The sign in the dimension string between the dimensions (e.g. the X in HO200X500) can be
any ASCII value. Default is X.
HOLE_ANNOTATE_USE_TYPE
If set the text in the hole type will be detected (e.g. HO200X500 will be 200X500). Default
not set.
HOLE_AN_MIN_TEXT_HEIGHT
The minimum text height for the hole annotation. Default is 2.0.
KNUCKLED_LINE_TYPE=<line type value>
Used to define the line type of the displayed knuckled lines in knuckled panels. Possible
values are:
SOLID
DASHED
DASHED_DOT
DASHED_DOUBLE_DOT
SHORT_DASHED
WIDE_SOLID
WIDE_DASHED
WIDE_DASHED_DOT
WIDE_DASHED_DOUBLE_DOT
WIDE_SHORT_DASHED
Default value
MARK_LINE_TYPE
The Line type. Default: solid
MARK_LINE_COLOUR
MAT_SYMB
If set it enables the material symbol setting.

16:14
12 Series

MAT_SYMB_SIZE
The size of symbol independent of scaling.
Default: 5 mm.
MAT_SYMB_COLOUR
The colour. Default: Green.
MAT_SYMB_FONT
The symbol font. Default: 8
MAT_SYMB_SYMBNO
MAT_SYMB_SYMBNO_OFF
MAT_SYMB_DIST
The distance from the geometry. Default: 3
MAT_SYMB_POS
The distance from the start of the geometry. Default: 50 mm
MAT_SYMB_MIN_LENGTH
The minimum length of the geometry to draw the material symbol along. Default: 500 mm
MIN_STI_MTRL_SYM=<length>
<length> is the minimum length of a stiffener for which a material symbol should be
displayed. The default length is 500 mm.
NOBKT1
When given, no mould lines for brackets on panels will be drawn.
NOBKT2
When given, no brackets in the plane of the drawing will be drawn.
NOBKT3
When given, no separate bracket picture will be created, when panels are generated
separately.
NOCHAMFSYMB
When given, no chamfer symbols will be drawn along seams and along the outer contours
of panels.
NOCLIPS
When given, no clips will be drawn.

16:15
12 Series

NOCLIPSTEXT
When given, no identification string for clips will be drawn.
NOCUTOUTS
When given, no cutouts will be drawn.
NOENDCUTSYMB
When given, no end cut symbols will be drawn at the ends of stiffeners (irrelevant if
NOSTIFF is given).
NOHOLES
When given, no holes will be drawn.
NOLONGNO
When given, no identification strings for shell profiles (longitudinals and transversals) are
drawn (irrelevant if NOPROFSECT is given).
NOMATSYMB
When given, no symbols denoting the material side of stiffeners, flanges and brackets will
be drawn (irrelevant if NOSTIFF and/or NOBKT1 are given).
NOPLATEID
When given, no plate identity (position number and thickness) will be drawn.
NOPROFHOLES
When given, holes, notches and cutouts defined for stiffeners and flanges will not be drawn.
NOPROFNO
When given, no identification strings for profiles on adjacent panels are drawn if panels are
generated separately (irrelevant if NOPROFSECT is given).
NOPROFSECT
When given, no cross-sections are drawn of profiles crossing or abutting the current
drawing plane.
NOSEAMS
When given, no seams will be drawn.
NOSTIFF
When given, no stiffeners and flanges will be drawn.
NOSTIFFNO
When given, no position number for stiffeners and flanges will be drawn (irrelevant if
NOSTIFF is given).

16:16
12 Series

OPENING_DIST_HOLE
The minimum opening distance that should be handled as an opening in the drawing for
section views when the opening reason is a hole. Openings smaller than this distance will
be ignored. Default is 500.0 mm.
OPENING_DIST_NOTCH
The minimum opening distance that should be handled as an opening in the drawing for
section views when the opening reason is a notch. Openings smaller than this distance will
be ignored. Default is 500.0 mm.
PAN_MAT_SYMB
A material side symbol is drawn along the line for abutting panels in symbolic views, just as
for flanges, stiffeners and brackets (unless the keyword NOMATSYMB is set).
PART_NAME_DISPLAY
If set, it enables the short part name setting.
PART_NAME_DISPLAY_HEIGHT
The text height. Default: 5 mm
PART_NAME_DISPLAY_COLOUR
PART_NAME_DISPLAY_POS
The position along the geometry for the text. Default: 20 mm from the start.
PILLAR_COLOUR=<colour>
Used to set the default colour of pillars in the pillar statement. For its use, cf.
PILCROSS = <drawing code>
Controlling the drawing of pillar cross-sections in the plane of a panel. The drawing code is
a three digit number where the first digit refers to pillars attached to the front of the panel,
the second digit to pillars attached to the back of the panel and the third digit to pillars going
through the panel. The codes are:
1
2
3
4
Cross-section
Cross
Both cross and Cross-section
Cross-section dashed
(Default is 121)
PLA_SYMBOL
This will make the program add a plate symbol for every plate regardless of whether the
panel is drawn in a planar view or in a section view. This also means that when drawing the
panels 'as defined' the symbols are added. When drawn 'as plates' panel sections will also
have plate symbols (which plane view plates already have in this mode).

16:17
12 Series

PLOT_BOUNDARY
All boundaries displayed in Planar Hull Modelling will be plotted.
PRO_MINT
Cf. FLA_MINTH. This parameter, however, is used to control the drawing of the line,
indicating a flange in side views of profiles.
Default value is 0.5.
REF_LINE_LT=<line type value>
Used to define the line type of the displayed reference line (the result of an intersection
between a Reference Plane and the steel structure). Possible values are:
SOLID
DASHED
DASHED_DOT
DASHED_DOUBLE_DOT
SHORT_DASHED
WIDE_SOLID
WIDE_DASHED
WIDE_DASHED_DOT
WIDE_DASHED_DOUBLE_DOT
WIDE_SHORT_DASHED
Default value
REF_LINE_COL=<colour>
Used to define the colour of displayed line and text. Possible values are:
GREEN
BLACK
CYAN
BLUE
MAGENTA
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
Default value
REF_PLANE_DRAW_SYMB=<YES or NO>
Used to define if reference lines shall be displayed in Hull Views
REF_PLANE_DRAW_3D=<Yes or NO>
Used to define if reference lines shall be displayed in 3D views.

16:18
12 Series

SEAM_FONT = 

This parameter selects the font from which the symbol indicating seams section should be
selected (default is 8 - relevant only when SEAM_SYMBOL is set not equal 0).
SEAM_SECTION_FONT= 
As SEAM_FONT but a special font can be specified for seams marked as section seams. If
not set, SEAM_FONT is used.
SEAM_SECTION_SYMB_NO= <symbol number>
As SEAM_SYMB_NO but
SEAM_SYMB_NO is used.
for
seams
marked
as
section
seams.
If
not
set,
This symbol will be drawn as a bold symbol to distinguish it from an ordinary seam.
SEAM_SYMBOL = <action>
This parameter determines if symbols for seam section should be drawn and if so, which.
<action>
<action>
<action>
<action>
= 0 turns off seam symbols (default).

= 1 enables seam symbols on hull curve and panels.
= 2 enables seam symbols on hull curve (only).
= 3 enables seam symbols on panels (only).
SEAM_SYMB_NO = <symbol number>

This parameter selects the symbol used to indicate seam sections. The font may be
selected with SEAM_FONT (default symbol is 100 - relevant only when SEAM_SYMBOL is
set not equal 0).
SEAM_BLOCK_MARKS_FONT= 
Seam font used for presenting internal or block seams on planar panels. A symbol is placed
on internal seams with no bevel defined. Another is placed on block seams.If not set, no
symbol is placed.
SEAM_BLOCK_SYMBOL= <symbol number>
Seam symbol used for block seams If not set, default value is used.
SEAM_NOBEVEL_SYMBOL= <symbol number>
Seam symbol used for internal seams. If not set, default value is used.
SKIPFICT
When given, the mould lines of fictitious stiffeners will not be drawn.
SNOFICT
When given, identification numbers for fictitious stiffeners will be drawn.
SPC_SYM BNO = <symb_no>
The symbol number in symbol font 8 that indicates that a spigot plate is associated with
hole. Default is symbol no 96.

16:19
12 Series

Figure 16:1. Symbol no 96 in font no 8.
SPC_DISPLAY = <value>
The spigot symbol is placed in its own layer (-1130) and the display of that layer is controlled
by this default keyword. Default is NO meaning that the symbols should be hidden. By
changing to YES, the symbols will be displayed after a repaint and stay visible until
SPC_DISPLAY is changed to NO.
STIFF_COLOUR=<colour>
Used to set the default colour of stiffeners in the stiffener statement. For its use, cf.
TRANSNO10
When given, the transversal numbers will be divided by 10 before they are drawn in
separate generation.
VIEWX = <code>
Code defining from which side a drawing should be seen when its plane is in or close to a
frame plane:
1
-1
seen from the forward side of the plane

seen from the aft side of the plane
(Default is 1)
VIEWY = <code>
Code defining from which side drawing should be seen when its plane is in or close to a
longitudinal vertical plane:
1
-1
seen from the port side of the plane

seen from the starboard side of the plane
(Default is -1)
VIEWZ = <code>
Code defining from which side a drawing should be seen when its plane is in or close to a
horizontal plane:
1
-1
seen from the upper side of the plane

seen from the lower side of the plane
(Default is 1)

16:20
12 Series

VIEW_DET_SEL = <sel>
Controls the selections used when creating a detail view. Possible values of <sel> are:
AUTO
ORIG
Let the system set the selections automatically

Inherit the selections from the original view
VIEW_TEXT_PROPERTY
This key word has one of the following values:
16.2.4
FULL
Text properties (such as font, slant etc) according to drafting default

setting. This is default
SIMPLE
Text font always system font 0. No slant, no interline space set, no

aspect.
Drawing Development
BEV_REF_SYMB
These parameters starting with BEV_ and NO_BEV_ control the layout of bevel notes.
Defines the symbol to be set the start of the reference line of a bevel not.
The values accepted by this keyword are:
ARROW
NONE
A narrow arrow
No reference symbol
(Default is ARROW)
BEV_SYMB_FONT
Defines the number of the symbol font containing symbols used in the bevel note.
(Default is 90)
BEV_SYMB_HEIGHT
Defining the height of the symbol space controlling the height of all symbols used in the
bevel note.
(Default is 10 mm)
CLIP_SYMB_FONT
Defines the number of the symbol font containing the symbol for clips in symbolic views.
(Default is 8)
CLIP_SYMB
Defines the symbol number for the clips symbol drawn in symbolic views.
(Default is 41)

16:21
12 Series

HOLE_AN_SIGN=<value>
ASCII value of delimiting character between parameters in a note created by the hole
annotate function. Default value is 88 (X).
HOLE_AN_USE_TYPE=<value>
If set (which is default), the hole type is displayed in hole notes created by the hole annotate
function.
HOLE_AN_MIN_TEXT_HEIGHT=<value>
Minimum text height of note created by the hole annotate function when the note is placed
inside the hole. Default value is 2.0.
NO_BEV_TEXT
All texts should be suppressed for the bevel note.
POS_LIN_SYMB=<value>
These default parameters starting with POS_ are used to control posno notes.
Defines the symbol to be set at the start of the reference line, when the identified part is
represented in the picture by a line, for example a stiffener or a bracket drawn as a symbolic
line.
POS_SUR_SYMB=<value>
Ditto when a surface is identified, for example a plate or a bracket drawn in planar view.
The values accepted by these keywords are:
ARROW
BAR
DOT
NONE
A narrow arrow.
A small line perpendicular to the reference line.
A small circle.
No reference symbol.
POS_PRO_SYMB=<value>
These keywords define the symbol surrounding the position number.
Defines the symbol for profiles.
POS_PLA_SYMB=<value>
Ditto for plates.
POS_BRA_SYMB=<value>
Ditto for brackets.
POS_CLI_SYMB=<value>
Ditto for clips.

16:22
12 Series

CIRCLE
SQUARE
TRIANGLE
NONE
No symbol.
POS_PRO_TEXT=<value>
These keywords define the additional information to be added after the position number.
Defines the information for profiles.
POS_PLA_TEXT=<value>
Ditto for plates.
POS_BRA_TEXT=<value>
Ditto for brackets.
POS_CLI_TEXT=<value>
Ditto for clips.
DIMENSION
SYMBOL
SYMB_O_DIM
NONE
Part dimensions.
Material symbol (Effective only for profiles).
Material symbol and dimensions. (Effective only for profiles).
No additional information.
POS_PRO_QUAL=<value>
These keywords define the quality code to be added at the end of the note.
Add quality code for profiles.
POS_PLA_QUAL=<value>
Ditto for plates.
POS_BRA_QUAL=<value>
Ditto for brackets.
POS_CLI_QUAL=<value>
Ditto for clips.
YES
The quality code will be added at the end of the note, preceded by
a space, " " if the dimension string is presented, without the space
otherwise.
NONE
Quality code will not be presented.

16:23
12 Series

The system default setting for position number notes corresponds to the following set of
keywords and values in a default file:
POS_LIN_SYMB=ARROW
POS_SUR_SYMB=DOT
POS_PRO_SYMB=TRIANGLE
POS_PLA_SYMB=CIRCLE
POS_BRA_SYMB=CIRCLE
POS_CLI_SYMB=CIRCLE
POS_PRO_TEXT=SYMB_O_DIM
POS_PLA_TEXT=DIMENSION
POS_BRA_TEXT=DIMENSION
POS_CLI_TEXT=DIMENSION
POS_PRO_QUAL=NONE
POS_PLA_QUAL=NONE
POS_BRA_QUAL=NONE
POS_CLI_QUAL=NONE
AS_REFSYMB_LINE=<value>
These keywords define the reference symbol for the assembly name notes.
Defines the symbol to be set at the start of the reference line, when the identified part is
represented in the picture by a line, for example a stiffener or a bracket drawn as a symbolic
line.
AS_REF SYMB_SURF=<value>
Ditto when a surface is identified, for example a plate or a bracket drawing in plane view.
ARROW
BAR
DOT
NONE
A narrow arrow.
A small line perpendicular to the reference line.
A small circle.
No reference symbol.
AS1_SYMB=<value>
These keywords are used to control the identification notes.
AS2_SYMB=<value>
AS3_SYMB=<value>
AS4_SYMB=<value>
Note symbol used for general purpose strings (GPS).
Note: Strings used in a customer specific way, traditionally used to define assembly names
and are irrelevant as assemblies when the assembly planning application is used for
assembly definition.
AS_SYMB=<value>
Ditto for assemblies.

16:24
12 Series

The valid values are the same as those for position number notes plus the values below:
RECTANGLE
OCTAGON
RIGHT_ARROW_NOTEBOX
LEFT_ARROW_NOTEBOX
The default value for the assembly notes is NONE.
UPDATE_NOTE
When given, the mull modelling notes for position numbers, bevel and assembly will be
updated with correct model information when views are recreated. The settings of the note
will be kept. If the model object that the note refers to has been deleted, only the reference
line will be kept and the colour changed to blue.
UPD_NOTE_DEFAULT = DRAWING or DEFAULT
When notes are recreated as described for UPDATE_NOTE the parameter
UPD_NOTE_DEFAULT controls from were the definition of the note is taken. Normally it is
set to DRAWING and the setting will be unique for each note, but can be switched to
DEFAULT. The values will then be taken from the current default setting in the system.
PIPECROSS = <value>
Defines that a cross should be drawn in the centre of a standard hole.
The valid values are:
PER[MANENT]
TEM[PORARY]
NO
default
WELDINFO= <mode>
These parameters (WELDINFO= <mode> and WELDTEXT= <text>) make it possible to
display the size of fillet welds. This can be done for outer contours of panels and for stiffener
traces.
The valid values of <mode> are:
NONE
TEMPORARY
PERMANENT
No weld information (default).

Display during generation.
Add to the drawing.
WELDTEXT= <text>
<text> is the leading text presented in front of the weld leg length.

16:25
12 Series


16:26
12 Series
Design Language of Hull Modelling

12 Series

ii
12 Series

General about the Design Language

This document specifies the design language used in writing input to the Hull Modelling
system.
This specification consists of basic definitions, syntax specifications with comments and
examples in connection with the syntax.
1.1
Introduction to Schemes
1.1.1
Input Schemes
Input is organized in units, called input schemes. Each input scheme contains input for
generation of one panel. An input scheme is stored in a separate text file and this file has
the same name as the panel with the file extension sch.
When processed in the system, each input scheme is handled quite independently of other
schemes, processed in the same run.
Imperial units are implemented. The use of imperial units are documented in a separate
document.
1.1.2
Statements
An input scheme is divided into statements. Each statement type is identified by a
statement keyword and is terminated by a statement delimiter.
An input scheme always starts with an identifier statement which is the first non-empty line
of the input scheme (no statement keyword).
1.2
Basic Definitions
1.2.1
Syntactical Notations
In the formal specification of the syntax, the following notations will be used
<
[
>
]
Denotes data.
Data within brackets are optional.

1:1
12 Series

1.2.2
{} or |
One of the listed items should be used. { } are often replaced by "built
up" brackets.
(N ... M)
Repetition. The proceeding item (or group of items) must be repeated at

least N times and at most M times (M > N). If N is missing, 0 is supposed
as the lower limit. If M is missing, no upper limit is given.
Character Set
All language constructions may be represented by a basic character set, which is
subdivided as follows:
<letter>:
:=
A|B|C|D|E|F|G|H|I|J|K|L|M|N|O|P|Q|R|S|T|
U|V|W|X|Y|Z|V|W|X|Y|Z
Note that only upper-case letters can be used.
<digit>::= 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
<special_character>::= #|$|%|&|*|+|-|/|:|<|=|>|_|'space'
1.2.3
Lexical Units and Spacing Conventions

A scheme is a sequence of lexical units. The partition of the sequence into lines and the
spacing between lexical units do not affect the meaning of the scheme. The lexical units are
delimiters, numerical constants, strings and name strings. Each lexical unit must be
contained in one line. Spaces are neglected except in name strings.
Delimiters
A delimiter is one of the following characters:
<delimiter>::= = | , | / | ; |:
= (equal sign) and , (comma) are used to separate terms from each other
and are fully interchangeable. In the following sections, they will be used alternatively.
/ (slash) is used to mark the end of a sequence of connected terms.

; (semicolon) marks the end of a statement.
: (colon) is used as delimiter between name strings (cf. below) in repetition terms.
However, certain functions within the system suppose that a first value following a
keyword is preceded by an equal sign and that the following values are preceded by
commas (or colons, cf. below).
Numerical Constants
<unsigned_integer>::= <digit> (1...)
<integer>::= [+|-]<unsigned_integer>
<real>::= <integer>[.<unsigned_integer>]
<number>::= <integer>|<real>
Strings
A string is a sequence of letters/digits and asterisks, starting with a letter. Spaces within
strings are neglected.
<string>::=
<letter>(<letter>|<digit>|*) (0...23)

1:2
12 Series

A name string is a lexical unit, surrounded by apostrophes, that normally contains a name,
in most cases of an object.
<name_string>::=
'<letter>|<digit>|<special_character> (0...24)'
Term
A term is the smallest lexical unit occurring between two delimiters.
<term>::=
<number>|<string>|<name_string>
An empty term may occur but is ignored.

1:3
12 Series


1:4
12 Series

General Features of Input Schemes
2.1
Scheme Layout
An input scheme has been described in general terms in the introduction of the previous
chapter. Formally, this can be done in the following way:
A panel domain is a unit of the input scheme that generates one or several panels in exactly
the same way.
Component statements are all those statement types that generate a certain part of the
panel.
<comp_stmt>::=<BOUNDARY_stmt>
<SEAM_stmt>
<PLATE_stmt>
<HOLE_stmt>
<NOTCH_stmt>
<CUTOUT_stmt>
<STIFFENER_stmt>
<FLANGE_stmt>
<PILLAR_stmt>
<BRACKET_stmt>
<DOUBLINGPLATE_stmt>
<BEAD_stmt>
<EXC_stmt>
<CMP_stmt>
<WELD_stmt>
<MARKING_stmt>
<SHRINKAGE_stmt>
<POINT_stmt>
<CURVE_stmt>
<PLN_stmt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<statement>::=<identifier> |
<PANEL_stmt> |

2:1
12 Series

<ONLY_stmt> |
<comp_stmt> |
<COMMENT_statement>
All the different statement types will be described in detail in separate chapters of this
document.
2.2
General Layout of a Statement

Each statement (except the identifier statement) starts with a statement keyword that
identifies the statement type and is terminated by the statement delimiter; (semicolon).
All statements are built up in the following way:
<statement>::= <stmt_keyword>
[,<stmt_value>]
<clause>
((,|/) {<reference> } )
<value>
Figure 2:1.
(...)
Statement with different clauses and types of terms.
Unless otherwise stated, the order between clauses and references is irrelevant.
Keywords are predefined strings, recognized as such by Planar Hull Modelling. If longer
that 3 characters, they can always be abbreviated to 3 characters.
<keyword>::= <string>
<stmt_keyword>::= <keyword>
Clauses consist of keywords that may be followed by values assigned to the keyword. A
clause may also be a stand-alone keyword that carries information in itself.
<clause>::=
<keyword>[=<value>[( , | : )<value> (...)]

2:2
12 Series

Example:
U1=1500,2000
ALONG
SIDE=AFT
AS1='A':'B'
Values are attributes normally assigned to a keyword in a clause. A value may also get its
meaning by its position in certain statement types.
<value>::= <number> |
<string> |
<name_string>
<stmt_value>::= <value>
2.2.1
Repetition Terms
A repetition term is used to define several numerical values in a concise way.
<rep_term>::= <start>[-<step>]-<end>
<start>([<step>])<end>
<start>::=<step>::=<end>::=<number>
If the step is left out, then Planar Hull Modelling will set step = sign (end-start). If start = end,
then step = 1.
Repetition terms may be used in all clauses where numbers otherwise are allowed, (and
mixed with numbers).
Example:
10-15 = 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

6-2-14 = 6(2)14 = 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
1.5(0.3)2.1 = 1.5, 1.8, 2.1
Remark:
It is not necessary that
end = start + N * step (N is an integer)
E.g. 5(5)16 = 5, 10, 15
2.2.2
References
A reference consists of one or several stand-alone terms that are used to refer to certain
objects (panels, profiles etc.) by a name or a number.

2:3
12 Series

If a reference consists of more than one term, the terms may normally occur in an arbitrary
order and need not be given in a continuous sequence.
References may be combined with the stand-alone keyboard REF[LECT] which means that
the item referred to should be reflected in the vertical plane through the centre line of the
ship (y = 0). This will be applied on all reference terms of the statement (or all references on
the same side of the slash in statements with slashes).
Names are normally used to refer to different kinds of objects by names but they may also
be used to define a certain string to be stored in a panel.
<name>::=
<name_string> |
<B-term> |
<D-term>
<B-term>::= B, (i=1, 2, ..., 12)
To use a B-term means the same as to write the name given as the corresponding boundary
in the BOUNDARY statement last executed. NB. The BOUNDARY statement must have
been executed in the current run of the input scheme. Otherwise, the result will be an empty
string.
<D-term>::=
D, (i=0, ..., 9)
To use a D-term means the same as to write an object name earlier defined in a Dstatement (see Initialization Statements). An undefined D-term contains an empty string.

2:4
12 Series

Examples of Names:
Example:
1.
Name_str:
'AAR1-2', 'XYZ-111-45*1'
2.
B-terms:
PAN, ... ;
BOU, .../.../'ABC'/... ;
.
.
.
CUT, TYPE=, ... , B3, ... ;
Here, B3 means the same as 'ABC'.
3.
D-terms:
D5 = 'AA123-4' ;
.
.
.
PAN, D5, ... ;
Here, the use of D5 means the same as writing 'AA123-4'.
Curve references refer to principal hull curves (frames, buttocks, waterlines) by their
number (Planar Hull Modelling will, from these numbers, derive the object names of the
curves).
Example:
FR75
FR101(3)107
WL2
BT0

2:5
12 Series

Bracket references are used e.g. when a stiffener is connected to a bracket on the same
panel.
<bracket_ref>::= BR<integer>|<rep_term>
Example:
BR5
Hole references are used e.g. when a stiffener is "connected" to a hole in the same panel.
<hole_ref>::= HOL<integer>|<rep_term>
Example:
HOL3
Seam references are used e.g. when a stiffener is "connected" to a seam in the same
panel.
<seam_ref>::= SEA<integer>|<rep_term>
Example:
SEA2
Profile References refer to profiles by their numbers (or - for stiffeners - as an alternative,
by their positions). Profiles that can be referred to in this way are stiffeners flanges and
pillars - either on the current panel or on another panel - and longitudinals and transversals
in the shell.
<prof_ref>::= <int_prof_ref>|<ext_prof_ref>
An internal profile reference means reference to stiffeners and flanges on the current
panel.
<int_prof_ref>::= <F-ref>|<S-ref>|<PI-ref>
A stiffener reference can be made either by the stiffener number or by the stiffener tag
number. For details about the latter, see a special section below.
<S-ref>::= <Sno-ref>|<SL-ref>|<SF-ref>|<ST-ref>|<PI-ref>
An external profile reference means reference to profiles that are not stored on the current
panel.
<ext_prof_ref>::= (<shell_prof_ref>)|(<name>,<int_prof_ref>)
<shell_prof_ref>::= [<surface>](<L_ref>|<TR-ref>|<T-ref>)
In case of reference to a shell profile, the actual profile reference may be combined with
name of the surface in which it is located. If left out the main hull surface is expected.
All the profile reference terms on the lowest level are built up in the following way:
<prefix><integer>|<rep_term>
The prefix has the following sense
F
PI
S
SF
SL
ST
L
T
TR
flange
pillar
stiffener
longitudinal
transversal

2:6
12 Series

Remarks:
1. It is not allowed to mix reference terms of different types in one subpart of a statement,
i.e. on the same side of a slash in statement types where slashes can be used as
delimiters.
2. If, in the syntax description, repetition is allowed for profile references, e.g.
<ext_prof_ref>
(1 ... 25)
this should be interpreted in the following way:

1. All references must be done to profiles in the same panel or surface.
2. References to shell profiles requires the surface name to be given if the profile is
located in another surface than the main surface.
3. The total number of profiles referred to must be in the interval (1, 25). How this is
done is irrelevant.
Example:
S1-10 = S1, S2, ..., S10 = S1-3, S4-7, S8-10

4. A reference may consist of several terms. The order between the terms is usually
irrelevant and they need not form one unit.
3. If the step in a repetition term part of an L-term is not given explicitly in input (cf above),
the absolute value will be set to 10.
4. In SL-terms, the longitudinal number should not be multiplied by 10.
5. TR and T are interchangeable (except for transversals 1 and 2, where TR must be
used).
6. Negative transversal numbers cannot be used.
7. References to pillars are currently restricted to the POINT statement (cf. below).

2:7
12 Series

Examples:
1. Internal profile references:
Example:
S1
S2-4
(=S2, S3, S4)
F1
SL1(2)5 (SL1, SL3, SL5)
SF175
ST1
2. External profile references:
In the examples below OUTER is supposed to be the main surface.
Example:
'INNER', L10-30 (=L10()30 = L10, L20, L30)

['OUTER',] TR1-3
(=TR1()3 = TR1, TR2, TR3)
'DECK', SL1-5
'BULKH', SL35
'PANA', S5
'PANB', PI7
2.3
Coordinates, Points and Lines

The position of panels, boundaries and different components may be given explicitly in input
as coordinates and inclinations of lines. Planar Hull Modelling offers the user the possibility
to work either in the local uvw-system of the panel or in the main xyz-system of the panel.
The figures on the next two pages illustrate the way coordinates and lines are converted
from the xyz-system into the uvw-system, in which the panel is stored.

2:8
12 Series

Figure 2:2.
Conversion of global coordinates (xyz) into local (uv).

2:9
12 Series

Figure 2:3.
2.3.1
Conversion of a line defined by y-coordinate into line uvt.
Coordinates
Coordinates may be given explicitly as coordinate values. Planar Hull Modelling, however,
also offers different possibilities for relative definition of coordinates.
There are two main ways of doing this:

2:10
12 Series

1. Via references to principal planes in the ship, e.g. at frame positions.

2. By reference to topology points.
In general a coordinate may look like:
<coord>::= <number> | <ref_term>

The layout of <ref_term> is similar in all cases but its prefix depends on the type of
reference.
Here:
<ref_term>::= <plane_ref> | <point_ref>

The layout of these terms will be described in detail below.
References to Frame and Longitudinal Positions

References to principal planes in the ship can be done using the following options:
define the position along the x-axis relative to frame locations ("frame terms").
define positions along the y- and z-axes, respectively, by reference to theoretical

longitudinal positions in the midship section (LP-terms from Longitudinal Position).
The positions referred to are those defined in input to the GENTAB program (SF406D)
, see the documentation for details.
<plane_ref>:= <FR-term> | <LP-term>

<FR-term> and <LP-term> have the same syntactical construct, below described for
the <FR-term>.
<FR-term>::=
FR<start>
[([<step>]) <end> ][ +|- <dist> ]
<start>::= <step>::= <end>::= <dist>::= <number>

If step is given, it is calculated in the same way as in <rep_term>.
If the number is not an integer in an FR/LP-term, the position will be interpolated between
the two closest frame/longitudinal positions.
A negative longitudinal number means that the negative longitudinal coordinate will be
evaluated (only for positions along the y-axis).
<dist> is the offset, relative to the frame/longitudinal positions.
Example:
FR123
Frame pos 123.
FR123.5
Halfway between frame pos 123 and 124.
FR123()126
Frame pos 123, 124, 125, 126.
FR123(0.5)126
Frame and "half-frame" pos between frames 123 and 126.
FR123(5)133 + 500 500 mm forward of frame pos 123, 128, 133.

LP15

Long pos 15.
2:11
12 Series

Example:
LP10.5
A position, halfway between long pos 10 and 11.
LP-15
Negative y-position of long no 15.
FR-terms can be used only to define positions along the x-axis. LP-terms define positions
along the y-axis for numbers of bottom longitudinals, positions along the z-axis for numbers
of side longitudinals.
Additionally, FR-terms may be used for u-coordinates if the u-axis coincides with the x-axis.
LP-terms may be used for u- and v-coordinates if the corresponding axis coincides with the
axis for which LP-terms is relevant.
Violation of these rules will produce incorrect results without any error signals.
Coordinate References to Topology Points

The layout of coordinate references to topology points is:
<ref_term>::= P<start> [([<step>])] <end>][+|-<dist>]

<start>::=<step>::=<end>::= <integer>
This means that the reference has the same general layout as the FR- and LP-terms,
described above.
<start>,<step> and <end> form a sequence of numbers of topology points to which

reference is made.
The meaning of the term, i.e. u,v,x,y or z coordinate, depends on the keyword.
Example:
P5
P5-100
P5()7+100
2.3.2
(=P5+100, P6+100, P7+100)
Points
Points can be described, normally by assigning coordinates to individual keywords in the
local coordinate system of the panel (U and V) or of the global ship coordinate system
(X,Y,Z).
There is also an option make references to all coordinates of a topology point in one
assignment by a number of special keywords (UV, U1V, U2V, XYZ, X1Y, X2Y, XTY) which
accept only references to topology points.
<point>::= <by_coord> | <point_ref>

<by_coord>::= (U = <coord>, V = <coord>) |
(X = <coord>, Y = <coord>) |
(X = <coord>, Z = <coord>) |
(Y = <coord>, Z = <coord>)
A point may be defined in the uv-system or by two coordinates in the xyz-system.
<point_ref>::= UV | XYZ = P<start>[([<step>]) <end>

2:12
12 Series

Thus, the layout is equal to that of the coordinate references to topology points with the
exception that no offsets are allowed.
Remarks:
1. Complete references to topology points may be used also in other contexts where
coordinates are fed in, e.g. in assignments to the keywords ORI, VAX and VAX in the
bracket statement and in CURVE statements (without any keywords). For details, see
these statements.
2. Point references by UV, U1V, U2V may define also a direction (Cf. below).
<point_1>
has the same syntax as <point> with '1' added to all

coordinate keywords and UV is replaced by U1V, XYZ
by X1Y.
<point_2>
has the same syntax as <point> with '2' added to all

keywords and UV is replaced by U2V, XYZ by X2Y.
Example:
2.3.3
1.
U=1000, V=2000
2.
U=LP1, V=P5+100
3.
UV=P5
4.
X2Y=P3 (equal to e.g.: X2=P3,Z2=P3)
(equal to: U=P5, V=P5)
Directions
Directions are required to specify the directions of lines. The direction is defined as the
angle between the positive u-axis of the coordinate system and the positive direction of the
line. It is positive in the positive circulation direction.
Directions are given as angles when restricted lines are created using coordinates in the
local coordinate system (U, V, etc.). For unrestricted lines using global coordinates (X,Y,Z)
an additional "direction point" is used.
(For directions perpendicular to the axes of the coordinate systems there are certain rules,
cf. below)
<direction_angle>::=<angle> | <top_ref>
<angle>::=<number>
<top_ref>::=P|TA|TB<start> [([<step>])] <step> [+|-<delta>]
The general layout of reference to the direction of a topology point is the same as for
coordinate references.
Prefixes P and TA have the same meaning and mean reference to the primary direction of
the topology point. TB means reference to the secondary direction.

2:13
12 Series

Examples (of angles):

Example:
1.
T=45
2.
T2=30
3.
T1=P1()3+30
(equal to T1=P1+30, P2+30, P3+30 i.e. the primary direction of point

number 1 increased by 30).
2.3.4
Lines
A line may either be defined by a point and an inclination in the local coordinate (uv-) plane
of the panel or by two points in the xyz-space of the ship. If the line lies in a plane
perpendicular to a coordinate axis in the system, where it is described, then only one
coordinate need be given (see the figures above). The resulting line in the local uv-system
will be directed so that the component of its direction vector which has the greatest absolute
value in the system used in input will be positive.
Additionally, the direction of unindexed lines can be reversed by a special keyword,
REV[ERSE].
To put it formally:
<angle> is the inclination of the line in degrees, measured from the positive u-axis.
<line_uvt1> equal to <line_uvt> with '1' added to all keywords and U1V replacing
UV.
<line_uvt2> equal to <line_uvt> with '2' added to all keywords and U2V replacing
UV.

2:14
12 Series

Also in the last alternative, the line will be unrestricted and directed from (X, Y, Z) to (XT, YT,
ZT).
Also in the last alternative, the line will be unrestricted and directed from (X1, Y1, Z1) to (X2,
Y2, Z2). (However, check unrestricted lines below).
<line>::= <line_uvt> | <line_xyz>

<line_1>::= <line_uvt1>
<line_2>::= <line_uvt2> | <line_xyz2>
A restricted line may be defined by two points in the uv-plane:
<line_two_uv-points>::= U1 = <coord>
,V1 = <coord>
,U2 = <coord>
,V2 = <coord>
A restricted line may also be set, using two points in the xyz-space (currently used only in
the BOUNDARY statement).
<line_two_xyz-points>::=
<point defined by x1, y1 or z1> | X1Y=<point_ref>
,<point defined by x2, y2 or z2> | X2Y=<point_ref>
Note: that a <line_two_xyz-points> and <line_xyz2> may look the same. If it
is restricted or unrestricted depends on the statement in which it is used.
Remarks:
1. All
lines
are
unrestricted
except
<line_two_uv-points>
and
<line_two_xyz_points>
2. The use of the keyword REV is restricted to statement types, where the direction of a
line has any significance, i.e.:
CURVE statement, fillet curve
SEAM statement
STIFFENER statement
BRACKET statement
The effect of the keyword REV is not retained to a SAVE statement.
Below, a number of examples of the definition of lines are given.

2:15
12 Series

Examples:
1. <line>:
Example:
U =
U =
U =
V =
U =
UV=
X =
X =
Z =
XYZ=
5000 (equal to: U = 5000, T = 90)

8000, T = -90 (equal to: U = 8000, REV)
P3-100
2000
8000, V = 2000, T = 45
P5
FR175-200
5000, Y = 2000, XT = 5300, YT = 2700
5000
P1, XTY=P2
(equal
these)).
to
X=P1,Y1=P1,XT=P2,YT=P2 (or any suitable combination of
Note that T must not be used together with X, Y, Z.

2. <line_1>:
Example:
U1 = 5000
U1 = FR75, V1 = 2000, T1 = 50
UV = P4
3. <line_2>:
Example:
U2 =
U2 =
X1 =
X1Y=
3000, V2 = 2000, T2 = 30
P5
5000, Z1 = 2000, X2 = 7000, Y2 = 6700
P3, X2Y = P4
(In the last example, the panel must not be parallel to any principal plane.)

2:16
12 Series

4. <line_two_uv-points>:
Example:
U1 = FR75, V1 = 2000, U2 = FR85, V2 = 3000
2.4
Numerical Variables
In the input schemes numerical constants of type <real> may be replaced by numerical
variables. These variables are numbered and are identified when used by N followed by its
number. To put it formally:
<numerical_variable>::= N
(0< i <100 | -100< I <0)
A negative number means that the values assigned to the numerical variable should be
negated when used.
A numerical variable may used in combination with an offset, e.g.
U = N5 +100
This means that numerical variables are used very much in the same way as variables in
programming languages. However, once they have been given a value they must not be
reused by re-definition in another statement.
Numerical variables are given values in statements of their own.
Numerical variables may get their values in three different ways:
By explicitly given constants
By picking of a coordinate from a topology point.
By calculation via an expression
The options for the expression are described in detail in the specification of the statement
for Numerical Variables.
It should be observed that numerical variables can be used only in places where the Design
Language of Hull Planar Modelling allows real numbers to used, i.e. they cannot be used for
integers and strings.
Example:
.
NUM, NO=1, VAL=7.5;
PLA, MAT=N1, N-1;
.
These two statements will have the same effect as the statement below:
.
PLA, MAT=7.5,-7.5;
.

2:17
12 Series

2.5
Tag Handling for Stiffeners
2.5.1
Background
When generating, it is normal to refer to the surrounding structure when creating a new
panel. It is very usual that these references include references to stiffeners on an adjacent
panel (e.g. in setting cutouts) and/or on the current panel (e.g. in generating stiffeners and
brackets).
These references can take place via the stiffener numbers which are related to the
numbers of the attributes in which the stiffeners are stored. A severe disadvantage of this
method is that the stiffener numbers are normally not stable, i.e. as a panel is changed, the
stiffener numbers may change. This requires corresponding changes in the input schemes
of dependent panels. If the original change is made, e.g. on a deck or a bulkhead, which is
referred to from many other panels, this might cause considerable problems.
To overcome this, Planar Hull Modelling has been given the facility of referring to stiffeners
via "tags", which are stable and, for instance, are defined by the position of the stiffeners.
The tag need not be unique for a certain stiffener, but Planar Hull Modelling will
automatically, from a given tag, search for the corresponding stiffener. This searching is
performed in a way very similar to the one when a shell profile part is searched for, defined
by a longitudinal/transversal number.
2.5.2
Types of Tags
There are three different types of stiffener tags, two of which are set automatically. The third
one is user defined.
1. Stiffeners that lie in planes, which are close to horizontal or vertical, and the end points
of which are close to the longitudinal horizontal distance from the CL or to the
longitudinal vertical distance from the BL are given a tag which is identical to the
longitudinal number.
The longitudinal positions used are the theoretical midship positions for longitudinals
that are defined in the initialization of a new project. A longitudinal position can be
defined, even if there is no physical longitudinal, e.g. in the position of a girder or a
stringer.
Stiffeners located on the position of longitudinals on the starboard side are given the
negative longitudinal number as the tag. The figure below illustrates how the tags are
set:

2:18
12 Series

Figure 2:4.
Stiffener tags, Example
Stiffeners
Longitudinal tag No.
-2
a, B
-1
b, C
c, E
none
d, e
31
none
2. Stiffeners located in or close to a frame plane and close to a frame coordinate will be
given a tag, identical with the frame number.
3. Quite a number of stiffeners will not be given any tag automatically, because they do
not follow the conditions above. Nevertheless, it may be desirable to be able to refer to
them with stable references, e.g. a stiffener on a platform which is not parallel to CL or
stiffeners on a sloping hopper tank top.
Then the user, in generating a stiffener, can assign a tag as an integer number in the
interval 1-999, using the keyword TAG. Such a user defined tag always overrides an
automatically selected tag.
2.5.3
Reference to Tags
Stiffeners can be referred to via reference terms, S-numbers. For instance, a reference to
stiffener No.3 on panel ABC may be achieved via:
--- , 'ABC', S3, ---

2:19
12 Series

Reference to stiffeners via their tags can be performed in a similar way.
Reference to a longitudinal tag is made via SL<no> (Stiffener at Longitudinal position

<no>), e.g. SL5. Note that the longitudinal number should not be multiplied by 10.
Reference to a frame tag is made via SF<no> (Stiffener at Frame position <no>), e.g.
SF135.
Reference to a user defined tag is made via ST<no> (Stiffener with Tag <no>), e.g.
ST99.
In all cases, repetitions can be used and the reference terms can be combined with the
keyword REFLECT , e.g.:
SL5-10, REF
Reference to stiffeners on the starboard side of a deck or a platform is made via the
negative longitudinal number (e.g. the stiffener b, c, A, B, C in the figure above):
SL-10, SL-1(-2)-7
The tag reference terms can be used in all situations (= all statements) where stiffener
references are allowed.
2.6
Repetition Effects
It is possible to treat several (maximum 25) components (stiffeners, holes, etc.) in one
statement by assigning a number of values to one or more keywords (or by using several
references). Then the rules explained by the example below must be followed.
Suppose that n components (say holes) shall be generated in one statement. Then the
number of assigned values for each keyword, etc. must equal to one of the following values
1.
=0
In this case, the default value will be used for all n holes.
2.
=1
The single value assigned will be valid for all holes.
3.
=n
Each of the n holes will have one value of its own.
A violation of this rule will normally cause an error.

Example:
HOLE, D500, U = FR76, FR79, V = 1000;

Two holes will be set, located at frames 76 and 79, respectively. Both holes will be set at the
v-coordinate 1000 (since only one value is assigned to V). The default value (=0) for
inclination will be used (T is assigned no value at all).
Note: The number of allowed values is specific to each combination of keyword and
statement.
2.7
Default Values
Some properties of panels and components generated may be identical in most cases or
need not always be given (for instance, quality codes, position numbers, etc.). If not
otherwise stated, values not given will be 0. (If necessary values are missing, errors will be
signalled. The locations never default.)

2:20
12 Series

2.8
Principles for Documentation of Statements

In the following sections of this document, the different statements are described. These
descriptions have a common layout:
The purpose of the statement is described.
The formal and strict syntax of the statement is defined using the meta language.
Comments are made on the interpretation of the syntax.
Examples are given.
Remark:
The formal syntax has sometimes consciously been made somewhat imprecise to avoid
making it too heavy. For instance, the delimiter is normally supposed to be repeated in
repetitions even if not explicitly denoted.
A general rule is: Terms are always separated by one delimiter
Example:
1.
/[ <endcut>]
[, CON = <con_code>]
[, ...
In this case, no extra delimiter should precede CON if the endcut is left out.
2.
U = <coord>
(1 ... 25)
should be interpreted as:
U(=|, <coord>)
2.9
(1 ... 25)
Control of Colours of Parts

AVEVA Marine uses inbuilt colours for different kinds of parts. The colours may differ
between different types of views. It is possible to override the system defined colours of
components by assigning a colour to the keyword COL[OUR] in the relevant statements.
The syntax of the colour clause is like this:
COLOUR = <colour>
where <colour> can take on one of the following values:
GREEN
BLACK
CYAN
BLUE
MAGENTA
RED

2:21
12 Series

YELLOW
WHITE
If the keyword is left out the system defined colours will be used as described in the table
below. The components for which the colours can be controlled are those that result in parts
(except plates), i.e. stiffeners, pillars, flanges, brackets, clips (collars) and doubling plates.
All components generated by one and the same statement will get the defined colour.
Example:
STI, PRO=20,150,12 /CON=15, CUT=2100, COLOUR=BLACK;
Component type
Symbolic view
3D view
Stiffener
Green
Red
Flange (welded)
Green
Red
Pillar
Green
Red
Bracket
Green
Cyan
Clip
Green
Black
Doubling plate
Green
Green
Components not included in the table above will be presented as Green in both types of
view.
(These colours are valid when the background colour is white).

2:22
12 Series

Identifier Statement
The first non-blank line of an input scheme is interpreted as the identifier of the scheme.
The layout of the identifier can be chosen arbitrarily, but only the columns 1-72 are relevant.
(Note that the statement need not be terminated by a semicolon and that no keywords are
used.)
The identifier will occur on listings and on plots (only the first 12 characters) for identification
and to ease the distribution of results. The layout should be chosen, keeping this in mind.
Example:
246 OP UPPER
|------------|
DECK, DWG
12345/78
First 12 characters occur on plots from separate generation for identification purpose.

3:1
12 Series


3:2
12 Series

Panel Statement
Panel Statement
4.1
General
A PANEL statement defines the panel to contain the components defined by the component
statements. The PANEL statement is the first statement after the identifier statement.
A normal PANEL statement defines the following quantities:
The name of the panel
What the panel is valid for (PS, SB, etc.)
The block the panel belongs to
The datatype of the panel
Furthermore, the location of the panel may be defined and production and assembly
identifications may be added.
In special variants of the PANEL statement a panel can be deleted from the data bank.
4.2
Types of Panels
There are a few different panel types, which are handled differently by Hull Modelling:
Ordinary plane panels.
Knuckled panels. Knuckled panels have one or more knuckles between plate parts
lying in different planes.
Subpanels (for knuckling). A knuckled panel is built up by a number of subpanels,

each of which is located in one of the planes of the knuckled panel.
Bracket panels. Such panels are used to create brackets, which are not covered by
the bracket standards of Hull Modelling.
Generating them as panels is just a way of using the powerful tools for building up
arbitrary geometry, offered by the different input statements.
Bracket panels should, therefore, be handled as brackets everywhere in the system.
Jumbo panels are big panels, which normally are non-production units used in the
design phase. However, in AVEVA Marine they are handled as normal panels.
For general information about knuckled panels, see separate documents.
4.3
Panel Names
(In the rest of this chapter, SB means starboard, PS means portside and CL means centre
line.)
Panel names can, in principle, be selected quite freely, however only letters, digits and the
special characters minus (-) and underscore (_) can be used.

4:1
12 Series

Panel Statement
However, a certain structure of the panel name means that certain other things can be
implicitly defined by the name. Therefore, a recommended layout of the name is:
<panel_name>::=
'<block>-<pan>'
If not otherwise specified (see below), the panel is supposed to belong to the block with the
name <block> that forms the part of the name before -.
<pan> is panel specific part of the name.

The names of bracket panels are completely free and no block name is required.
4.4
Data Types
The data type offers the user a way of classifying panels in a way that he finds suitable.
The data type (DT) is an integer with the following restrictions:
There are certain data types that are reserved for special purposes:
Panels with data types in the interval

are supposed to be jumbo panels.
Data type 957 is reserved by the system for bracket panels.
Data type 958 is reserved by the system for sub panels of knuckled panels.
Data type 959 is reserved by the system for special panels transferred from outfitting steel.
Suppose that DT = <X><Y><Z>.
Then:
Y = 9 for tight bulkheads
Y = 8 for non-tight bulkheads
Y = 0-7 for other panels
The value of the second digit is used by Planar Hull Modelling to select appropriate line
types in drawing the traces of hidden, abutting panels in drawings.
There is a possibility to control which values that are allowed to give to a panel. Please see
Hull Detail Design / Setup and Customisation / Miscellaneous / Panel Data and Geometry
Type Set-up.
Design Panels in Structural Design are automatically given a data type equal 1600. A user
defined data type is not possible to define for these types of panels and tight structures are
instead identified by the use of the keyword WT (see below).
4.5
Storing of Panels
Panels are always described in the uv-plane of a local coordinate system, uvw, oriented by
a transformation vector in the global ship coordinate system xyz. For general rules, see the
Design Standards. (For knuckled panels the subpanels are oriented in this way.)

4:2
12 Series

Panel Statement
The normal situation is that panels are described where they are physically located.
However, panels can also be describe in their mirrored position. It might be convenient to
described an SB specific panel in the same way (including the location) as the
corresponding PS specific panel (e.g. by copying and modifying the input scheme).
The following possibilities exist:
1. The panel is symmetric, i.e. occurs in one SB-variant and in one PS-variant.
2. The panel is PS specific.
3. The panel is SB specific.
In all these cases, the panels can be described, either PS or SB.
4. The panel is located over/in CL ("SP-panel").
Such a panel must be described where it is located, i.e. it must not be reflected.
(A panel should be considered as a panel over CL only if it is symmetric over the CL,
located in the CL plane or if it has whole components on both sides of the CL. A PS specific
panel may very well have one plate that partly extends into SB.)
The Planar Hull Modelling system treats all panels correctly independently of where and
how they are stored. However, the user must be aware of the storing, because a reference
to another panel is always made in the position where it is stored. E.g. when generating a
double floor bottom transverse to be stored on SB, and having a SB specific girder as one
boundary. Then the girder must be reflected as a boundary if stored on PS but not if it is
stored on SB (cf. the figures below).
Figure 4:1.
Starboard girder, stored starboard side.
BOU, ... /'GIRD'/ ... ;

4:3
12 Series

Panel Statement
Figure 4:2.
Starboard girder, stored (generated) on port side.
BOU, ... /'GIRD',REF/ ... ;

For many component types on a symmetrical panel it is possible to define them as valid for
portside or starboard only. This facility is useful for defining small differences on an
otherwise symmetrical panel. It is then possible to define and modify the majority of
components for both sides simultaneously in spite of e.g. an additional hole on one of the
sides.
However when the differences between the two sides become to big, the symmetrical panel
should be split into one portside and one starboard panel. As a side specific panel can be
described on either side, just copying the scheme of the original symmetrical panel and then
change the name and symmetry can easily do this.
In general portside or starboard specific components on symmetrical panels should be used
when the component should be suppressed on one of the sides. If the component exists on
both side but with different characteristics, two separate panel definitions should be used to
avoid problems in generation and production.
4.6
Normal Panel Syntax

This syntax is used when a normal panel is generated. A panel must not occur in more than
one statement of this kind. (Violations of these rules cause erroneous connections between
generated components and the statements of this kind.)

4:4
12 Series

Panel Statement
Syntax:
PANEL
,<pan_name>,<pan_loc>
[,BLOCK=<bl_name>]
,<data_type>
[,<location>]
[,<store_code>]
[,GT=<geo_type>]
[,<id's>]
[,<assembly>]
[GMS=<side>
[BUI=<build_no>
[,WT]
;
Description of Syntax
<pan_name>
contains the panel name, cf above,
<pan_name>::=<name>
<pan_loc>
defines what the panel is valid for (cf Storing of Panels above).
It must follow immediately after the panel name. (Irrelevant for
bracket panels.)
<pan_loc>::= SBP[S] | S | P | SP
SBP means that the panel is valid for PS and SB (two panels,
which are mirror images of each other)
S means SB specific.
P means PS specific.
SP means a panel over/in CL.
BLOCK
defines the block which the panel belongs to. If not given, the
block name is supposed to be derived from the panel name
(see Panel Names above).
When given, the block clause must follow immediately after
the panel name and the location code, if any.
<bl_name>::=<name>
<data_type>
defines the data type of the panel but may also identify the
panel as a panel bracket or as a curved panel.
<data_type>::= DT=<dtype> |
BRA[CKET_PANEL] |
CURVED
For data types, see section Data Types above.
(<dtype>::=<integer>.
BRACKET_PANEL implies a bracket panel.
CURVED indicates that the panel is a curved panel. On such
a panel, only brackets can be generated (i.e. the panel
domain must consist of BRACKET and COMMENT
statements only).

4:5
12 Series

Panel Statement
<location>
defines the position in space of the panel. If not given, the

position is supposed to be fetched from boundary one in the
BOUNDARY statement.
<location>::=
X=<coord> |
Y=<coord> |
Z=<coord> |
<three points> |
<curve references> |
LOC=<obj_name>
<three points> defines the location via three points in
space; the first in the origin of the uvw-system, the second on
the positive u-axis and the third a point in the uv-plane with a
positive v-coordinate (not necessarily on the v-axis), cf the
figure below.
<three points>::=
ORI=<point>,
UAX=<point>,
VAX=<point>
<point>::= <coord>, <coord>, <coord>
Figure 4:3.
Panel, located by three points.
P1='ORI', P2='UAX', P3='VAX'

4:6
12 Series

Panel Statement
Example:
URI=FR75, 2000, 3000,

UAX=FR76, 2100, 3000,
VAX=FR75, 3000, 3200
LOC is used to define the name of an object from which the
location of the current panel should be fetched. The object
must contain transformation information defining a plane. This
is true for e.g. planar Shell curves, Panels, Reference Surface
Objects (RSO:s) of type Compartment Limit or General Inner
Structure and Plane objects. If an RSO is used as Location,
the panel will be noted as belonging to this RSO when stored.
<obj_name>::= <name>
Example:
LOC='DECK_CURVE'
The panel, e.g. an inclining deck panel, will get the same local
coordinate system as DECK_CURVE.
Curve references can be used to define the location in a
similar way.
<store_code>
is used, explicitly to define if the panel is stored PS or SB.

This is normally evaluated automatically but, in some cases, it
might be somewhat uncertain. Then it is possible explicitly to
tell Planar Hull Modelling that the panel has been described
as though it were stored PS or SB
<store_code>::=STO=PS|SB
When given, the storing code is supposed to be valid for all
panels of the statement.
GT
The geometry type is used to control the generation of certain

"special side webs" (see the BOUNDARY statement).
<geo_type>::=<integer>
Default value is 101.
Geometry type 90 is reserved for Panel Profiles, which are
Panels that can be created as profiles in production.
Geometry type 958 is reserved for a knuckled (main) panel.

4:7
12 Series

Panel Statement
<id's>
define a number of items, that may be used to form part

names etc.
The <id's> set in the panel statement are normally
supposed to be valid for all parts of the panel. However, in
certain cases the definition on panel level may be overridden
on part level (cf. the Component statements).
<id's>::=[,MAR=<marking>]
[,WOR=<drawing_name>]
[,LIS=<parts_list>]
[,AS1=<name>]
[,AS2=<name>]
[,AS3=<name>]
[,AS4=<name>]
<marking>
is a string that may be used as the common part of part name.

The use of <marking> and <assembly_name> for this
purpose is normally mutually exclusive.
<marking>::=<name>
<drawing_name>
is the name of the drawing in which the panel occurs.
<drawing_name>::=<name>
These two strings are normally set in a run of the component
list programs.
LIS
The name of a parts list may be set equal to the block name or
to any of assembly names as specified in the default files of
the Parts List Hull system.
However, independent of these settings a part will belong to a
parts list whose name is explicitly assigned to LIS, i.e. use of
LIS causes override of the default setting.
<parts_list>::=<name>
AS's
General Purpose strings used in a customer specific way,

traditionally used to define assembly names.
<assembly_name>::=<name>
The AS's are irrelevant as assemblies when the Assembly
Planning application is used for assembly definition.

4:8
12 Series

Panel Statement
<assembly>
is the reference to the assembly containing the panel. The

<assembly> in the panel statement is valid for all parts of
the panel unless overridden by an <assembly> on part level
(cf. the Component statements).
<assembly>::=[AR=<ass_ref>] |
[ARP=<ass_ref>]
[,ARS=<ass_ref>]
AR is used for non-symmetrical panels and for symmetrical
panels where both the portside and starboard instance belong
to the same assembly. For symmetrical panels with different
assemblies for the two sides, ARP is used for the portside
assembly, and ARS for the starboard assembly.
<ass_ref>::= <name>
The assembly reference is a system generated identifier
corresponding to a user defined assembly name. The
assembly references are normally not handled directly by the
user. They are rather the result of some function working with
the user defined name. The assembly reference can be set in
the panel object, via an interactive function, and then
automatically transferred to input scheme clauses, or they can
be set in the scheme via a function translating it to the user
defined assembly name.
defines which side should be the marking side for the panel
GMS
See also Hull / Setup and Customisation / Alignment Marking /

Marks for Assembly (GSD) / GSD Customising / General.
<side>::= SB|PS|TOP|BOT|FOR|AFT
Defines which building number (project) the panel belongs to.
BUI
<build_no>::= string defining the ship building number.

This string is compared to the string defined in the Structure
Reference Object as the Project.
Defines if a structure is watertight. The definition affects the
selection of cutouts and the selection of Line types in drawing
the traces of hidden abutting panels in drawings.
WT
Example:
PAN, 'AA334-6', Y = 6503, DT = 104;

PAN, 'AA999-9', ORIGIN = FR111, 1000, 0, 333,
UAXIS = FR113, 1100, 0,
VAXIS = FR111, 2000, 100, DT = 999;
PAN, 'PANEL_BKT', BRA;
In all these cases, a BOUNDARY statement must follow, defining the contour of the panel.

4:9
12 Series

Panel Statement
4.7
Syntax for Subpanels

This syntax is used when generating the subparts of knuckled panels. It is very similar to the
syntax of ordinary panel (of - 6 above) but some clauses have no sense for subpanels.
Syntax:
PANEL
,<pan_name>
,SUB
[,<location>]
[,GT=<geo_type>]
[,<id's>]
[,<assembly>]
;
SUB (as a stand-alone keyword) indicates a subpanel. Otherwise the clauses have the
same meaning as in the usual panel syntax.
4.8
Syntax for Knuckled Panels

This syntax is used for knuckled (main) panels and has the following layout.
Syntax:
PANEL (,<pan_name>
[,BLOCK=<bl_name>])
,<data_type>
[,<store_code>]
SUB=(<subpanel> (1...25)|<group_name>*)
;
Most of the clauses are common to the usual panel syntax. The keyword SUB can be
followed by all the subpanel names, explicitly given in an arbitrary order. It may also be
followed by a group name concluded by an asterisk. In the former case the number of subpanels is restricted to 25.
In the latter case all subpanels whose names start in <group_name> will be included. The
number of sub-panels can in this case in principle be unrestricted.

4:10
12 Series

Panel Statement
Example:
The following input schemes generate two subpanels which then are combined into one
knuckled panel.
Example:
Sub-panel l
PAN,'TB123-SUB1',SUB,Z=15000;
BOU,X=50000/Y=0/X=55000/Y=4000,CON;
SEA,Y=2600;
PLA,MAT=10,Y=2000,3500,X=52000;
-----------------------------------------------------------Sub-panel 2
PAN,'TB123-SUB2', SUB,
ORI=50000, 4000,15000,
UAX=60000, 4000,15000,
VAX=50000, 8000,14500;
BOU,X=50000/Y=4000,CON/X=55000/Y=7500;
SEA,Y=5000;
PLA,MAT=10,Y=4500,6000,X=52000
-----------------------------------------------------------Main panel
PAN,TB123-1,SBP,DT=343,
SUB=TB123-SUB1:TB123-SUB2;
(or PAN,TB123-1, SBP, DT=343, SUB=TB123-*;)

4:11
12 Series

Panel Statement

4:12
12 Series

Only Statement
Only Statement
The ONLY statement is used when one or many COMMENT statements should precede the
PANEL statement.
Its syntax is very simple:
ONLY, <pan_name>;
The ONLY statement defines a rudimentary panel without e.g. location and data type. Its
only use is to serve as a container for the following COMMENT statements. Before any
other type of statement a regular PANEL statement has to appear containing the same
panel name as the one in the preceding ONLY statement.

5:1
12 Series

Only Statement

5:2
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Boundary Statement
The BOUNDARY statement is used to generate the outer geometry of the current panel(s)
as a closed geometry.
There are three main alternatives for its syntax.
1. The normal syntax in which parts of the outer contour are fetched from the surrounding
structure, like panels, curves, lines, etc. The Hull Modelling system then cuts these
parts together to form the closed contour.
2. In a variant of this syntax, one of the boundaries may be a "free" side, controlled by the
length of the adjoining limits and of a number of parameters.
3. The third alternative consists of a few special cases for the generation of side webs
from a set of parameters.
6.1
Normal Syntax
In the normal syntax, a closed geometry is formed from at most 12 different boundaries.
Each boundary can be given independently of any other boundary.
The boundaries must be given in a counter-clockwise direction, seen in the local uvwsystem of the panel.
The direction of each individual boundary can be chosen arbitrarily. Hull Modelling will turn
it, if needed.
Each boundary can be given in a great number of different ways. Below follows a short
verbal description, which is documented in a more formal way later. The possibilities are:
Curve references (frames, waterlines and buttocks). Reference terms can be used only
in the first boundary.
Lines (restricted or unrestricted).
Curves, either established in a CURVE statement or read from the form data bank.
Surface references, by name or number.
Planes, either established in a PLN-statement or read from the structure data bank.
Panels, that intersect the plane of the current panel.
A limit or a flange of a panel whose plane is close to that of the current panel.
The crossection of an intersecting profile, either in the shell or on an intersecting panel.
A contour along the edge of a profile.
A contour, overlapping the end of a profile.
Certain boundary types will result in two contours ("twins"). Hull Modelling will automatically
select the one to be used.

6:1
12 Series

Boundary Statement
If not defined by the PANEL statement, the location of the panel(s) will be fetched from the
first boundary. This can be done for many types of boundaries, but not for the following
ones:
Lines
Curves, established in CURVE statements
Surface references
Intersecting panels
Planes
Profile crossections

6:2
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Syntax Description:
BOU, <boundary_1>(/<boundary>)
(1...11);
Example:
BOU, FR105/'TANKTOP'/'BULKH';
<boundary_1>::=
<boundary> |
(<curve_ref> (1...10),
[CNO=<cont_no>]
[<paral_displacem>]
[, REF | SYM]
)
<boundary>::=
<profile_boundary> <boundary_crossection>
::=
<along_profile> |
<overlap_prof_end>

6:3
12 Series

Boundary Statement
<boundary_1>
differs from the remaining boundaries syntactically in one

way: the boundary can be defined by the use of curve
references.
<paral_displacem>
Some boundary types can be displaced parallel to

themselves before being used as boundaries.
<paral_displacem>::= COR= <dist>

<dist>::= <number>
CON
Used only for those boundaries of subpanels that should be

connected to another subpanel along a knuckle line. If no
value is assigned to CON, the default bending type (=9999)
will be used.
<bending-type>::= <integer>
6.1.1
Lines
Individual comments are given below on the different boundary types with reference to the
general syntax above.
Both restricted and unrestricted lines may be used.
6.1.2
Curves
CNO
By default contour 0 of the curve will be used. Any other

contour can be selected using CNO.
<cont_no>::= <integer>
parallel move
When a curve is moved parallel to itself, the displacement will

be to the right (in the circulation direction of the curve if
positive, to the left if negative.
<paral_displacem>::= COR=<dist>
<dist>::=<number>
REF
All boundary types (except explicit lines) can be reflected in

the vertical plane in the CL before being used. REF[LECT] is
used for this purpose.
SYM
When boundary_1 is a curve, the use of SYM means that the

curve will be reflected in the CL-plane, and then the reflected
curve will be connected to the unreflected curve to form one
boundary over the CL.
SYM can only be used for curves, starting in the CL, like
frames.
Example: BOU, FR105, SYM/ ... ;
6.1.3
Surfaces
The surface reference can either be a number or a name.
<surface>::= SURF = <surf_no> | <surf_name>

<surf_no>::= <integer>
<surf_name>::= <name>

6:4
12 Series

Boundary Statement
The number is 1 for the main hull and -1 for the default deck surface if any. For additional
surfaces the numbers are the ones used when defining supplementary surfaces during
initiation of CGDB.
The names are the surface object names like "SURF='AAHULL'".
Limits can be given along the principal axes to trim the curve resulting from the surface
reference. This is necessary e.g. when the curve consists of multiple contours as a
boundary limit curve should have only one contour.
<limits>::= [XMIN = <coord>]

[,XMAX = <coord>]
[,YMIN = <coord>]
[,YMAX = <coord>]
[,ZMIN = <coord>]
[,ZMAX = <coord>]
If none of the keywords above are given "YMIN=0" is assumed for a symmetric surface.
When referring the reflected surface the keywords above should be given relative to the
original position.
This means that the surface will be intersected with the plane of the panel considering the
currently set limitations. Any mirroring will take place on the resulting intersection curve.
Thus, if an inclined deck on starboard is described on starboard the limits should be set for
an intersection on starboard.
Example:
PAN, ..., SB, ORI=FR50, 0, 10000, UAX=FR51, 0, 1000

VAX=FR50, 5000, 9900,...
The first boundary statement below will give an unwanted result, the second the expected
one.
(BOU, SURF= '...', REFL/.....;)

BOU, SURF= '...', YMIN=-15000, YMAX=0/.....;
6.1.4
Intersecting Plane
The plane to be used as a boundary must either exist in the data bank, established by the
program SF400D, or it must have been created in a PLN statement (see the PLN
statement).
<intersect_plane>::= <name>
CORR < 0 gives a displacement, creating a smaller surface of the panel, CORR > 0 a
larger surface.
6.1.5
Intersecting Panel
Normally, two curves will result from an intersected panel, one from each side. Hull
Modelling will automatically select the proper one.

6:5
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:1.
Section curves from panel used as a boundary.
In some cases, it might be convenient, explicitly to select the curve to be used. This is
done by defining the side as one of the main directions of the ship.
The resulting contours will always be extended outside the edges of the intersected panel
to make certain that adjoining boundaries intersect even when minor gaps should occur.
The shape of this extension may vary, e.g. as controlled by the default parameters
CHAMFER_ADJUST and REDUCE_HOOKS.
However, when CORR is used, the resulting contour(s) will always be straight,
"unrestricted" lines. The position of the lines is calculated from the thickest plate (on the
side of the panel from which the line is displaced).
<intersect_panel>::= <name>
<side_info>::=
SID= AFT |
FOR |
SB
|
PS
|
TOP |
BOT
Example: ... / 'BULKH', SID=PS / ...
Chamfer in Panel Boundaries

When the plane section of one panel is used as the boundary of another panel, the steps in
the plate thickness of the intersected panel are taken into consideration (see Figure 6:2.:
Chamfered boundary curve from panel with a chamfered joint.
However, when the difference of the plate thickness is considerable, the thicker plate is
normally chamfered.

6:6
12 Series

Boundary Statement
This can be considered in the generation phase of Hull Modelling when the section curve is
calculated by setting the default parameter CHAMFER_ADJUST (see Default File of Planar
Hull Modelling).
A similar change will occur at the limit between to butt-welded panels. However, in this case
chamfer is supposed independently of the difference in plate thickness
Figure 6:2.
6.1.6
Chamfered boundary curve from panel with a chamfered joint.
Intersecting RSO
When intersecting an RSO two cases arise depending on whether the RSO contain panels
where intersected or not.
If panels with plates defined extend over the whole intersection, two curves are derived
from each intersected panel like when intersecting a single panel (6.1.5: Intersecting
Panel). Then the panel curves are combined into two "RSO-curves".
However if the RSO does not contains any panels, or if there are gaps between the
panels or if any of the panels has no plates only a single curve is the result. This curve
is derived directly from the RSO plane(s).
If a face number is given, then panels are not considered at all.
The contour(s) is extended at both ends to ensure intersection with surrounding limits.
Giving <side_info> will select one of the two curves. It is also used to indicate the
direction when CORR is given to displace the resulting contour.
<intersect_RSO>::= <name>
<side_info>::= SID = AFT | FOR | SB | PS | TOP | BOT
<face number>::= NO = <integer>
Example:
.../ '_RSO_DECK1', SID=BOT, COR=750/ ...

6:7
12 Series

Boundary Statement
6.1.7
Panel in the Same Plane

Normally, when a panel is used as a boundary it is intersected.
It is, however, also possible to use a panel in or close to the plane of the current panel as a
boundary, see Figure 6:3.: Panel boundary from limit or flange.
Figure 6:3.
Panel boundary from limit or flange.
In this case, then the user must specify a certain limit of this panel to be used or a flange
along one of its limits.
<coplanar_panel>::= <name>
<lim_no>::= <integer>
6.1.8
Profile Crossection
In a boundary of this type, the boundary curves - one from each side of the profile - are
derived from the intersection between a given profile and the plane of the current panel.

6:8
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:4.
Profile section curve used as boundary
<profile_crossection>::=
CROSS
,<ext_prof_ref> (1...10) [,REF]
[,SHORT]
[,<paral_displacem>]
<ext_prof_ref>,
<paral_displacem>, see above. The displacement is always
positive in this case, i.e. creating a gap at the profile.
SHORT

Normally, the resulting contours will be made very long. By the use
of SHORT, the contour will only extend roughly half the profile
height outside the actual profile height. See Figure 6:5.: Use of
keyword SHORT.
6:9
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:5.
Use of keyword SHORT.
Examples:
... / CRO, L140, COR=50 / ...

... / CRO, 'AA124', SL14, SHORT / ...
Remark:
The height of the profile in the section will be available as the parameter value H in the LENclause in the BOUNDARY syntax with a free side, see Free Side Syntax.
6.1.9
Boundary along Profile

In a boundary of this type, the boundary curve(s) will be derived along the edge of a given
profile. In the case of a flange, the result will be two curves. The curve can be displaced
parallel to the edge.

6:10
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:6.
Boundary along edge of profile
<along_profile>::= ALONG,
[,<panel_displacem>]
<shell_prof_ref>/
<stiff_tag_ref>
<xyz-line>
General Layout of a Statement

defines a plane parallel to a principle plane. It is used to
select the profile part to be used and is compulsory for
shell profiles and optional if a stiffener tag reference is
not otherwise unique.
<xyz-line>::= X|Y|Z = <coord>

<adj_pan>::= <name>
<panel_displacem>
see above.
A positive value means overlap, a negative value a
gap.
Remarks:
1. The resulting trace will be extended 500 mm outside the profile trace at both ends for
shell profiles, otherwise 1000 mm.
2. If given as a boundary number 1, the local coordinate system of the panel may be
defined by the boundary.
It is selected in the following way:
the origin is on the profile trace.

6:11
12 Series

Boundary Statement
the u-axis is in the intersection between the plane of the profile and a principal
plane. For shell profiles, the principle plane is defined by the selecting line.
the w-axis is oriented as is "natural", i.e. pointing in the direction of the negative yaxis depending on its largest component in the xyz-system.
Since, in such a case, the user has little control of the local coordinate system, it is
recommended to use xyz-coordinates in the rest of the panel.
Examples:
... / ALONG, L470, X=FR117, COR=50 / ...

... / ALONG, 'ADJ-PAN', SL15, X=FR75 / ...
6.1.10
Overlap of Profile End

A contour will be derived from the overlap of one end of a given profile (shell profile or
stiffener). The actual contour is controlled by a number of parameters.
In the syntax, three distinct matters are defined:
The profile to overlap
The plane from where overlapping curve is evaluated
The shape of the curve
Figure 6:7.: Boundary contours from overlap of profile ends. illustrates three different cases
and also defines the extension of the contour at both ends.
Figure 6:7.
Boundary contours from overlap of profile ends.

6:12
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Syntax Description:
<overlap_profile_end>::= OVERLAP
,<profile>
,<intersect_plane>
,<contour_param>
defines
the
profile
to
overlap
<profile>
<profile>::=
<shell_prof_ref>/
<stiff_tag_ref>
<adj_pan>
see General Layout of a Statement

is the name of an adjacent panel on which
the stiffener referred to is located.
The name must be given immediately
after the keyword OVERLAP.
<adj_pan>::= <name>
is used to indicate in which direction from
the intersecting plane to search for the
profile end. See also above.
<side_info>
It is compulsory for shell profiles, optional if

a stiffener tag reference is not unique.
<intersect_plane>
defines the plane from where

overlapping contour is evaluated.
the
It can be defined in different ways:
by a given panel
by a given plane
by a plane parallel to a principal plane

at a given position
as a tangent plane to a given curve in

a given position
<intersect_plane>::=
<panel> |
<plane> |
(<curve>, X|Y|Z = <coord>)|
(X|Y|X = <coord>)
All three alternatives are illustrated in
Figure 6:8.: Overlap contour without lug.

6:13
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:8.
Overlap contour without lug.
<contour_param>
defines the parameters controlling the

shape of the contour
<contour_param>::=
[,R[=<radius>]]
[,M1=<measure>]
[,M2|M3=<measure>]
[,M4=<measure>]
<radius>::= <measure::= <number>
When given, the resulting contour will

include a lug. The radius at the end of the
lug can be controlled (default value: 50).
No radius:
Figure 6:9.
Overlap, no lug (R missing).
With radius (R>0):

6:14
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:10. Overlap with lug (R>0).
A positive value means that the edge of the lug is part of the contour
along the trace of the profile (as in Figure 6:10.: Overlap with lug
(R>0).).
A negative radius means that the contour will pass perpendicularly
across the trace of the profile, see Figure 6:11.: Overlap with lug (R<0).
With R < 0:
Figure 6:11.
Overlap with lug (R<0).
M1
defines the distance of the knuckle point

close to the edge of the profile.
Default value: 50
M1 > 0:
The contour is extended parallel to
the intersecting plane.
M1 < 0:
The contour is perpendicular to the
profile edge.

6:15
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:12. Interpretation of parameter M1.
These parameters define the overlap in

different ways and are mutually exclusive.
M2, M3
M2 defines the distance from the

intersecting plane to the intersection point
between the resulting contour and the
edge.
M3 controls the actual overlap as in Figure

6:14.: Interpretation of parameter M3. The
overlap is calculated along the edge of the
profile. M3 < 5 is interpreted as a factor,
giving the actual overlap M3*H, where H is
the profile height.

6:16
12 Series

Boundary Statement
If neither M2 nor M3 are given, M3 = 1.5 as

default.
In calculating the overlap, the end cut of the
profile will be taken into consideration.
M4 has different meanings for a contour
with and without a lug:
M4
With a lug:
M4 > 0:
M4 is interpreted as the distance from
the intersecting plane to the knuckle
of the contour at the lug.
M4 < 0:
M4 is interpreted as the distance
along the profile trace from the profile
end to the starting point of the arc at
the
lug.
See
Figure
6:15.:
Interpretation of M4 (contour with
lug).
Figure 6:15. Interpretation of M4 (contour with lug).

6:17
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Default: M4 = -50
Contour without a lug:
M4 is the distance in the intersection plane
between the profile trace and the resulting
contour.
M4 is the distance in the intersection plane
between the profile trace and the resulting
contour.
See Figure 6:16.: Interpretation of M4
(contour without lug).
Figure 6:16. Interpretation of M4 (contour without lug).
The default is dependent on the angle ( x ) between the profile trace and
the intersecting plane:
x < 110 degrees: M4 = 100
x >= 110 degrees : M4 = 75
Remarks:
1. The length of the contour from the intersection plane to the edge of the profile will be
available as the parameter value H in the LEN-clause in the BOUNDARY syntax for
a free side, see Free Side Syntax.
2. If the position of the panel is defined by a profile overlap, the origin will lie in the
intersection point between the intersecting plane and the profile trace, the u-axis
along the intersecting plane and the v-axis in the direction towards the overlapped
profile. The uv-plane coincides with the plane of the profile end.
When evaluating the circulation direction, this should be kept in mind.
In such cases, it is recommended to avoid local (uv) coordinates in input.
6.1.11
Examples
A number of examples of the normal syntax follows below:

6:18
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Example 1:
Penetration of bottom web.
Example:
PAN, 'AA161-7', DT=101;

BOU, FR117 /'ZPLANE',
CORR=-20/'AA461-3';
Figure 6:17. Panel generated by the same input.
The material thickness of AA461-3 will automatically be taken into consideration.

Example 2:
Generation of the same panel:
Example:
BOU, FR117 /V=5200/U=13006;

If possible, the solution of Example 1 should be chosen.
Example 3:
Generation of web against a longitudinal bulkhead.
Example:
PAN, 'AA461-7', DT=104, FR117;

BOU, 'AA461-3'/Z=5220/Y=16006/V=29350;
Note: that, in this case, the position of the panel is defined by giving the frame numbers in
the panel statement, since the frame does not make part of the contour of the web.

6:19
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Example 4:
Generation of a carling against the shell.
Example:
Figure 6:18. Small panel (bracket) between longitudinals.
PAN='CARLING', BRACKET;
BOU, FR81/L200, CROSS, CORR=100/V=400/L180, CROSS;
Example 5:
Generation of a stringer overlapping a longitudinal.
Example:
Figure 6:19. Panel overlapping along longitudinal.

6:20
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Example:
PAN='STRINGER', DT= ... ;

BOU, L43, ALONG, X=FR238, CORR=100/X=FR235/Y=20000/X=FR245;
In this case, normally the position of the panel is defined by the longitudinal which it
overlaps.
For more examples, see the Free Side Syntax below (which is an extension of the Normal
Syntax).
6.2
Free Side Syntax

This syntax is used when one of the limits is 'free', i.e. not directly abuts any limiting
element, typically the side between the arms of a bracket.
The Free Side Syntax is a variant of the Normal Syntax, that allows the definition of the free
side by parameters, lengths etc.

6:21
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Syntax:
BOUNDARY, <boundary_1>
(/<boundary>) (0 ... )
/<boundary_n-1>
/[<boundary_n>]
/<boundary_n+1>
(<boundary>) (0 ... );
Description
<boundary_1> and <boundary> have the same definition as in the normal

BOUNDARY syntax. <boundary_n> is the boundary which is 'free'. <boundary_n1> and <boundary_n+1> are the boundaries before and after the 'free' boundary,
respectively. The free side may be quite empty.
<boundary_n> may be the first boundary and, in this case, <boundary_n-1> is the
last boundary.
<boundary_n> may as well be the last boundary and, in this case,

<boundary_n+1> is the first boundary of the panel.
<boundary_n-1>::= <boundary_n+1>::=
<boundary_1>|<boundary>, LENGTH=<length_of_limit>
<boundary_1> may occur only as the first boundary.
<length_of_limit>::= <length>|(H+|-<dist>)
<length>::= <dist>::= <number>
In case the boundary is of type <profile_crossection> (see Syntax Normal), H is
the height of an intersecting profile section, defining the limit in question. See Figure
6:20.: Use of parameter H for profile crossection boundary.
Figure 6:20. Use of parameter H for profile crossection boundary.
In case a boundary of type <overlap_profile_end> (see Syntax Normal), H is the

length of the contour between the two end points A and B in Figure 6:21.: Contour A-B is
length H for overlap boundaries.

6:22
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:21. Contour A-B is length H for overlap boundaries.
H is the length of the boldly marked parts of the figure.
<boundary n>::=
<preliminary_boundary>
[,FREE]
[,M1=<m1>]
[,M2=<m2>]
<preliminary_boundary>::= <boundary>
The meaning of <l1>, <v1> etc. will be explained in the figures and the remarks below.
1.
The keyword FREE is used to identify the free side. Normally, Hull Modelling is able
to evaluate that from the rest of the input, but in the following case ambiguity will
prevail if FREE is not given.
there are four boundaries
the free side looks like an ordinary boundary (i.e. it is not empty and
parameters).
has no
Then boundaries 3 and 4 will not be selected as the free side unless FREE is given.
FREE can be given also in the cases when it is redundant.

6:23
12 Series

Boundary Statement
2.
The boundaries must form a preliminary closed contour according to the same rules
as for Normal Syntax. If the boundaries except <boundary_n> fulfil this
requirement, then <preliminary_boundary> may be missing, as in Figure
6:22.: Panel with free side, no preliminary free side boundary required. where the
boundaries 1, 2, 4 and 5 form a closed preliminary contour. No
<preliminary_boundary> need be given for boundary 3 (= <boundary_n>).
Figure 6:22. Panel with free side, no preliminary free side boundary required.
(The figures are boundary numbers.)

If this requirement is not met as in Figure 6:23.: Panel with free side, preliminary
boundary 2 required., then a <preliminary_boundary> must be given. Here,
<boundary_n> is boundary 2 and the boundaries 1 and 3 do not form a closed
contour. Thus a <preliminary_boundary> must be defined for boundary 2.
Figure 6:23. Panel with free side, preliminary boundary 2 required.

6:24
12 Series

Boundary Statement
3.
The preliminary contour created in this way will then be modified to the final contour
in steps as follows:
1. <boundary_n-1> will be shortened to the length <length_of_limit>
(or possibly extended), counted from its starting point.
2. <boundary_n+1> will be shortened to the length <length_of_limit>
(or possibly extended), counted from its ending point.
If the original length of the boundary is less than the one demanded, then the
contour will be extended along its tangent in the concerned end point.
3. So far, the end points of the 'free' boundary <boundary_n> are defined. Its
detailed shape is controlled by the parameters given in <boundary_n> as
illustrated below. There are two cases.
Case A
The free boundary has two toes connected with a line segment. (Keywords R1 and
R2 are used.)

6:25
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:24. Parameters at start of free side.
Figure 6:25. Parameters at end of free side.
The parameters define two 'toes', one at each end of the free side.
<m1>
/
<m2>
<r1>
/
<r2>
<v1>
is the height (or length) of the toe in a direction perpendicular to

<boundary_n-1>(/<boundary_n+1>). May be missing.
is the radius of the arc being part of the toe. May be missing.
is the inclination in the positive direction of arc 1 relative to the preceding

segment, measured in the counter-clockwise direction.
Default values:
m1 = 0
v1 = 80
m1 > 0
v1 = 0
Note: If v1=0, then m1 should be considered a toe length rather than a

toe height.
<v2>
is the inclination in the negative direction of arc 2 relative to the following

segment, measured in the clockwise direction.
Default values:
m2 = 0 :
v2 = 80
m2 > 0 :
v2 = 0
Case B
The free boundary has two 'toes' connected by one radius. (Keyword R is used.)
Two subcases may occur:
6:26
12 Series

Boundary Statement
I.
<t1> and <t2> are omitted.

This means that the two 'toes' are connected by the arc with radius <R>.
Figure 6:26. Free side, consisting of toes and one arc.

6:27
12 Series

Boundary Statement
II
<t1> and <t2> are both given.

Then an arc with radius <R> will be inserted as a fillet between two lines
from the toes. The deviation angles of these lines relative to adjoining
segments will be <t1>(=80) and <t2>(=85), respectively. See Figure 6:27.:
Free side, consisting of toes and fillet between straight lines.
Figure 6:27. Free side, consisting of toes and fillet between straight lines.

6:28
12 Series

Boundary Statement
4.
The following procedure is recommended when generating a panel with a free side:
1. Decide how many boundaries the panel finally will have. Write BOUNDARY
and one new slash on a new line each for the boundaries 2, 3, etc. giving:
BOU,
/
/
/ ...
;
2. Decide the number of the free boundary and write down the other boundaries.
It is never wrong to add FREE to the free side even if it is not required in most
cases.
BOU, 'A'
/ 'B'
/ FREE
/ 'C'
/ ...
;
('free side')
3. Examine if the boundaries, so far defined, form a closed contour. If not, add a
rough preliminary boundary along the free side, closing the contour.
4. Add 'length_of_limit' along the surrounding limits, giving:
BOU, 'A'
/ 'B', LEN = ...
/
('free side')
/ 'C', LEN = ...
/ ...
;
5. Finally, add toe heights, radii, etc. for the free side giving:
BOU, 'A'
/ 'B', LEN = ...
/ M1 = ... , R1 = ...
/ 'C', LEN = ...
/ ...
;
Note: The free side may be quite empty (if it has no toes, for instance).
Below follows a number of examples of the Free Side Syntax (which also includes all the
facilities of the Normal Syntax).

6:29
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Example 1:
A connection bracket between two webs:
Example:
Figure 6:28. Bracket panel, generated with a free side.
PAN= ... ;
BOU, 'A', F1, LEN=800
/U=20500, V=5000, T=150, M1=15,
M2=15, R2=200, 80
/'B', F1, LEN=450;

6:30
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Example 2:
Ending
bracket
for
longitudinal
against
the
shell.
In
this
case,
no
<preliminary_boundary> need be defined to close the contour. Therefore it is

empty.
Example:
Figure 6:29. Complicated bracket panel, generated with free side.
PAN= ... ;
BOU, 'LONGCURVE'
/X=FR315+200, LEN=250
/M1=100, R1=150
/'WEB', S1, LEN=H-20, CROSS
/'WEB';

6:31
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Example 3:
Bracket between longitudinals against a frame curve.
Example:
Figure 6:30. Panel bracket, generated with simple free side.
PAN= ... ;
BOU, FR65
/L1230, CROSS, LEN=H-20
/FREE
/L510, CROSS, LEN=H-20
;
Note: that, in this case, the 'free side boundary' is quite empty.

6:32
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Example 4:
Generation of a panel bracket, overlapping a profile end.
Example:
Figure 6:31. Panel bracket generated with overlap boundary and free side.
PAN, 'BRA', BRACKET;

BOU, OVERL, L320, SID=FOR, 'PANA', R, M1=-50, LEN = H+15
/B1
/B1, S5, CROSS, LEN=H-50
/M1=100, R1=100
;
In this case, several default values have been supposed in the OVERLAP boundary.
6.3
Boundary Syntax for Special Side Webs
6.3.1
General about Special Side Webs

The geometry of certain side webs is defined by characteristic measures, e.g. so that the
maximum width of a plate is not exceeded. Hull Modelling offers the possibility to generate
them under certain conditions described below, controlled by special geometry types.
6.3.2
Restrictions
The following requirements must be fulfilled for the 'special webs'.
1. The web must have four boundaries.
2. The first boundary must be a frame curve.
3. The 'free' side, the location of which is defined by measures, must be boundary number
3.

6:33
12 Series

Boundary Statement
4. Boundaries 2 and 4 must be straight lines (which, however, may result from plane
intersecting panels, etc.).
5. Allowed geometry types are 102, 103 and 104.
6.3.3
Syntax, General
The general syntax for a 'special side web' is:
PANEL, ... , GT = <geo_type>

;
BOU, <frame_reference>
/<straight_boundary>
/<free_side>
;
<geo_type>::= 102|103|104
6.3.4
<straight_boundary>
Boundary (cf Normal Syntax) resulting in

one line segment.
<free_side>
Measures and coordinates defining the

location of the boundary.
Syntax, Geometry Type 102
<free_side>::=
,M1 = <m1>
[,M2 = <m2>]
[,M3 = <m3>]
,M4 = <m4>
[,M5 = <m5>]
[,M6 = <m6>]
<m1>::= <m2>::= <m3>::= <m4>::= <m5>::= <m6>::= <number>

6:34
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:32. Parameters, controlling side web with geometry type 102.
The significance of the measures are illustrated in Figure 6:32.: Parameters, controlling side
web with geometry type 102.
m2, m3 (m5, m6) are used to define the origin of the radius of length m1 (m4), which is to
touch the frame curve. Any of m2, m3, m5, m6 may be skipped, giving a default value of 0.
Example:
PAN, ...
GT = 102, ... ;
BOU, FR97/'PAN', F1/

M1 = 2000, M2 = 2000,
M3 = 1000, M4 = 2050, M5 = 500,
M6 = 5500/
V = 13000;
6.3.5
<free side>::= M1=<m1>

<m1>::= <number>

6:35
12 Series

Boundary Statement
Figure 6:33. Parameter, controlling side web with geometry type 103.
The free side, in this case, consists of a vertical line, the distance of which from the frame
curve is defined by M1.
Example:
PAN, ... GT = 103, ... ;

BOU, FR97/U = 20000, V = 26000, T = 170/M1 = 1200
/Z = 13000;
6.3.6
<free side>::= M1 = <m1>

6:36
12 Series

Boundary Statement
<m1>::= <number>
Figure 6:34. Coordinates and parameter, controlling side web with geometry type 104.
The significance of the values is illustrated by Figure 6:34.: Coordinates and parameter,
controlling side web with geometry type 104. The free side is defined by its minimum
distance (m1) from the frame curve and by its distance from the centre line of the ship either
at its lower or its upper end.
The distance at its lower end is given by using U1 or Y1, at the upper end by using U2 or Y2.
Example:
PAN = ... , GT = 104, ... ;

BOU, FR101/Z = 28000/M1 = 12000, Y1 = 19750
/Z = 13000;

6:37
12 Series

Boundary Statement
6.4
Trigger in Boundary
Description
The very first time a boundary is created there is now implemented a possibility to start a
trigger. The trigger is named: phulltriggerpostboundarycreation.pmlfnc and can be found
under the path: <installation catalogue>\PMLLIB\hulldesign\functions.
In the installation this trigger will not do anything at all. This is so it will not disturb any
ongoing projects. In order to have the trigger in use, the trigger must be edited and the
comment marks must be removed (remove the minus signs).
define function !!pHullTriggerPostBoundaryCreation()

-- !marPanel = object MARHULLPAN()
-- !unusedPanel = object
PHULLNOTCH(!marPanel.panListActivePML()
endfunction
The trigger in the installation is only an example that will create notches in the panel corners
and also find intersecting seams to make scallops. To make the trigger effective, it must be
customized.
The trigger will not be started when boundary is rerun or modified.

6:38
12 Series

Component Statements
7.1
Common Features
The statements for generation of different components of a panel (stiffeners, flanges,
brackets, etc.) are, to a large extent, unique and will be treated individually. However, they
have some features in common, which will be explained first.
1. Repetition
In most cases, several (maximum 25) components can be generated in one statement.
The number of components is defined by the keyword with the largest number of
assigned values (or by the highest number of references). See General Layout of a
Statement.
2. Definition of Position
The definition of positions can be made explicitly or implicitly.
Explicitly it is done by giving the positions of end points of stiffeners, etc., by
coordinates. The coordinates may be given either in the uv-system of the panel or in
the xyz-system of the ship.
Implicitly it is done by referring to already existing components on the panel or on
adjoining panels, longitudinals or to topology points, etc.
To as large an extent as possible, the implicit way of defining the position should be
used, since the components will then certainly fit together and a topology will be
established in input.
3. Separation of Input Data
Many types of input data - typical examples are the end point characteristics of a
stiffener and the orientation of two arms of a bracket - are, to a large extent,
symmetrical and syntactically equal. This means that, to be able to use the same
keywords etc., one must separate data concerning the two end points, etc. This is done
by the delimiter / (slash).
Consequently, clauses and references concerning one end point of a stiffener or one
arm of a bracket must be given before the slash, data concerning the other after the
slash.
Apart from that, the order between clauses and references is normally quite free.

7:1
12 Series


7:2
12 Series

Seam Statement
Seam Statement
8.1
General about Seam Statement

The SEAM statement generates seams between parts within a panel. Additional information
related to the seam can be described as well, e.g. bevelling.
Seams may be straight or follow a curve, they may pass over the whole panel or end/start at
another seam.
The generation of seams and plates are integrated in the sense that modifying the seams
affect the plates. When generating seams any existing plates intersected by this seam will
be automatically divided. The geometry of the plate as well as the user-defined point is
updated by the system. Also when deleting or moving seams the affected plates are
updated automatically.
A single plate can be defined before any seams are added. In such a case new plates will
be automatically created when seams are added. The plates created will inherit the relevant
attributes from the original plate. If no plate is defined when adding seams the areas created
inside the panel boundary can be regarded as potential plates.
A seam can intersect the outer contour and/or any existing seam at most two times. The
new seam must not coincide with the outer contour or any existing seam. Each added seam
is normally supposed to divide at least one plate (true or potential) in two, the exception
being the seam "chain" explained below.
A seam chain is composed of seams meeting end-to-end, where these ends are not
connecting to the outer contour or to another seam. Only together the seams in a chain will
divide any plates. The seam chains are found automatically by the system. If e.g. a seam is
added starting at the outer contour and ending inside the panel, no new plates are created
as the seam doesn't intersect the panel surface.
If then another seam is added starting where the previous one ended and ending at the
outer contour, a seam chain is created and two (potential) plates are created.

8:1
12 Series

Seam Statement
If then a third seam is added from the upper right corner ending at the connection point it will
not be part of any chain as the two existing seams are already connected. However it will
intersect a plate creating the third plate.
The third seam should have a TO keyword to emphasize that it is not part of the chain.
To be chained a seam must:
Be defined by <line_two_uv-points> or by a curve.
Have one or two end(s) not stopping at the outer contour but meeting the end of
another chainable seam.
Not have TO and/or FROM defined for the end(s) to connect.
The order between, or the directions of, the seams to be chained is not significant. As long
as seams are ending inside a (potential) plate, the system will search for seams to chain.
Seam chains can e.g. be used if different bevelling or excess is needed along a seam as
only one set of values can be given for each seam.

8:2
12 Series

Seam Statement
Syntax:
SEAM[,<bevelling>]
[,BVT=<string>]
[,COM[MENT]=<comment>]
[,<excess>[<exc_type>][,GRI=<number][,WEL=number]]
<seam_along_line> |
<seam_parallel> |
<perpendicular_seam> |
<seam_for_panel> |
<seam_along_curve>
Example:
SEAM, Z=1500, BEV=002;

8:3
12 Series

Seam Statement
Description:
<bevelling>
is used to define the bevelling along the seam, using a bevelling code,
see the Design Standards.
The bevelling may be symmetric on both sides of the seam or
unsymmetric.
<bevelling>:=
(BEV=<bev_code> |([,LBEV= <bev_code>]
[,RBEV=<bev_code>])[,SID=<direction>]
<bev_code>::= <integer>
<direction>::= AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
BEV is used for symmetric bevelling, LBEV for the level to the left of
the seam, RBEV to the right.
SID defines the bevel side. As an alternative the bevel can be given as
a name. In that case; variant, e-measure and side are given with
separate keyword. See Users Guide and Customisation.
BVT
An arbitrary string that will be written along the trace of the seam in
symbolic views.
COMMENT
<excess>
An arbitrary comment string

is used to define excess (or gap) on the parts along the seam.
The excess may be symmetric, and then the given value will be
partitioned equal on both sides.
The value may also be unsymmetric.
<excess>::= EXC= <size>|([,REXC= <size>][,LEXC=

<size>)
<size>::= <number>
A positive excess means additions to the plate(s) along the seam, a
negative excess means gap.
EXC is used for symmetric excess.
LEXC defines excess/gap for the plate to the left of the seam, REXC to
the right.
<exc_type>
is used to specify the type of excess along the seam.
GRI
A number defining the grinding can be given to this keyword.
WEL
A number defining the weld can be given to this keyword.

8:4
12 Series

Seam Statement
<type >::=<number> | <string>

Type is used when the excess type is symmetric, LTYPE and RTYPE
when the excess type is not on both sides.
(The definition type should be in accordance with the definition of the
excess, cf. above.)
If the excess type is not given, the type number of the default
parameter EXC_TYPE_1 will be used.
For both bevelling and excess, "left" and "right" are related to the
direction of the seam.
8.2
Seam along a Line

The seam in this case coincides with a given line.
<seam_along_line>::=
( <line> (1 ... 25) [,REV] ) | <line_two_uv-points>
[,FROM= <from_seam>]
[,TO= <to_seam>]
FROM/TO
A seam within the panel at which the seam to be generated will start/end.
<from_seam>::= <to_seam>::= <integer>

The seam(s) will follow the given line(s) and may start in the intersection with another
seam (FROM) and end at another seam (TO).
If these are not specified, the seam is supposed to start/end at the outer contour.
Note: It is not allowed to set a seam end like this:
Figure 8:1.
8.3
Incorrect (free) end of seam.
Seam Parallel to another Seam

In this sub-syntax, one or several seams are set parallel to an already existing seam or to a
limit of the panel.
<seam_parallel>::=

8:5
12 Series

Seam Statement
(LIM= <limit_no>[,<line>]) |
(SEAM= <seam_no>)
,M1= <dist>
[,M2= <spacing>]
[,NUMB= <number_of_seams>]
[,TO= <to_seam>]
LIM
Limit to which the seam is set parallel.
<limit_no>::= <integer>
SEAM
An already existing seam to which the new seam should be set parallel.
<seam_no>::= <integer>
M1
The distance of the first seam from the limit/existing seam.
<dist>::= <number>
M2
NUMB
The partition between the seams if several seams are set.

Default value = M1.
<spacing>::= <number>
<number_of_seams>::= <integer>
If the seam is set parallel to a limit, the part of the limit to which the seam is parallel can be
chosen by an intersecting line. Otherwise, the seam will be set parallel to the longest
straight segment of the limit.
The seam will have the same direction as the limit or the seam when LIM or SEAM is
positive, otherwise the opposite direction.
When the seam is set parallel to another seam, M1 > 0 means that the new seam is set to
the left of the old one, < 0 to the right.
M2 should always be given without sign.
If several seams are set, the first is set at distance = M1, the second at distance = M1 + M2,
etc. Cf. the figures below.
Figure 8:2.
Seam parallel to tangent of limit in given point.
Seam parallel to a limit.

8:6
12 Series

Seam Statement
Figure 8:3.
Parameters, controlling seams set parallel to another seam.
Seams parallel to another seam.

The seams may start/end at another seam as in seam along line.
8.4
Perpendicular Seam
A seam is generated perpendicular to a limit of the panel.
<perpendicular_seam>::=
,<one_coord_line>
,LIM= <limit_no>
[,TO= <to_seam>]
<one_coord_line>::= U|V|X|Y|Z = <coord>
Limit of which the seam starts
LIM.
The given line intersects the given limit LIM. The system then searches for a limit opposite
to this intersection point. The seam is generated through the intersection point,
perpendicular to the limit opposite to the given one, cf. the figure below.
FROM/TO: As in seam along line.

8:7
12 Series

Seam Statement
Figure 8:4.
Seam perpendicular to opposite limit through given point.
The resulting seam will be directed from the intersection point towards the selected limit.
8.5
Seam for Panel

This syntax generates seams for panels intersecting the current one. Normally each panel
will cause two seams to be generated, one for each side of the panel.
<seam_for_panel>::=
<panel_name> (1...25>
[,REF]
[,DIR=<direction>]
<panel_name>::=<name>
Indicates that the given panel(s) should be reflected in the CL-plane. All panels
REFL
must be reflected
DIR
Should be used when the direction of the seam is crucial, i.e. when it has an
unsymmetric bevel or excess
<direction>::=AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
8.6
Seam for Curve

This syntax generates seams along given curves. The curves are supposed to be available
in the uv-coordinate system of the panel and would normally be the result of a CURVE
statement in the same input scheme.
The resulting seam will be cut off at its intersection point with outer contour or with another
specified seam.
<seam_for_curve>::=
<curve_name> (1...25)
[,REF]
[,DIR=<direction>]

8:8
12 Series

Seam Statement
For the interpretation, cf. <seam_for_panel>. However, DIR is always optional for a
curve. If given, it defines the direction of the tangent of the curve in its starting point.
Example:
SEAM,
SEAM,
SEAM,
SEAM,
SEAM,
SEAM,
Z=2100, BEV=018;
V=2200, LBEV=022, RBEV=018, EXC=30;
Y=1100, 3100, FROM=1;
LIM=1, U=17000, FROM=1;
'PAN_1', 'PAN_2';
'CURVE_1', REFL;

8:9
12 Series

Seam Statement

8:10
12 Series

Plate Statement
Plate Statement
Input in this statement is used to define the plates of a panel. The plates will eventually - in
the splitting process - result in plate parts.
Syntax:
PLATE[, <point> (1 ... 25)]

, <material>
[, <material_location>]
[, QUAL = <quality>]
[, DEST=<destination>]
[, SURF=<surface_treatment>]
[, RAW=<raw_plate_name>]
[, POS = <pos_no> (1 ... 25)]
[, <id's>]
[,<assembly>]
[,<COL[OUR] = <colour>]
[,<COM[MENT] = <comment>]
;
Example:
PLATE, U=15000, V=2550, MAT=12.5;

9:1
12 Series

Plate Statement
Description:
Each plate is defined by giving one point anywhere on the plate.
<point>
If the plate consists of one plate only, the point can be left out.
<material>
Defines the position of the surfaces of the plate along the w-axis of
the uvw-system of the panel (and hence the plate thickness).
<material>::= MAT =
(<side_1>[, <side_2>],) (1 ... 25)
<side_1>::= <side_2>::= <number>
If any of the sides of the plate coincides with the mould plane of the panel, only one
number (which always is a coordinate) need be assigned to MAT, otherwise two.
Compare the figures below.
Figure 9:1.
Position, one value >0.
Figure 9:2.
Plate position, one value <0.

9:2
12 Series

Plate Statement
Figure 9:3.
Plate position, two values (coordinates).
Figure 9:4.
Plate position, mould plane outside plate.
The coordinates are always given along the normal of the panel.
Remark:
If two plates are generated in the same statement and values are
assigned to MAT, then one value will be used for each plate.
Consequently, the two values are not interpreted as the
coordinates of the two plate surfaces to be used for both plates.
<material_location>

9:3
12 Series

Plate Statement
Normally, the plate is supposed to be defined from the positive waxis.

However, the user can select to look at the panel from any direction
when defining "this side" and "other side". This clause defines the
one that is used.
<material_location>::=
MSIDE=AFT|FORE|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
QUAL
defines the material quality of the plate.
<quality_code>::= <integer>
<quality_string>::= <string>
If left our entirely, mild steel is supposed.
Qualities may also be given as strings. However, then the quality
must be selected as one of the strings defined by the user.
DEST
defines the workshop station where to assemble the plate.
<destination>::= <name>
The value to be assigned must be selected among the destination
strings defined by the customer. .
SURF
defines the surface treatment of the plate before the production

phase.
<surface_treatment>::= <name>
The value to be assigned must be selected among the surface
treatment strings defined by the customer.
RAW
defines the raw plate name. There is made no checks of the

contents of the string.
<raw_plate_name>::= <name>
POS
defines the position number of the plate to be used for marking in

the production.
<pos_no>::= <integer>

9:4
12 Series

Plate Statement
<id's>
correspond to the items assigned to the keywords LIS, AS1-AS4 in

the panel statement (cf. that statement).
<id's>::= LIS=<parts_list>,
AS1=<name>,
AS2=<name>,
AS3=<name>,
AS4=<name>
The name given in the plate statement will override the
corresponding name given on panel level.
To cancel a name set on panel level without replacing it with
another name, the corresponding keyword should be given stand
alone (i.e. without any assigned value) or be assigned an empty
string (e.g. AS3='').
<assembly>
Cf. Panel statement. If the plate belongs to a different assembly
than the panel in general, that assembly can be specified here.
COLOUR
COMMENT
Colour of all plates defined in the statement.

Example:
The first example is a panel with only one plate
PLA, MAT=14;
PLA, X=FR75(2)77, Z=1500, MAT=15, MSIDE=PS;
PLA, U=10000, V=1500(3000)17000, MAT=12-17;

9:5
12 Series

Plate Statement

9:6
12 Series

Notch Statement
10
Notch Statement
This statement generates different types of standard notches that are covered by the Design
Standards. It is also possible to set arbitrary curves defined by the user as notches. As
another option, the customer may make extensions of his own to the notch standard via a
Vitesse trigger.
For details about notch in AVEVA Marine, the in-built standard and the option to extend the
notch standard, see Hull / Setup and Customisation / Holes and Notches / Notch Standards.
The notches may be generated in plates and stiffeners. Since the syntaxes are somewhat
different they are described separately. See also Hull / Setup and Customisation / Holes and
Notches / Notch Standards.
10.1
Notches in Plates
Notches in plates can be located in different ways:
at corners
along a limit
at seams in the shell or on an adjacent panel.

10:1
12 Series

Notch Statement
Syntax:
[,FIC[TITIOUS]]
Description
<notch_designation>
<notch_designation>::=
is the standard notch designation.
<string>
Example:
R75
<notch_name>
is the name of an arbitrary notch existing as a curve

in the data bank or created by a curve statement. If
no position is defined it is supposed to be described
in its wanted position directly according to the given
coordinates.
<notch_name>::=<name>
MIRR
means that the notch should be reflected in its vaxis. Irrelevant for standard notches.
<symmetry>
Normally notches on a symmetric panel are

supposed to be valid both portside and starboard.
However, it is possible to indicate that a notch
should be used portside only or starboard only. This
clause is relevant on a symmetric panel (SBPS
panel) only.
<symmetry>::= P | S
P means portside specific,
S means starboard specific.
COMMENT

An arbitrary comment string.
10:2
12 Series

Notch Statement
Giving this keyword means that the generated notch

will not be considered as a notch in splitting. The
notch will rather be treated as a marking contour.
FIC
10.1.1
Notch Along a Limit

The notch is located at the intersection between a given limit (LIM) and a given one
coordinate line.
<notch_along_limit>::=
,LIM=<limit_no>
,U|V|X|Y|Z= <coord> (1 ... 25)
[,ALONG]
(<limit_no>::= <integer>)
ALONG
Normally a notch is placed perpendicular to the limit. By

giving this keyword the notch will be centred around the
given line (i.e. its v-axis will coincide with the line).
Example:
NOT, R50, LIM=1, Y=10000(400)12000;
10.1.2
Notch for Seam

The notch is set for a seam/butt in the shell or for a seam on an adjacent panel.
<notch_for_seam>::=
[,<adj_name>]
,SEAM= <seam_no>, (1 ... 25) [,REF]
<adj_name>
gives the name of an adjacent panel or surface. If left out, a seam in

the main shell surface is supposed.
<adj_name>::= <name>
Example:
NOT, R75, 'OUTER', SEA=71;

NOT, R50, 'BULKH', SEAM=2;
10.1.3
Notch at Corner
This subsyntax is used to define notches at the corners of the panel.

10:3
12 Series

Notch Statement
(Corner no i is the starting point of limit no i of the current panel.)
<notch_at_corner>::=
, COR= <corner_no> (1 ... 25)
[,LIM= <limit_no> (1 ... 25)]
<corner_no>::= <limit_no>::= <integer>
For unsymmetric notches, it is necessary to specify along which limit the unsymmetric notch
should fall.
Example:
NOT, VUF200*75*50, COR=1, LIM=3;
10.1.4
Notch at Plate Corner

At Seam End
Notch is set for seam ending at outer contour.
NOT, <notch_designation> [,MIR], SEA=<seam_no>,

SID=<direction> [,DIR=<direction>];
Description
MIR
Makes an unsymmetrical notch fall along the seam.
SEA
Gives the seam ending at the outer contour.
SID
Gives the side of seam.
DIR
Gives the seam end if intersecting the outer contour twice.
At Seam Intersections
Notch is set for the seam intersection.
NOT, <notch_designation> [,MIR], SEA=<seam_no>,

SID=<direction> / SEA=<seam_no>, SI2=<direction>;
Description
MIR
Makes an unsymmetrical notch fall along the second seam.
SEA
Gives the two seams intersecting each other.
SID, SI2
Gives side of the seams defining the quadrant.

10:4
12 Series

Notch Statement
Notch from Design to Production Mode

Depending on the type of seams used to create a notch in the design mode, the notch could
be converted to other types while transferred into production mode, according to the
following rules:
10.2
Design mode
Production mode
One seam
Notch at seam end
Notch at seam end
One block seam
Notch at seam end
Notch at corner
Two seams/butts
Notch at
seams
intersection
of
Notch at
seams
One seam/butt, one block

seam
Notch at
seams
intersection
of
Notch at seam end
Two block seams
Notch at intersection seams
intersection
of
Notch at corner
Notch in Stiffener
Notches in stiffeners can be located in different ways:
at intersections with seams in the same panel.
at given distances from the end of the stiffener.
at the intersection with given lines.
Syntax:
NOTCH, <notch_designation> | <notch_name>
<notch_designation> and <notch_name> see Notch in Plate.

MIRR
INC
means that the notch should be reflected in its v-axis.

Normally, the notch is set parallel to the stiffener. INC is the angle the notch
should be turned compared to its normal orientation. The positive direction is
in the direction of the mould line of the stiffener.
Note: The notches may not intersect the stiffener ends.

10:5
12 Series

Notch Statement
10.2.1
Notch for Seam

Notches are set for a seam in the same panel.
<notch_for_seam>::=
,SEAM= <seam_no>, (1 ... 25)
<S-ref> (1 ... 25)
[SID= <direction>]
<seam_no>
<S-ref>
Number of the seams for which notches should be made.

Selects the stiffeners in the same panel in which the notches should be
generated.
Note that if the stiffener is selected on a tag reference, several different
stiffeners may be selected.
Relevant only in cases when the stiffener is identified by a tag reference
and stiffeners with the same tag exist on both sides of the panel.
SID
The direction is specified either relative to the w-axis or as a main ship

direction.
<direction>::= -1 | 1 |AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
Note: that notches will be generated in all possible combinations of the given seams and
stiffeners.
10.2.2
Notch at Line
Notches are set at all intersections between given lines and selected stiffeners.
<notch_at_line>::=
U | V | X | Y | Z = <coord> (1 ... 25)
, <S-ref>
[SID= <direction>]
Intersections must exist between all the given lines and all the selected stiffeners, otherwise
an error will be issued. (However, when stiffeners are selected on tags not all individual
stiffeners need intersect, only one "representative" of each tag.)
10.2.3
Notch at Distance
Notches are given at given distances from any of the ends of the given stiffener.
<notch_at_distance>::= D= <dist> (1 ... 25) <S-ref> (1 ... 25)
is the distance from any of the end points of the stiffener.

>0
from the starting point.
<0
from the ending point.

10:6
12 Series

Notch Statement
<S-ref> Tag references are not allowed when notches are set in this subsyntax.
If any of the given distances should lie outside the stiffener, the corresponding notch will be
shipped without notification.
Example:
NOT, R30, SEAM=1-3, SL1-10;

NOT, R25, D=50(300)4000, S1-5;
NOT, R35, X=FR75.5()85.5, SL1, SL3;
Note, the syntax is very powerful and a large number of notches can be set in a large
number of stiffeners in one statement. For example, in the last example above, several
different stiffeners with longitudinal tag numbers 1 and 3 may be intersected by the given
lines.
10.2.4
Remark
Since the stiffener itself and its notches are generated in different statements in certain
situations all of the involved statements might have to be rerun to get a correct result. If not
done, the system will issue a warning message and "make the best possible" of the current
situation.

10:7
12 Series

Notch Statement

10:8
12 Series

Hole Statement
11
Hole Statement
The hole statement generates holes in plates or stiffeners. The holes are normally instances
of the parameter controlled hole standards. However, any closed contour may be used as a
hole.
A rather comprehensive hole standard is built into AVEVA Marine and can be accessed
without any special initialisation. However, a customer may make extensions of his own to
the hole standard via a Vitesse trigger.
For details about holes, the in-built standard and the option to extend the hole standard, see
Hull, Set-up and Customisation, Holes and Notches, Hole Standards.
11.1
Holes in Plates
Holes will be generated in the order they are set, starting in 1 for the first hole rulers
otherwise specified.

11:1
12 Series

Hole Statement
Syntax:
HOLE,
<stand_hole>, <position> (1 ... 25)) |

(<object>[, <position> (1 ... 25)])
[, FIC[TITIOUS]]
[,<PIL=<pno>]
[,<M1=<DIST>]
[,<symmetry>]
[,CRO[SSMARKING]]
[,SPC=<comp_name> [,POS=<pos_no>]
[,SI2=<side>]]
[,BEV=<bevel> [,SET=<set_no>]]
[,BRI [, BRW=<dist>]
[, BRR=<bridge_radius>]
[, <line_2>
| <line_two_uv-points>
| <line_two_xyz-points>] ]
[,HOO [ =<hook_position>(1 10)]
[, HGP=<dist>]
[, HRA=<hook_radius>]
[, HTY=<hook_end_type>] ]
[,COL[OUR]=<colour>]
[,<ids>]
;
Example:
HOLE,D500, U=FR75, V=1000;

HOLE,HO800*600, U=4000, V=2000, T=90, SPC=SPLATE2, SI2=FOR,
POS=18;
HOLE,PANEL1, PIL=2, M1=25, BEV=250;

11:2
12 Series

Hole Statement
Description:
<stand_hole>
is a parameterised designation of standardized holes according to

the standards.
<stand_hole>::= <string>
Example: H0600*300
<object>
is either the name of an object containing in contour 0 a closed

contour or the name of an object, penetrating the current panel.
The system will automatically find out based on its object code.
<object>::= <name>
Example: 'SPEC_HOLE'
PIL
This keyword can only be given when <object> is a panel with a

penetrating pillar.
<pno> is the pillar number of the penetrating pillar in <object>.

M1
If the hole is made for a penetrating object (such as a pillar) then

M1 is the parallel displacement of the hole compared to the
section contour. This it is incompatible with M1 when
<position> is given.
SPC
This keyword defines that a spigot plate is attached to the hole.
<comp_name> is an arbitrary text string to indicate the type of

spigot plate.
<pos_no> is the position number of the spigot plate

<side> is the side of the panel where the spigot plate is
positioned.
Possible values are AFT, FOR, PS, SB, TOP and BOT.
BEV
Defines the bevelling of the hole contour. The bevel is valid for the
complete hole.
GRI
SET
Defines the grinding for the hole.
NAB
Switch off automatic bevel. There will then be no bevel in the

hole.
BRI
Given when a hole with a bridge is required. If <line_2> or

<line_two_uv-points> or <line_two_xyz-points> is given, bridge is
defined according to line.
If <set> is of a varying type (dotori) then specifies the bevel set it

belongs to.
If line keyword is omitted, bridge in place of seam crossing is

constructed. One bridge for hole is possible.
BRW
Bridge width - distance between two parts of hole contour. If not

given, BRIDGE_WIDTH default value is used. Bridge width is
greater than 0.
<dist> ::=<number>
BRR
The radius of the corners of the bridge. If not given,

BRIDGE_RADIUS default value is used. Radius is equal or greater
than 0.
<bridge_radius> ::=<number>

11:3
12 Series

Hole Statement
HOO
Given when the hole is to be cut geometry with hooks. Comaseparated values <hook_position> indicate percentage of length
from the start of the hole contour where hole hooks are placed.
If no hook position is given, hole will be constructed with a gap with
hooks for seam crossing. One seam crossing is possible.
HGP
The gap for a hook. Gap is measured along line parallel to hole
contour between end points of partial hole contours. If not given,
HOOK_GAP default value is used. Hook gap is greater than 0.
<dist> ::=<number>
HRA
The radius of the hook. If not given, HOOK_RADIUS default value

is used. Hook radius is greater than 0.
<hook_radius> ::=<number>
HTY
The type for the hook:

0
1
2
3
COLOUR
COMMENT
<position>
Hook on both ends (default)

Hook on end of contour part
Hook on start of contour part
Opening is created without hooks
Colour of all holes defined in the statement

defines the location and orientation of the hole. If a hole contour
has been created in its proper location, it can be left out.
<position>::= (<hole_at_limit>|
<point>[,<inclination>])
<inclination> may be defined by an angle if uv-coordinates
have been used, otherwise by an additional point.
<inclination>::= (T=<angle>) | <point_T>

<point_T> is a point defined by XT/YT/ZT.
If no inclination is given, the inclination angle is set to 0.
<hole_at_limit> defines the position of a hole related to a

given limit of the panel. The hole is located at a certain distance
from the limit and may be turned parallel to the limit.
<hole_at_limit>::=
<line>
,LIM=<limit_no>
,M1=<dist>
[,ALONG]
[,PARALLEL]
[,INC=<angle>]
<dist>::= <number>
The centre of the hole is located on the given line at the distance
M1 from the given limit LIM.
If ALONG is given, the distance will be measured along the line,
otherwise perpendicularly to the limit.
If PARALLEL is given, the hole will be parallel to the limit,
otherwise to the line. For further details, see the figures below.

11:4
12 Series

Hole Statement
If INC is given, the hole will be rotated <angle> degrees around

the centre point of the hole.
FIC
Giving this keyword means that the generated hole will not be
considered as a hole in the splitting. The hole will rather be treated
as a marking contour.
<symmetry>
Holes in symmetrical panels ("SBPS-panels") are normally

supposed to be valid portside and starboard.
This clause may be used to indicate that a certain hole is relevant
portside only or starboard only. It is relevant only for symmetrical
panels.
<symmetry>::= P | S
P means port side specific
CRO
Giving this keyword means that the generated hole will get a cross
placed in the centre point. (Only for standard holes and a
parameter, PIPECROSS, must be defined in the default file).
<ids>
General purpose strings.
[AS1=<name>,]
[AS2=<name>,]
[AS3=<name>,]
[AS4=<name>,]
Correspond to the items assigned to the keywords AS1-AS4 in
the panel statement (cf. that statement). The General Purpose
String can be defined if the environment variable
SBH_HOLE_GPS is given any value.

11:5
12 Series

Hole Statement
Figure 11:1.
Parameters for control of hole along limit
Example:
HOLE,
HOLE,
HOLE,
HOLE,
HOLE=
HOLE,
HOLE,
HOLE,

H0900*600, U=10000(900)12700,
V=700, T=90;
'SPEC_HOLE';
D700, X=FR75, Y=1000;
HE200*75, X=100, Y=200, XT=200,
YT=300;
HE150*80, LIM=1, X=FR75( )83,
M1=60, PARALLEL;
HO800*600, U=4000, V=2000, T=90, SPC=
'SPLATE2', SI2=FOR, POS=18;
'PANEL1', PIL=2, M1=25, BEV=250;
HE1000*400*50, U=3000, V=2000, T=-140,
HOO=10,50,80, HRA=10;
11:6
12 Series

Hole Statement
11.2
Holes in Stiffener
Holes in stiffeners are handled in a similar way to holes in plates. The way of defining their
position is, however, a little different. They may be set:
at the intersection with given lines.
at given distances from the end points of the stiffener.
Syntax:
HOLE, (<stand_hole>|<hole_object>)
D = <dist> (1 ... 25)
,{
U|V|X|Y|Z = <coord> (1 ... 25)
,M1 = <distance>
,INC = <inclination>
<S-ref> (1 ... 25)
[,SID = <direction> ] ;
Description
<stand_hole>
<hole_object>
D
Cf. Holes in Plates.

is the distance from any of the end points of the stiffener.
> 0 from the starting point.
< 0 from the ending point.
As an alternative, the position is defined as the intersection point between the stiffener(s)
and given one-coordinate lines:
M1
The distance from the plate surface (= foot point of the stiffener) to
the centre of the hole.
INC
Inclination of the hole. Normally, it will be set parallel to the

direction of the stiffener.
INC is the angle from the positive direction of the stiffener to the uaxis of the hole.
<S-ref>
is used in the current panel to select the stiffeners in which the

holes should be inserted.
Note: If the stiffener is selected on a tag reference, several
different stiffeners may be selected for each number.
SID
is relevant only in cases when the stiffener is identified by a tag

reference and stiffeners with the same tag exist on both sides of
the panel. The direction is specified either relative to the w-axis or
as a main ship direction.
<direction>::= -1 | +1
|AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT

11:7
12 Series

Hole Statement
Example:
HOLE, HE150*75, M1=100, D=200(250)2000, S1;

HOLE, D50, M1=75, X=FR75()80+25, SL1-5;
Note: Since the syntax is very powerful a large number of holes may be set in an
unrestricted number of stiffeners in the last example above.
Important: Since the stiffener itself and its holes are generated in different statements in
certain situations all of the involved statements might have to be rerun to get a
correct result. If not done the system will issue a warning message and "make
the best possible" of the current situation
11.3
Bridged Holes
11.3.1
General
In then system, a normal hole is always closed. Whenever a hole is intersected by a seam it
is divided and inserted in the boundary of the resulting plate part. In Nesting it is then
possible with the help of bridges to "close" the hole.
For bridged holes the designer has a possibility to determine if a hole shall be bridged
already in the design phase, in some different situations.
The rules for how the hooks and bridges should be created can be controlled both in the
hole statement and as keywords in the default file for hull modelling.
In Planar Modelling User Guide Default File of Hull Modelling the following keywords are
defined BRIDGE_WIDTH, BRIDGE_RADIUS, HOOK_GAP, HOOK_RADIUS.
11.3.2
Seam Crossing Hole

If a seam is defined across a hole, the designer has the possibility to state that the hole
should be 'opened' with a predefined distance. In the drawing the hole will be presented with
a gap for the seam. The hole can also be divided into two with a bridge for the seam.

11:8
12 Series

Hole Statement
When ppanparts is run, the hole is not included in the plate boundary. Instead the hole will
be opened up and stop at a predefined distance from the plate edge. This part is available
for cutting.
A default keyword MARK_HOLE_PART in the IP file for Ppanparts controls the minimum
distance from the hole edge to the plate edge. If the distance between the two edges is less
than specified in the keyword, the part of the hole will be treated as a marking.
If the hole is larger than a by the user specified size, the hole will be opened in the middle of
the cut contour.
11.3.3
Manually Defined Bridge

It is also possible to define a bridged hole at an arbitrary place just as a normal hole. They
can be defined in three different ways:
The hole is defined as fictitious. It will be drawn in the drawing, but in the plates it will be
marked and will not be considered in WCOG calculations.
The hole is divided by a bridge defined by a line passing through the hole. It will be
considered in WCOG.
The hole is defined as cut geometries with hooks in the ends. Presentation will be
made in drawings and a contour to be burnt in the plate parts. It will not be considered
in WCOG.

11:9
12 Series

Hole Statement

11:10
12 Series

Cutout Statement
12
Cutout Statement
The cutout statement is used to generate cutouts for intersecting profiles, either in the plates
of the current panel or in stiffeners belonging to it.
The cutouts are selected from the Design Standards. However, the user may also define
variants of the most commonly used cutout types via an external table. To activate such user
defined cutout standards, the name of a cutout definition object should be assigned to the
logical name SBH_CUTSTDOBJ.
12.1
Cutouts in Plates
Cutouts in plates are made for stiffeners in other panels or for shell profiles. In addition to
the actual cutouts, the statement may also define the clip arrangement in the cutout.
Clips can be generated either via the AVEVA Marine built in standard or as customer
defined clips. Customers may define their own clip standard via geometry macros. Clip
handling via geometry macros is documented separately.
The intersections of certain small panels with a flange, like girders or side webs, look very
much like a big T-bar. Cutouts can be made for such a panel in the same way as for a real
profile.

12:1
12 Series

Cutout Statement
Syntax:
CUTOUT, [TYPE=] <type_code>

[,<symmetry>]
,<ext_prof_ref> (1 ... 25)
{
}
<inters_pan>
[,REF]
[,C= <slope>]
[,M1= <width>]
[,CLIP= <clip_code>]
[,CL1= <clip_dim>]
[,CL2= <clip_dim>]
[,CL3= <clip_dim>]
[,AREA= <con_area>]
[ ,CT1 = <clip1_sel> ]
[ ,SID[E] = <direction> ]
[ ,PO1 = <posno_clip1> ]
[ ,NO1 = <number_clip1> ]
[ ,MAT = <dist1>,<dist2> ]
[ ,WEL[D]
= <weld_size> ]
[ ,WCL[IP] = <weld_size>]
[ ,WPR[OF] = <weld_size>]
[ ,WSH[ELL] = <weld_size>]
[ ,BCL[IP]
= <bevel_type>]
[ ,BWE[B]
= <bevel_type>]
[ ,BCW[EB]
= <bevel_type>]
[ ,BFL[A]
= <bevel_type>]
[ ,BCF[LA]
= <bevel_type>]
[ ,BSH[ELL] = <bevel_type>]
[ ,BCS[HELL] = <bevel_type>]
[ ,NABU]
[ ,NABI]
[ ,GRI=<number>]
[ ,SUR[FACE] = <string>]
[ ,DES[TINATION] = <string>]
[ ,QUA[LITY] = <quality> ]
[ ,EXC[ESS] = <dist>]
[ ,EX2 = <dist>]
[ <assembly_info> ]
[ ,COL[OUR] = <colour>]
[ ,COM[MENT] = <comment>]
[, CLH1 = <hole designation for clip
[, HU = ]
[, HV = <v coordinate (1 .. 3)>]
[, HT = ]
12 Series

Cutout Statement
Description
TYPE
is the standard type of a certain cutout.
<type_code>::= <integer>
Note that this keyword can be left out altogether so that the
cutout type is treated as a statement value, assigned directly to
the statement keyword.
<symmetry>
Normally cutouts on a symmetric panel are supposed to be valid

both portside and starboard.
However, it is possible to indicate that a cutout should be used
portside only or starboard only. This clause is relevant on a
symmetric panel (SBPS panel) only.
<symmetry>::= P | S
<ext_prof_ref>
defines the profile for which the cutout should be made. See
General Layout of a Statement.
Cutouts for flanges cannot be made, however, see below.
<inters_pan>
defines a small T-profile like a panel with a flange intersecting the

current panel. Note that only the panel name should be given.
<inters_pan>::= <name>
C
Certain cutout types have one sloping edge, the slope of which is
controllable. The slope is controlled by the measure C in the
cutout standards, cf Figure 12:1.: Use of parameter C.
Figure 12:1. Use of parameter C.

12:3
12 Series

Cutout Statement
<slope>::= <number>
For customer defined cutouts the following specific rules are
related to the control of the slope:
The slope can be controlled in all cases except on the side

where the cutout has a "lug", i.e. is supposed to be welded
to the profile.
The measure assigned to C should always be the

deviation from the point where the cutout would cut the
base line were C not given.
For cutouts which are open on both sides, any of the sides
might get the slope.
C>0 places the slope on the non-mould line (flange) side, C<0
on the mould line side
M1
is relevant only for cutouts defined in the external cutout

definition. It may be used for all open cutouts.
M1 is the distance from the mould line to the cutout contour on
the free side as indicated in Figure 12:2.: Use of parameter M1.
Figure 12:2. Use of parameter M1.
For cutouts which are open on both sides, M1>0 defines the
distance on the non-mould line (flange) side of the profile,
M1<0 on the mould line side.
<width>::= <number>
CLIP
Defines the clip arrangement according to built in standard.
<clip_code>::= <integer>

12:4
12 Series

Cutout Statement
clip dimensions
CL1-CL3 are used to define the dimensions of the clips, if they

are not to follow the rules stated in the Design Standards. CL1
corresponds to the first (leftmost) figure of the three-figure clip
code assigned to CLIP, CL2 to the second one, etc.
CL1-CL3 may only be used when the corresponding figure of
the clip code is not equal to zero.
<clip_dim>::=
[[<breadth,]<length>,]<thickn>
<breadth>::=<length>::=<thickn>::=<number>
Three numbers assigned to one of the keywords will be
interpreted as the breadth, the length and the thickness
respectively of the clip - two numbers as the length and the
thickness and one number as the thickness. In the latter two
cases, the missing measures will be calculated according to the
rules of the standards.
AREA
When clips are dimensioned automatically, their sizes might be

controlled by the fact that the cutout should have a total
connection area against the profile section.
(Relevant only for built-in Clips standard).
The area should be given in square cm's.
<area>::= <number>
CT1
This is the type of a customer defined clip.
CT1 is valid for the clip on the mould line side of the profile (or
for a clip covering the whole cutout).
<clip_sel>::=
CT2
CT3
<value>
Ditto for a clip on the non-mould line side of the profile.

Ditto in the event that there is a separate clip on top of the
profile.
The keywords CT1,
CT2 and CT3 cannot be used in
combination with the keyword CLI.
SIDE
Used to control on which side of the panel the clip(s) should be

located.
If the SIDE keyword is not used, the clip will still be forced to be
located on the non-moulded side of the panel if the logical
name SBH_CLIP_PANEL_SIDE is assigned value NONMOULD. The other valid value of SBH_CLIP_PANEL_SIDE
is MOULD.
Please observe that the SIDE keyword always overrides any
setting of SBH_CLIP_PANEL_SIDE.
If not given the clip(s) are placed on the moulded side of the
panel.
PO1

The position number of clip number 1 (valid for the clip selected
via CT1).
12:5
12 Series

Cutout Statement
PO2,PO3
Ditto for the second and third clip (if any).

(If SB/PS specific position numbers are required, PP01, SP01
a.s.o. have to be given.)
NO1
The internal number of clip number 1 (valid for the clip selected
via CT1).
NO2,NO3
MAT
Ditto for the second and third clip (if any).

One value is given: The thickness of the clip. Not relevant for
standard clips. If omitted then the clip will get the same
thickness as the plate to which it is welded, unless otherwise
defined by the macro.
Two values are given: The material thickness may also be
defined by two coordinates to the faces of the clip in the
direction of the positive and negative w-axis, respectively. In
this case the clip thickness is given by dist1 - dist2.
WELD
Defines the weld size in general for welding of the clips. Unless
otherwise specified this weld will be valid for all welds of the
current clip.
WCLIP
In case there is a need separately to control the welding of a

seam within a clip this keyword can be used. Otherwise
handled as WELD.
WPROF
In case there is a need separately to control the welding

against the profile compared to other welds of the clip this
keyword can be used. Otherwise handled as WELD.
WSHELL
Ditto welding against the plate that is carrying the profile

(which, for longitudinals and transversals, is the shell).
Otherwise treated as WELD. (Irrelevant for clip 3.)
BCLIP
Bevel type when two clips are welded together and have to be
bevelled beforehand.
BWEB
BCWEB
Bevel type against the web of the profile section.
BFLA
BCFLA
Bevel type against the flange of the profile section.
BSHELL
BCSHELL
Bevel type against the shell (or plate carrying the profile).
NABU
NABI
GRI
SURFACE
Switch off automatic bevel for the cutout.

Bevel type against the web of the profile section if coinciding

with cutout contour. Default is BWEB.
Bevel type against the flange of the profile section if coinciding
with cutout contour. Default is BFLA.
Bevel type against the shell (or plate carrying the profile) if
coinciding with panel contour. Default is BSHELL.
Switch off automatic bevel for the clips.
Defines the grinding for the cutout.
The surface treatment of the clip(s) before the production
phase. The value to be assigned must be selected among the
surface treatment strings defined by the customer. See Surface
Treatment in Set up and Customisation. Default is plate surface
treatment.
12:6
12 Series

Cutout Statement
DESTINATION
The workshop destination showing where the clip(s) are to be

assembled. The value to be assigned must be selected from
the destination strings defined by the customer. See
Destination Definition in Set up and Customisation. Default is
plate destination.
QUALITY
Quality of clip(s). If not given, it is assumed to be equal to that

of the plate onto which they are welded.
EXCESS
Excess on the edge of the clip(s) abutting the shell (or plate
carrying the profile).
EXCESS, EX2
Excess on the edge of the clip(s) abutting the shell (or plate
carrying the profile).
If EX2 is given the second clips will get this value.
<assembly_info>
Specifies the name of the assembly in which the clip(s) will be

used.
The default assembly will be selected as the lowest assembly
level common to both the current panel and the panel carrying
the profile provided that the environment variable
SBH_CLIP_DEF_ASS is set to COMMON.
Colour of all clips defined in the statement.
COLOUR
COMMENT
CLH1
CLH2
CLH3
HU
HW
HT

Parameterised designation of standardised holes for clip 1.
u coordinate
v coordinate
Inclination of hole
Some parameters may be defined by the clip macros. If not given as input the values set
in the macro will be used as a default.
Example: (standard clips):
CUT,
CUT,
CUT,
CUT,
TYP=53, CLI=012, AREA=60, L110-230;

3, 'AA462-7', SL2, CLI=777;
TYP=53, L110, REF, CLI=010, CL2=340, 15;
TYP=5, 'GIRDER';

12:7
12 Series

Cutout Statement
Example: (customer defined clips):
CUT, TYP=10, CT1=101, CT2=102, L120(1)5,

SID=FOR,MAT=8;
CUT, TYP=10, CT1=100, CT2=103, L130(10)200, SID=AFT,
MAT=10, QUA=A36, PO1=100-107, PO2=108-115,
NO1=1-8, NO2=9-16;
CUT, 10, CT1=101, CT3=102, L120(1)5,
SID=FOR,MAT=8,CLH1='D20', CLH3='D25', HU=55,60,
HV=45,65;
12.2
Cutouts for Inter-crossing Panels

A specific cutout type, 9999, is used to make "cutouts" in intersecting panels in a so called
egg-box connection.
Both of the two panels involved in the crossing must have a cutout for the other panel, and
the cutouts must be set individually.

12:8
12 Series

Cutout Statement
Syntax:
CUTOUT, [TYPE= ] 9999

, <interc_pan> [,REF]
[, DIR=<direction>]
[, R1=<radius_1>]
[, R2=<radius_2>]
[, M1=<width_1>]
[, M2=<width_2>]
[, M3=<height_1>]
[, M4=<height_2>]
;
Description
<interc_pan>
REF
The name of the panel that passes through the current one.
DIR
The direction of the v-axis of the cutout (see Controlling parameters

of egg-box cutout. below). The v-axis is located in the mould plane
of the inter-crossing panel. (Unless the mould plane is located
inside the panel. In that case the v-axis will be located on the plate
surface in the negative direction of the w-axis of the intersected
panel). The direction to be given must be one of the global ship
directions FOR, AFT, PS, SB, TOP or BOT.
Indicates that the cutout will be made for the reflected image of the
inter-crossing panel.
When the two panels have different heights the cutout will
automatically be located at the common limit in the bigger panel
and in this case DIR need not be given. DIR is compulsory in other
cases.
R1
The radius R1 (see Controlling parameters of egg-box cutout.

below). A positive value indicates a radius, a negative value a KSnotch. Default value is -10, i.e. a KS10 notch.
R2
Like R1 (see Controlling parameters of egg-box cutout. below).

R2 is set to R1 if not given.
M1
The notch width (see Controlling parameters of egg-box cutout.

below).
M2
M3
Like M1. M2 is set to M1 if not given.
M4
Like M3. M4 is set to M3 if not given.
Height of the notch on the mould line side (see Figure 12:3.:
Controlling parameters of egg-box cutout.)
M1 and M3 will be set to R1 if smaller than R1. Likewise M2 and M4
will be set to R2 if smaller than R2. If R1 (R2) <=0 then M1 and M3
(M2 and M4) are set to 0.
R, M1 and M3 are valid for the side of the cutout welded against the
moulded side of the intersected panel, R2,M2 and M4 for the
opposite side.

12:9
12 Series

Cutout Statement
Figure 12:3. Controlling parameters of egg-box cutout.
This cutout has a number of parameters which are possible to control via logical variables.
The three distances TD, SD and TR denote the free space between the panels at the top of
the cutouts, the gap along the cutouts and the top radius, respectively. The logical names
are:
TD: SBH_INTERCROSS_CUTOUT_TOPDIST
(default: 5 mm)
SD: SBH_INTERCROSS_CUTOUT_SIDEDIST (default: 1.5 mm)
TR: SBH_INTERCROSS_CUTOUT_TOPRADIUS (default: 3 mm)
Note: that TD will be shared equally between the two interlocating cutouts. E.g. if the panel
heights are 1000 then the cutout heights will be 502.5 (supposing the cutouts are
equal and the default value of TD is used).
Condition for this cutout to be set is that the panels have a common point in at least one of
their limits.

12:10
12 Series

Cutout Statement
The heights of the cutouts will be calculated so that the welding height is equal in the
interlocking cutouts (considering e.g. the height of the notches at the root of the cutout).
Example:
An input scheme describing two inter-crossing panels.
PAN,
BOU,
PLA,
CUT,
.
.
PAN,
BOU,
PLA,
CUT,
'A', SP, X=300, DT=101;

U=-3000/ V=0/ U=3000/ V=500;
MAT=30;
9999, 'B',
DIR=BOT,
R1=50, R2=100
'B', SP, Y=0, DT=101;
U=0/ V=0/ U=600/ V=500;
MAT=40;
9999, 'A',
DIR=TOP,
R1=-50, R2=100;
.
.
Remark:
The cutout statement in panel A has to be entered after the creation of panel B.
Figure 12:4. Two inter-crossing panels.
When splitting a panel containing cutouts of the type 9999, a warning will be given in case
the opposite cutout has not been defined or if it has been defined but not with the opposite
direction.

12:11
12 Series

Cutout Statement
12.3
Cutouts in Stiffeners
Cutouts in stiffeners are set in the same way as cutouts in plates.
The main differences are:
Cutouts in stiffeners can be set only for other stiffeners in the same panel.
No clips can be defined in cutouts in stiffeners.
Syntax:
CUTOUT ,[TYPE=]<type_code>
, <inters_prof>
/<curr_prof>
[SID=<direction>] ;
Description
<type_code>
is the cutout type.

Note: that it may be assigned directly to the statement keyword.
<inters_prof> identifies the profiles for which the cutouts should be made.
Note: this should be given before the slash.
<inters_profile>::= <S-ref> (1...25)

<curr_prof>
selects the profile in which the cutouts should be inserted.

Note: Should be given after the slash.
is relevant only in cases when any of the involved stiffeners exist on
both sides of the panel with the same tag number.
SID
The direction is specified either relative to the w-axis or as a main

ship direction.
<direction>::= -1 | 1 |AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
Example:
CUT, 5, SL1-10/ SF105(3)111;
Note: that a very great number of cutouts can be set in one statement. In the example
above all possible combinations of intersecting stiffeners will be evaluated
automatically. (At most 300.)
Remark:
Since the stiffener itself and its cutouts are generated in different statements in certain
situations all of the involved statements might have to be rerun to get a correct result. If not
done, the system will issue a warning message and "make the best possible" of the current
situation.

12:12
12 Series

Handling of Profiles
13
Profiles are used in many different situations in the design and construction of a ship.
Depending on their function, it is, in most cases, suitable to treat them as different
component types.
The actual Hull Modelling system creates information only in the internal hull structure and,
therefore, the shell profiles (longitudinals/transversals) are generated in a separate module.
They are in Hull Modelling supposed to exist in and they are referred to from input.
13.1
Component Types
The different component types for profiles on plane panels are:
13.1.1
stiffeners
flanges
pillars
Stiffeners
Profiles welded to a plane plate surface are identified as stiffeners. They are normally
described in the STIFFENER statement.
Profiles that, from a functional point of view, are flanges (see below) must also be generated
as stiffeners if they are not flat bars.
Stiffeners on type standard brackets are considered to be part of the bracket standards.
They cannot be generated by the STIFFENER statement but can be modified or deleted in
the BRACKET statement.
Stiffeners may be straight, curved or knuckled.
Swedging (see below) is generated as stiffeners.
Curved Stiffeners
By definition a curved stiffener has a trace curve that is not straight. On the other hand the
cross section perpendicular to the trace curve is always constant and equal to the nominal
dimension of the profile.
This means that a stiffener which is knuckled perpendicular to its trace is a curved stiffener,
not a knuckled stiffener, see Figure 13:1.: According to definition curved (not knuckled)
stiffener.

13:1
12 Series

Figure 13:1. According to definition curved (not knuckled) stiffener.
Curved stiffeners may be set parallel to limits, holes and arbitrary curves stored in the panel.
Knuckled Stiffeners
Knuckled stiffeners have a diagonal knuckle line, either extending diagonally across the
stiffener or affecting only a part of the stiffener. The knuckle line must not intersect the trace
line of the stiffener. Therefore, the trace line of the knuckled stiffener must always be a
straight line. Figure 13:2.: Examples of knuckled stiffeners. shows a couple of typical
knuckled stiffeners.
Figure 13:2. Examples of knuckled stiffeners.
The generation of knuckled stiffeners is activated by the inclusion of the default parameter
KNUCKLED_STI[FFENERS] in the default file of Hull Modelling (programs sj001 and
sj010). Generation of knuckled stiffeners may occur in three different situations.
1. The stiffener is connected between two other profiles, e.g. between a horizontal
stiffener on a bulkhead and a "rising" longitudinal, see Figure 13:3.: Knuckling caused
by location of connecting profiles.

13:2
12 Series

Figure 13:3. Knuckling caused by location of connecting profiles.
In such a case the need knuckling will be discovered automatically by AVEVA Marine.
The knuckle line will be diagonally across the stiffener and placed in such a way that
the knuckle line starts at the weld trace in the connection to the shell profile. The
knuckle angle will be calculated automatically.
No special input from the user is required in this case.
2. The second case is that an (inclined) stiffener should end (or start) in a given plane,
see Figure 13:4.: Knuckle when stiffener should end in a given plane. (The system
supports only that the stiffener is knuckled into one of the principal planes.)
Figure 13:4. Knuckle when stiffener should end in a given plane.
The knuckle line will start at the trace at the indicated end of the stiffener and be
calculated so that the "triangular" bent piece of the stiffener is, located in the specified
plane.
The stiffener end and the location plane must be defined by the user.
3. The third case is that the position of the knuckle line is controlled explicitly by the user
as well as the bending angle, see Figure 13:5.: Manually controlled knuckle line. for a
possible case.

13:3
12 Series

Figure 13:5. Manually controlled knuckle line.
13.1.2
Flanges
In the Hull system, two different component types are identified as flanges. They are both
generated in the FLANGE statement. They are:
flat bars - straight or curved - welded to a plate edge along the outer contour of a panel
or in a hole ("face plates").
A flange may be unsymmetrically located relative to the plate. It must be perpendicular
to the plate surface.
folded (bent) flanges along the outer contour. When a folded flange is generated, the
shape of the plate is modified simultaneously.
A folded flange has the function of a profile, but it is of course no physical bar.
Flanges must be generated as stiffeners if they are not flat bars or if they are not
perpendicular to the plate surface.
Flanges on type standard brackets are considered to be part of the bracket standards. Their
sizes can be affected only in the BRACKET statement.
13.1.3
Pillars
Any profile of any type can be generated as a pillar. However, normally a pillar is a "free"
profile, connected only at its ends. Pillars are typically used to carry decks in open areas,
e.g. on passenger ships.
Pillars are generated by the PILLAR statement.
Pillars, built up by plate parts, must be generated as panels.
13.2
Profile Data
The profiles can normally be generated complete with all information required for
production.
The following kinds of data can be defined in addition to the location and orientation:
profile type and parameters according to the Design Standards.
material quality codes.
excess material
endcut data (type and parameters) according to the Design Standards. Normally,
connection angles of the endcut will be calculated automatically in case of connection.

13:4
12 Series

bevelling at the profile ends and along the trace.
holes, notches and cutouts (stiffeners only).
information about the welding.
the position number of the profile.
assembly information.
surface treatment.
etc.
Of course, all information related to the physical component is irrelevant for a folded flange.
13.2.1
Holes, Notches and Cutouts in Profiles

In addition to the end cut definition holes, notches and cutouts can be set in the interior of
the profile. However, this facility is restricted to stiffeners, i.e. no holes etc. can be set in
flanges and pillars.
The generation of holes etc. in stiffeners is done in a similar way as for plates. Special
variants of the HOLE, NOTCH and CUTOUT statements are used for this purpose. Cf. these
statement types for details.
Normally when an item in a panel is generated there is a one-to-one or one-to-many relation
between the input statement and the component(s) that it generates, i.e. normally all
information in a certain component has its origin in one statement. (Exception: The outer
contour which may be modified by a folded flange.)
However, in stiffeners with holes, etc. the stiffener itself is generated by one statement and
the holes may be generated by several other statements. This must be taken into
consideration when stiffeners are regenerated/changed/deleted. Then, in some cases,
several different statements may have to be modified or rerun. However, in each situation
the system tries to take the most natural action. In any case, as soon as a stiffener with
holes in regenerated, a warning message will be issued.
13.3
Position of the Profile

The position in space of a profile is specified by its end point coordinates, normally
described in the coordinate system of the panel (or bracket) which the profile belongs to. In
most cases, the end point coordinates are computed by connection to other parts of the
structure.
The line from end point 1 to end point 2 is called the mould line (or description line) of the
profile.
For stiffeners and flanges, the web (and the flange, if any) of the profile is supposed to be
located to the left of the mould line. Thus, the orientation of the profile section is defined by
selecting the direction of the mould line (or the order of the end profile).
For pillars, the description line is normally located in the symmetry line of the profile section
(see the PILLAR statement for details). The orientation of the profile section is controlled by
a separate data item.
13.4
Swedging
There is an additional way to stiffen a plate surface, e.g. to use small profiles like
corrugations. Such corrugations are, in Hull, called swedging. From a functional point of

13:5
12 Series

view, they act very much like stiffeners. In Hull Modelling, they can be generated as
"stiffeners" according to the syntax of the STIFFENER statement. Swedging is identified by
profile types in the interval 100-110. The characteristics of the swedging is specified in a
user defined external table, a swedging object.
Of course all attributes of the STIFFENER statement that are related to the stiffener as a
distinct physical component of its own do not make any sense when generating swedging,
for instance, endcutting, position number and material quality. Apart from this, all
STIFFENER syntaxes can be used. Swedging will modify the geometry of the part it is
located on. This modification of the geometry will take place in the splitting to parts.
Therefore, the geometry of the model is correct.

13:6
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
14
Stiffener Statement
The STIFFENER statement generates stiffeners on panels and swedging.
Stiffeners are all stored in exactly the same way, if they are small connection stiffeners or if
they are big profiles on bulkheads or decks. However, since stiffeners occur in so many
different kinds of structures, it may be convenient to generate them according to somewhat
different combinations of input. This means that input can be given according to different
syntaxes. The syntaxes for connection stiffeners and curved stiffeners are so different from
the others that they will be treated quite independently.
The different subsyntaxes are:
1. "Mould line first" - the mould line of the stiffener is defined first and when this is done,
the end points are calculated, using the mould line.
2. "End point first" - the end points are defined directly, for instance via connections to an
intersecting longitudinal.
A special case of this is when one end point defines the end point as well as the
direction of the stiffener.
3. "Connection stiffeners" - this syntax is characterized by a high degree of automation,
i.e. very little input has to be given.
4. Syntax for curved stiffeners.
14.1
Stiffeners Except Connection Stiffeners

The subsyntaxes for the generation of these stiffeners have a large part in common.

14:1
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Syntax:
STIFFENER, <profile>
[,<symmetry>]
[, SBP]
,SID= <direction>
[,MSIDE= <orientation>]
[,<pos_no>]
[,TAG= <tag_no> (1 ... 25)]
[,QUAL= <quality>]
[,DEST=<destination>]
[,SURF=<surface_treatment>]
[,WELD= <throat_thickn>]
[,INC= <inclination>]
[<knuckle_data>]
[,NO= <stiff_no> (1 ... 25)]
[,NOM]
[, NO2]
[,TEMP]
[,UNSYM= <hangout>]
[, <id's>]
[,<assembly>]
[,<excess 1>]
[,<excess 2>]
[,SHR]
[,<bevel 1>]
[,<bevel 2>]
[,<end cut 1>]
[,<end cut 2>]
[,TBE=<bevel>]
[GRI=<number>
[SUP=<number>
[,SBP]
<mould_line_first> |
<end_point_first>
;
Even if not explicitly stated in the syntax above, data valid for end 1 of the stiffener should
precede a slash (/), data for end 2 should follow the slash.
Example:
STI, SID=AFT, PRO=10, 200, 12, L40, CON=3,

CUT=1100/CON=14, CUT=1302, 15;

14:2
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Profile data
The profile type and the parameters are given. The profile types are
according to the Design Standards.
<profile>::= PRO=
<prof_type>
, <prof_param> (0 ... 6)
<prof_type>::= <integer>
<prof_param>::= <number>
The profile parameters should be given in the correct number and correct
order as compared to the standards.
Example:
PRO=10, 200, 10
PRO=31, 350, 125, 10, 12
For swedging, profile types in the interval 100-110 may be

used if defined in the swedging object. Depending on its
definition, it may or may not have one size parameter.
<symmetry>
Normally stiffeners on a symmetric panel are supposed to be

valid both portside and starboard.
However, it is possible to indicate that a stiffener should be
used portside only or starboard only. This clause is relevant on
a symmetric panel ("SBPS panel") only.
<symmetry>::= P | S
SBP
This keyword is only valid for panels over CL (SP panels).

Moreover the normal vector of such a panel must be located in
the CL plane. The effect is that if a stiffener is modelled on one
side of the CL a mirrored copy on the opposite side of the CL
will be created automatically.
SID
defines the side of the panel on which the stiffener is located,

either relative to the w-axis (=+1|-1) or as a main ship
direction.

14:3
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
MSIDE
Normally, the orientation of a stiffener is defined by its

direction, e.g. by the order in which the end points have been
given. The rule is that the material should be located to the left
of the line from the starting point (end point 1) to the ending
point (end point 2).
By use of the keyword MSIDE it is possible to control the
material orientation independently of the order in which the
endpoints have been given (or the direction defined for the
mould line).
Remarks:
If the use of MSIDE is in conflict with the default rule the

order of the end points will automatically be swapped
after generation, i.e. if a scheme is derived form the panel
it should be possible to take away MSIDE and still get the
same result.
The direction of the mould line is still relevant in cases

when the stiffener ends e.g. at the outer contour, because
the direction in this case defines what is end point 1 and
2, respectively
<orientation>::= AFT | FOR | SB | PS | TOP | BOT
<posno>
The part (or position) number of a stiffener (i.e. the lowest level
of identification of a part in production) can be defined at
generation stage but is normally set automatically later, e.g. by
the autopos function. It may be purely numerical but may also
be a number surrounded by letters. In symmetrical panels
where stiffeners on portside and starboard have the same
numbers the keyword POS is used. If the numbers are
different PPOS is used for the portside version and SPOS for
the starboard version.
<posno> ::= <keyword> = ( <integer> | [<prefix>] <integer>
[>suffix>] ) 1 25
<keyword>::= POS | PPOS | SPOS
Examples:
POS=1-3, 5
SPOS = A43B
TAG
See Tag Handling for Stiffeners in Tag Handling for Stiffeners

in Chapter General Features of Input Schemes.
Often, the stiffener tags are calculated automatically.
If a tag is not set automatically, then a user defined tag should
be given so that reference via stiffener numbers can be
avoided.
A given tag will override an automatically evaluated tag.
<tag_no>::= <integer>
(0 < TAG <= 999)
A tag number need not be unique within the panel. E.g.
several stiffeners in line with each other may have the same
tag.

14:4
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
QUAL
Defines the material quality of the stiffener.
If left out entirely, the default quality according to customer
definition is used.
Qualities may also be given as strings. However, then the
quality must be selected as one of the strings, defined by the
user.
<destination>
defines the workshop station where to assembly the stiffener.
The value to be assigned must be selected among the
destination strings defined by the customer.
<surface_treatment>
defines the surface treatment of the stiffener before the

production phase.
The value to be assigned must be selected among the surface
treatment strings defined by the customer.
WELD
<throat_thickn> defines the thickness of the welding.

<throat_thickn>::= <number>
INC
Normally, the stiffeners are perpendicular to the plate surface.

INC can be used to control the inclination of the profile.
<inclination>::= <number>
The inclination angle is measured between the mould line side
of the stiffener and the surface of the panel as indicated in the
figure below.
Figure 14:1. Inclination angle of stiffener
The angle is always positive.

Defaulting value is 90 degrees.
An inclination angle equal to 1, 2 or 3 is interpreted as though
the x-, y- or z-axes, respectively, are in the web of the stiffener.
The inclination angle will then be calculated automatically.

14:5
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
When the stiffener is connected to longitudinals etc., the

inclination angle will normally be calculated automatically.
Then a value assigned to INC will override the automatically
calculated value. To make certain that the stiffener is
perpendicular to the panel in such a case, set INC=90.
INC can be used in a little extended way in the control of
knuckled stiffeners, see below.
<knuckle_data>
NO
The input required for user control of knuckled stiffeners.

Normally, stiffeners will be numbered automatically and get the
first free stiffener number (1, 2, ... ).
However, the stiffener numbers can be controlled via input.
Two stiffeners may never be given the same number,
(see TEMP below)
Reference to stiffeners via stiffener numbers should be
avoided since they are normally not stable during changes.
<stiff_no>::= <integer>
NO2
This keyword is relevant only in combination with SBP (cf.

above) and it controls the number of the mirrored stiffener,
generated as by that option.
Note: To NOT keep the NO in the scheme the environment
variable SBH_UPD_NO_IN_SCH must be set.
NOM[ARK]
Normally the stiffener traces will be marked with marking lines

on plate parts in splitmark. NOMARK will prevent these
marking lines.
TEMP
This means that the generated stiffener shall be temporary

and that it will be deleted automatically before the panel is
stored. Such stiffeners are auxiliary and will get the numbers
901, 902, ..., unless otherwise stated.
UNSYM
If an unsymmetrical flange is generated as a stiffener, UNSYM

is the height of the part of the profile on the "other side"
(compared to the side defined by SIDE) of the mould plane of
the panel. See the figure.
Figure 14:2. Definition of hang-out of stiffener placed along edge.
The height is always measured from the mould plane of the

panel.
<id's>

correspond to the items assigned to the keywords LIS, AS1AS4 in the panel statement (cf that statement).
14:6
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
<id's>::=
LIS=<parts_list>,
AS1=<name>
AS2=<name>
AS3=<name>
AS4=<name>
<parts_list>::= <name>
The names, given in the stiffener statement will override the
corresponding name given on panel level.
To cancel a name set on panel level without replacing it with another
name, the corresponding keyword should be given stand alone (i.e.
without any assigned value) or be assigned an empty string (e.g.
AS3='').
<assembly>
Cf-Panel Statement. If the stiffener belongs to different assembly than

the panel in general, that assembly can be specified here.
<excess 1>
<excess 2>
Defines the excess material (overlength) of the profile related to any

of the profile.
<excess 1>::= <excess 2>::= EXC = <number>

When the clause occurs before the slash (=<excess 1>), it is valid for
end 1, after the slash for end 2.
SHR
This standalone keyword indicates that shrinkage compensation

should be applied to stiffeners to the same extent as to plates. I.e.
stiffeners (and welded flanges) will be stretched with the same factor
as the plate they are attached to, considering the direction of the
profile relative to the stretch direction of the plate.
See also the description of the ip SHRINK_WHEN_SPECIFIED in
ppanparts, i.e. Hull / Manufacturing / Manufacturing of Plane Panel
Parts / Plane Panel Parts / Set-up of Program / Set-up of the IP File.
<bevel 1>
<bevel 2>
Defines the bevelling at the ends of the profile.

<bevel1>::= <bevel 2>::= BEV=<bev_web>[,<bev_fla>]
<bev_web> is the bevelling in the web of the profile, <bev_fla> is

the bevelling in the flange of the profile.
<bev_web>::=<bev_fla>::=<number>.
If the profile is bevelled only in the flange, <bev_web> must be given
as 0.
When the clause occurs before the slash (=<bevel 1>), it is valid
for end point 1, after the slash (=<bevel 2>) for end 2.
The assigned values may be bevel code or bevel angle, depending on
the implementation.
<end cut 1>

<end cut 2>
Defines the end cutting of the stiffener.
<end cut 1>::=<end cut 2>::=

CUT = <cut_type>
[, <cut_param> (0 ... 6)]

14:7
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
<cut_type>
is the end cut type according to the Design Standards.
<cut_type>::= <integer> <cut_param>

are the controllable parameters of the end cut according to the
Design Standards.
<cut_param>::= <number>
In case of connection, angles of the end cut may be calculated and
added automatically and need not be given in the input.
Manually given values will always override the automatically
calculated ones.
Example:
CUT= 1100[,87]
When the clause occurs before the slash (=<end cut 1>) it is valid for
end 1 of the stiffener, after the slash for end 2.
End cut data are irrelevant for swedging.
TBE
Defines the bevelling along the trace of the profile.

If bevel name is used the keywords valid are:
TBE=<bevel name>, TME=<trace e-measure>, TBV=<trace variant>,
TBS=<trace bevel side>.
GRI
Defines the grinding along the trace of the profile.
SUP
Side UP, default setting for looking direction of profile sketch

Default = 0
Mould plane side = 1
Non-mould plane side = 2
Side of maximum number of markings = 3
COLOUR
COMMENT
Colour of all stiffeners defined in the statement.
NABE
Switch off automatic bevel for the profile end.
or
NABW
Switch off automatic bevel for the profile end web.
NABF
Switch off automatic bevel for the profile end flange.
NABT
Switch off automatic bevel for the trace.
SBP
If given in a center line panel (SP panel) the stiffener will be

symmetrical over CL. I.e. if a stiffener has a mirror image on the other
side of the CL, one statement may generate both.
All of POS, QUAL, WELD,

irrelevant for swedging.

TEMP, UNSYM, EXC, BEV, TBE and CUT are
14:8
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
14.1.1
Mould Line First

In cases where the mould line is defined first, the mould line can either be defined by a line
directly or as a line parallel to a limit of the panel (or to a line).
<mould_line_first>::= <mould_line><end_point_1>/<end_point_2>
Below, we treat the definition of the mould line first and then how to define the end points,
once the mould line is known.
A. Mould line definition
The mould line can be defined, either along a given line or as being parallel to a limit or a
given line.
<mould_line>::= <line_direct> | <line_parallel>

<line_direct>
is an explicitly given line, see General Layout of a Statement.
<line_direct>::= ,<line> (1 ... 25) [,REV]

<line_parallel>
is used to define one or several stiffeners as being parallel at a

distance to a limit or to a given line.
<line_parallel>::=
<parallel_line>
<parallel_limit> |
,M1= <dist>
[,M2= <partition>]
[,NUMB= <no_of_sti>]
<parallel_line>
defines the line to which the stiffener is parallel.
<parallel_line>::= <line>
<parallel_limit>
defines, as an alternative, the limit to which the stiffener

should be set parallel.
<parallel_limit>::= LIM=<limit_no>[,<line
>]
LIM
defines the limit to which the stiffener is set parallel.
>0
the mould line has the same direction as the limit.
<0
opposite direction
This makes sense only if any of the end points end against the outer contour.
By adding an extra line, intersecting the limit, the stiffener will be set parallel to the tangent
in the intersection point.
Otherwise, the stiffener will be set parallel to the longest straight segment of the limit.
M1
The distance of the first stiffener from the given limit/line.
<dist>::= <number>

14:9
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
The distance between the first and the second, the second
and the third stiffener, etc.
M2
When left out, M1 will be used.
<partition>::= <number>
NUMB
is the number of stiffeners to be set. Default value is 1.
<no_of_sti>::= <integer>
To summarize: The mould line can be defined in one of the following ways:
1. Along a given line.
Figure 14:3. Stiffener along a given line.
2. Parallel with and at given distances from a line.
Figure 14:4. Stiffeners parallel to line at a distance.

14:10
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
3. Parallel with and at given distances from (the longest straight part of) a limit.
Figure 14:5. Stiffeners parallel to limit.
4. Parallel with and at given distances from the tangent to a given limit in the intersection
point with a given line.
Figure 14:6. Stiffeners parallel to tangent of limit in given point.

14:11
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
B. Definition of the end points

Once the mould line is defined, the end points can independently of each other - be defined
in a number of different ways:
by attachment to a stiffener/flange on the panel
by the intersection with a given line
by the intersection between the mould line and the outer contour.
by connection to the surface of a given intersecting panel.
by connection to the surface of a bracket on the same panel.
by "connection" to a hole in the same panel.
by "connection" to a seam in the same panel.
<end_point_1>::=
CON = <con_code>
[, <int_prof_ref> |
<line_1> |
<name> [,REFL] |
<bracket_ref> |
<hole_ref> |
<seam_ref> ]
CON
is the connection code according to the Design Standards.
<con_code>::= <integer>
<name>
Name of an intersecting panel, to the surface of which the

stiffener should be attached. It may be mirrored in the CL plane
by adding the keyword REF.
<int_prof_ref>
<line_1>
<bracket_ref>
<hole_ref>
See General Layout of a Statement.
If not defined by a given profile, line or any other explicitly given item, the stiffener is
supposed to end at the outer contour. Depending on the connection type this may be done
as though the stiffener were connected to a stiffener along the tangent of the outer contour
in its intersection point with the mould line (see the figure below).
As an alternative, the stiffener may be connected to the surface that bounds the panel
where its outer contour is intersected by the mould line of the stiffener, or it may be
connected end-to-end with a stiffener on another panel bounding this panel.
Conditions for the latter cases are:
a connection code for surface connection has been used, and a hull curve (or panel)
has been used for the corresponding boundary.
or
a hull connection code for end-to-end connection has been used and a panel has been
used for the corresponding boundary.
<end_point_2>::= <end_point_1>

14:12
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
However, in <end_point_2>, <line_1> is replaced by <line_2>.

The formal description above means that any of the end points can be defined in one of the
following ways:
1. Attach to another stiffener or flange on the current panel. An appropriate connection
code must be supplied to define the detailed shape of the connection.
Figure 14:7. Connection of stiffener to another profile on the same panel.
2. Intersect the mould line with a given line. A connection code is accepted but does not
affect the result.
Figure 14:8. Connection of stiffener to a given line.
3. "Attach" the stiffener to a "fictitious" stiffener along the tangent to the outer contour in its
intersection point with the mould line. Connection code must be supplied.
Depending on the connection type (cf. above) the "tangent line" may be replaced by the
"tangent plane" of the boundary, e.g. of the hull surface.
In the former case, the end cut angle of the web will normally be 90 degrees and
clearance (if any) will be calculated along mould line.
In the latter, the web angle may have any value and the clearance will be perpendicular
to the surface.
(If any of the end points has been generated according to this alternative, the given
direction of the mould line must be that of the stiffener when generated. In other cases,
the direction is irrelevant - Hull Modelling will select the correct direction automatically.)

14:13
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Figure 14:9. Connection of stiffener to a limit.
4. Attach the stiffener to the surface of a given panel. The connection will be done, as in
case 1), to a fictitious flat bar in the location of the panel.
5. Attach to the surface of a given bracket on the panel itself. The connection will be done
as in case 4).
6. Attach to a hole on the panel itself. The connection will be done in the same way as to
a flange welded to the edge of the hole.
Below, a number of examples defined according to the syntax for 'mould line first' are
given. In some of the examples, the end cut data are left out.
In the examples 1-2, the direction of the given line can coincide with or be opposite to
the final mould line, since both end points are explicitly defined.

14:14
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example 1 ('line direct'):

Example:
Figure 14:10. Stiffener between two other stiffeners.
STI[FFENER], ... U = 10000, V = 5000, T = 45,

S1, CUT = 1302, 15, CON = 14/
S2, CUT = 1302, 15, CON = 14;
Example:
Figure 14:11. Carling stiffeners around hole.
STI, ... Y = 6400, 6840,

SL22-23, CUT = 1302, 15, CON = 14/
SL23-22, CUT = 1302, 15, CON = 14;

14:15
12 Series

Stiffener Statement

Example:
Figure 14:12. Stiffener across panel along given line.
STI, SID
U =
CUT
CUT
= AFT, PRO = 10, ... ,

7000, V = 3000, T = -30,
= 1302, 15, CON = 14/
= 1302, 15, CON = 14;
Example 4 ('parallel to limit'):

Example:
Figure 14:13. Stiffeners parallel to limit, end 1 by line.

14:16
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example:
STI, SID = AFT, LIM = -3,

PRO = 10, 200, 12,
NUMB = 3, M1 = 900, M2 = 750,
V1 = 5000/CON = 14;
In this example, the direction of the mould line is essential because in one end point the
stiffener is "attached" to the outer contour.

14:17
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example 5 (cf Ex 4 - Note: LIM > 0):

Example:
Figure 14:14. Stiffeners parallel to limit, opposite direction, end 1 by line.
STI, SID = AFT, LIM = 3,

PRO = 10, 200, 11.5,
NUMB = 3, M1 = 900, M2 = 750,
V1 = 5000/CON = 14;

14:18
12 Series

Stiffener Statement

Example:
Figure 14:15. Stiffener parallel to limit, both ends by lines.

PRO = 10, 200, 11.5,
M1 = 2000,
U1 = 15000/V2 = 7250;
Example 7 ('parallel to limit' - see figure above):
Example:

PRO = 10, 200, 12, WELD = 4,
M1 = 2000, U1 = 15000/S1, CON= 14;

14:19
12 Series

Stiffener Statement

Example:
Figure 14:16. Stiffener parallel to indicated part of limit.
(Select the part of the limit where to set the stiffener by giving a line.)
STI, SID = AFT, LIM= 3, Y = 12000,

PRO = ... , Y1 = 15000/
CON = 14;

14:20
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example 9 ('parallel to line'):

Example:
Figure 14:17. Stiffeners parallel to line, restricted by lines.
STI, SID = -1, PRO = ... , U = 5000,

V = 2000, T = 20,
M1 = 1000, M2 = 750, NUMB = 2,
U1 = 2000/U2 = 7000;
Example 10 (along line between bracket and hole):
Example:
STI, SID = ..., PRO = ..., Y = 13000

CON = ..., CUT = ..., BR2/
CON = ..., CUT =, HOL3;
14.1.2
End Points First

This subsyntax is valid in situations where the end points of the stiffeners are primarily
defined. The mould line then "results" as the line between the end points and the problem is
reduced to selecting the end points in the correct order.
However, there are the additional possibilities that:
One end point also defines the direction of the mould line.
One end point is calculated or given and the direction of the mould line is given
explicitly.
In these two cases, the other end point can be calculated as described under "Mould Line
First".
The pictures below give an overview of the possibilities:
1. Both end points explicitly given or calculated:

14:21
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Figure 14:18. Both ends connected to profile sections.
2. One end point defines the direction of the stiffener as well.
Figure 14:19. Profile section defining end 2 and direction.
3. One end point is calculated or given and the direction of the mould line is given.

14:22
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Figure 14:20. End 1 and direction explicitly given.
Syntax:
<end_points_first>::=
[,T= <dir_angle> (1 ... 25)]
<end_point_1> /
<end_point_2
The direction angle can be controlled if only one of the end points is uniquely defined by a
connection or a given point. E.g. a case where a stiffener connects a longitudinal to a
stiffener on the panel itself. Then, normally, the stiffener is set in the direction of the web of
the longitudinal. Any other direction may be defined by T in this and similar situations. When
given, T is the direction of the mould line, i.e. from end point 1 to end point 2.
<dir_angle>::= <number>
<end_point_1>::=

14:23
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
CON
<end cut>
See Mould Line First above.
<point_1>
<line_1>
<ext_prof_ref>
<int_prof_ref>
<bracket_ref>
<hole_ref>
See General Layout of a Statement in a previous chapter.
<name>
Name of an intersecting panel to the surface of which the

stiffener is attached. It may be mirrored in the CL-plane by
adding the keyword REF.
See Mould Line First above. Also see Recalculation of End

Cut Parameters below.
<line_1> can only be used if the direction has been defined by
the opposite end point (or by T).
Note: however, that the stiffeners cannot be attached to
flanges.
<end_point_2> is identical to <end_point_1> if <point_1> is replaced by

<point_2>.
If no point and no profile reference are given, the stiffener is supposed to end at the outer
contour in the same way as described in "Mould Line First" above.
To summarize, the following possibilities exist if at least one of the end points has a fixed
position. Then the other end point can be set by:
explicitly given coordinates.
attachment to a profile intersecting the plane of the panel. The profile can be in the
shell or an adjoining panel.
by attachment to a stiffener, bracket or hole on the panel itself or to the contour of the
panel. (In the latter case, only the connection code is given.)
by "attachment" to an intersecting line.
In case of connection, an appropriate connection code must be given.

14:24
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example 1 (both end points explicitly given):

Example:
Figure 14:21. Both ends explicitly defined.
STI, SID=AFT, PRO=10, 200, 12, WELD=6,

U1=5900, V1=7150, CUT=1302, 15, CON=14/
U2=7000, V2=9300, CUT=1302, 15, CON=14;
Example 2 (both end points attached to intersecting profiles):
Example:
Figure 14:22. Both ends connected to profile sections.
STI, SID=AFT, L300-320, CUT=1100, CON=4/

'LSK1', SL30-32, CUT=1100, CON=4;

14:25
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example 3 (one point explicitly given, the other attached to an intersecting profile):
Example:
Figure 14:23. End 1 connected to profile section, end 2 explicitly given.
STI, L370, CUT=1120, CON=4/ Y2=21000,

Z2=9556, CUT=1302, 15, CON=4;
Example 4 (attachment to the longitudinal defines the starting points as well as the
direction of the mould line):
Example:
Figure 14:24. Stiffener between profile section and stiffener on the panel.
STI, ..., S3, CON=14, CUT=1302, 15/

L370, CON=13, CUT=1130;
Example 5 (the explicitly given direction will override the direction fetched from the

14:26
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
longitudinal):
Example:
Figure 14:25. User control of stiffener direction.
STIFFENER, ...
L370, CUT=1130, CON=4/
S3, CUT=1302, 15, CON=14, T=180;
(Direction angle from the positive u-axis.)
Example 6 (like example 4 except that the stiffener on the panel has been replaced by
a panel.)
STI, L370, CON=13, CUT=1130/'INT_PANEL', CON=65 ....;

Example 7 (like example 4 except that the stiffener has been replaced by a line)
STI, ...L370, ... / Y2=18000, .... ;

Example 8 (ditto, but stiffener replaced by bracket)
STI, ..., L370, .../ BR3, CON ... ;

Example 9 (ditto, but stiffener replaced by hole)
STI, ..., L370, .../ HOL2, CON= ... ;
14.1.3
Control of Knuckled Stiffeners

When a stiffener becomes knuckled because of the relative orientation of the profiles it is
connected to the user need not make any special indication - AVEVA Marine will
automatically find out and evaluate the knuckling data.
Otherwise the knuckling is controlled by the following sub-syntax of the common stiffener
syntax:
INC = <inc1>, <inc2>

[,KNH = <height>] [,KNL=<length>]
/ [,KNH = <height>] [,KNL=<length>]

14:27
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
INC
Specifies two inclinations of the profile. The first value is the

inclination of the part of the profile, welded to the plate. The second
is the orientation angle of the knuckled part. This angle is
calculated relative to the trace line in the same way as specified for
INC in the common syntax (i.e. the knuckling angle may be
different from <inc1> - <inc2>).
<inc2>= 1| 2 | 3 is interpreted in the same way as there.

KNH
Specifies the distance from the current end point to the knuckle line
just above the end point (see the figure below). KNH must be
smaller than the profile height.
KNL
Specifies the distance from a point on the upper edge of the profile
just above the current end point to the point where the knuckle line
reaches the edge of the profile, see the figure below.
The number of total occurrences of the keywords KNH and KNL (for both end points must
not exceed two).
Figure 14:26. Knuckled stiffener, example.
Examples:
Knuckle input for the stiffener in the figure above may be as follows.
Example:
STI, ..., INC=90,75, KNH= 75, ... / ..., KNL=500, ... ;

When the stiffener end should be bent so that the knuckled part is located in a given plane,
this is controlled in the following way:
1. KNH for the current end is set to 0.
2. The second knuckle angle is controlled in the same way as for an inclined (but not
knuckled) stiffener, i.e. a vector parallel to any of the main coordinate axes (1=x, 2=y,
3=z) should lie in the web plane of the bent part.

14:28
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
The next example illustrates the knuckling data require to generate the stiffener in the
figure below.
Example:
Figure 14:27. Knuckled stiffener, knuckled part in plane containing y-axis.
STI, ..., INC=90,2, KNH=0, ... / ... ;
14.1.4
Recalculation of Parameters of Certain End Cuts

When a stiffener is connected to an "external profile", one parameter of two special end
cut types may be changed, see the figures below:
Figure 14:28. Recalculation of end cut parameters.
For end cut types starting in 12 or 22 according to the Design Standards, the A-measure is
supposed to be given along the mould line of the profile (cf Am in the figure above).
However, for these end cut types, it is in some cases convenient for the designer to define
the measure A (cf the figure), giving the actual overlap of brackets, etc. This happens when
the characteristic measure B of the end cut exceeds half the profile height (H).
Therefore, in this case Hull Modelling supposes that the measure A has been given and
transforms it into the measure Am.
Consequently:
B > H/2
B <= H/2
=> user should give A.

=> user should give Am.
Note: that this is only done for end cut types, the two leftmost digits of which are 12 or 22.

14:29
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
If the end cut angle equals 90 degrees, of course, A will not be changed.
14.1.5
Control of Twisted Stiffeners

Twisted stiffeners will only be handled if the default keyword KNUCKLED_STIFFENERS is
set to TWISTED.
When a stiffener becomes twisted because of the relative orientation of the profiles it is
connected to, the user need not make any special indication - AVEVA Marine will
automatically find out and evaluate the twist data.
Otherwise the twist angles are controlled by the INCLINATION keyword of the common
stiffener syntax:
INC = <inc1>, <inc2>

INC Specifies two inclinations of the profile. The first value is the inclination of the first
end and the second is the inclination of the second end of the stiffener. These
angles are calculated relative to the trace line in the same way as specified for
INC in the common syntax.
<inc2>= 1|2|3 is interpreted in the same way as there.

Only milled stiffeners are handled by this (profile of type 10 - 31 and 40).
It is, however, possible to override the twist calculation in order to get a knuckled stiffener
instead by simply using the sub-syntax of a knuckled stiffener. To get a knuckled stiffener
where the knuckled is across the whole stiffener, KNL for end number one should be set to 1.
14.2
Connection Stiffeners
Connection stiffeners can be generated according to any of the previous subsyntaxes.
However, the special syntax for connection stiffener is very simple to use, because it
involves a high degree of automation and default setting of parameters.
In one case (type = 4, see below), the stiffener overlaps e.g. a longitudinal at one end and
has a free other end.
In the other case, the free end is connected to another stiffener/flange on the same panel.
The figures below illustrate the different cases.
type = 4:
Attachment to a stiffener placed either on the same or on the opposite side of the panel, to a
flange or to the outer contour:

14:30
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Figure 14:29. Connection stiffener, type 4.
Default values in this case:
PRO = 10, 150, 12

CUT = 1220, 100 / CUT = 1302, 15
If V > 95 or V < 85, this angle will be added to the first end cut.
type = 5:
Stiffener of type 5 may only be attached to a stiffener on the same side of the panel or to a
flange. In both cases, the stiffener abuts the profile.
Figure 14:30. Connection stiffener, type 5.
Default values in this case:
PRO = 10, 200, 12

CUT = 1220, 100 / CUT = 1120
If V1 > 95 or V1 < 85 / V2 < 89 or V2 > 91, the first and the second end cut, respectively, will
be supplemented with these angles.
For both types, profile and end cut data can be changed via input.

14:31
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Syntax:
STIFFENER, <type>
[,<symmetry>]
,SID= <direction>
[,POS= <pos_no> (1 ... 25)]
[,QUAL= <quality_code>]
[, <profile>]
[<id's>]
[<,assembly>
<ext_prof_ref> [,REF]
[<end cut>]
[/<end cut>]
;
<type>
defines the type of connection stiffener, free at one end (type = 4)

or connected (type = 5).
The remaining clauses have the same meaning as for ordinary stiffeners.
Remarks:
The system automatically selects the correct direction of the mould line.
If end cut data is controlled via input, end cut data for the overlapped end should
always be given before the slash, for the other end after the slash.
Example:
STI, 4, SID=AFT, L190-250;
14.3
Curved Stiffeners
Stiffeners which are not straight must be generated as curved stiffeners. Curved flanges
which are not mounted at 90 degrees to the plate surface must also be generated as curved
stiffeners.
There are three main options for definition of the trace curve of stiffeners:
1. The stiffener is set parallel to a limit of the panel at a given distance.
2. The stiffener is set parallel to a hole of the panel at a given distance.
3. The stiffener is set along a given curve, optionally at a given distance from it.
The statement for generation of curved stiffeners have a large part common with the
"normal" stiffener statement under sub-chapter 1 above.

14:32
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Syntax:
<common data>
corresponds to all the clauses in sup-chapter 1 above

except the clause defining, the position and end point
coordinates.
In general curved stiffeners should always be given a user defined TAG, because otherwise
they might get automatically set tag numbers which may create problem in references to
other stiffeners with the same tag number.
-
A. Curved Stiffener Parallel to Limit

When a curved stiffener is set parallel to a limit the following sub-syntax should be used.
<parallel_limit>::= CURVED
,LIM = <limit_no>
,M1 = <dist>
,<end_1>
/<end_2>
<end_>::= [CON = <con_code>,[<stiff_ref>]
][,<line_>]
These clauses have the same sense as for straight stiffeners, parallel to a limit. The only
difference is that CURVED indicates that the stiffeners should follow also a curved limit. For
details, see 14.1 above.
Note: that it is not possible to connect a curved stiffener to an explicitly given panel or to a
bracket on the panel.

14:33
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example:
1.
Figure 14:31. Curved stiffener along limit.
A stiffener along a curved limit with clearance against the surrounding limit of the
panel.
STI, .... , CUR, LIM=3, M1=20, CON=14,
/CON=14, ....;
2.
Figure 14:32. Curved stiffener along limit, end 2 restricted by line.
Compared with the previous example end no 2 is restricted by a line.
STI, ......
CUR, LIM=3, M1=20,

CON=14, Z2=4000, ...../CON=14, .....;
B. Curved Stiffener Parallel to a Hole

When a curved stiffener is set parallel to a hole the following sub-syntax should be used.
<parallel_hole>::=

CURVED,
14:34
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
,CNO = <hole_no>
,M1 = <dist>
,<end_1>
/<end_2>
<end_>::= [CON =
<con_code>,[<stiff_ref>]][,<line>]
CNO is assigned the number of the hole parallel to which the stiffener should be set.
The stiffener will follow the entire hole contour if no end point is explicitly defined. It may also
be restricted to a certain part of it by the intersection of the displaced contour with a line or
another stiffener. Since multiple intersections always will occur with a line the first
intersection point in the direction of the line will be selected as the end point.
The stiffener is supposed to follow the hole in the clockwise direction if CNO > 0, i.e. so that
the mould line side of the stiffener is facing the hole (and the flange, if any, is in the direction
away from the hole). If CNO<0 then the flange will be directed inwards the hole. A given
connection code will not be used in the calculations in this case.
M1 is the distance from the hole contour to the trace curve of the stiffener. M1>0 if the
stiffener should be moved away from the hole, i.e. into the plate. If M1<0 then the trace
curve is moved into the hole.
Example:
1.
Figure 14:33. Curved stiffener parallel to hole.
Stiffener following the complete contour of a hole.
STI, ....., CUR, M1=20, CNO=5, CON=40, CUT=1100/CON=40,

CUT=1100,

14:35
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example:
2.
Figure 14:34. Stiffener along hole contour between two lines (short way).
Stiffener set between two restricting lines.
STI, ... , CUR, CNO=5,M1=20,

U1=10000,T1=270, ... /
U2=20000,T2=270, ... /
3.
Figure 14:35. Stiffener along hole contour between two lines (long way).
Stiffener set between the same restricting lines but along the other part of the hole.
STI, ... , CUR, CNO=5, M1=20

U1=20000,T1=270, ... /
U2=10000,T2=270, ... /

14:36
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
C. Stiffener Set along a Curve

When a stiffener is set along a curve the following sub-syntax should be used.
<along_curve>::=
<end_>::=
CURVE = <curve_name>,
[,M1 = <dist>]
,<end_1>
/<end_2>
[CON = <con_code>, [<stiff_ref]]
[,<line>]
CURVE specifies the name of the curve along which the stiffener should be set. This curve
may exist in the databank but is normally supposed to be created in the same input scheme.
The curve may be parallel displaced as specified by M1 (>0 to the right, <0 to the left). If M1
is not given the stiffener will follow the curve itself.
The stiffener may end in one of the following ways:
1. By the intersection with a given line.
2. By connection to a given stiffener in the same panel.
3. By connection to a given hole in the same panel.
4. By connection to a given seam in the same panel.
5. If no line and no stiffener are given the stiffener will end at the intersection between the
curve and the outer contour of the panel, provided an appropriate connection code is
given.
6. If none of this is fulfilled the stiffener will end at the end point of the curve, i.e. when no
restricting line or stiffener is defined, when no appropriate connection code is defined
or when the curve has no intersection with the outer contour.
Example:
1.
Figure 14:36. Stiffener along curve, restricted by boundary.
In the figure the solid line is the curve, the dashed line the stiffener.
STI, ... , CUR='ABC',... /CON=15....;

14:37
12 Series

Stiffener Statement
Example:
2.
Figure 14:37. Stiffener along given curve between stiffeners.
The stiffener follows the curve and is connected against two stiffeners.
STI, ... , CUR='DEF'

S5, CON=14, ... /
S6, CON=14, ... ;
14.4
Marking Lines
It is possible to insert marking lines for drawing purposes by the aid of the STIFFENER
statement. All syntaxes descri2bed in the previous sections can be used and the fictitious
stiffener is indicated by giving a negative position number. The value of the position number
defines the type of line to be drawn, as explained below.
-1
solid
-2
dashed
-3
dashed and dotted
-4
dashed and double-dotted
-5
"railway"
These "stiffeners" will be stored with the numbers 701, 702, etc., if not otherwise stated.
Fictitious stiffeners may be used for attachment of stiffeners etc. like all normal stiffeners.

14:38
12 Series

Flange Statement
15
Flange Statement
The FLANGE statement is used to generate flanges of different kinds. Flanges may be
folded ("bent") flanges, created by bending part of the plate along one edge.
Flanges may also be flat bars welded to the edge of the plate. Such a flange may be straight
or curved, welded symmetrically or unsymmetrically, and set along the outer contour or in a
hole.
Profiles which are not flat bars, but used as flanges, must be generated as unsymmetric
stiffeners (see the STIFFENER statement). Flanges which are not perpendicular to the plate
surface must also be generated as stiffeners.
15.1
Welded Flanges
The following syntax is used for the flange statement when the flange is a profile, welded to
the plate edge, either along the outer contour or in a hole.
Syntax:
FLANGE
[,<symmetry>]
, <profile>
[,CURVED]
,LIM= <limit_no> [, <at_line>]
{
,CNO= <hole_no>
[,INC=<inclination>]
[,QUAL= <quality>]
[,POS= <pos_no> (1 ... 25)]
[,WELD= <throat_thickn>]
[,UNSYM= <hangout>]
[,SHR]
[,NO= <flange_no> (1 ... 25)]
[,COL[OUR]= <colour>]
[< <id's>]
[<assembly>]
<end_point_1>/<end_point_2>
;
Profile data, symmetry, excess, position number, quality assembly, destination, surface
treatment, welding, shrinkage compensation and the flange number are handled in the
same way as for stiffeners.

15:1
12 Series

Flange Statement
Profile types that may be used are flat bars (face plates) and round bars/pipes.
Description.
CURVED
means that the flange is to be placed along a curved contour. (A flange along
a contour with a very small curvature can be handled as a straight flange.)
By default, a straight flange is supposed.
The contour along which the flange is set can either be a limit (LIM) of the panel or a hole
with a given number (CNO).
LIM
defines the limit.
A straight flange will be set along the longest part of the
limit, unless another straight part is selected via an
intersecting line (<at_line>).
If a straight flange is set along a curved limit, <at line> is
used to indicate the point at which the flange should be set
parallel to the tangent.
<at_line>::= U|V|X|Y|Z::= <coord>

Unless the end points of the flange both are explicitly given,
the flange will be opposite the direction of the limit if LIM >
0, and have the same direction if LIM < 0.
CNO
is the number of a hole in which the flange will be set.
<hole_no>::= <unsigned_integer>
Flanges in holes may be straight or curved.
They are always in the opposite direction compared to the
direction of the hole.
INC
Inclination of the flange relative to the plate surface. Relevant

only for straight flanges.
If given explicitly, the angle should be given between the
would line side of the flange and the mould plane of the panel
on its positive side.
INC=1/2/3 is supported with the same sense as for stiffener,
i.e. a vector along axis INC (=X for INC=1, etc) should be
located
in
the
plane
of
the
flange
<inclination>::=<number>
UNSYM

Normally, a flange is welded symmetrically to the plate edge.

If the flange shall be placed unsymmetrically, UNSYM is the
distance from the edge in the negative direction of the w-axis
to the mould plane, cf the figure:
15:2
12 Series

Flange Statement
Figure 15:1. Control of asymmetrically welded flange.
<hangout>::= <number>
COLOUR
COMMENT
<end_point_1>
Colour of all flanges defined in the statement.

defines the end point. The syntax differs somewhat in
different cases:
<excess>,<bevel> and <endcut>, see Stiffener

Statement.
<end_straight_1>

defines the possibilities for a straight flange.
15:3
12 Series

Flange Statement
CON
See Stiffener Statement.

If a curved stiffener should extend outside a limit, the amount
of extension has to be specified by a connection (type 3) with
a negative gap. As an alternative it is possible to refer to an
endcut code by its negative number, e.g. CON=-14.
The alternatives are:

1. Let the end be defined by the intersection between a given one-coordinate line and the
given limit.
<one_coord_line_1>::=
U1|V1|X1|Y1|Z1::= <coord>
If the line is defined outside the limit end, the flange is extended in the tangent of the
end point.
2. Connect the flange to another profile.
(For <ext_prof_ref>, see General Layout of a Statement.)
In this case, end cut angles may be added automatically.
3. If no line and no profile is given, then start/end at the distance from one of the end
points of the limit, as defined by the connection code.
<end_curved_1> is equal to <end_straight_1> with the exception that a
curved flange cannot be connected to another profile.
<end_in_hole_1> defines the end of a flange in a hole.
<end_in_hole_1>::= [, <fl_line_1>]
If nothing is specified about the end points, the flange is supposed to follow the hole
contour completely.
Otherwise, the flange must be restricted by a line, intersecting the hole contour. Since
there are always two intersection points between an infinitely long line and a closed
contour, there is an additional rule:
"The first intersection point in the direction of the line is selected", cf the figure below.

15:4
12 Series

Flange Statement
Figure 15:2. Curved flange in hole, restricted by lines.
<fl_line_1>::= <line_uvt_1> |
(X1|Y1|Z1= <coord>)
Note: Since a line described in the xyz-system in this case cannot be given an arbitrary
direction, it might be necessary to use a uv-line.
<end_point_2> Equal to <end_point_1> if all indices "1" are replaced by "2".

To sum up, the end points can be defined in one of the following ways.
1. By a line intersecting the limit (or the hole). In a hole, the direction of the line is
significant for selection of an intersection point.
2. By connection to an intersecting profile. (only straight flanges)
3. By ending a certain distance from a corner as defined by a connection code (not for
flanges in holes).
4. By setting a flange along a complete hole contour (only flanges in holes).
Remark:
If an end point of the flange is generated according to the alternatives 1) and 3) above, then
adding an angle to the end cut means that the mould line of the flange will be changed
accordingly. See the example below.
Figure 15:3. Recalculation of flange end point (from P to S)

15:5
12 Series

Flange Statement
... CON=15, CUT=1100, 45 ... moves the end point of the flange from P to S.
Example:
1.
A flange on a bottom web is generated.
FLANGE, LIM=2, PRO=10, 400, 20, WELD=5,

L290, CON=3, CUT=1402, 50/
'LSK1', SL29, CON=3, CUT=1402, 50;
The three examples below are similar but different.
Figure 15:4. Illustration of examples 2, 3 and 4.
2.
FLA, ..., LIM=3,

CON=14/V2=11874;
3.
FLA, ..., LIM=-3,

CON=14/V2=11874;
4.
FLA, ..., LIM=3,

V1=11874/CON=14;
5.
A curved flange is generated.

15:6
12 Series

Flange Statement
Example:
Figure 15:5. Curved flange along limit.
FLA, TYPE=5, LIM=3, ...,

CON=14/CON=14;
6.
A flange in hole number 5.
Figure 15:6. Curved flange in hole.
FLA, CUR, PRO=10, 100, 10, CNO=5,

CUT=1100/CUT=1100;
7.
A straight flange in a part of a hole number 2.

15:7
12 Series

Flange Statement
Example:
Figure 15:7. Straight flange in part of hole.
FLA, CNO=2, PRO=10, 200, 12,

U1=FR128-50, T1=-90/ U2=FR126+50, T2=-90;
8.
A curved flange extending outside the limit.
Figure 15:8. Extended curved flange.
FLA, LFM=3, PRO=.....,

CON=18/CON=-.....;
15.2
Folded (Bent) Flange

Folded (bent) flanges are generated using the following subsyntax.
The characteristics of the folded flanges are normally defined by each customer, utilizing the
facility. Each customer may define several flange types, one of which is the default type.
This handling of flanges is activated by assigning the logical variable SBH_FLANGE_CTRL.
If the customer does not define his own flange standard, the system will use the built in
flange standard, described below.

15:8
12 Series

Flange Statement
Bent flanges can only be generated along a straight part of the outer contour.
The addition of a bent flange normally means that the geometry of the outer contour will be
modified. To restore it, the BOUNDARY statement may have to be re-executed. Before
doing so, it might be necessary to delete the flange. Likewise, a regeneration of the
BOUNDARY means that the FLANGE statement must be regenerated.

15:9
12 Series

Flange Statement
Syntax:
FLANGE, SID= <direction>

,LIM= <limit_no> [, <at_line>]
[,TYPE= <flange_type>]
,H= <flange_width>
<end_point_1>/<end_point_2> ;
SID
LIM
TYPE
See STIFFENER statement.

See Flat Bar Flanges above.
Relevant only when the new flange handling has been activated.
If then left out the user defined default flange type will be used.
Otherwise TYPE must be assigned one of the user defined flange
types.
The nominal height of the flange.

The width of the added material for the built-in flange standard is
described below.
For the customer defined flange standard, each customer controls
himself the calculation formula.
<end_point_1> defines the start of the flange.

<end_point_1>::=
[<line_uvt_1> |
(X1|Y1|Z1= <coord>)]
[,CUT=<end type>]
[,M1= <angle>]
If no restricting line is given, the flange will start from the beginning
of the selected straight part of the limit.
CUT
If the customer controlled flange handling is activated, the default

flange end type will be used if not otherwise specified. Via CUT the
user may select any other flange end type, set up in the flange
definition file.
<end_type>::=<integer>
M1 is the angle at the start of the flange.
<angle>::= <number>
In the customer control flange definition, M1 will override the angle
defined in the flange definition file. In the default flange handling it
will replace the built-in default value of 30 degrees.
<end_point_2> is equal to <end_point_1> if, in all keywords, "1" is replaced by

"2".
The two end points should follow each other in the circulation
direction of the contour.
Remark:
The length of the free edge of the folded flange must exceed the given value H, otherwise
an error will be signalled.
15.2.1
Evaluating the Flange, Built-in Standards

15:10
12 Series

Flange Statement
When a folded flange is evaluated, part of the outer contour is moved parallel to itself a
certain distance (below denoted a).
In the customer defined flange standard, the calculation of a is customer controlled.
In the built-in standards, a is set using the following formula:

a=H+k*R
Here, H is as given in input.
k is a factor (= 0.6).
R is the radius of the bending tool (current value 25).
Consequently, a = H + 15.
Suppose that the bending starts at the original geometry to which the flange is added, cf the
figure below.
Figure 15:9. Evaluation of flange size (folded flange).
t is the material thickness.

As can be seen, the flange will add R+t to the extension of the panel if the assumption
regarding the bending is correct.
The resulting height, Hb, after bending will be evaluated as follows (still with the assumption
above).
The neutral line (not stretched during the bending) is supposed to be located at 1/3 of the
material thickness from the inner surface.
Hb = H + k * R - PI * (R + t/3)/2 + R + t
= H + R * (1 + k - PI/2) + t * (1 - PI/6)
= (appr.) H + 6
(supposing R = 25, k = 0.6, t = 12)

15:11
12 Series

Flange Statement
Remark:
In type standard brackets with built-in flange standards, H is directly given when controlling
the size of the flange (cf. BRACKET statement).
Example:
1.
Figure 15:10. Folded flange along free side of (bracket) panel.
FLA, SID=FOR, LIM=2, H=100;
Figure 15:11. Folded flange along indicated part of limit.
2.
FLA, SID=AFT, LIM=3, Y=7000, H=150, Y1=9950, Y2=4700;

The segment where the flange will be generated is chosen by the line defined by Y.
3.
A flange is generated in the new flange handling, using the default flange end type at
one end a flange type (=7) that is not the default one.
FLA, SID=AFT, LIM=2, TYPE=7, H=120

/CUT=191;
(The flange type 7 and the flange end type 101 are supposed to have been defined in the
flange definition file.)

15:12
12 Series

Flange Statement

15:13
12 Series

Flange Statement

15:14
12 Series

Pillar Statement
16
Pillar Statement
The PILLAR statement generates pillars consisting of profiles according to the Design
Standards. The generated pillars always belong to the current panel.
"Built" pillars must be treated as panels themselves.
Syntax:
PILLAR, <profile>
[,<symmetry>]
[, POS= <pos_no> (1 ... 25)]
[, QUA= <quality>]
[, COL[OUR]= <colour>]
[, COM[MENT]= <comment>]
[, <excess>]
[, <bevel>]
[, <id's>]
[<assembly>]
[, <orientation>]
[, <endcut>]
[, <connection>]
<position>
;
16.1
General Data for Pillars

Symmetry, POS, QUA, DEST, SURF, COLOUR, <excess>, <bevel>,
<id's> and <assembly> are used as for stiffeners (see Stiffener Statement).
The same thing is valid for profile data. Normally, however, different kinds of profiles are
used as pillars and as stiffeners.
In principle, all profile types may be used for pillars of those noted in the Design Standards.
The location of the description line (i.e. the position of the location point in the profile
section) and the symmetry line is individual to each profile type. Below, they are depicted
for the profile types that are normally used for pillars.

16:1
12 Series

Pillar Statement
Figure 16:1. Location point of pillar profile types.
End cutting and connection codes are defined in the same way as for stiffeners (see the
STIFFENER statement).
Angles of the end cut are calculated in all cases when the pillar is attached. For certain
profile types, like tubes, I-bars, etc., there are no specific end cut types. It is recommended
to use similar end cut types as for L-bars or T-bars, e.g. 2100 or 3100 if the pillar is cut along
a straight line.
Given connection codes are never used in the calculations.
16.2
Orientation of the Pillar

Stiffeners and flanges are normally orientated by the plate surface they are welded to.
Pillars are "free" and must therefore be oriented by the user explicitly to a larger extent. It is
the orientation in space of the symmetry plane (or line) that is defined (see the figure
above).
Unless the pillar has an end cut with a special orientation, it is irrelevant for round bars and
tubes.
Three alternatives exist:
the symmetry line is directed along one of the main directions of the ship.
the symmetry line has a given angle to the u-axis in the uv-plane of the panel.

16:2
12 Series

Pillar Statement
the symmetry line is between the location point and a given extra point.
This alternative means that the symmetry line is pointing in the given direction. It
can always be used when applicable.
<inclination>::= T= <angle>
<angle>::= <number>
Defining the orientation by an angle can only be used if the description line through
a given uv-point is in the direction of the w-axis (see below).
<additional_point>
is a point in the plane of the panel in the positive direction of the symmetry line,
defined by XT, YT/XT, ZT or YT, ZT. May only be used if the position has been
defined by a point xyz or by end points (see below).
For all unsymmetrical profile types, it is necessary to define the orientation of the flange
relative to the symmetry plane (cf. the figures above).
<fla_dir>::= SID= AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
16.3
Positioning of the Pillar

The position in space of the pillar can be defined in two different ways:
by a line that is supposed to be parallel to any of the coordinate axes. This line can then
in different ways be restricted to give the actual extension of the pillar.
by explicitly defining the position in space of the end points. This is currently the only
possibility when the pillar is not parallel to any of the coordinate axes.
<position>::= <line_and_restrictions> | <end_points>

<line_and_restrictions>::= <point> (1 ... 25)
<end_1>/<end_2>
see General Layout of a Statement.
<point>,
The point is always defined using two coordinates. An unrestricted line is created along
the axis, not used in the definition of the point (e.g. along the w-axis if the point has been
defined in the uv system).

16:3
12 Series

Pillar Statement
Once the line along the pillar has been generated, it can be restricted at the ends in
different ways:
- by a plane at a given coordinate.
- by a given plane.
- by a given panel or by a flange in a panel.
Clearance between the plane and the end point of the pillar can be defined, e.g. for a
"doubling" plate.
<one_coord_plane>
is a plane defined by one coordinate in the main

coordinate system of the ship.
<one_coord_plane_1>::= X1|Y1|Z1= <coord>

is the name of a plane object in the data bank or created
<plane>
in a PLN statement.
<plane>::= <name>
<panel>
is the name of a panel. The description line is intersected

either by the plane or the flange of the panel.
<panel>::= <name>
If not defined according to any of these alternatives, the pillar is supposed to end at the
plane of the current panel.
M1
is a gap, introduced between the restricting plane/panel and the end of

the pillar.
<gap>::= <number>
<end_2>
is equal to <end_1>, but "1" should be exchanged for "2" in all indexed
keywords.
<end_points> is used explicitly to define the end points of the pillar.

<end_points>::=
,X1= <coord>
(1...25)
,Y1= <coord>
(1...25)
,Z1= <coord>
(1...25)
,X2= <coord>
(1...25)
,Y2= <coord>
(1...25)
,Z2= <coord>
(1...25)

16:4
12 Series

Pillar Statement
Example 1:
Example:
PILLAR,PRO=70, 150, 8, U=FR125, V=2350, CON=70,

CUT=2100, M1=20/ Z2=11700, CON=70, CUT=2100;
This is a tube attached to the current panel at end 1 with a clearance of 20 mm and
restricted at end 2 by a one coordinate plane.
Example 2:
Example:
PIL,
PRO=53, 200, X=FR175(3)187, Y=11000, DIR=FOR,

'DECKA', CON=70, M1=15, CUT=3100/
'GIRDER', F1, CON=70, CUT=3100;
This is an I-bar with the web parallel to the CL, placed between a deck and the flange of a
girder.
Example 3:
Example:
PIL,
PRO=50, 160, DIR=FOR, SID=PS,

X1=FR175, Y1=5300, Z1=9000, CUT=2100/
X2=FR177, Y2=5300, Z2=11500, CUT=2100;
The pillar is a U-bar with its web parallel to the CL and the flanges towards portside. The
pillar is inclined and the end points explicitly given. If the pillar shall be cut at an angle, the
end cut angles must be given explicitly in input.

16:5
12 Series

Pillar Statement

16:6
12 Series

Generation of Brackets
17
17.1
General
The general principles for handling of brackets are described in various paragraphs of the
document Hull / Set-up and Customising / Brackets.
As described there, brackets can be of principally three different types:
17.2
Type standard brackets
Panel brackets
Any closed contour may be used and converted into a bracket.
Type Standard Brackets, Overview

Type standard brackets are brackets that are standardised with regard to geometry,
stiffening, controlling parameters, rules for connection to the surrounding structure, etc.
They are part of the bracket standards of a certain yard and the standard may be created
and maintained by the yard. The majority of the parameters for creation of instances of
brackets are normally evaluated automatically, e.g. location, sizes, etc.
AVEVA Marine has traditionally contained an extensive bracket standard that was in-built in
the system. This in-built standard is still available but it is strongly recommended to replace
the in-built brackets by customer defined brackets. The system is delivered with a set-up file
that redefines the vast majority of the in-built brackets. This file may be extended with
customer specific additions to the standard.
Type standard brackets may occur in a number of different types of connections and has
interactive support for their generation (menu function Planar /Model / Create / Bracket).
The result will be input in bracket statements according to a number of bracket syntaxes,
described in detail below.
Type standard brackets are normally topologically connected to their surrounding, i.e. they
will automatically adapt to changes.
17.3
Panel Brackets
A convenient way to create non-standard brackets is to generate them as small panels, so
called panel brackets. They can be generated using all the features and all the flexibility
available for generation of panels. This means that they will normally adapt to changes in
the surrounding.
AVEVA Marine offers to ways of generating panel brackets:
They may be generated separately as panels first and then connected to the panel they
should belong to afterwards.

17:1
12 Series

More "standardised" types of non-standard brackets can be generated via a Vitesse

trigger that has to be developed and maintained by the customer. The name of the
trigger is _TBhookCustBracket. Its interface is described in the on line documentation
Vitesse, Hull. A simple version of this trigger is delivered along with the system to be
extended by the customer. Generation of panel brackets via this hook resembles
generation of type standard brackets, i.e. is integrated with the generation of the panel
it belongs to in a similar way.
The connection of pre-generated panel brackets and activation of the Vitesse trigger are
both activated by the interactive bracket generation function as an alternative to generating
type standard brackets. The bracket will in both cases be connected to the main panels via
a bracket statement in a special layout.
17.4
Brackets from Closed Contours

There is a final alternative to generate arbitrary bracket. Any closed contour may be
transformed into a bracket, provided it is properly located in space and is assigned material
characteristics.
However, "brackets from contours" have certain restrictions:
They are not topological, i.e. they will not adapt to changes of the environment
They cannot be stiffened
They cannot have notches and cutouts (unless made part of the closed contour from
the beginning).
Nevertheless it may be a convenient way to create odd brackets, especially in a phase close
to production.
Such brackets may be created using the ordinary drafting tools. It is especially convenient to
create them in a symbolic hull view whose plane coincides with that of the bracket. If so, the
geometry of the bracket may be created from elements of the surrounding and the location
of the bracket in space may be automatically fetched from the view. Be certain to make that
view current before creating the bracket.
However, any closed contour may be used as a bracket, e.g. drawn in a local coordinate
system a view of its own. But then it must be actively positioned in space.
"Contour brackets" are connected to the panel the same interactive bracket modelling
function as all other brackets and the result will be a bracket and bracket statement looking
very much like that for a panel bracket.
17.5
Storing of Type Standards Brackets
17.5.1
Standard Brackets
Normally, type standard brackets are stored as individual brackets on the panel and as
separate parts after splitting.
However, under certain circumstances brackets can be handled as standard brackets. This
means that the bracket is created in one copy only and that all further occurrences of the
same bracket are replaced by references to this standard bracket.
The handling of standard brackets is currently not activated for customer defined brackets.
A bracket will be handled as a standard bracket only if certain conditions are fulfilled.
The conditions are:

17:2
12 Series

1. The bracket must be of a type, for which Hull Modelling has foreseen that standard
variant may occur.
This is currently true for the following bracket types:
B, BK, BA, BAK, BAA, BAB, BB, BBK, BBA, BR, BBR, KL, KLK, K, KP, KPA, L
2. A standard bracket table must have been established in the data bank for the bracket
type.
3. The angle between the bracket arms must be close to 90 degrees.
4. The length of the bracket arms must be equal to one of the sets of allowed values that
are registered in the bracket table.
The standard bracket is identified by adding an S to the bracket designation. This is done
automatically by Hull Modelling.
17.5.2
Variant Brackets
Even brackets which do not fulfil the conditions for a standard bracket as described above
may occur in a great number of identical copies.
The user can ask Hull Modelling to handle them in a similar way as pure standard brackets.
The user assigns such a bracket a certain variant number and it is his responsibility to check
that all brackets with the same variant number and the same arm lengths really are
identical. (Two brackets with different centre angles may get the same designation, see
below.) A variant bracket is separately stored only if the user demands this explicitly.
The handling of variant brackets is currently not activated for customer defined brackets.
17.6
Bracket Designation
When a type standard bracket is generated and stored in the panel, the bracket will get a
designation from which some details about the generated bracket can be figured out.
Syntax
The bracket designation is built up in the following way:
<bkt_design>::= <bkt_type><arm_A>/<arm_B>
Example:
B50/45

17:3
12 Series

Description of syntax
<bkt_type>
is the bracket designation given as input.
<bkt_type>::= <string>
Examples:
<arm_A>
<arm_B>
B, BK, A, C ...
denotes the size of the bracket as the length of the bracket arms A
and B, respectively, expressed in centimetres.
<arm_A>::= <arm_B>::= <unsigned_integer>

For in-built brackets the bracket designation has a somewhat extended format:
<bkt_design>::= <bkt_type>[S]<arm_A>/<arm_B>-<x><y>z>
Added for standard brackets, see above.
S
denotes the alternative number for notch arrangement given as input.
<x>
<x>::= <digit>
denotes the stiffener/flange arrangement on the bracket.
<y>
<y>::= <digit>
= 0 no stiffener/flange.
= 1 stiffener/flange on the positive side of the flange.
= 2 ditto on the negative side.
= 3 stiffener of both sides along the free edge. Remaining stiffeners on the
positive side.
= 4 as 3 but remaining stiffeners on the negative side.
<z>
denotes the variant number.
<z>::= <digit>
= 0 for standard brackets.
= 9 for normal individual brackets.
=1-8 user given variant (cf. Variant Brackets above.)
Examples (in-built brackets):
BS50/50-200
Standard bracket.
C150/60-511
Variant bracket that may be handled as a standard bracket.
EA80/75-209
Ordinary individual bracket.
Note: that the designation will be equal for two similar brackets with different angles
between the arms.

17:4
12 Series

Bracket Statement
18
Bracket Statement
The BRACKET statement is used to generate type standard brackets and to connect
brackets of the other types to a panel.
In generating type standard brackets, some of the parameters of the bracket (and its
location) are normally derived from the surrounding structure. However, it is also possible to
generate such brackets by explicitly defining all relevant parameters.
The following main syntaxes for generating brackets exist today:
1. Type standard brackets are generated by reference to the surrounding structure.
Seven different subsyntaxes exist, each corresponding to one type of connection.
2. Type standard brackets are generated by explicitly given parameters.
3. Panel brackets or parts are connected as brackets.
4. Already generated brackets may be copied, either within the panel or from another
panel.
Type standard brackets to be generated must have been defined by the customer as
described in Hull Detailed Design / Setup and Customisation / Brackets.
18.1
Type Standard Brackets, Generated from the

Structure
Depending on the type of connection which the bracket is involved in, there are seven
different subsyntaxes. They are numbered 1 to 7 as in the pictures in the next page.
1. Connection panel/profile in such a way that one of the bracket arms normally ends at
an intersecting profile on the panel. Cutouts may be made for intersecting stiffeners if
so specified in the bracket set-up.
There are a few additional options, described in section 18.1.3.1 below.
2. Connection panel/profile as in syntax 1, but the arms completely free. 3-edge brackets
can also be generated in situations as in the figures below.

18:1
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Figure 18:1. Example of 3-arms brackets in syntax 2.
3. Connection panel/panel by a bracket lying in the same plane as the two panels.
4. Connection profile/profile when the two profiles lie in approximately the same plane
which will also be the plane of the bracket.
5. Connection panel/profile like syntax 2, but the profile end is overlapped.
6. Connection profile/profile like syntax 4 but at least one of the involved profile ends is
overlapped.
7. Many different types of surroundings may occur, but in all of them the plane of the
bracket is defined by the user (2- or 3-arm brackets).

18:2
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Figure 18:2. Typical arrangements in syntaxes 1-6.

18:3
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Figure 18:3. Typical bracket arrangements in syntax 7.
The seven syntaxes are very similar and the common parts will be described first. After that,
the special features of each syntax will be outlined in detail.
There is one general rule that is common to the syntaxes 1-6. In most cases, a bracket
connects elements (profiles, a plate surface, etc.) on two different panels. The involved
elements are referred to by the statement. For 2-arm brackets the reference is always
made first (before the slash, if any) to the foreign component, after the slash to the
component at the current panel (if required at all).
For 3-arms brackets the reference should always be done in the following order.
18.1.1
connection side (A in fig. 18.1 above)
location of arm B
location of arm A
3-arm Brackets Controlled by Depth

Normally, the geometry of the bracket is primarily controlled by the length of the arms, either
explicitly given or calculated automatically.
However, for 3-arm brackets it is in certain cases more convenient to let the bracket size be
controlled by the depth of the bracket. Typical examples are the two brackets in Figure
18:4.: Examples of 3-arm brackets controlled by depth.
Figure 18:4. Examples of 3-arm brackets controlled by depth
In most cases the free side should be parallel to the "base" of the bracket and the length of
the edges should be adjusted automatically accordingly. There is an option to control the
bracket size by the depth in these cases.

18:4
12 Series

Bracket Statement
But then there is a possible conflict between the given depth, the arm lengths and the toe
definition if all of them are given. Such a conflict is solved according to the following
scheme:
If arm lengths (A and/or B) are explicitly given (or calculated by connection e.g. to a
connecting profile as in the bracket to the right) they will always be kept.
If in such a case the toe type is of type 3 (as in the figure referred to above) the toe
length (<toel> in the figure above) will be calculated to fit (thus overriding any toe
length of the set-up or as explicitly given)
If the toe type should be of type 12 (tight connection) as in the right bracket both the
arm length and the toe length will have been calculated automatically and the
radius of the toe (R in the figure above) will be adjusted to fit, thus overriding any
given toe radius (either part of the set-up or explicitly given).
If the arm length is not given (when the length is free as in the left bracket above) then
the arm length is calculated from the depth and the toe length (given as part of the
bracket set-up or explicitly given).
The option to generate 3-arm brackets using depth is available in syntaxes 2, 3 and 7 (cf.
below).
18.1.2
Common Input for Syntaxes 1 to 7

The following input features are common to syntaxes 1 to 7.

18:5
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Common syntax
BRA, <bkt_definition>
[,CNO = <bkt_number>( 1... 25)]
[,<symmetry>]
,MAT = <plate_thickn>
[,R = <radius> ]
[,RA = <radius> ]
[,RB = <radius> ]
[,TOLA = <toe_length> ]
[,TOLB = <toe_length> ]
[,<notch_def>]
[,SID = <side_info>]
[,PSID = <side_info>]
[,DOUBLE]
[,<profile_size>]
[,<flange_height]
[,POS = <pos_no> (1 ... 25)]
[,QUA = <quality>]
[,DEST = <destination>]
[,SURF = <surface_treatment>]
[,WELD = <size> (1 ... 5)]
[,BVS = <side_info>]
[,BEV = <bevel> (1 ... 5)]
[,NAB]
[,GRI=<number>(1 ... 5)
[,VAR = <variant_no>]
[,SEP | BEL]
[,BRPAN = <current_panel>]
[,COM[MENT]= <comment>]
[,PO1= < profile_pos_no >]
[,<id's>]
[,<holes in bracket>]
Description
<bkt_definition>

defines the following items:
18:6
12 Series

Bracket Statement
the bracket type.
the notch arrangement.

(In the Extended Bracket Handling the notches
should normally be controlled directly by the
user via input, see <notch_def> below.)
normal or reflected placing of the bracket.
the bracket syntax.
<bkt_definition>::=
, <bkt_type>
,COR= <alt_no>]
[,MIRR]
[,SYN= <synt_no>]
Example:
BRA, B, COR=3, MIRR, SYN=3, ...

<bkt_type> is the designation according to the
standards.
<bkt_type>::= <string>
Examples:
A, B, BK, ...
CNO Number of the bracket. Need normally not be
given when the bracket is generated first time but
should be given when a panel is regenerated after
splitting in order to ensure constant naming of the
bracket plate part(s) extracted from the panel
Defines the notch arrangement alternative
according to the Design Standards.
COR
If no alternative is given, the alternative with the

lowest number will be selected automatically.
<alt_no>::= <integer>
In the Extended Bracket Handling the notches are
normally supposed to be explicitly given (see
<notch_def> below). For compatibility reasons
COR is still accepted for old brackets and will give the
same result as before. Any explicit notch definition
will supersede the one, asked for by COR.
Thus, COR cannot be used for brackets that are not
in-built (or have been in-built
MIRR In many cases, there are two possible

orientations of the bracket. It can be in normal
position, i.e. the "A-side" of the bracket (= its u-axis)
along the current panel. It can also be mirrored, i.e.
the "B-side" along the current panel. Cf. the figures
below.

18:7
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Figure 18:5. Normal position.
Figure 18:6. Mirrored position.
defines the syntax according to which input is

given. Each bracket type has a default syntax and if
input is given for this syntax, it need not be defined.
SYN
<symmetry>
see STIFFENER statement.
Used to control a radius of the free side of certain

brackets. A negative value is interpreted as the
amplitude of the arc.
RA,RB
Radius of toe A and B, respectively, for certain types

of brackets/ bracket toes. Any values defined in the
bracket setup will be overridden.
TOLA
TOLB
MAT
Ditto lengths of toes at end of arm A and B,

respectively.
defines the thickness of the bracket plate.
<plate_thickn>::= <number>

18:8
12 Series

Bracket Statement
<notch_def>
is relevant only for brackets according to the

extended bracket handling. Explicit control of the
notches thus may be performed.
<notch_def>::=[,NOT=<notch_design>]
[,NOA=<notch_design>]
[,NOB=<notch_design>]
[,NOC=<notch_design>]
The figures below illustrate in which corners the

different corner notches may be used. The arrows
indicate the default direction of asymmetrical
notches. Note that there are somewhat different
rules for 2- and 3-arm brackets.
Figure 18:7. Keywords for notches at bracket corners.
<notch_design> specifies the notch in the same

way as in the notch statement. If set -1 means total
suppression of the corresponding notch that would
otherwise have been set, e.g. as a default in the
bracket set-up.
If <notch_design> is preceded by a minus sign,
the notch will be mirrored in the bisector of the corner
angle (i.e. its u-axis will fall along the other bracket
arm).
Note: that symmetric notches always will be centred
at the profile edge in case of overlapping
brackets. Thus they may be transformed into
unsymmetric notches when cut into the
bracket geometry.
SID
defines the position of the bracket relative to the

plate of the current panel. Need not be given if the
bracket is in the same plane as the panel.
<side_info>::=
AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
PSID
defines on which side of the bracket the flange/

stiffener shall be located (if any). Need not be given
for brackets without any stiffening and must not be
given for bracket types which cannot have any
profiles at all.
DOUBLE
Certain big brackets may have stiffeners on both

sides of the bracket, parallel to the free edge. Profiles
on both sides are called for by DOUBLE.

18:9
12 Series

Bracket Statement
<flange height>
is relevant only for brackets with a folded flange. For

them it may be used to control the nominal height of
the flange.
<flange height>::= H= <number>

In most cases, there is a built in default flange size
and then this clause need not be given even for
flanged brackets.
<profile_size>
is used to control the dimension of the stiffeners that

will occur on the bracket according to the bracket setup.
<profile_size>::=
[,PRA=
[,PRB=
[,PRC=
[,PRD=
[,PRE=
<p_type>
<p_type>
<p_type>
<p_type>
<p_type>
[,
[,
[,
[,
[,
<param>
<param>
<param>
<param>
<param>
(1...4)]]
(1...4)]]
(1...4)]]
(1...4)]]
(1...4)]]
Cf. the definition of profiles on stiffeners in the

STIFFENER statement.
PRA is used for the first stiffener on the bracket (or
the flange, if any).
PRB for the second stiffener (first stiffener if there is
a flange), etc.
<p_type>= -1 indicates that the corresponding

stiffener should be deleted.
POS
defines the position piece number of the bracket.

Standard brackets and variant brackets are normally
not supposed to have position numbers.
<pos_no>::= <integer>
QUAL
defines the material quality of the bracket.
<quality>::=
<quality_code>|<quality_string>
If left out entirely, the default quality according to
customer set-up will be selected.
DEST
defines the workshop station where to assembly the

bracket.
The value to be assigned must be selected among
the destination strings defined by the customer.
SURF
defines the surface treatment of the bracket before

the production phase.
The value to be assigned must be selected among
the surface treatment strings defined by the
customer.

18:10
12 Series

Bracket Statement
WELD
defines the welding size along the connected edges

of the bracket.
<throat_thickn>::= <number>
For 2-edge brackets at most four values may be
given. They should be given in the following order:
w_a, w_b, w_toea, w_toeb.
For 3-edge brackets at most five values may be
given in the following order: w_con, w_a, w_b,
w_toea, w_toeb.
(Here w_a is the weld along arm A, w_b along arm B,
w_toea weld at (tight connected) toe of arm A,
w_toeb ditto for toe of arm B. w_con is the weld
along the extra edge connecting arm A and B)
Any irrelevant weld must be indicated by 0 if a
relevant weld follows. Trailing zeroes need not be
given, e.g. WELD=5,5,0,5 and WELD=5,5.
BVS
Specifies the direction that the user considers to be

positive side when defining the bevel information. It
may have impact on the sign of the bevel code.
Relevant only if BEV is used.
BEV
defines the bevel along the connected edges of the

bracket.
BEV=<bevel1>, <bevel2>, ...

Similar rules should be applied as described for
WELD above
NAB
Switch off automatic bevel. There will then be no

bevel.
GRI
Defines the grinding along the edges of the bracket.

Similar rules should be applied as described for
WELD above.
VAR
defines a variant number of the bracket. A given

value should be in the interval 1-8.
<variant_no>::= <integer>
SEP
Normally, individual brackets are stored along with

the panel. Using SEP[ARATE] means that the
bracket should be separately stored as a "variant
bracket". SEP should not be used without defining a
variant number simultaneously. Cf also BEL below.
BEL
As a default, standard brackets are stored separately

(provided the standard bracket handling is in
operation).
BEL[ONGING] is used to make Hull Modelling treat a
bracket as an individual bracket even if it fulfils all
requirement of a standard bracket.

18:11
12 Series

Bracket Statement
BRPAN
Normally, the bracket is generated directly on the

current panel. In certain situations, it might be
necessary or more convenient to give input as
though another panel were current. This can be done
by assigning the name of the panel to be considered
as the current one to BRPAN (BRacket PANel).
<current_panel>::= <name>
All input in the current statement shall be given as if
the given panel had been the current one.
COLOUR
COMMENT
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
Colour of all brackets defined in the statement.

Defines the position number of the stiffeners on the
bracket.
<profile_pos_no>::=
[,PO1= <integer>]
[,PO2= <integer>]
[,PO3= <integer>]
[,PO4= <integer>]
[,PO5= <integer>]
PO1 is used for the first stiffener on the bracket (or
the flange, if any).
PO2 for the second stiffener (first stiffener if there is a
flange), etc.
<id's>
correspond to the items assigned to the keywords

LIS, AS1-AS4 in the panel statement (cf. that
statement).
<id's>::= LIS=<parts_list>,
AS1=<name>
AS2=<name>
AS3=<name>
AS4=<name>
<parts_list>::= <name>
A name given in the bracket statement will override
the corresponding name given on panel level.
To cancel a name set on panel level without
replacing it with another name, the corresponding
keyword should be given stand alone (i.e. without
any assigned value) or be assigned an empty string
(e.g. AS3='').
<assembly>

Cf. Panel Statement . If the stiffener belongs to

different assembly than the panel in general, that
assembly can be specified here.
18:12
12 Series

Bracket Statement
<holes in bracket>
Defines holes in bracket
<holes in bracket> := BHO=<hole

designation>, HU=, HV=<v
value>, [HT=<inclination> | PLLA |
PLLB | PLLC]
BHO - Parameterized designation of standardized
holes according to the standards. Only one type of
hole per bracket.
HU - u coordinate (1... 25)
HV - v coordinate (1... 25)
HT - Inclination of hole (1... 25)
PLLA - Hole(s) will be parallel to arm a
PLLB - Hole(s) will be parallel to arm b
PLLC - Hole(s) will be parallel to arm c
18.1.3
Syntax 1
General
The examples at the end of this section illustrate typical situations in which brackets may
occur in this syntax.
In most cases the bracket is attached with its A-arm welded to the plate of the current panel
and with its B-arm welded along an external profile. However, there is an option to attach the
A-arm to the web of a stiffener on the current panel and the B-arm along another stiffener on
the same current panel. This may be the case if the first stiffener acts like a small panel
itself, e.g. a T-beam under a deck.
The normal situation is also that the end of the A-arm is defined by an intersecting profile on
the current panel, either explicitly given by the user of automatically found. However, if no
profile is found the program examines if the panel has a bounding panel in the direction of
the bracket. If so the bracket ends at this panel as though it had been a big flat bar. The
name of such a bounding panel may also be given explicitly.
Finally, the length of the A-side can be given explicitly. In that case any intersecting profile
information is irrelevant and will cause an error..
<syntax_1>::=[,A= <length_A>]
[,B= <length_B>]
[,C= <length_C>]
[,M1= <gap>]
[,OFF=<offset>]
[, <bkt_dir>]
<B-side_ref>
[/ <A-side_end>]

18:13
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Normally the A-measure is calculated automatically from the distance between

the overlapped profile and the intersecting profile. In the Extended Bracket
Handling the details about the connection of the bracket to the intersecting
profile are controlled by the customer set-up.
However, A may be explicitly defined.
<length_A>::= <number>
When not explicitly defined a clearance can be introduced between the bracket
and the intersecting component (see M1 below).
Figure 18:8. Gap controlled by M1.
Defines the length of the B-arm.

B is normally the length of the B-arm. However, if given negative (B<0) B
specifies the height above the plane of the current panel of the end of arm B.
<length_B>::= <number>
C
C specifies the height of the toe at the end of arm A. It is normally calculated
automatically from rules in the bracket set-up.
<length_C>::= <number>
If explicitly given and < 0 C specifies the height of end of toe A above arm A.
M1
Clearance between the intersected profile and the bracket (cf. the comment on A
above).
OFF
Normally one of the faces of the bracket lies in the mould line plane of the profile.
OFF can be used to displace the bracket a given distance from this plane. (Using
the clause for overlapping brackets has no effect.)
<offset>::= <number>
Normally, the bracket is placed in line with the profile along the edge of
<bkt_dir>
which it is set.

18:14
12 Series

Bracket Statement
<bkt_dir> can be used to control the direction in an arbitrary way.

The direction line can be controlled to have a certain direction or to pass a
given point.
1. Given as a direction:
<inclination>::= T= <angle>
The angle is measured relative to the u-axis of the panel.
The vector is defined as in the xyz-space by giving two coordinates of a

point relative to the origin of the xyz-system of the ship, i.e. two
components of a vector (in the plane of the panel).
<in princ. plane> specifies that the bracket is located in a

principle plane of the xyz-system.
<in princ. plane>::= XT | YT | ZT |
Thus, the keywords should be given without any value.
2. Given as a point.
<dir_point>::= <point_1>
<B-arm_ref>
Specifies the profile along which the B-side is attached. Normally this is
and "external profile" but if the bracket is generated between two
stiffeners on the same panel it is a reference to a stiffener on the current
panel.
<B-arm_ref>::=
<A-arm_end>
<ext_prof_ref> (125)
<S_ref> (125)
[,REF]
Specifies (when given) the component against which the A-side should
end (a stiffener or flange on the current panel or an external panel. If the
bracket is set between two stiffeners on the current panel this is the
stiffener against the web of which the A-side is welded.
<A-arm_end>::= <int_prof_ref> | <panel_ref>

18:15
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Examples:
Example 1:
Figure 18:9. Bracket A in a typical syntax 1 connection (example 1).
BRA, A, COR=5, SID=AFT, PSIDE=SB, MAT=12, L160/S1;
Example 2:
Figure 18:10. Bracket type C as in example 2.
BRA, C, COR=5, SID=AFT, PSIDE=SB, B=1600, MAT=15, L310;

18:16
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Example 3:
Figure 18:11. Bracket BCB as in example 3.
BRA, BCB, SID=FOR, B=350, MAT=12, 'GIRDER',F1;

Example 4:
Brackets between stiffeners on a deck, one of which is a beam (e.g. a T-bar)
BRA, BCB, SID=FOR, B=350, MAT=12, SF55/SL1-4;
(SF55 is a beam at frame 55, SL1-4 are longitudinal stiffeners at longitudinal positions 1 to
4)
18.1.4
Syntax 2
The figures below illustrate the type of connections which the brackets may be part of. (In
the figures, L denotes shell profiles, S stiffeners and F flanges.)

18:17
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Figure 18:13. 3-edge bracket in syntax 2.
Any of the involved panels can be the current panel.

In case of a 3-edge bracket the references must be given in the order A / B / C. The name of
the current panel may be left out. In this case it does not make sense to mirror the bracket.
(Brackets with these edges must have been established by the customer in the Extended
Bracket Handling.
<syntax_2>::=
[,A= <length_A>]
[,K= <depth>]
[,B= <length_B>]
[,SI2= <side_info>]
[,OFF=<offset>]
[,<bkt_dir>]
[/ <prof_ref> (1 ... 25), [REF]]

[/ <name>[<int_prof_ref> (1 ... 25), [REF]]
For <prof_ref>, see General Layout of a Statement.
<pan_ref>
is used when the adjoining panel is the panel with the plate surface for 2edge brackets.
<pan_ref>::= <name>
SID
(cf. Common syntax above) should always be given relative to the plate
surface (i.e. not necessarily relative to the current panel).

18:18
12 Series

Bracket Statement
defines the length of the side A of the bracket.
B
Ditto for side B. If not given, B is supposed to be equal to A.
In the case of a 3-edge bracket A and B may be calculated from each
other to ensure the same distance of the bracket toes from the
intersecting plane, see the figure below.
Figure 18:14. Default rules for A and B in 3-edge brackets.
Assigning any of A or B a negative value means that the distance

(height) shall be measured perpendicularly to the bottom of the bracket.
<length>
As an alternative to giving A (and B) in case of 3-arms brackets with its

free side parallel to the base of the bracket K can be assigned the depth
of the bracket (cf-section 18.1.1 3-arms brackets controlled by Depth).
SI2
If a bracket is set at the edge of a flange, it is necessary to select one of

the possible edges (cf. the figures above).
The same is true if a stiffener is referred to by a tag reference and there
are stiffeners on both sides of the panel.
<side_info>, see SID, Common Syntax.

If SI2 is not given in a connection to a flange, the bracket will be
connected to the flat side of the flange.
OFF
<bkt_dir>
See General.

See General.
18:19
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Examples:
A BAK-bracket connecting a bottom web to a longitudinal.
Example:
Figure 18:15. Bracket BAK as in example 1.
BRA, BAK, COR=3, SYN=2, MAT=12, SID=FOR,

PSIDE=SB, A=845, B=1000, L290;
A KL-bracket connecting a longitudinal bulkhead to the flange of a web, and
belonging to the bulkhead.
Example:
Figure 18:16. Bracket KL as in example 2.
BRA, KL, SYN=2, SID=SB, SI2=FOR, A=600,

PSID=BOT, MAT=12, 'AA141-3', F1;

18:20
12 Series

Bracket Statement
A user defined 3-edge bracket, connected to the plane of the current panel.
Example:
Figure 18:17. User defined 3-edge bracket ABC as in example 3.
BRA, ABC, NOT=R50, NOC=R50, MAT=10, B=500, SID=TOP

/'AA123-4', SL45,
/TR45;
Since A has been left out it will be set B/sin(V).
18.1.5
Syntax 3
The figures below illustrate different situations in which a bracket can be generated
according to syntax 3.
In the figures, LIM means a limit, F a flange, L a shell profile and S a stiffener on an adjacent
panel.

18:21
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Figure 18:18. Typical Bracket Arrangements in Syntax 3.

18:22
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Except for a connection with a three-arm bracket, any of the involved panels can be the
current one.
<syntax_3>::=
[,A= <length_A>]
[,B= <length_B>]
[,K= <depth>]
<F_ref>
/
}
LIM= <lim_no>
The length of arm A. Must always be give for two-arm brackets

If A=<a> (<10) then A=<a>*B.
For three-arm brackets A will be calculated from B as described in syntax 2
above (or from depth).
The length of arm B.

If B= (<10) then B=*A.
If B is not given for a two-arm bracket it will be set equal to A.
If B is not given for a three-arm bracket it will be calculated from A as described
in syntax 2 above (or from depth).
Cf. Syntax 2.

18:23
12 Series

Bracket Statement
The definition of the position of the bracket arms is done in the following way:
1. The arm along the current panel is defined after the first slash via a
reference to a flange on the panel or to one of its limits.
2. The position of the arm B can either be made via an external profile
reference or limit on an adjoining panel or via a line, all of it before the first
slash, or via a reference to a panel or hull curve.
If a line is used, it must have such a direction that the bracket is to the
left of the line if SI2 is not given.
3. The position of the arm A for a three-arm bracket can be defined in the
same way as for arm B, but following the second slash
SI2
Defines the position of the bracket relative to the limit before the first slash. Not
relevant for profile and limit references and never for three-arm brackets.
When given together with a line it makes the direction of the line irrelevant.
<side_info>, see SIDE, Common Syntax

Regarding <line>, <line_1>, <line_2>, <ext_prof_ref>, <F_ref>, see
General Layout of a Statement.
<panel>::= <curve>::= <name>


18:24
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Examples:
Bracket KC belonging to a deck web.
Example:
Figure 18:19. Bracket KC as in Example 1.
BRA, KC, COR=2, PSIDE=AFT, DOUBLE, A=2600, MAT=15, 'AA465-7',

F1/F1;
Bracket B, one arm of which is defined by a line.
Note: that the bracket will lie to the left of the line.

18:25
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Example:
Figure 18:20. Bracket B as in Example 2.
BRA, B, COR=2, SYNT=3, MAT=15, PSIDE=TOP, A=500, U=23200,

T=270/LIM=4;

18:26
12 Series

Bracket Statement
A bracket BR connecting a double floor bottom to a transversal.

Example:
Figure 18:21. Bracket BR as in Example 3.
BRA, BR, MAT=12, A=500, TR75/LIM=2;

A bracket along a limit with arm B restricted by a panel surface.
Example:
BRA, KL, MAT=12, A=700, AB123-4, SI2=PS/ LIM=3, ... ;
18.1.6
Syntax 4
The figures below show typical examples of connections in which brackets may occur in this
syntax.

18:27
12 Series

Bracket Statement
(In the figures, L denotes shell profiles, S stiffeners and F flanges.)
Figure 18:22. Typical bracket arrangements in syntax 4..
<syntax_4>::= ,A= <length_A>

[,B= <length_B>]
[,SI2= <side_info>]
[,OFF=<offset>]
,<ext_prof_ref> (1 ... 25)
/<int_prof_ref> (1 ... 25)
<ext_prof_ref> and <int_prof_ref>, see General Layout of a Statement.
A
The length of the bracket arm A.
B
The length of the bracket arm B. If not given, B is supposed to be equal to A.
Any of A and B may be negative to be interpreted as the depth of the bracket relative to
the opposite arm.
SI2
OFF
See Syntax 2 and the figures above.

Normally one of the faces of the brackets lies in the mould line plane of the
profile. OFF can be used to displace the bracket a given distance from this
plane. (The bracket must not overlap along any of its arms for this clause to
come into effect.)

18:28
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Examples
A BB-bracket connecting a flange on a deck web to a longitudinal.
Example:
Figure 18:23. Bracket BB as in example 1.
BRA, BB, MAT=16, SID=AFT, A=500, L590/F1;

A BBK-bracket connecting two flanges and generated on a bottom web.
Example:
Figure 18:24. Bracket BBK as in example 2.
BRA, BBK, SID=AFT, MAT=20, SI2=PS, PSID=BOT, A=1400, 'AA1613P', F1/F1;
18.1.7
Syntax 5
The figures below illustrate the type of connections which the bracket may be part of. (In the

18:29
12 Series

Bracket Statement
figures, L denotes shell profiles and S stiffeners. A, B, D are bracket parameters according
to the standards, H is the profile height.)
Any of the involved panels can be the current one. If the panel statement with L/S is current,
then the keyword MIRR should be given to reflect the bracket.
<syntax_5>::= [,A= <length_A>

[,(BOV= <overlap>) | (B= <length_B>)]
[,D= <length_D>]
[,M1= <dist>]
[, <ext_prof_ref> (1 ... 25) [,REF]]
[/ <int_prof_ref> (1 ... 25)]
<ext_prof_ref> and <int_prof_ref>, see General Layout of a Statement.
However, a bracket cannot overlap a flange.
In general, the bracket parameters will be generated according to the rules specified in the
Design Standards. (The special built-in bracket BVB has a quite different way of deriving
parameters compared to the others with a very high degree of automation.) Normally, quite
a number of different alternatives exist and they will be described in detail below.

18:30
12 Series

Bracket Statement
1. For brackets with a D-side (see the figures above) this measure is defined by
an intersecting stiffener or flange
If not given by the user, the system will automatically search for the closest
intersecting profile.
2. For brackets with a toe, the measure can be defined in the same way.
However, the stiffener may be on the opposite side of the plate and there will
be a clearance between the bracket and the intersected profile. See the figure
below:
Figure 18:26. Example of cl. Clearance/overlap at intersecting stiffener.
3. If not given at all, the A-measure will be calculated from the condition
regarding clearance at the end of the overlapped profile (1.5*H for built-in
brackets) and angle between the plate surface and the free edge (< 75
degrees for built-in brackets). See the Design Standards for details. (For
externally defined brackets constants of the bracket set-up are used.)
4. Finally, for brackets with a toe, A can be given explicitly.
B
BOV
For brackets in syntax 5, the length of the side B is normally controlled by

the profile overlap.
The following possibilities exist:
1. If neither BOV nor B is given, Hull Modelling uses the overlap as specified by
bracket set-up.
2. BOV is given explicitly.
<overlap>::= <number>
BOV < 5 is interpreted as a factor giving the actual overlap BOV * H.
BOV >= 5 is the actual overlap.
The overlap is measured along the profile, taking into account the end cutting.
3. Finally, for certain types of toe/overlap the B-measure can be given explicitly
by the user.
B is then always given perpendicular to the plate.
Consequently, a bracket can be generated without giving any dimensions as far as the
rules specified for the bracket are accepted.

18:31
12 Series

Bracket Statement
The length of edge D is calculated automatically for those brackets where relevant.
However, the D-measure can be given explicitly, but the given length must be
shorter than the automatically calculated value.
<length_D>::= <number>
M1
For brackets with lug:

If not given, the lug will end 50 mm before the end of the profile (along the trace of
it).
M1 defines the distance of a seam from the plate.
<dist>::= <number>
M1 > 0 for perpendicular distance. The lug will end 50 mm before the point
defined by M1.
M1 < 0 indicates the distance along the trace of the overlapped profile from its end
to the beginning of the lug of the bracket.
For brackets without lug:
The distance from the "origin" corner of the bracket and the trace of the
overlapped profile. The distance is measured in the direction of the A-arm of the
bracket (dimensions above for built-in brackets.)

18:32
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Examples:
A GA-bracket connecting a sideweb to a longitudinal.
Example:
Figure 18:27. Bracket GA as in example 1.
BRA, GA, SID=FOR, BOV=2.7, A=1175, MAT=12.5, L450;

(BOV = 945 gives the same result.)
If the default rules are used:
BRA, GA, SID=FOR, MAT=12.5, L450;

18:33
12 Series

Bracket Statement
An EC-bracket connecting a sideweb with an intersecting profile to a longitudinal.

Example:
Figure 18:28. Bracket EC as in example 2.
BRA, EC, COR=4, SID=AFT, MAT=15, M1=300, BOV=1.7, L570/S1;
18.1.8
Syntax 6
The figures below illustrate the type of connections which the bracket may be part of in this
syntax. (In the figures, L denotes shell profiles, S stiffeners and F flanges.)

18:34
12 Series

Bracket Statement
<syntax_6>::= [,(A= <length_A>) | (AOV= <overlap_A>)]

[,(B= <length_B>) | (BOV= <overlap_B>)]
[,M1= <seamdist>]
,<ext_prof_ref> (1 ... 25) [,REF]
/<int_prof_ref> (1 ... 25)
For <ext_prof_ref> and <int_prof_ref>, see General Layout of a Statement in
Chapter General Features of Input Schemes.
<panel>::= <name>
In general, the bracket parameters will be generated according to the rules specified in the
Design Standards. (The very special built-in brackets BVA and BVB are generated
according to special rules with a high degree of automation. The following comments are not
valid for these brackets.)
For the brackets EA, EAK, EB and EBK, the A-measure can be defined in two
ways:
1. If not given at all in input, A will be calculated as described in Syntax 5.
2. The measure can explicitly be assigned to A.

18:35
12 Series

Bracket Statement
AOV
For those bracket types which overlap along the side A, the A-measure is defined
by an overlap assigned to AOV.
<overlap_A>::= <number>
Suppose that H is the height of the overlapped profile. If not given, AOV is
supposed to be H or as specified by the bracket set-up.
AOV < 5 is interpreted as a factor giving an overlap AOV * H.
AOV >= 5 is interpreted as the actual overlap.
B
BOV
M1
Normally, the B-measure is controlled via the overlap.

See Syntax 5 which has the same options.
See Syntax 5. Note that when > 0, M1 should include the height of the profile
which the bracket is standing on, i.e. be measured from the plate surface.
Remark:
The rules above mean that a bracket can be generated quite automatically the constants
of the bracket set-up are accepted

18:36
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Examples:
EC bracket, connecting a bulkhead to a longitudinal:
Example:
Figure 18:30. Bracket EC as in example 1.
BRA, EC, COR=2, SID=FOR, PSI=BOT, M1=250,

BOV=1.7, AOV=1.2, MAT=15, L500/S2;
or ... BOV=650, AOV=450 ... ;)

18:37
12 Series

Bracket Statement
GB-bracket, connecting a bottom transverse to a longitudinal.

Example:
Figure 18:31. Bracket GB as in example 2.
BRA, GB, MIRR, PSIDE=SB, MAT=14, A=800,

SID=AFT, BOV=1.35, L180/SL18;
If the default rules are accepted, A and BOV need not be given.
18.1.9
Syntax 7
The figures below illustrate the type of connections which the brackets may be part of in this
syntax.
Characteristic for this syntax is that the bracket plane is "free", i.e. not defined by any of the
parts it is connecting. Thus normally the bracket plane has to be defined by the user.
SYN=7 may be given for all brackets in this syntax but need to be given only for brackets
occurring also in other syntaxes as specified for each individual bracket.
This syntax supports brackets with both two and three bracket arms. The length of the arms
of the brackets may (in case the bracket toe is of a type that may be free) be given either by
the user explicitly or e.g. by a profile against which it is connected, cf. the two figures below.

18:38
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Figure 18:33. Explicitly given bracket size vs. automatically calculated.
In both cases B is supposed to be given by the user. In the left case A must also be given
whereas A is calculated from the profile section in the right case.
<syntax_7>::= <plane_def>
,MSID=<side_info>
[,SID=<side_info>]
[,SI2=<side_info>]
[,A=<length_A>]
[,B=<length_B>]
[,K=<depth>]
[,C=<length_C>]
[,D=<length_D>]
[,R=<radius>]
[,<position_a>]
/<position_b>
[/<position_c>]
;

18:39
12 Series

Bracket Statement
<plane_def>
defines the plane of the bracket. This information is compulsory

except when the bracket arm A falls along a shell curve. In that case
the bracket plane is supposed to be the same as that of the curve if
not otherwise specified.
<plane_def>:= <principal_plane> |
<normal+line> |
<three_points>
<principal_plane>::=X|Y|Z=<coord> (1...25)
<normal+line>::=<line>
In this case the bracket is supposed to be perpendicular to the uvplane of the current panel along a given line in that plane.
<three points>::= ORI=<coord>,<coord>,<coord>

,UAX=<coord>,<coord>,<coord>
,VAX=<coord>,<coord>,<coord>
When the bracket is defined by this option arbitrary space points in the
plane of the bracket can be selected, provided they are not co-linear.
When the bracket is defined by a curve or by three points only one
bracket can be generated in one statement, otherwise up to 25.
Examples of plane definitions:
1. X=FR25()29, FR31()35
2. U=FR34, V=1345, T=45
3. X=FR34, Y=1345, XT=FR34+100, YT=1445
4. ORI=FR34,1345,1000,
UAX=FR34+100,1445,
1000, VAX=FR34,1345,2000
Examples 2), 3) and 4) are supposed to define the same plane. 2) and
4) suppose that the bracket is perpendicular to the current panel.
MSID
Defines the orientation of the material relative to the mould plan of the
bracket.
SID
Defines the position of the bracket relative to the element given in

<position_a> unless defined by any of the involved elements.
SI2
Defines the position of the bracket relative to the element given in

<position_b> unless defined by any of the involved elements.
Need never be given if <position_c> is given.
Defines the length of the bracket arm A it not otherwise specified. If

given (=a) and a<10, A will be set to a*B (where B is the length of arm
B, whether explicitly given or calculated).
Ditto bracket arm B. If given (=b) and b<10, B will be set to b*A (where
A is the length of arm A, whether explicitly given or calculated).
If A and/or B is negative, this should be interpreted as the height of the
corresponding toe above the bottom of the bracket (perpendicular
arm length).

18:40
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Defines the height of the toe at the end of arm A. In case of

connection to profile this height is normally set automatically.
Cf. Syntax 2.
Figure 18:34. Definition of parameter C.
D
R
Ditto for toe at end of arm B.

In certain cases a major (fillet) radius of the free side of the bracket
(associated with one of the toes) may be controlled by the user via R.
In most cases this radius has a default value set up in the bracket
definition.
The bracket position is defined in the following way:

1. The origin of the bracket is supposed to be in the intersection between the element
given by <position_a> and <position_b>.
2. The position of bracket arm B is defined by <position_b> and follows always
after the first slash.
3. For brackets with two arms the bracket arm A is defined by <position_a>. For
brackets with three edges the arm A is defined by <position_c>.
4. For brackets with three edges the position of the edge connecting arm A and arm B
is defined by <position_a>.

18:41
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Examples:
Figure 18:35. Positioning of bracket with two arms.
Figure 18:36. Positioning of bracket with three arms.
<position_a>::=
<position_a>
is used to define the position of arm A for brackets with two arms, to
define the position of the connection edge for brackets with three
edges (cf. above).
When the panel to be given is the current panel the panel name need
not be given.

18:42
12 Series

Bracket Statement
<position_b>
has the same layout as <position_a> and is used to define the

position of bracket arm B.
If bracket arm B has a toe with tight profile connection a profile
reference must be included. The complete arm B may fall along a
profile section, e.g. a flange in the current panel. In the latter case no
panel name is required.
<position_c>
is similar to <position_b>. It is used to define the position of

bracket arm A for brackets with three edges but may also be used to
define the connection /restriction of the bracket arm A for two-arm
brackets (cf. above).
In case arm A of a two-arm bracket should be restricted by a profile
section there are two possibilities provided arm A is located along a
plane panel. Either the profile reference can be given in
<position_a> or in <position_c> (cf. the example below). (If
arm A is located along a shell curve and restricted by a shell profile
section the latter option is the only alternative).
Figure 18:37. Bracket connection with optional alternatives for generation (see below).
Alternative 1:
BRA, ..., 'PAN_A', SL13/ 'PAN_B', ... ;

Alternative 2:
BRA, ..., 'PAN_A'/ 'PAN_B'/ 'PAN_A', SL13, ... ;

(If PAN_A should happen to be the current panel, 'PAN_A' can be left out
completely in the statements above).
In the examples below, PAN_A is supposed to be the current panel and thus left
out wherever possible.

18:43
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Example 1:
Example:
A free type of bracket is generated and the arms are not restricted by any intersecting
member.
Figure 18:38. Bracket KL as in example 1.
BRA, KL, X=FR35, MAT=12, MSID=AFT, SI2=PS, ..

/ 'PAN_B', A=500, B=500;
Note: In this case the built-in KL bracket must have been re-defined in the Extended
Bracket Handling (to be used in syntax 1).
In this case it is not necessary to give SID since PAN_B is only on one side of
PAN_A.

18:44
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Example 2:
Example:
In the same situation the bracket arm A is restricted by a an intersecting stiffener.
Figure 18:39. A user defined bracket BGM generated as in example 2.
BRA, BGM, ... , SL15/ 'PAN_B', B=500;

(or cf. above):
BRA, BGM, ... / 'PAN_B'/ SL15, B=500;
In this case A should not be given since the A-measure is defined by the intersecting
stiffener. Note, in this case it is not necessary to give SI2 since this direction is defined by
the intersecting profile SL15.

18:45
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Example 3:
Example:
In this case arm B is restricted by a flange on PAN_B and arm A is restricted by an
intersecting panel.
Figure 18:40. Bracket KL generated as in example 3.
BRA, KL, ... / 'PAN_B', F1/ 'PAN_C';

In this case neither A nor B should be given, nor are SID or SI2 required.
Example 4:
Example:
The bracket is here used as a tripping bracket between the current panel and a flange on
it.
Figure 18:41. Bracket KL connecting flange and plate as in example 4.
BRA, KL, ... / F1, A=300, SID=TOP;

Note: In this case the arm A of the bracket must always fall along the panel, not along the
profile. If not given B will be calculated from the flange height. SID is compulsory.

18:46
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Example 5:
Example:
A tripping bracket is set perpendicularly to the current panel to support a bent flange. The
bracket is positioned along a line in the current panel.
Figure 18:42. Bracket KL along given line, connecting flange and plate as in example 5.
BRA, KL, ... , U=15000, V=1000, T=60/ F1, A=600,

SID=TOP;
Example 6:
Example:
The bracket is positioned by three arbitrary points in space. Otherwise equal example 1.
BRA, KL, ... / 'PAN_B', A=500, B=500, SI2=PS,

ORI=FR35, 7000, 1000,
UAX=FR35+1000, 8000, 1000,
VAX=FR35+500, 7000, 2000;
18.2
Type Standard Brackets, Explicitly Defined

This syntax is used explicitly to define all necessary information about the bracket, its
geometry and its position.
Currently, this syntax can be used mainly for simple types of brackets.

18:47
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Syntax:
BRA, <bkt_definition>
[,<symmetry>]
,MAT= <plate_thickn>
,MSID= <side_info>
, <bkt_param>
[,PSID= <side_info>]
[,DOUBLE]
[, <profile_size>]
, <position>
[,POS= <pos_no>]
[,QUA= <quality_code>]
[,WELD= <throat_thickn> (1 ... 3)]
[,VAR= <variant_no>]
[,SEP | BEL]
[,V1= <angle_1>]
[,V2= <angle_2>]
;
Most of the clauses are used in the same way as described above in the normal bracket
syntax. Only the deviations will be described in detail below.

18:48
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Description
<bkt_definition>
MIRR and SYNTAX must not be used when selecting the

bracket.
MSID
The orientation of the plate relative to the mould plane of the

bracket must be defined.
<bkt_param>
<position>
<side_info>::= AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
Parameters controlling the geometry of the
bracket.
<bkt_param>::=
(<param_keyw>=<number>)(...)
<param_keyw>::= A|B|C|D|E|F|G|H|J|K
The bracket is located in space by three points assigned to
ORI, UAX and VAX in the same way as described in the
PANEL statement.
The local uv-system of the bracket has its origin in the lower
left corner of the bracket and the u-axis is along the edge A.
If the point assigned to VAX lies along the edge B of the
bracket, the centre angle of the bracket will be calculated
automatically (cf V1 below).
V1
defines the angle of the origin of the bracket. If not given, it will
be calculated as the angle between the vectors from ORI to
the points UAX and VAX, respectively (cf <position> above).
<angle_1>::= <number>
V2
Relevant only for brackets with another edge at the end of

edge A. The angle at this corner is assigned to V2.
<angle_2>::= <number>
Example:
BRA, B, COR=2, MAT=12.5, A=500, B=500,

MSIDE=TOP, PSID=TOP,
ORI=FR75, 2000, 1000,
UAX=FR75, 3000, 1000,
VAX=FR76, 2000, 1000;
18.3
Panels and Parts as Brackets

In this syntax, it is possible to attach a bracket panel or a part as a bracket to the current
panel.

18:49
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Syntax:
BRA, <obj_name>
[,<symmetry>]
[,NAME= <designation>]
[,SEP]
[,MAT= <mat_thickn>]
[,MSID= <side_info>]
[,POS= <pos_no>]
[,MIRR]
[,<position>|<translate>]
;
Those items which are equal to the other syntaxes will not be explained below.

18:50
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Description
<obj_name>
Name of the object in which the bracket is stored.
<obj_name>::= <name>
If the object is a panel, it must have been generated as a bracket
panel (see the Panel Statement).
NAME
The bracket will get a designation equal to <obj_name> unless

otherwise stated. An arbitrary designation can be assigned to
NAME
<designation>::= <name>
SEP
A bracket panel or a part with holes will automatically be stored

separately. SEP is relevant only for a part that otherwise would
have been stored with the panel.
MAT
MSID
The plate thickness and the orientation of the material must be

controlled via input for a part and may optionally be changed for a
bracket panel.
QUA
For bracket panels, the quality of the bracket panel will be used if
not given here.
POS
Brackets generated in this syntax are normally supposed to be

given position numbers automatically (e.g. in autopos). Giving
POS = -1 means inhibiting of the automatic position number setting.
In that case no position number will be set, e.g. because the
bracket is a standard part.
MIRR
Means mirroring in the centre line of the bracket compared to where

it has been generated.
<position>
Must be given if not defined by the part.

A given position overrides the existing position, if any. Defined as in
the previous syntax, using ORI, UAX, VAX.
If a bracket panel should be reflected (MIRR) and given a new
position simultaneously, then the unreflected position should be
given.
<translate>
is used to move one (or several) bracket(s) from the position where
it has been generated.
<translate>::= MOVE
[,X=<delta_x> (0...25)]
[,Y=<delta_y> (0...25)]
[,Z=<delta_z> (0...25)]
<delta_x>::=<delta_y>::=<delta_z>::=<number>
The numbers assigned to X, Y and Z respectively, define a vector
(and distance) along which the bracket will be moved relative to the
position where it has been generated. A left-out keyword means
that the corresponding vector component is 0.
In case of a mirrored bracket (cf. MIRR above) the vector should be
given before the mirroring.

18:51
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Example:
Example 1:
A bracket generated as a separate panel and not to be position numbered.
BRA= 'BRACKET PANEL',POS = -1;
Example 2:
A part, the position of which is stored in it.
BRA= 'PART', NAME= 'AG112/75-209',MAT=15, MSIDE=TOP;
Example 3:
A panel bracket, occurring in 4 extra copies in addition to the position where it was
generated.
BRA, 'BRA_PAN', MOVE, X=0(700)2800;
18.4
Copying an Existing Bracket

By this syntax, an arbitrary bracket can be copied within a panel or from another panel.
Syntax:
BRACKET ,COPY [, <panel_from>]

,FCNO= <from_no> (1 ... 25)
[,<symmetry>
[,SEP]
[,MAT= <plate_thickn>]
[,MSID= <side_info>]
[,POS [,= <pos_no> (1 ... 25)]]
[,MIRR]
[,<position>|<translate>]
Most of the clauses are common to the previous syntax. Attributes which are not changed
will retain their values from the bracket to be copied.

18:52
12 Series

Bracket Statement
Description
COPY
If no panel name is assigned, the bracket is supposed to be copied

from a given bracket of the current panel, otherwise from the given
panel.
<panel_from>::= <name>
FCNO
defines the bracket number(s) from where to copy the bracket(s).
<from_no>::= <integer>
QUAL
If standard quality is wanted for a bracket stored with a special

quality, then the quality code should be set to -1.
MIRR
The bracket will be mirrored in the centre line plane of the ship.
Example:
Example 1:
BRA, COPY= 'AA171-7', FCNO=5;

Example 2:
An alternative way of achieving the same thing as in example 3 of the previous section
(provided the first bracket is stored with number 1):
BRA, 'BRA_PAN';
BRA, COPY, FCNO=1, MOVE, X=700(700)2800;
Example 3:
BRA, 'BRA_PAN';
BRA, COPY, FCNO=1-4, MOVE, X=700;

18:53
12 Series

Bracket Statement

18:54
12 Series

Doubling Plates Statement
19

Doubling plate is the name of plate parts that are used to reinforce openings in plane panel
plates or as support for pillars. Doubling plates are always attached to the surface of a panel
plate. Such plates are generated via the DOUBLING statement.
Syntax
DOU
/CNO=<cno>\
/ CLO
\
< NOT=<no> >,M1=<dist>[,<
>],MAT=<th>
\CUR='cur'/
\ [M2=<dist1>]/
[ POS=<posno>]
[ SID=FOR | AFT | TOP | BOT | PS | SB ]
[ { P | S} ]
[ QUA=<quality> ]
[ NOA=<notch>]
[ NOB=<notch>,SEA=<no.>[,<panel>']
[ BEV=<bev1> [,<bev2>]]
[,NAB]
[,WEL=<wel1>[,<wel2>]]
[,GRI=<number>[<number>]]
[ AS1=<str> ]
[ AS2=<str> ]
[ AS3=<str> ]
[ AS4=<str> ]
[ AR=<ass> ]
[ ARP=<ass> ]
[ ARS=<ass> ]
[,COM[MENT]= <comment>]
;
Description
The position and geometry may be defined by one of these different alternatives:
1. By a hole with number CNO.

19:1
12 Series

2. By a notch with number NOT.

3. By a curve CUR, defining the geometry of the doubling.
In case of 1 and 2 the geometry of the doubling plate is (at least partly) controlled by a
parallel displacement of the component it is associated with.
The hole/notch may either be completely covered by the doubling plate or the region around
the component may be reinforced by a strip of plate parallel to the contour of the component
M1
Width of strip in case of a doubling strip. Otherwise, the size by which

the doubling overlaps the plate
CLO
The doubling plate should cover the whole referenced component.

Incompatible with M2.
M2
Distance from the inner curve of the strip to the component it is

associated with. Incompatible with CLO.
MAT
P | S
Material thickness of the doubling plate
QUA
NOA
NOB
Quality of the material.
SEA
Referenced seam to make the notch NOB. <no> is the seam number.
The seam number in panel <panel>. If a seam in the shell surface
<panel> is the surface name.
BEV
Bevel codes to be used for panels of the doubling contour. (Only valid
when reference type is NOTCH).
Symmetry of the doubling plate. P only valid portside, S only valid

starboard (relevant only in otherwise symmetrical panels).
A notch should be placed in the corner of a doubling plate.
A notch should be placed for a seam (only valid when reference type is
NOTCH). NOB is the notch designation for the seam SEA.
<bev1> is bevel along the part of the contour following the part
associated with M1.
<bev2> is the bevel along the part of the contour following the part
associated with M2.
<bev1> is bevelling in the first bevelled interval in the circulation
direction of the contour, <bev2> is the second.
If the notch is for a seam and the doubling plate is open and <bev2> is
left out then <bev2> = <bev1>.
NAB
WEL
Switch off automatic bevel. There will then be no bevel.
GRI
Defines the grinding of the doubling contour. Same rules as for bevel
above.
COLOUR
COMMENT
Colour of all doubling plates defined in the statement.
Defines the welding size of the doubling contour. Same rules as for
bevel above.

19:2
12 Series

Figure 19:1. Doubling plate around notches, (Symbolic view and Model view.)
AS1
AS2
AS3
AS4
General purpose strings
AR
ARP
ARS
Assembly references
Example 1:
DOU, CNO=2, M1=250, M2=15, MAT=12, SID=AFT, POS=8;
Figure 19:2. Doubling plate around hole, (symbolic view and model view).
Example 2:
DOU, NOT=3, M1=30, CLO, MAT=20, SID=FOR, POS=143, AS1='DNOT';

19:3
12 Series

Figure 19:3. Doubling plate covering a notch.
Example 3:
DOU, NOT=3, M1=30, MAT=20, SID=FOR, POS=143, AS1='DNOT';
Figure 19:4. Doubling plate (strip) around a notch.
Example 4:
DOU, NOT=1, M1=125, M2=25, MAT=30, SID=FOR, POS=118, BEV=250;
Figure 19:5. Doubling plate for a notch at a seam.
Ppanparts will mark the panel plates with the double plate edges and also handle the
bevelling including dotori.

19:4
12 Series

In the automatic parts generation the edge contour of the doubling plates will be marked or
the plate parts they are welded to. The doubling plates themselves will be equipped with
bevel information, including dotori.

19:5
12 Series


19:6
12 Series

Excess Statement
20
Excess Statement
The EXCESS statement defines excess along one of the limits of the current panel. The
geometry of the panel will be modified when the parts are extracted.
Syntax
EXC, LIM=<lim_no>,M1=<size>[,TYP={<ename>|<ename>}]
[,<symmetry>] ;
Description
defines the limit along which to add excess.
LIM
defines the amount of the excess.
M1
<size>::= <number>
TYP
Defines the excess type and must be one of the excess types given in the
default file of Planar Hull Modelling.
<symmetr
y>
Normally excesses on a symmetric panel are supposed to be valid both

portside and starboard.
However, it is possible to indicate that an excess should be used portside
only or starboard only. This clause is relevant on a symmetric panel
(SBPS panel) only.
<symmetry>::= P | S
P means portside only,
S means starboard only.
Remarks:
1. For excess along inner seams, see the SEAM statement.
2. Excess may be added only to limits which fulfil the following condition:
Split the limits into separate contours and extend them at both ends along the
tangents in the end points.
Make a parallel displacement of those limits which have excess.

The contours, thus extended and moved, must now intersect, otherwise an error will
occur in the splitting phase.
This means that an excess can not be added in the case illustrated below. Limit 3 will
not intersect limit 2 after the parallel displacement.

20:1
12 Series

Excess Statement
Figure 20:1. Excess, causing problem in Parts Extraction.
In such a case, the limits must be reorganized or the excess has to be included in the
original contour.
3. It is possible to have multiple excess types along one limit. Up to five individual excess
types along a boundary limit can be used. For inner seams one type is allowed. If some
excess are of the same type, an error will be signalled. The excess types are lost in the
plate and are only available in the panel.
Example:
EXC, LIM=2, M1=50;

20:2
12 Series

Compensation (CMP) Statement
21

This statement defines a wedge-shaped compensation along the outer contour. The
compensation can be considered to be an unsymmetric excess.
Like excess, the compensation is applied when the parts are extracted.
There are two different types of compensation as illustrated below:
Type 1: Symmetric compensation.
Type 2: Compensation at a corner.

21:1
12 Series

Syntax:
CMP, TYPE= <type>

,LIM= <lim_no>
,M1= <size>
[,M2= <length>
,COR= <corner_no>]
Description
TYPE
Type of compensation (see above).
<type>::= 1|2
LIM
The limit along which the compensation will be added.
M1
The size of the compensation (see the figures above).
<size>::= <number>
M1 > 0 means expansion of the panel.
M1 < 0 means inwards compensation.
M2 and COR are relevant only for compensation of type 2 (see above).
M2 must be given.
M2
defines the length from the corner along which the compensation will be
added.
If the given length is greater than the length of the limit, then the
compensation will cover the whole limit.
<length>::= <number>
COR
defines the corner of the given limit from which the compensation shall be
added.
<corner_no>::= <integer>
Example:
CMP, TYPE=1, LIM=1, M1=25;

CMP, TYPE=2, LIM=2, COR=2, M1=30,
M2=1500;

21:2
12 Series

Shrinkage Statement
22
Shrinkage Statement
When welding together plates or welding profiles to a plate surface, the plate will shrink due
to the heating. Especially for thin plates the shrinkage is not neglectable but might have to
be compensated for. The system has functions to achieve this.
The SHRINKAGE statement is used to indicate that the shrinkage compensation shall be
activated for a panel. The actual compensation will take place when the plate parts are
created.
This means that the panel is always stored with its correct extensions, etc. The amount of
the compensation can be controlled in different ways:
entirely under user control via the SHRINKAGE statement.
entirely automatic from a user specific external table and from the thickness of the
plate.
In this case, the main direction of the shrinkage is defined by the stiffeners. Stiffeners
and seams along the main direction will add to the compensation as controlled by the
shrinkage object.
partly manually, partly automatically.
For details, see below.

22:1
12 Series

Shrinkage Statement
Syntax
SHR[INKAGE]
[, <line>]
[,M1= <p_sti_fact>]
[,M2= <p_sti_part>]
[,M3= <alfact>]
[,M4= <alpart>]
[,M5=<p_seam_fact>]
[,M6=<p_seam_part>]
Description
<line>
The line defines a direction, perpendicular to which the main shrinkage takes
place (normally parallel to the main stiffeners).
If undefined, the system will search for that direction from the stiffeners.
SHR, U = 1000, M1 ... ;
SHR, Y = 1500, M1 ... ;
When the line is perpendicular to any of the axes, only the appropriate
keyword need be given, e.g.
SHR, U, M1= ... ;
SHR, Y, M1= ... ;
M1
Compensation factor for stiffeners to be applied perpendicularly to the main

direction, i.e. normally perpendicularly to the main stiffeners.
<p_sti_fact>::= <number>
M2
If M2 (below) is left out, then M1 is interpreted as a factor. Otherwise the

actual factor is calculated as M1/M2.
If M1 is left out, the factor will be calculated automatically from the plate
thickness.
M1 = 0 indicates no compensation for stiffeners perpendicular to the

main direction.
Partition perpendicular to the main direction, that together with M1 is used to

defined a compensation factor for stiffeners (see above).
<p_sti_part>::= <number>
M3
M4
Used as M1 and M2 but valid in a direction along the main direction

If M3 is left out, then the compensation is calculated automatically.
M3 = 0 indicates that no compensation should be made along the main
direction.
M5
As M1 and M2 but to be used for shrinkage caused by seams parallel to the

main direction.
M6
For the automatic calculation of the compensation, it is necessary that the corresponding
information can be found in the shrinkage object.
The figure below illustrates the concepts above.

22:2
12 Series

Shrinkage Statement
Figure 22:1. Shrinkage directions and parameters for shrinkage control.
The main direction is normally defined by the stiffeners but may be given on a line.
M1/M2 and M5/M6 are valid perpendicularly to the main direction. M2 is normally the
position between the stiffeners, M6 the partition between seams.
M3 and M4 are applied parallel to the main direction.
Remark:
If stiffener arrangement is as in the figure below, the partition between the stiffeners will be
incorrectly calculated (=d). In such and similar cases, the partition should be set manually.
Figure 22:2. Unsuitable arrangement for automatic shrinkage evaluation.

22:3
12 Series

Shrinkage Statement
Example:
1.
SHR,;
The compensation is calculated entirely automatically.
2.
SHR, V, M1=0.5, M2=700, M3=0, M5=0;

SHR, V, M1=0.0007, M3=0, M5=0;
These two statements give the same result. The shrinkage is parallel to the uaxis. Compensation only perpendicularly to the main direction and for stiffeners
only.
3.
SHR, M2=800, M3=0, M6=2500;

In this case, there is compensation only perpendicularly to the main direction. This
direction is calculated automatically and the compensation for each profile is
defined by the shrinkage table and the plate thickness. Similarly, the
compensation for each seam is fetched from the shrinkage object.

22:4
12 Series

Weld Statement
23
Weld Statement
The WELD statement is used to define bevelling and welding along the limits of a plane
panel. A limit may be broken down into several intervals. One WELD statement is required
for each interval. Bevelling and welding can be set along limits defined by hull curves, panel
intersections, profile sections (CROSS), profile edges (ALONG) if no overlap is given and by
flanges on panels in the same plane.
Syntax:

23:1
12 Series

Weld Statement
Description
LIM
Defines the limit of the panel along which the interval is defined. If no
limit is given explicitly, bevelling and welding is applied to all limits
possible.
<limit> ::= <integer>

<int_start>
Defines the start of the interval along the limit.

Different options are available for the start of the interval:
From the end of the previous interval along the limit. If no interval
has been defined before, it is supposed to be the starting point of
the limit.
From the intersection between the limit and a given line.
From the intersection between the limit and a given seam in the
panel.
By a distance from the start or end of the limit.
<line1>
FROM
See General about the Design Language.

Defines the seam from where the interval starts.
Defines the distance from an end point of the limit to
the start of the interval. (M1=0 need not be given)
M1
> 0 : From starting point

< 0 : From the ending point.
<int_end>
Defines the end of the interval along the limit.

Basically the same options are available as for the start of an interval:
End at the end of the limit. This is chosen if no explicit end point
is defined.
End at the intersection between the limit and a given line.
End at the intersection between the limit and a given seam in the
panel.
Define end as a distance from the start or end of the limit.
<line2>
TO
See General about the Design Language.

Defines the seam where the interval ends
M2
Defines the distance from an end point of the limit to

the end of the interval. (M2=0 need not be given)
> 0 : From starting point
< 0 : From the ending point.

23:2
12 Series

Weld Statement
SID
Defines the positive side that is supposed when defining the weld and
bevel type (cf. below).
If not given, the positive side is supposed to be in the direction of the
w-axis of the local coordinate system of the panel.
<def_side>::= AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
WELD
The size of the (fillet) weld on "this" and "the other" side, respectively.
If the weld is symmetric, only one value need be given.
BEV
Defines the type of bevel in the interval. In the case with a bevel to be
derived automatically, the bevel type is normally derived from rules,
set up in the bevel control file.
<bevel_type>::= <number>
In combination with the keyword VARYING the bevel
VAR
angle should be calculated automatically but the
automatic selection of bevel type should be cancelled.
In combination with the keyword A the bevel angle is

defined. Two values mean that the angle should vary
continuously between these along the interval.
A > 0 means a bevel "open" in the direction as defined
by SIDE,
A < 0 in the opposite direction.
<ang_st>::= <ang_end>::= <number>

AUTO
Indicates that the bevel should be derived automatically. Can only be

used for limits against the shell or against another, intersected panel.
The use of AUTO implies also that the a continuously varying bevel
angle (if any) should be calculated unless explicitly given.
VAR
A
Need not be given (default).

Cf. BEV above. If the bevel angle is manually set then
the bevel type will be selected automatically but the
automatic calculation of the angle will be inhibited.
SET
The bevel rule set from which the bevel should be selected. Need not
be given if the default set should be used.
EQUAL
Should be used only in case of butt welding to the limit of another

panel. Then the bevel type (and weld, if any) will be fetched from the
adjoining limit of that panel.
BVT
An arbitrary string that will be written along the trace of the boundary
in symbolic views.
<kn_line> :: =
KNA=<ang> | KNP=<panel>
<kn_line> is used to define a knuckle angle against the adjoining panel
along this boundary, either as an explicit angle or by giving the name of the
adjoining panel.
KNA
Defines the knuckle angle along the boundary. If the angle, <ang>, is
positive the knuckle is supposed to be concave, negative otherwise (when
seen from the positive side of the panel).

23:3
12 Series

Weld Statement
Reference to a panel, <panel>, that should be used to calculate the

knuckled angle along the boundary.
KNP
If <kn_line> is left out, Hull Modelling will use the boundary references to
automatically calculate the knuckled angle. Only panel references are
handled.
A given <kn_line> overrides the automatic calculation.
<kn_line> is only valid for the basic bevel types 10, 20, 50 and 51.
Defines the grinding along the boundary.
GRI
Figure 23:1. Bevel along outer contour according to example 1.
Example:
1.
The bevel and weld information in the panel above will be described by the following
statements.
WELD,
WELD,
WELD,
WELD,
WELD,
LIM
LIM
LIM
LIM
LIM
=
=
=
=
=
1,
1,
2,
4,
4,
TO = 1, BEV = 2, WELD = 6.5;

FROM = 1, BEV = 18, WELD = 7;
BEV = 18, WELD = 5;
TO = 3, BEV = 18, WELD = 5;
FROM = 3, BEV = 2, WELD =6;
This is relevant in case the panel is butt weld against another panel and the two
panels are not located in exactly the same plane. The bevel angles may then have
to be adjusted to become symmetrical with respect to the bisector of the angle
between the two panels.

23:4
12 Series

Weld Statement
Example:
2.
Bevel to be selected automatically against a shell curve limit.
WELD, LIM = 1, AUTO;

23:5
12 Series

Weld Statement

23:6
12 Series

Curve Statement
24
Curve Statement
The CURVE statement is used to establish curves that can be referred to from other
statements within the scheme. The curves exist only temporarily during the execution of the
input scheme and will not be stored on any data bank. Curves may be closed contours.
There are three main layouts of the CURVE statement:
24.1
The curve is established by explicitly giving the segments which it consists of.
The curve is established as a spline curve through a set of given points.
The curve is established by connecting curve parts by fillet radii. The curve parts may
be arbitrary contours or straight lines.
Curve, Defined by Segments

This type of statement is used when segments, i.e. lines and arcs, of the curve are known.
Syntax:
CURVE, <curve_name> [, <system>], <point>

(/<segment>) (1 ... 29);
<curve_name>::= <name>
<system>::= UV|XY|XZ|YZ
<segment>::= R <radius>| <amplitude>, <point>
<radius>::= <amplitude>::= <number>
Remarks:
1. The statement can be given everywhere in the scheme. If xyz-coordinates are used,
the statement must not occur until the position of the panel has been defined.
2. <system> defines the coordinate system, used to describe the curve. All points must
be given using the same type of coordinates. If not given, uv-coordinates are
supposed.
3. As everywhere else, FR-terms, LP-terms and topology point references may be used.
4. Radius and amplitude are positive if the circulation direction of an arc is positive,
negative if the direction is negative. Zero indicates a line segment.
When described in the xyz-system, the curve is supposed to be seen from
FOR|TOP|SB when judging the circulation direction.
5. <point> may be a complete topology reference, i.e. one term only.

24:1
12 Series

Curve Statement
Example:
1.
CURVE, 'ABC', 1000, 2000/0, 2000,

1800/R2000, 3000, 2000;
Figure 24:1. Curve defined explicitly as in example 1.
2.
24.2
CURVE, 'AAA', P1/50,P2/0, P1+50, P2+100/0, 1000, 2000.
Spline Curve
This type of statement is used when the curve is supposed to pass through a number of
known points. The curve is generated as a spline.

24:2
12 Series

Curve Statement
Syntax
CURVE, <curve_name>, SPL[INE] [, <system>], <point>

[, <vector>] (/ <point> (0 ... 28)) /<point>
[, <vector>];
Description
is the name of the curve.
<curve_name>
<curve_name>::= <name>
see above.
<system>
is a tangent vector of the curve in the starting and/or ending
<vector>
points. It can also be a reference to a direction of a topology
point. In that case the direction vector is calculated from the
direction angle. It can be given at any end independently of the
other. If left out, the spline has a free direction in the end points.
The vector need not be normalized.
<vector>::= <number>, <number>|<top_ref>

<top_ref>
is a topology direction reference.
The general remarks on the previous type of curve statement are valid also here.
Example:
24.3
1.
CURVE, 'DEF', SPLINE, 1000, 1000, 1,0,

/1500, 1200/2000, 1500;
2.
CUR, 'BBB', SPL, P1, P1, TA1 /P2/1000, P3/ 3000, 500/
Fillet Curve
This type of statement is used when a curve shall be formed by connecting curve parts to
each other via fillet radii. The curve parts can be lines, existing curves, limits of the current
panel and boundary curves from intersected panels and profiles. All curves can be
displaced parallel to themselves.

24:3
12 Series

Curve Statement
Syntax
CURVE, <name> [,CLO[SED] [,R= <radius>]],<curve_part>

(/[,R= <radius>], <curve_part>) (0 ... 9);
Description
CLOSED
indicates that the curve shall be closed.

This means that the last curve part will be intersected with the
first one.
is the radius of the fillet arc, connecting the current curve part to
the previous one. It should be given without sign. If left out, a
knuckle will normally be introduced in the intersection point
between the involved curve parts.
A single topological point can also define the radius. The radius
is then created in such a way that the arc goes through the point.
The point must lie in the sector where the arc would have been
created when given with a number. However, the point can lie
exactly on one of the curve parts and would in that case coincide
with the tangent point of the radius.
If the curve is not closed, the radius of the first curve part is
irrelevant. The radius is always supposed to be given in the
plane of the resulting curve.
<radius>::=<number>
<curve_part>::=

24:4
12 Series

Curve Statement
<curve>::= <panel>::= <name>

<surface>::= SURF = (<surf_no> | <surf_name>) [<limits>]
<limits>::= [XMIN = <coord>]
[,XMAX = <coord>]
[,YMIN = <coord>]
[,YMAX = <coord>]
[,ZMIN = <coord>]
[,ZMAX = <coord>]
<surf_no>::= <integer>
<surf_name>::= <name>
The surface may either be selected via its number or via its
name.
The number is 1 for the main hull and -1 for the default deck
surface if any. For additional surfaces the numbers are the ones
used when defining supplementary surfaces during initiation of
CGDB.
The
names
are
the
"SURF='AAHULL' ".
surface
object
names
like
Limits can be given along the principal axes to trim the curve
resulting from the surface reference. This is necessary e.g. when
the curve consists of multiple contours as a curve part curve
should have only one contour.
If none of the limit keywords above are given "YMIN=0" is
assumed. When referring the reflected surface the keywords
above should be given relative to the original position.
<prof_ref>
see General Layout of a Statement in Chapter General Features

of Input Schemes. However shell profiles are not handled. Also
no repetition can be used here.
<side>
is used to indicate the direction of the parallel displacement. In

the case with a curve part, resulting from an intersected panel, it
also selects the side of the panel that shall be used.
<side> ::= SID= AFT|FOR|PS|SB|TOP|BOT

<direction>
is used to indicate the positive circulation direction of the curve

part.
<direction>::= DIR= AFT|FOR|PS|SB|TOP|BOT

M1 is the displacement of the curve. If <side> is not given, M1 > 0 means displacement to
the right, < 0 to the left. However, if the curve part is derived from a limit, the displacement
is always to the left, i.e. towards the interior of the panel.

24:5
12 Series

Curve Statement
<dist>::= <number>
<limit>::= LIM= <limit_no>
REFL means that the curve, panel, etc. shall be reflected in the
CL-plane before the curve part is calculated.
This also means that SID and DIR, if given, will be applied after
the curve has been reflected.
As described in the syntax, each curve part can be described independently of the others in
one of the following ways:
1. As a line, restricted or unrestricted. The line may be displaced.
2. As a limit of the current panel. If combined with a line, the limit is replaced by its tangent
in the intersection points with the line. The limit can be displaced. A positive limit
number means that the curve part retains the direction of the limit, a negative that it is
reversed.
3. As an arbitrary curve, read from the data bank or established in another CURVE
statement in the same scheme. The curve itself can be replaced by its tangent in the
intersection points with a given line. If the curve is reflected and displaced, SID and
DIR should always be given to make certain that the curve part is correctly located and
oriented. By default, contour zero will be used for the curve part. Other contours can be
selected via CNO=<no>.
<no>::= <integer>
4. As a curve, resulting from the intersection between the plane of the current panel and a
given surface. This curve may be restricted by a box, otherwise it is handled as an
existing curve.
5. As an intersection curve with a given panel that can be reflected in the CL-plane.
Differences in the plate thicknesses are not taken into consideration.
6. As a stiffener trace line. The non-mould side can be chosen by defining a proper value
for side (SIDE=...). If the stiffener is given by tag, an additional line can be defined
to select a single instance. If no line is given the first stiffener with the given tag is
chosen.
7. As a flange line. For welded flanges the side welded to the outer contour is used unless
the other side is chosen. The resulting curve part is the intersection between the flange
and the panel plane.
8. As a pillar description line. This is the default. As for stiffeners the side keyword is used
to select either one of the web sides or the flange side(s) depending on the orientation
of the pillar relative to the curve plane. The pillar web is supposed to be either
perpendicular to, or lie in the curve plane.
9. As an elliptical pillar cross section. A special case is when a pillar made from a tube or
a round bar is intersecting the curve plane. Then the cross section curve of the pillar is
used. This will be the case if the angle between the curve plane and the pillar
description line is more than 30 degrees. The resulting elliptical curve will have a
deviation less than 0.5 mm also for inclined intersections. If the side keyword is given
for the cross section this means that the curve part will have a gap on the opposite
side.
Remarks:
1. In the following cases, the position of the panel in space must already have been
defined before executing the CURVE statement:
when xis-coordinates are used.

24:6
12 Series

Curve Statement
when SID or DIR are used.
when a curve part is derived by intersecting a panel or a surface.
Likewise, of course the boundary of the current panel must exist if a limit is referred to.
2. The curve parts must be given the same direction as the final curve.
3. The fillets may interfere, but the result will then normally be that a knuckle is introduced
in the breakpoint between the involved fillets.
One of them will have a radius that differ somewhat from the given value.
4. Note the possibility to generate one curve, consisting of several others that are
connected.
5. Also a curve that has been established in a curve statement can be reflected in the CLplane.

24:7
12 Series

Curve Statement
Example: 1:
This statement generates a simple rectangular hole with different radii at all corners.
CURVE, 'HOLE', CLO, V=1000, R50

/U=2000, R=75
/V=2000, REV, R=100
/U=500, REV, R=125;
Figure 24:2. Closed Fillet Curve as in Example 1.

24:8
12 Series

Curve Statement
Example: 2:
This statement generates a curve parallel to the limits of the current panel, The curve can
be used e.g. As a hole.
CURVE, 'HOLE2', CLO,

/LIM=2, M1=500,
/LIM=3, M1=400,
/LIM=4, M1=700,
LIM=1, M1=600, R=500

R=500
R=400
R=700;
Figure 24:3. Closed Fillet Curve as in Example 2.

24:9
12 Series

Curve Statement
Example: 3:
This statement generates a curve that is supposed to be used as a free boundary of a side
web. (PITFALL and DECK are panel names).
CURVE, 'LIMIT', 'PLATF', SID=TOP, DIR=PS, M1=500

/'SBX106', M1=-800, R=700
/'DECK', SID=BOT, DIR=SB, M1=400, R=400;
Figure 24:4. Fillet Curve as in Example 3 (used as free edge).

24:10
12 Series

Curve Statement
Example: 4:
This statement generates a fillet curve where the radius of the fillet arc is calculated from
the condition that it should pass through a given topology point.
CUR, NAME, Y=P1

/ U= P1, V=P1, T=15
/ R=P1, ESX45, M1=700, SID=SB
/ ---
Figure 24:5. Fillet Curve as in Example 4.
24.4
Curve Parallel to Other Curve

This type of curve statement is used when a curve shall be parallel to another curve. There
are two ways this can be done; as a displacement or as a transformation.

24:11
12 Series

Curve Statement
Syntax
CURVE, <name> [,LTY=<line_type>] [,COL=<color>] ,PAR =

<curve_name>
{ ,M1=<displacement>
,<point1> ,<point2>};
Description
Line type of the curve.
LTY
COL
PAR
M1
Color of the curve.

The name of the curve from were the new curve is moved.
The displacement from the original curve. M1 > 0 means displacement
to the right, < 0 to the left.
<displacement>::=<number>
<point1>
<point2>
A point on the original curve.

The point to where the point above will be transformed together with
the rest of the curve.
Example:
CUR,
'CURVE', COL=CYAN, LTY=Solid, PAR='C1', U1=P1, V1=P1,

U2=P2, V2=P2;
CUR,
'CURVE', PAR='C1', M1=200;

24:12
12 Series

Topology Points
25
Topology Points
25.1
Background
When creating the hull model in Hull Modelling there is a general ambition to use topological
references to as large an extent as possible. This ensures that changes in one object will
more or less automatically propagate also to the dependent objects. Another way of
expressing this is that the use of explicitly given coordinates and positions should be
minimized.
One means of enhancing the level of topological references in the modelling work is to use
the so called topology points that are available in the design language of Hull Modelling.
The concept topology point and its intended use in Planar Hull Modelling are outlined in this
chapter.
25.2
What is a Topology Point?

The definition of a topology point given here is supposed to be primarily valid within the
modelling of internal/plane structures.
Hull Modelling supports the use of many kinds of topology references, e.g. by connecting a
stiffener to the cross section of a longitudinal, by connecting stiffeners to each other, by
using penetrating structures as the boundaries of panels and parts, etc.
A topology point is a point stored in the current panel whose position, etc. normally is
calculated by reference to parts of the model. Components in the panel may then be
generated by reference to topology points. The topology points can be said to form a kind of
"topology links" between components and the model in those cases where no direct
topological references of the type mentioned above are available.
A topology point is characterized by
1. The information stored along with the point,
2. The way it can be generated,
3. The way it can be used.
This will be further discussed below.
25.3
Storing of Topology Points

The topology points are currently restricted to be used within one plane panel only. On the
other hand they may of course be generated by references to other panels and to other
items in the model.
Topology points are numbered in the range 1 to 999. The numbers of the points are used
when they are referred to and may be user defined.

25:1
12 Series

Topology Points
Topology points may be restricted to the plane of the current panel, either the mould plane
or a selected side of the plating of the panel. Such points are called 2D topology points.
However, topology points may also be space points, located in an arbitrary way in the
coordinate system of the current panel. Such points are called 3D points.
Topology points are stored as attributes in the panel. In addition to the position of the point,
2D points also have associated with them two directions in the uv plane of the current panel,
one primary direction and one secondary direction. The sense of these directions depends
on the way the topology point has been generated.
References to topology points may concern their position or directions or both combined in
one reference.
25.4
Generating a Topology Point

The idea behind the topology points is that they should be able to be generated in a very
general way by referring to a large variety of items in the model, including other topology
points. If new needs should occur the point generation module can easily be extended.
The design language of AVEVA Marine has a special statement type for topology points, the
POINT statement. The syntax of this statement is described in detail in the next chapter.
The main alternatives for definition of a topology point are as follows:
Explicitly given point,
Corner of the current or another panel,
Cross section of an intersecting profile (one of several characteristic points in a profile

section),
Intersection between two curves to be arbitrarily combined:
A line
A panel limit
An arbitrary curve
A curve from a panel section
Interpolation between points
At stiffener, flange or seam end
Along curve
Each point definition is supposed to be combined with a possibility for offsets along the axes
of the coordinate system (either in uvw or xyz) or for displacements given distances along
the directions associated with the point (or along the curves involved in the point definition).
Existing topology points may be used in the definition of new ones.
Display of Topology Points

When generated the topology points are displayed in the current view in the following way:
By a point symbol in the position of the point,
By a small circle surrounding the point symbol,
By a solid line and an arrow in the primary direction associated with the point,
By a dashed line and an arrow in the secondary direction,
By the number of the point, displayed close to the point symbol.

25:2
12 Series

Topology Points
Figure 25:1. Display of topology point.
In the case with a 3D point the direction arrows are not displayed. To minimize irrelevant
information in the view it is recommended to generate the points as R3 points except when
the directions are of interest.
The display of the points in the drawing is temporary during the generation only. When a
scheme is terminated the view will automatically be cleansed for the points.
25.5
Use of Topology Points

The general principle for the use of topology points is that references to topology points
should be supported everywhere in plane hull modelling where explicit coordinates
and directions can be given in input. This means e.g. in assignments to keywords like U,
V, X, Y, Z, T, etc. but also in curve statements without any keywords and in the keywords for
space points (ORIGIN, UAXIS and VAXIS).
Exception to the general rule is that topology references are not supported in the PANEL
and plane (PLN) statements.
Reference may take place for individual coordinates and directions but also for/to a point as
a whole.
This is described in detail in General Layout of a Statement in Chapter General Features of
Input Schemes.

25:3
12 Series

Topology Points

25:4
12 Series

Point Statement
26
Point Statement
The POINT statement is used to generate topology points in a plane panel. A POINT
statement may occur everywhere in an input scheme after the PANEL statement.
There are a few alternatives available for the generation of topology points, each
corresponded by variants of the general syntax.
These alternatives are currently:
1. Explicitly given point.
2. Point at corner of panel.
3. Cross section of profile.
4. Intersection between "curves".
5. Interpolation between points.
26.1
Common Features
The general layout of the point statement is as follows.

26:1
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
POINT[, NO = <point_No>
[, R3]
[, MSIDE = <dir>]
[ <deltas>]
(1 ... 25)]
;
Description
NO
Points are normally numbered automatically and will get the first
free number in the range 1-999.
When given by the user the number must be in this interval and a
point with that number must not exist before.
<point_No>::= <integer>
R3
Indicates a 3D point. If not given, the resulting point will be

projected onto the surface or mould plane of the current panel.
For space points the directions associated with the points are
irrelevant (they are set to 0).
MSIDE
If not given (and R3 missing) the point will be projected onto the
mould plane of the panel.
If given, the point will be moved to the plate surface of the panel in
the calculated point in the indicated direction.
<dir>::=AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT

26:2
12 Series

Point Statement
<deltas>
Used to move the calculated point parallel to the axes of the
selected coordinate system.
<deltas>::=
<delta_<>>::=<number>
For 2D points the deltas in the xyz system will be projected onto the
uv-plane of the panel before being applied.
The deltas and the offsets along directions (cf. below) form two
independent and complementary ways of adjusting the position of
the point.
26.2
Point Given
This subsyntax may be used to define a topology point by giving points and an associated
direction explicitly (including references to already existing points).

26:3
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
<given>::=<point>[ <direction> [ ,M1=<offset> ]
Description
<point>
Cf. the general definition of this item in the design language.

However, for a 3D point all the three coordinates X/Y/Z may be given.
<point def. by XT/YT/ZT>

<direction>::=
}
,T=<angle>
The primary direction (DIR1) is defined. The secondary direction is

automatically set to DIR1 +90.
If not given, DIR1 will be set to 0.
Note: that the point and the direction may be given independently of
each other, e.g. the direction may be given by T and the point by
X/Y/Z.
This clause is irrelevant for 3D points.
Defines a move along <direction> from the given point.
M1
Example:
26.3
1.
POI,
U=1000, V=500, T=30, M1=500, DY=100;
2.
POI,
X=FR75, Y=P3+25, T=45, M1=-100;
3.
POI,
XYZ=P1()2, DY=725;
Point at Corner
This subsyntax may be used to define a topology point by reference to the corners of the
current panel or any other given panel.

26:4
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
<at_corner>::=
,COR = <corner_No> ( 1 ... 25)

[, <panel> [, REFL] [,SID=<dir>] ]
[, M1=<forw_move>] | [, M2=<backw_move>]
<corner_No>::=<integer>
<forw_move>::=<backw_move>::=<number>
<panel>::=<name>
Description
COR
<panel>
The number of the corner.

Name of the panel the corner(s) of which should be used.
If left out the corners of the current panel will be used.
REFL
SID
The corner point will be reflected in the centre line plane of the ship.
If the corner is on another panel which is intersected by the current one,
SID indicates from which side of the "other" panel the corner point should
be fetched. If left out it is supposed to be in the mould plane.
<dir>::= AFT|FOR|PS|SB|TOP|BOT
M1
Defines a move in the forward direction of the outer contour from the given
corner. The move will be along the contour of the panel in which the corner
is indicated.
M2
Defines a move in the backwards direction.
The primary direction will be calculated as the direction of the tangent after the corner, the
secondary as that of the tangent before the corner in the negative direction of the contour.
In case of a move the corresponding direction will be calculated in the position of the
resulting point.
The picture below illustrates the meaning of the parameters in this case.

26:5
12 Series

Point Statement
Figure 26:1. Topology points at panel corner
Example:
26.4
1.
POI,
COR=1-2;
2.
POI,
'OTHER_PANEL', COR=3, M1=250, DZ=-100;
Point at Profile Section

This subsyntax may be used to define a topology point by reference to a profile cross
section. The section may be either with the plane of the current panel or with principal
planes in the local coordinate system of the panel or in the ship coordinate system.

26:6
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
<profile_section>::= ,CRO
/ ,<ext_prof_ref> [,REF] \
<
> (1 ... 25)
\ ,<int_prof_ref>
/
[ ,<plane> ]
( [ TOP | FLA [,DIS] [,DIR] ] ) |
( [ SID ] [,FLA] [,DIR]
)
[ ,M1 = <offs_dir1> ]
[ ,M2 = <offs_dir2> ]
[ ,PER[PENDICULAR] ]
Description
Indicates profile section.
CRO
<ext_prof_ref>
See General Layout of a Statement in Chapter General Features of Input
Schemes.
<int_prof_ref>
Note that references to pillars are supported.
<plane>
Normally the profile is supposed to be intersected by the plane of the
current panel (on the side indicated by MSIDE, cf. above). This clause
allows the profile to be intersected by a plane perpendicular to an axis of the
global or local coordinate system.
<plane>::= U|V|X|Y|Z = <coord>

Normally, the intersection point with the plane is calculated as the
intersection with the mould line (trace) of the profile. However, there are
different possibilities to get another intersection point.
TOP
FLA
DIR
Moves the point to the top of the profile section.

Moves the point to the side of the flange against the web.
(= AFT|FOR|PS|SB|TOP|BOT). Moves the point to the flange in the

indicated direction (should be used primarily for pillars which normally have
flanges in two directions). If combined with FLA the point will be on the
"inwards" side of the flange.
DIS
Moves the point to the non-mould line side of the web of the profile. Should
be used only for profile types where the mould line is one side of the web.
SID
Moves the point to the edge of the flange in the given direction.
In this case TOP is not required.
The result will be as though the flange was a profile (flat bar) of its own.
M1
M2
Defines an offset in the primary direction.

Defines an offset in the secondary direction.

26:7
12 Series

Point Statement
PER
Means that the measure will be measured perpendicularly to the profile

trace, e.g. to give a correct overlap of a bracket.
The picture below shows the keywords used to reach certain node points of a T-bar (without
any offsets and deltas and without the use of SIDE). 'Basic point' is the result when no other
keywords than CROSS are given. The resulting directions are also indicated.
Figure 26:2. Parameters for control of topology points in profile section.
The next picture shows the points (and directions) at the edge of the flange that are reached
with the aid of the keyword SIDE.
Note: that the directions have changed compared to the previous picture.
Figure 26:3. Parameters for control of topology points in a profile section in combination with use of
SIDE.
Similar principles are also valid for the profile types normally used for pillars. However, DIR
should be given in all cases except when a point is wanted in the description line.

26:8
12 Series

Point Statement
Welded flanges can be considered as T-bars. However, if none of TOP, FLA and SID is
given the point will be delivered on the free face of the flange. Also, if TOP or FLA are not
given when SID is used the point will be delivered on the mould line side of the flange.
The resulting directions will be as follows.
If SID is not given then the primary direction (DIR1) will be in the direction of the web and
the secondary direction (DIR2) along flange towards web. Cf. the figure below which also
illustrates the positions that can be reached without the keyword SIDE.
Figure 26:4. Control of topology points in flange section without use of SIDE.
If SID is given, DIR1 will be along the flange in the direction indicated by SID. DIR2 will be
along the web of the profile inwards the flange. This is illustrated in the next picture.
Figure 26:5. Control of topology points in flange section with use of SIDE

26:9
12 Series

Point Statement
Example:
26.5
1.
POI,
CRO, L240;
2.
POI,
'WEB', F1, SID=AFT, FLA, M1=-20;
3.
POI,
CRO, 'DECK', SL13, TOP, M1= -50;
4.
POI,
CRO,
5.
POI,
CRO, R3, X=FR75, L200, M1=-50, PER;
6.
POI,
CRO, Z=7000, PI3, DIR=PS;
U=1000, MSI=AFT, ST5;
Point at Intersection
This subsyntax may be used to define a topology point as the intersection between two
curves. Each of the two curves may be derived in a number of ways independently of each
other. They will always be projected into the UV-plane of the current panel before being
intersected.

26:10
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
<intersection>::= ,INT
<curve_1>
[ ,M1 = <dist_along1>
/
<curve_2>
[ ,M2 = <dist_along2>
[ ,PER[PENDICULAR] ]
Description
INT
M1
Indicates point by intersection.

Move along <curve_1> from the intersection point.
>0 in the positive direction of <curve_1>
<0 in the negative direction.
M2
PER
Ditto along the second curve.

The distances M1 and M2 should be measured perpendicularly to
<curve_2> and <curve_1>, respectively.
(In this case only one of M1 and M2 may be given.)
curve_1>::=
<lim_pan>::=<int_pan>::=<curve>::= <name>
<direction>::= AFT|FOR|PS|SB|TOP|BOT
<lim_No>::=<cont_No>::=<integer>
<line>
LIM
SID
See specification in General Layout of a Statement.

Limit number within the current panel if the panel name (<lim_pan>) is
left out, otherwise limit of the given panel. If another panel is given then
the limit may be reflected in the Centre Line plane.
In the case with an intersected panel (<int_pan>) one must indicate
which of the two possible intersection curves that should be used. SID
should be assigned the direction of the preferred face.
The direction of the curve in this case is selected so that the largest
component of its direction vector (U or V) will be positive.
CNO
The contour number within the curve. If left out contour 0 is supposed.

26:11
12 Series

Point Statement
<curve_2>::=
The interpretation is similar to <curve_1> with some keyword

exchanged (the definition keywords for lines, SI2 replacing SID and FCN
replacing CNO).
The directions associated with the point will be those of the positive
tangents in the intersection point (primary direction along <curve_1>,
secondary along <curve_2>). If the point is moved along any of the
curves the direction will be calculated in the new position along that curve.
The result of the intersection may be multiple intersection points. They will all be delivered. If
the user has controlled the point number via input it will be increased by one for each of the
resulting points.
The figure below illustrates a point calculated in the intersection between a frame curve and
a deck. The position is defined by the condition that its perpendicular distance from the
frame should be 1000 mm (cf. example 3 below).
Figure 26:6. Topology point by intersection as in example 3 below

26:12
12 Series

Point Statement
Example:
1.
POI, INT, Y=LP3()7, M1=500, PER/ LIM=1;

This example creates the same positions as the centres of the holes in the
following statement.
Note: the slash that is required in the POINT statement.
HOL,
2.
D400, Y=LP3()7, M1=500, LIM=1;
POI, INT, Y=LP3()7, M1=500 / LIM=1;

In this case the distance is measured along the lines corresponding to a slight
modification of the HOLE statement.
HOL,
D400, Y=LP3()7, M1=500, LIM=1,
ALO;
3.
POI, INT, 'DECK', SID=TOP, M1=-1000, PER /'FRAME40',

DZ=15;
4.
POI, INT, U=1000, V=1000, T=30/ U2=500, V2=0, T2=100;

Two lines are intersected.
Note: that the first point is defined by unindexed keywords, the second by
keywords with index 2 (however an inclined line in XYZ by X1,Y1,Z1/
X2,Y2,Z2).
26.6
Point by Interpolation
This subsyntax may be used to define a topology point by interpolation between two other
points (any of which may be a topology point).

26:13
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
<interpolation>::=
, F = <factor>
, <point>
, <point_2>
[ ,M1 = <offset_along> ]
[ ,M2 = <offset_perp> ]
<offset_along>::=<offset_perp>::= <number>
Description
Interpolation factor between the two points. It may have any value. F=0.5
means calculating the midpoint between the two points.
See specification in General Layout of a Statement.

<point>
<point_2>
Specifies a displacement along the connection line between the two given
M1
points from the calculated point.
Displacement perpendicular to and to the left of the previous direction.
M2
Example:
1.
2.
The following statements generate a number of holes at longitudinal positions 2-4 at

an equal distance from the frame curve and a platform (assuming that the frame
curve is limit 1 and the platform limit 2 of the current panel).
POI,
POI,
POI,
HOL,
INT, Y=LP2()4/ LIM=1;

INT, Y=LP2()4/ LIM=2;
F=0.5, UV=P1()3, U2V=P4()6;
D300, UV=P7()9;
POI,
F=1, U=1000, V=500, U2=2000, V2=1500, M2=200;
In this case a point is generated 200 mm from the second point in the direction
perpendicular to the line from the first point to the second.
26.7
Point for Curves

This sub-syntax may be used to define a topology point along a curve.

26:14
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
,<curve_name>
{ ,F = <factor>
,M1 = <offset_along>}
Description
<curve_name>
The name of the curve along which the point is defined.
Factor 01 of the length of the curve. It may have any value between
0 and 1. F=0.5 means calculating the midpoint of the curve.
or
M1
Specifies the distance from the start point of the curve where to place
the point.
Example:
26.8
1.
POI, 'CURVE1', F=0.5;
2.
POI, 'CURVE2', M1=1000;
Point at Part End

This sub-syntax may be used to define a topology point at the end of seams, flanges or
stiffeners on the own panel.

26:15
12 Series

Point Statement
Syntax
<part_end>::=
,<part definition>
, END = <part_end>
[ ,M1 = <offset_along> ]
[ ,M2 = <offset_perp> ]
<offset_along>::=<offset_perp>::= <number>
Description
<part
The type of part S, ST, F or SEA. E.g. S12
Definition>
End
Part end 1 or 2 in the direction of the part.
M1
Specifies a displacement along the part tangent in the point.
M2
Displacement perpendicular to the part tangent in the point.
Example:
POI,
S1, END=1;
POI,
SEA=2, END=2, M1=200;

26:16
12 Series

Plane (PLN) Statement
27

The PLN statement is used to create a plane to be referred to later in the input scheme. The
plane will not be stored in the data bank.
The plane can be defined as a plane perpendicular to a principal coordinate axis by one
coordinate. It can also be given as three points in the xyz-space.
Syntax
PLN, <pln_name>,
X|Y|Z= <coord>
{
} ;
<point>/<point>/<point>
Description
<point>::= <coord>, <coord>, <coord>

is the name of the plane.
<pln_name>
<pln_name>::= <name>
Remarks:
1. If three points are used to define the plane, they must not be co-linear.
2. FR- and LP-terms can be used when giving the coordinates.
Example:
PLN, 'X-PLANE', X=FR175+100;

PLN, 'GENERAL PLANE', 100, 110, 120/200,
210, 220/FR10, 0, 0;

27:1
12 Series


27:2
12 Series

Comment Statement
28
Comment Statement
The purpose of this statement is to introduce comments in the input scheme.
A COMMENT statement may occur anywhere after the identifier statement in an input
scheme.
Syntax:
COMMENT, <char> (0 ...);

<char>::= <letter>|<digit>|<special_character> |=|,|/
Example:
COM, THIS IS A COMMENT;

28:1
12 Series

Comment Statement

28:2
12 Series

Marking Statement
29
Marking Statement
The marking statement is used to define special marking of six different types:
1. Explicitly positioned marking triangles GSD:s
2. Marking lines resulting from intersections between selected reference planes and the
current panel.
3. Arbitrary marking lines by arbitrarily given end points.
4. Marking defined as curve.
5. Marking defined as seam.
6. Marking defined as picture.
The syntax of the MARKING statement is different in these cases and the different cases
are described in individual sections below.
29.1
GSD
As there may be a need for additional reference marks along the boundary of a panel, the
interactive modelling function has been supplied with a facility for manual setting of GSDs.

29:1
12 Series

Marking Statement
Syntax::
MAR, LIM= <lim_no>;

[, M1=<distance> ]
[, TYP=<type> ]
[ {P|S} ]
;
Description
LIM
Defines the limit along which reference marks should be added.
<lim_no>::=<integer>
Distance from the limit.
M1
<distance>::<float>
TYP
Defined type of marking.
<type>::<integer>
P | S
Symmetry of the marking. P only valid portside, S only valid starboard.
The GSDs are placed along panel limits and are oriented towards one of the three principal
axes.
The spacing between GSDs in the direction of the y- and z- axes is defined by the keyword
INTERVAL in the file assigned to the environment variable SBH_GSD and evaluated from
the centre line and the base line, respectively. Reference marks in the direction of the x-axis
are placed at frame locations.
The evaluated GSDs are displayed during modelling but will not be part of the drawing.
Distance is moving the marking always inside the panel.
Type is a simple number.
29.2
Reference Planes
Reference planes, previously defined, can be selected to be marked on a panel.
Syntax:
MAR, PLA=<name_of_reference_plane>;
Description
PLA
Defines the plane whose intersection with the current panel should be marked.
The reference plane is marked as the line of intersection between the plane and the panel.
The evaluated intersection line is displayed during modelling but will not be part of the
drawing.

29:2
12 Series

Marking Statement
When creating this statement interactively, all reference planes intersecting the current
panel will be displayed on the panel, allowing the user to pick the one he wants to use.
29.3
Arbitrary Line
An arbitrary restricted line can be added for use as a marking line. A typical example is to
use such a line to align two plate parts in a slender panel, e.g. a curved side web.
Syntax:
MAR, U1=<coord>,
V1=<coord>,
U2=<coord>,
V2=<coordinate>
U=<coord>,
V=<coord>,
T=<angle> |
X=<coord> |
Y=<coord> |
Z=<coord>
[, TYP=<type> ]
[, {P|S} ]
;
Description
U1, V1
U2, V2
U, V
T
X, Y, Z
TYP
Defines the starting point of the line.

Defines the ending point of the line.
Defines the starting point of the line.
Defines the angle of the line.
Defines the axis.
<type>::<integer>
P | S
Symmetry of the marking. P only valid portside. S only valid starboard.
When creating this statement interactively:
for two point uv line the user points at the starting and ending point of the line,
for uvt line the user points at the starting point and choose angle,
for axis line the user points at the point of axis.

29:3
12 Series

Marking Statement
By the default parameters MARK_LINE_TYPE and MARK_LINE_COLOUR in the default

file of Hull Modelling the line type and the colour of the marking lines can be controlled.
29.4
Marking Defined as Curve

Syntax:
MAR, CUR=<curve>
[, M1=<distance> ]
[, TYP=<type> ]
[, {P|S} ]
;
Description
CUR
Defines the curve name along which reference marks should be added.
<curve>::=<name>
Parallel distance from the curve.
M1
<distance>::<float>
TYP
<type>::<integer>
P | S
29.5
Marking Defined as Seam

Syntax:
MAR, SEA=<seam_no>
[, M1=<distance> ]
[, TYP=<type> ]
[, {P|S} ]
;
Description
SEA
Defines the seam number along which reference marks should be added.
<seam_no>::=<integer>
M1
Parallel distance from the seam.
<distance>::<float>
TYP
<type>::<integer>
P | S

29:4
12 Series

Marking Statement
29.6
Marking Defined as Picture

Syntax:
MAR, PIC=<picture_name>,
UV=<coord> |
XY=<coord> |
YZ=<coord> |
XZ=<coord>
[, T=<angle> ]
[, TYP=<type> ]
[, {P|S} ]
;
Description
PIC
Defines the picture name which is represented as marking.
<picture_name>::=<name>
UV, XY,
YZ, XZ
Coordinates of left-upper corne.
T
TYP
Angle of picture rotation around left-upper point.

<type>::<integer>
P | S

29:5
12 Series

Marking Statement

29:6
12 Series

TAP Statement
30
TAP Statement
Panels are split into parts by seams. In the assembly process the parts are welded together
along the seams. To ensure a good welding result the parts are sometimes extended with
extra pieces of material, here called taps. Taps may be added when a seam passes across
the following types of components:
Plate edges/ panel boundaries
Holes
Notches
Cutouts
Additionally, taps may be set at corners of panels when butt-welded to parts form another
panel.
In the panel taps are represented only as attribute information. They are converted into real
geometry in the automatic parts generation (ppanparts). In symbolic views they are
represented by a special symbol.

30:1
12 Series

TAP Statement
Syntax:
Description:
TYPE
Is the standard type of a certain tap defined in
__SBH_TAP_CTRL_
<type_code>::= <integer>
COR
Defines the corner of the plane panel where to place the tap.
<corner>::= <integer>
The keyword may only be used in combination with the
keyword LIM.
SEA
Defines the intersecting seam
<seam_no>::=<integer>
LIM
Together with COR: Defines the limit where to place the tap.
Together with SEA; Defines the limit to be intersected by the
seam to locate the tap.
<limit>::= <integer>
CNO
Defines the hole to intersect with SEA. If the seam intersects

the hole twice, there will be one tap at each intersection
point.
<hole_no>::=<integer>
NOT

Defines the notch to intersect with SEA.
30:2
12 Series

TAP Statement
Defines the cutout to intersect with SEA.
CUT
<panel> is an intersecting panel with a profile for which a

cutout is defined. If left out, a shell profile is assumed.
<prof_no> is the profile number for which a cutout is
defined.
Normally, taps will be numbered automatically and get the
first free tap number (1, 2, ... ).
NO
However, the tap numbers can be controlled via input.

Note: Two taps may never be given the same number.
<no>::=<integer>
COLOUR
COMMENT
<symmetry>
Colour of the tap defined in the statement.

Taps in symmetrical panels ("SBPS-panels") are normally
supposed to be valid portside and starboard.
This clause may be used to indicate that a certain tap is
relevant portside only or starboard only. It is relevant only for
symmetrical panels.
<symmetry>::= P | S
P means port side specific
Examples:
1
Tap at intersection between seam and limit

30:3
12 Series

TAP Statement
TAP, TYP=2, SEA=1, LIM=2;

TAP, TYP=2, SEA=1, LIM=4;
2
Tap at intersection between seam and hole

30:4
12 Series

TAP Statement
TAP, TYP=1, SEA=1, CNO=1;

TAP, TYP=1, SEA=2, CNO=1;
3
Tap at intersection between seam and notch

30:5
12 Series

TAP Statement
TAP, TYP=2, SEA=1, NOT=1;

4
Tap at intersection between seam and cutout

30:6
12 Series

TAP Statement
TAP, TYP=1, SEA=1, CUT, 'AA123-345', LP13;

5
Tap at corner of limit (in this example the plates parts are supposed to be buttwelded to parts from other panels along limits 2 and 4).

30:7
12 Series

TAP Statement
TAP, TYP=2, COR=3, LIM=3;

TAP, TYP=2, COR=4, LIM=3;

30:8
12 Series

Swage Statement
31
Swage Statement
Swage is a type of small corrugation of a plate that is used instead of stiffeners to
strengthen the plate. The swage is defined in a statement of its own and extends always
across the whole panel.
Syntax

31:1
12 Series

Swage Statement
Description
<type>
H
Swage type defined in a swage standard object.

In the swage standard object a normal height is registered of each type of
swage. This can be overridden by specifying another height at run time.
<height> ::= <number>

SID
Defines the side of the panel on which the swage rises relative to the plate
surface.
<side>::= AFT|FOR|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
COMMENT An arbitrary comment string.
Colour of the swage (only valid in symbolic planar views).
COLOUR
Line along which the swage will be located. See paragraph Coordinates,
<line>
Points and Lines in Chapter General Features of Input Schemes. Only axis
parallel lines (u, v, x, y, z) are valid.
M2
The pitch between several swages set in one statement.

When left out, only one swage will be set.
<partition>::=<number>
NUM
Number of swages to be created (with the pitch M2).

When left out, the number of swages will be calculated with help of M2. As
many swages as possible will then be added until the end of the panel is
reached.
<num>::=<integer>
LIM
Limit which the swage should be parallel to. Only straight limits are handled.
M1
<limit>::=<integer>
Distance between the <limit> and the first swage.
<dist>::=<number>
Examples
1
First swage is located at U=500 and the following ones at a pitch of 1200 mm
until the end of the panel.
SWA, TYP=101, SID=FOR, U=500, M2=1200;

2
First swage parallel to limit 3 at a distance of 500 and the following ones with a
pitch of 1200 mm until the end of the panel.
SWA, TYP=101, SID=FOR, LIM=3, M1=500, M2=1200;

3
First swage parallel to limit 2 at a distance of 400 and the following ones at a
pitch of 800 mm. Eight swages are generated in total.
SWA, TYP=102, SID=AFT, LIM=2, M1=400, M2=800, NUM=8;

31:2
12 Series

Special FRP Additions
32

General information about the FRP (Fibre Reinforced Plastics) option of Hull can be found in
User Guide Setup and Customisation. To support modelling of vessels in the FRP technique
certain extensions have been made to some of the input statement of the design language
of Hull Planar Modelling. Moreover, quite a new statement type has been introduced for the
modelling of beads along panel boundaries. These extensions are described below. The
special features are also supported in interactive modelling of a FRP vessel.
At the same time certain clauses of input statements have become obsolete for FRP
vessels. However, these are not specified in this documentation and they are normally
available for use/definition. However, they will in most cases have no effect if used.
32.1
Hole Statement
It is possible (but not compulsory) to laminate holes. This means that the additions to the
hole statement specified below may be missing.
Syntax:
HOLE, ...
[,LAMINATE = <lam>]
[,D = <width>]
, ...
;
Description
LAM
D
Specifies the laminate code for the lamination around the hole.
Defines width of the laminate zone around the hole.

32:1
12 Series

Example:
Figure 32:1. Laminated hole.
Example:
HOLE
32.2
,D800
, ...
,LAM =16
,D = 100
;
Plate Statement
Two special keywords, LAMINATE and DISPLACED, have been added to the plate
statement.
LAMINATE defines the laminate (implies thickness, designation and weight of the laminate).
DIS[PLACED] defines how to place the laminate. If given and one surface of the core
material as specified to coincide with the mould plane (e.g. MAT=60, 0), then mould plane of
the plate will be placed outside the laminate on the side of the plate originally located in the
mould plane.
PLATE, ...
[,LAMINATE = <lam1>[,<lam2> ]
[,DISPL]
, ...
;

32:2
12 Series

<lam1>
Indicates the laminate code or laminate name on the

side of the plate pointing in the positive direction of the
w-axis (or as indicated by MSIDE). If the laminate
consists of multiple layers of a basic laminate
combination, simply add a multiplication factor followed
by an * before the laminate name, e.g. LAM = 2*L3.
Note: It should be observed that if two laminate names
are given they must be separated by colon (:).
<lam2>
Laminate for the opposite side. If <lam2> is omitted,

then <lam2>=<lam1>.
Example (see the figure below):

Example:
PLATE, ...
,MAT=60
,LAM=L2:L3
,DISPL
,QUA=600
;
Figure 32:2. Defining of plate thickness in a FRP project.
32.3
Stiffener Statement
Only two profile types are available for use for stiffeners, the normal flat bar (type 10, with or
without supporting beads) and a special profile type with a cross-section in the shape of a

32:3
12 Series

trapezoid. The latter has been assigned the profile type 99. Use of any other profile type will
result in an error message.
Syntax:
STIFFENER, ...
,LAMINATE = <lam side>[,<lam top>]
[,BED = <width>]
[,BPO = <bead_posno>]
, ...
;
<lam_side>
<lam_top>
Defines the laminate code on the side of the profile.

Defines the laminate code on the top of the profile.
A missing <lam_top> means that <lam_top> will
be set 2* <lam_side>.
BEAD
Defines the leg length of the bead along the profile. If

given, the profile must be of type 10.
BPO
Defines a position number of the beads.
Example (of profile type 10 ("flat bar"), see figure below):
Figure 32:3. Laminated flat bar with beads.

32:4
12 Series

Example:
STI, ...
,PRO = 10, 200, 60
,LAM = 11, 12
,QUA = 200
,BEAD = 20
,BPO = 4
, ...;
Example (of profile type 99, see figure below):
Figure 32:4. Example of profile type 99 with laminate.
Example:
STI, ...
,PRO = 99, 300, 100, 80
,LAM = 12
,QUA = 300
, ...
;
32.4
Bead Statement
In normal shipbuilding, welding is used to connect parts to each other. In the FRP technique,
fillet connections are often supplied with additional beads before the connection is

32:5
12 Series

laminated. The BEAD statement makes it possible to define beads along the boundaries of
the panel.
Syntax:
BEAD,
,LIMIT
[,SIDE
,POS
,M1
[,V
,LAMINATE
,QUALITY
;
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
<limit_no>
<side>]
<pos_no>
<width>
<angle>]
<lam>
<quality>
LIMIT
Indicates the number of the boundary for which the

bead(s) will be defined.
SIDE
Indicates the side of the panel where to position the

bead.
side>::= FOR|AFT|SB|PS|TOP|BOT
If SIDE is not given, beads will be defined for both sides
of the panel.
32.5
POS
M1
V
Defines a position number of the bead(s).
LAMINATE
Indicates the laminate code for the lamination of the

bead(s).
QUAL
Defines the density of the core material of the bead(s).
The leg length of the section of the bead(s).

The corner angle of the bead, i.e. the angle between
the current panel and the adjacent panel to be
connected to.
Flange Statement
An edge of a plate can have special laminate. This is easily defined by a flange statement
as below:

32:6
12 Series

Syntax:
FLANGE,
,LAMINATE = <lam code>
,LIMIT = <limit number>
, ...
;
<lam_code>
<lam_number>
Defines the laminate code of the flange.

Defines the limit number
Example of flange
FLA, LAM=FL500B, LIM=1;

32:7
12 Series


32:8
12 Series

Numerical Variable Statement
33

For a general description of Numerical Variables, see Numerical Variables in Chapter
General Features of Input Schemes.
Numerical variables are used in very much the same way as e.g. topology points, i.e. they
are created in a statement of their own and may then be used in subsequent statements
belonging to the same panel.
Numerical variables are created via a statement type of their own, the NUM[ERICAL]
statement. The numerical variables are stored in attributes of the panel they belong to.
Thus, the NUM statement must be preceded by a PANEL or ONLY statement.
Syntax:
NUMERICAL
[,NO = <integer>]
[VALUE = <real number>|
EXP=<expression>|
<topology_attribute>]
[,COM = <comment>]
;
Description:
NO
Numerical constants will be numbered automatically and get the first

free number (1, 2, ... ). If given the numerical constant will get the
number given.
VALUE
The assigned values may be a constant, including FR-, LP-term or

another N-term with or without offset.

33:1
12 Series

A mathematical expression given as a string, (specified in detail

below). This string must be surrounded by apostrophes and its length
is restricted to 70 characters. However, the whole string must be given
on the same line. Since the length of a line in the design language is
restricted to 72 characters this means that a maximum size string
must be given in a line of its own, e.g.
EXP
NUM, NO=5, EXP=

'xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'
;
When a numerical value should be fetched from a topology point it is
necessary to specify what attribute of the topology point that should
be delivered.
The attributes that may be fetched from a topology point are
coordinates and angles. In case of coordinate it is necessary to
specify the coordinate system in which the coordinate should be given
(global xyz or local uv).
<topology_attribute>::=<keyword>=<topology_ref>
<keyword>::=X/Y/Z/U/V/T/T1/T2
E.g. NUM, NO=1, X=P2; means that numerical variable 1 (N1) is

assigned the x-coordinate of topology point number 2.
T, T1 (=T) and T2 are used to fetch the direction angles associated
with a topology point.
COM
The mathematical expression string may be built up by the following constituents:
Previously (in the panel) defined numerical variables (e.g. N2)
A numerical constant (e.g. 123, 12.3, 1E-6)
Arithmetical operators:
Unary plus operator, returns the value of its operand.
Unary negation operator, returns the negative value of its operand.
Logical NOT operator, returns the complement of its operand.
Multiplication operator, returns the first operand multiplied by the second.
Division operator, returns the first operand divided by the second.
Addition operator, returns the sum of the two operands.
Subtraction operator, returns the difference between the two operands.
==
Equal to operator, tests if the two operands are equal.
!=
Not equal to operator, tests if the two operands are not equal.
<
Less than operator, tests if the first operand is less than the second operand.

33:2
12 Series

>
Greater than operator, tests if the first operand is greater than the second
operand.
<=
Less than or equal to operator, tests if the first operand is less or equal to the
second operand.
>=
Greater than or equal to operator, tests if the first operand is greater or equal
to the second operand.
&&
Logical AND operator, returns true if both operands are true, otherwise false.
||
Logical OR operator, returns true if one of the operands are true, otherwise
false.
? :
Conditional operator, returns the second operand if the first operand is true
and otherwise the third operand.
Built-in functions:
abs(x)
Returns the absolute value of x.
acos(x)
Returns the arccosine of x in radians.
acosd(x)
Returns the arccosine of x in degrees.
asin(x)
Returns the arcsine of x in radians
asind(x)
Returns the arcsine of x in degrees.
atan2(x,y)
Returns the arctangent of x and y in radians.
atand2(x,y)
Returns the arctangent of x and y in degrees.
cos(x)
Returns the cosine of x. x should be given in radians.
cosd(x)
Returns the cosine of x. x should be given in degrees.
pow(x,y)
Returns x raised to the power of y (y is normally 2).
sin(x)
Returns the sine of x. x should be given in radians.
sind(x)
Returns the sine of x. x should be given in degrees.
sqrt(x)
Returns the square root of x.
tan(x)
Returns the tangent of x. x should be given in radians.
tand(x)
Returns the tangent of x. x should be given in degrees.
It should be observed that FR- and LP-terms cannot be used directly in expressions. They
must be used via storing in numerical variables.

33:3
12 Series

Example:
NUM,
NUM,
NUM,
NUM,
NUM,
NO=1, T=P2;
NO=2(1)6, VAL=1000(1000)5000;
VAL=LP21-100;
VAL=N2 +1000;
EXP='SIND(N1)*N2';

33:4
12 Series

Planar Modelling

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Planar Modelling

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hull Detailed Design

AVEVA Solutions Limited

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

September 2011 12.1.1

Deleted Chapter 12.2 Jumbo Panel Splitting

Copyright added to all pages.

Update Standard Holes in Standard Brackets.

Change to chapter 3.1 Programs Creating Basic Information...

New forms in chapter 6.2.4 View. Model generation and View

In chapter Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Function the

Addition to Bracket Statement; definition of position number of

Addition to Cutout Statement; Cutout in Plates, holes for clips.

Updates to plane defined by RSO. Chapter Model Generation

Two new parameters in the Default File for Panel Modelling;

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Create RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Hull Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14

Position Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14

Create Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15

Create Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17

Relation between Planar Hull Modelling and other Hull Subsystems

Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3

Control Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5

Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3

Controlling the Scheme layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4

Model Generation and View Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Create RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28

Hull Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30

Create Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Part Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:68

Right Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:75

Planar Views from the Model - Hull Model Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

Language Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

Model Generation, General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Model Generation, Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

Model Generation, Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1

Generating a Panel Separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2

Generating a Panel in a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2

Integrity of Input Scheme, Model and Panel Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4

Interactive Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1

Automatic Setting of Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4

Jumbo Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

Information on Drawings and Information Structure. . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Drawing Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide

Added Information in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7